Google
This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at |http: //books .google .com/I
THE MONTHLY
MICEOSCOPICAL JOURNAL:
TBANSACTIONS
OP THK
ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY,
BBOOED OF HISTOLOGICAL EESEABCH
AT HOME AND ABROAD.
EDITBD BT
HENKY LAWSON, M.D., M.K.C.P, F.E.M.S,
Aseistani F/igskiait to, and Leclwrer on Physiology in, St. Marij's Hospital.
YOLUME XII.
LONDON:
ROBERT HARDWICKE, 192, PICCADILLY, W.
MDOCCLSXIV.
• t . » • l«
t
ra?-X.U';?.yiaci--'!^c-pcal A'lrr^al July 1 IB74-
. L-Ji
^:.
^-»-^-'1-^ THE
f MONTHLY MICROSCOPICAL JOUMAL.
JULY 1, 1874.
—Synopsis of the Principal Facts elicited from a series of
MieroBcopieal ifesearcAes upon the Nervous Tissues.
By Dr. H. I>. ScHMiDr, of New Orleans, La.
(^Rmil before the Koyal Mickoscofical Society, Jirne 3, 1874.)
1. The ganglionia bodies of the spinal mairow and brain repre-
sent plexuses of nervous fibriUiB, wliich are continuons witli the
fibrillaa of the procesees and axia cylinders arising from them.
Each plesns, thus formed, embraces a mieleus which is distinguished
by a double contour repreaenting its wall ; it contains a large
nucleolus and a great number of small granules. The nucleolus is
also distingnished by a fine, sharply-defined doable contour, and
filled up by granules. In the large ganglionic bodies of the spinal
marrow, it contains besides the granules two clear bodies of a
reddish lustre; the one of these is never wanting, and is distin-
guished by ita size, amounting to jrajs """ ■ in diameter, and also by
ite brightness. It appeara in the form of a veaiele with a dark
granule in its centre. The other is usually somewhat smaller, and
frequently absent. In many cases, in addition to the nucleolus, a
few smaller ones are observed, which, however, contain no glimmer-
ing vesicles, but are only filled with granules.
2. The Cortical Layer of the GerArwm.' — The nervous portion
of this consists of numerous ganglionic bodies of different form and
size, and of vertically or horizontally-ranning nerve fibres arising
from them ; ftirther, of a fine granular substance, lodging a netimrk
of fine granular fbrillm, and also a considerable number of free
nuclei. The typical form of the greater portion of the ganglionic
bodies in this portion of the brain resembles a more or less spindle-
shaped tuber, from the sides of which a number of greater or
smaller conical processes arise ; the whole body appears, therefore,
in a thin section in the form of a triangle or pyramid. The average
number of the processes is four or five. One of themj the pyramidal
or pointed process, takes a vertical course toward the surface of the
cerebrum ; another, sometimes two, the lateral processes, pass in a
more or less horizontal direction ; ajid the rest, the basal processes,
* The descriptioii relates mainly to the convolutiona of the convoiilj iif tlio
hemiapboroa of Ibo ccrobrmn of mau.
VOL. XII. B
2 Transactions of the
pass vertically toward the white substance. The pointed process
attains, according to the size of its ganglionic body, a length of
fix>m xVff to tVcf nam. In its more or less serpentine course it
gives off a number of small lateral branches, which soon terminate
in the above-mentioned fibrillous nervous network of the granular
substance. I have never seen this process terminate in a dark-
bordered nerve fibre. From the lateral process, a dark-bordered
nerve fibre always arises ; it attains a considerable length, and its
course is more or less horizontal. A direct communication between
two ganghonic bodies by means of these fibres I have never seen ;
in some cases, however, I have observed them dividing into two
branches, the ramifications of which ended in the terminal network.
From the basal processes, the nerve fibres of the white substance
arise. On ganglionic bodies of medium size, two of these processes
are ordinarily seen, one of which is converted into a nerve fibre,
while the other divides dichotomously. One of the branches result-
ing from this division forms also the axis cylinder of a nerve fibre,
while the other subdivides into finer branches, which terminate in
the network. In the larger ganghonic bodies, even the first basal
process divides and gives lise to two axis cylinders.
In the upper strata of the cortical layer a considerable number
of smaller ganghonic bodies of a more triangular or quadrilateral
form are met with. Their deUcate processes run about in the
same direction, and terminate in the same manner as those of the
larger bodies just mentioned.
The nerve fibres of the white substance, arising from the basal
processes, leave the grey matter in the form of bundles, composed
of about eight to ten, or even more nerve fibres of different thick-
ness. Generally, two or three of the fibres, of from -^ to ^hs nim.
in diameter are met with in each bundle ; the rest are finer fibres,
of about -chf to ttttt nam. in diameter. One portion of the finer
fibres appears to arise from the smaller ganglionic bodies of the
upper strata, but another arises directly from the terminal nervous
network. At first, the bundles of nerve fibres are separated from
each other by considerable interspaces ; but as others arise from
the ganghonic bodies situated below, the interspaces become more
narrow, until, at the border of the white substance, they are
entirely lost, so that the bundles come to lay contiguous to each
other.
In tracing the different nervous elements, imbedded in the
granular substance of the cortical layer qf the cerebrum, from the
surface toward the white substance, we first meet with the exceed-
ingly fine, felt-like, fibrillous neurogha, covering the surface and
extending throughout the whole cortical layer to the white sub-
stance. Directly under the neuroglia, in . the uppermost stratum
of the cortical layer, a considerable number of nne dark-bordered
Royal Mieroscopical Socidt/. 3
nerve fibres are seen crossing in various directions ; the terminal
ramifications of which form an imperfect network. The meshes
of this network, measuring about -^ mm. in vndth, extend into
the granular substance to a depth of ^V mm., and are gradually-
lost in the fine terminal nervous network, already mentioned. A
considerable number of free nuclei, surrounded by pigment granules,
are distributed throughout the stratum to a depth of r^jy mm.
Advancing farther, we now meet with the first ganglionic bodies,
forming a layer of about ^nnr nim. in depth. The direction of the
processes of these bodies is various and indefinite, as some pursue a
vertical and obUque course, while others run in an opposite direc-
tion. Their further connection is difficult to discover, as they can
only exceptionally be traced to a greater distance than xw ^^'
From certain observations, I suppose that those fine dark-bordered
nerve fibres on the surface, above mentioned, as well as others of
the same kind, running horizontally in the interior, are derived
from them. I doubt not but that these small ganglionic bodies also
send a nerve fibre to the white substance. The transition of the
ramifications of some of their processes into the terminal network
can always be seen.
About Tinr Dam- from the surface of the cortical layer, the
gangUonic bodies commence to change their form by the lengthening
of their pointed process, and thus approach the above - described
pyramidal type. Gradually mcreasing in size, they attain, about
^nr Dam. deeper, their maximum, with a length of from t-Jxt to
y^ mm. These bodies, the most perfectly developed, and repre-
senting the type, form a layer of about -rfinr ^am. in thickness.
Advancing still deeper, they diminish again in size, and become, to
a certain degree, though not without exception, more spindle-
shaped, in which form tney extend to the white substance. At the
same time they decrease in number, so that in the lowermost layer
of the cortical substance the fibrous element already predominates.
The decrease in size of the gangHonic bodies in approaching the
white substance, however, is not so considerable as might be sup-
posed, for they still attain a length of about t^tt nun. or more;
their pointed process, however, is proportionately thinner.
3. The Cortical Layer of the CereheUum, — This consists of
the true cortex or so-called grey layer, and of the reddish-grey
mbcleated layer. In the latter, the transition of the grey matter
into the white, composed of nerve fibres, takes place.
The grey layer is about -^ mm. thick, and consists of gan-
glionic bodies and free nuclei, imbedded in a fine granular substance
through which a terminal nervous network extends. The principal
gangUonic bodies are those of Ptirkinje, well known by their pecu-
Ear form. They are found at the inferior margin of the grey layer,
whence they extend their enormous antler-shaped processes with
B 2
Tranaadions of the
n
their extensive ramifications throngliont the whole grey kyra-, to
terminate in its terminal network. Another mnch smaller procesa,
arising from a point opposite to the large process, passes into the
nucleated layer, and is transformed into a dark-hordered nerve
fibre. Distributed thronghout the granular snbstance betweea the
extensive ramifications of the targe ganglionic bodies of Purkinje,
a number of smaller ones of a triangular form is observed. From
their acutely projecting angles fine processes arise, which, however,
even in the most favourable cases, can be traced only to a very
short distance. Single free nuclei are also distributed throughont
the whole layer. In addition to the elements of the grey layer just
mentioned, there are a considerable number of fine nervous fibrillsB,
which, arising directly from the terminal network, pass over to the
nucleated layer, either sbgly or in the form of anastomoses. They
arise in all parls of the grey layer, and approach in a vertical direo-
tion its inner border. At the summit of the convolution they
penetrate in this direction into the neighbouring nucleated layer,
more or less parallel to the axis of the convolution. At the sides of
the latter, however, they make a greater or smaller curve, before they
leave the grey layer, in order to pursue a course parallel to the axis.
The nucleated layer is a continuation of the grey layer. Its
examination is rendered difficult by a large number of nuclei
densely distributed through it, and preventing one from obtaining
.a clear view of the relative arrangement of me axis cylinders and
nerve fibres passing through the interspaces. In examming a very
thin section at the summit of a convolution, it will be observed that
the granular Bubstance of the grey layer extends through the whole
nucleated layer and even farther, and fills up the interspaces left
between the nuclei, fibrillfe, and dark-borderea nerve fibres. There
will also be observed a number of fine nervous fibrillie, which,
singly crossing or anastomosing with each other, pass over from
the former to the latter. The greater portion of these fibriilse are
most probably derived from tie terminal network of the grey
layer ; a small part of them, however, may arise from the smaller
ganglionic bodies, a conjecture which I have not been able to con-
firm by direct observation. But it is certain that a large part
o£ them originate in the network, not only in the grey but also in
the nucleated layer. In extremely thin, somewhat torn sections,
especially at the border of the nucleated layer, the fibrillous
terminal network, passing through the granular substance, can
be distinctly recognized, as well as fine and short fibriUee arising
from it, which, al'ter onflstomoaiug with each other here and there,
finally unite to ioqa fine axis cylinders. These are soon trans-
formed into dark-bordered UMTt) fibres, and after passing through
the nucleated layer, more or less parallel with the axis of the con-
volution, at last disappear m tho wliito siibatauco.
Royal MieroscopicaT Soaeii/,
At the sides of the convolution, a part of the fibril Iffi, originating
tjn tho network of the grey layer, take aaother ixiuras, by making
\ itefore leaving the grey layer a turn toward the base of the convo-
I hition ; then they enter the nucleated layer, and, after being
I «mverted into dark-bordered nerre fibres, run along ita border
F v^jnnd the bottom of the anlcufl, to pass over into the neighbouring
I sonvolution. These fibres connect, therefore, the grey layer of two
eonvolutions. Nevertheless, other fibres, leaving ite grey layer
, around the bottom of the aniens, ore also observed, which cross
those connecting fibres obliquely and pass through the nncleated
iayer into the white substance.
I The ganglionio bodies of Purkinje are found, aa wo know, near
I itlie inner border of the grey layer ; many of them project even
I ;with a part of their body into the nucleated layer ; their basal
1,'^Dcess belongs therefore to the latter. When we meet with this
MocesB entirely isolated, it is generally partly torn off, and there-
OTe seldom longer than ^V ^^ . Neverthele^, 1 saw it paisa into
I K dark-bordered nerve fibre, which I was able to pursue, while
I jaaeing along between the nuclei, to u considerable distance, and in
> direction toward the white aubatauce. Its diametor near its origin
is jIt! mm., diminishing. at a distance of about ^'q mm. from the
^body to -BTTB nun-
The dark-bordered nerve fibres, iBsuing from the nucleated
Rlayer, form the white substanc«^. The transition from the former
bto the latter, however, is only gradual, and it is therefore ditfi-
ult to draw a distinct limit between them. The difficulty consists
[1 the extension into the white anlistance, not only of the nuclei,
ying now farther distant from each other, but also of the granular
mbatance, which here still appean in the form of small isolated
EiRToupB of granules, though without terminal network. The fine
■ifibrillous neurogha, extending itself between the nervo fibres, from
Vihe white substance below upward, contributes also to lend to the
iwhole structure a confused appearance. As fej as I have been
^ble to ascertain, there exists no communication between the indi-
Elidnal nerve fibres of the white Bubstance of a group or leaf of
^convolutions of the cerebellum." In examining these fibres in a
thin section, or in a fine bundle, spHt off from the white substance
at a point where they leave a group of convolutions, a considerable
difference is found to exist in their diameter. While this, namely,
. jneasares in the greater number of fibres from ^^-^ to ^^ mm.,
thers are met with of only ^^ mm., and, again, some even as thick
* irio mm. We might venture to presume, thereibre, that while the
orger nerve fibres of the white snbstance be a continuation of the
■itua^ process of the ganglionic bodies of Purkinje, the axis cyhn-
• TliQ i.Tmvo diseriptiou relates to llie Jong couvolutious of ILo LumiBiiheici
vof (he cerebellum of maD.
8 Transadions of the
dera of the finer nerve fibres are probably formed by tbe jihrillx
onginating in tbe ierminal nduvrk ; eoiiic of tbein may also arise
from the »mall triangular ganglionic bodies of the giey layer.
4. The Ganglionic Bodies of the Sympaihdic Ganglia,. — Theao
ore especially distingnisbed from iLhose of the spinal marrow and
brain by being encloaed in a membranitbrm capsule with which they
are in a certain manner connected. From the body, encloaed within
thfi capsule, a number of larger and smaller proceBses arise, consist-
ing, like those proceeding from the ganglionic bodies of the spinal
marrow and brain, of fine granular fibrillfe. These, however,
cannot be distinctly traced over tbe body from one process into the
other as in the former case ; on the contrary, tbe whole body
appears more as a maas of grannies surrounding the nucleus.
lu selecting a sympathetic ganglionic body of the gangliaied
cords of man as a type, we observe from two to four of the larger
processes, directly after arising from the body, piercing the capsule
and disappearing, at a distance of about tow ™ii'- or more, in tbe
form of naked axis cylinders among the neighbouring bundles of
sympathetic nerve fibres. The two largest processes frequently
arise from opposite points of the body ; in some cases, tbe larger
one of these, again, divides already dichotomously within the capsule,
so that the axis cylinders arising from this division subsequently
pierce the capsule. The axis cylinders arising from the processes
possess a sheath manifesting itself by a double contour, and which,
in many instances, may be traced back over the body ; the diameter
of the axis cylinders measures about ^^ mm.
The smaller processes, arising from the body, are more numerous
than those just mentioned, and consist mostly of only two or even
one fibril. After a course of 5^ to j^o mm. alongside of tho
body, they enter the capsule at its inner surface, and form, by
means of ramification and reciprocal connection, a networh extend-
ing throughout this membrane; the interspaces of the network
are filled up by small granules. The capsule of the sympathetic
ganglionic bodies, therefore, represents convplicated, memhrani/orm,
tiervous structure, derived from and connected with the body which
it encloses. On the surface of the capsule, formed in this manner,
a number of fine fibrillse arise from the network, a ] art of which
pass, in the fctm of a finely relicukted plexus, over into the
capsules of neighbouring ganglionic bodies, and thus establish a
reciprocal communication; the rest surroimds the axis cylinders
arismg from the Isjger processes which have pierced the capsule,
and, nmniug with these m the same dfrection, unite among them-
selves to Ibrm finally the so-called sympathetic nerve fibres.
Scattered over the inner as well as the outer surface of the
capsule, a considerable number of ronnd or oval nuclei are observed.
They are especially numerous in the reticulated fibrillous plexus
i
Boyal Mieroseopieal Socidt). 7
ft«Dimecting the ganglionic boiUes witii eacli other, whence they
fftend, while assnining a more oblong form, botween the sympathetic
rve fibres.
The destination of those axis cylinders, arising from the processes
f'jiercing the capanle, I hayo nerer been able to determine satisfac-
torily. Several times I have seen them isolated to a length of
s\ mm., and frequently I have traced them in thin transparent
sections to a considerable distance, without noticing any change in
' their structure or even their diameter ; they always disappeared
U between the bundles of sympathetic nerve fibres. Although these
■ axis cjhnders run mostly, as already mentioned, parallel with the
^mpathetic fibres, they nevertheless are observed to pass here and
there through the latter in au obhque direction, and aa it appears,
toward the dark-bordered nerve i5bres. In consequence of this
fact, I presume that, after a shorter or longer course, they are
surrounded by a covering and transformed into dark-bordered
nerve fibres. If this conjecture slould prove to be true, as we
shall see farther on, the sympathetic gangfionic bodies would then
give rise to both kinila of nerve fibres, each of which might transmit
a nervous current of its own.
The ganghonic bodies of the spinal ganglia show, with some
deviations, the same structure as those of the gangliated cords.
There are certain dlffleulties, however, in the way of esamining
them accurately, produced by their more considerable size and a
greater thickness of their capsule, as well aa by ii number of dark-
bordered nerve fibres running between them. From the body
within the capsule, as in the former case, a nnmber of processes of
diflerent diameters arise ; some of ttem seem to pierce the capsule,
while the rest contribute to tho formation of the capsule. The con-
struction of the latter, as also the reciprocal connection with the
noighbouring capsnlea, are the same as those of the ganghonic bodies
of the gangliated cords, with this difference, that the meshea of the
network are, in proportion to the greater size of the whole body,
somewhat larger. The moat e^enlial difference, however, consists
in a dark-hordered nerve fibre, originating directly in the spinal
ganghonic body. The asis cylinder of this nerve fibre arises, as
usnal, from the body, and pierces the capsule, while the tubular
memhrane seems to terminate in the latter. Whether this dark-
bordered nerve fibre connects the sympathetic ganghonic body with
the spinal marrow, or whether it runs in an opposite direction
toward the periphery, ia difficult to determine, especially, as it first
vrinds il^ way along for some distance between the neighbouring
ganghonic bodies before it joins tho bundle of nerve fibres. Bnt
judging &om certain observations I made, I am inclined to think
that it belongs to the spinal marrow. A part of the fibrilhe arising
&om the network on the outer surfiu^ of the capsule go to contri-
Traasaeim)ts of the
Eof the finer nerve fibres are pToVably formed by the fbrillse
Dating in the terminal nd-work ; some of them may abo ariae
from the small triangular gaugliotiic bodies of the grey layer.
4. The Ganglionie Bodies of the Sympathetic Ganglia. — These
are especially distinguished from those of the spinal marrow and
brain by being enclosed in a membranifonn capsule with which they
are in a certain manner connected. From the body, enclosed within
the capsule, a number of larger and smaller processes arise, consist^
ing, like those proceeding from the ganglionic bodies of the spinal
marrow and brain, of fine grannlar fibrillaj. These, however,
cannot be distinctly traced over the body from one process into the
other as in the former case ; on the contrary, the whole body
appears more as a mass of granules surrounding the nucleus.
In selecting a sympathetic ganglionic body of the gangliaied
corda of man as a type, we observe from two to four of the larger
jyrocesses, directly after arising from the body, piercing the capsule
and disappearing, at a distance of about ^gg mm. or more, in the
form of naked asis cylinders among the neighbouring bundles of
sympathetic nerve fibres. The two largest processes frequently
arise from opposite pointe of the body ; in some cases, the larger
one of these, again, divides already dichotopionsly within the capsule,
so that the axis cylinders arising from this division subsequently
pierce the capsule. The axis cyiinderB arising from the procesges
possess a sheath manifesting itself by a double contour, and which,
in many instances, may be traced back over the body ; the diameter
of the asis cyhnders measures about 5^5 mm.
The smaller processes, arising from the body, are more numeroua
than those just mentioned, and consist mostly of only two or even
one fibril. After a course of fjn to ^%ts mm. alongside of the
body, they enter the capsule at its inner suriace, and form, by
means of ramification and reciprocal connection, a tteticork extend-
ing throughout this membrane ; the interspaces of the network
are filled up by small granules. The capsule of the sympathetic
ganghonic bodies, therefore, represents complicated, memhranifarm,
}tervou8 etruciure, derived Irom and connected with the body which
it encloses. On tlie surface of the capsule, formed in this manner,
a number of fine fibrillie arise from the network, a }.art of which
pass, in the form of a finely reticulated plexus, over into the
capsules of neighbouring ganglionic bodies, and thus establish a
reciprocal communication; the rest surrounds the axis cylinders
arising from the larger processes which have pierced the capsule,
and, running with these m the same direction, unite among them-
selves to form finally the so-called sympathetic nerve fibres.
Scattered over the inner as well as the outer surface of the
capsule, a considerable number of round or oval nuclei are observed.
They are especially numerous in the reticnlated fibrillQUfl plexus
Boi/al Mioroacopical Socidij. 7
t'ODiiiiecting the ganglionic bodies witii each other, whence they
l«teii(l, while asBuming a more oblong I'onn, between the sympathetic
\ nerve fibres.
The destination of those axis cylinders, arising from the processes
I'l-percing the capsule, I have never been able to determine eatiflfcc-
■ lorily. Several times I have seen them isolated to a length of
1,^ mm., and frequently I have traced them in thin transparent
Vfiections to a considerable distance, without noticing any change in
* their structure or even their diameter; they always disappeared
between the bondlea of sympathetic nerve fibres. Although these
axis cylinders run mostly, as already mentioned, parallel with the
sympathetic fibres, they nevertheless are observed to pass hare and
there through the latter m an oblique direction, and aa it appears,
toward the dark-borilered nerve fibres. In consequence of this
fact, I presume that, after a shoct«r or longer course, they are
surrounded by a coveting and transformed into dark-homered
nerve fibres. If this conjecture should prove to be true, as we
shall see farther on, the sympathetic ganglionic bodi^ would then
give rise to both kinds of nerve fibres, each of which might transmit
a nervous current of its own.
The ganglionic bodies of the apinal ganglia show, with some
deviations, the same structure as those of the gangiiated cords.
There are certain difficulties, however, in the way of examining
them accurately, produced by their more considerable size and a
greater thickness of their capsule, aa well as by a number of dark-
bordered nerve fibres runmng between them. From the body
within the capsule, as in the tbrmer case, a number of processes of
different diameters arise ; some of them seem to pierce the capsule,
while the rest contribute to the formation of the capsule. The con-
struction of the latter, as also the reciprocal connection with the
neighbouring capsnlea, are the same as those of the ganglionic bodies
of the gangiiated cords, with this difference, that the meshes of the
network are, in proportion to the groat^tr size of the whole body,
somewhat larger. The most essential difference, however, consists
in a darh-hordered nerve fibre, originating directly in the spinal
ganghonic body. The axis cylinder of this nerve fibre arises, aa
usual, from the body, and pierces the capsule, while the tubular
membrane seems to terminate in the latter, Whether this dark-
bordered nerve fibre connects the sympathetic ganglionic body with
the spinal marrow, or whether it runs in an opposite direction
toward the periphery, is difficult to determine, especially, as it first
winds its way along for some distance between the neighboui'ing
gauglionie bodies before it joins the bundle of nerve fibres. But
judging from certain observations I made, I am inclined to think
that it belongs to the spinal marrow. A part of the fibrillse arising
from the network on tne onter surface of the capsule go to contri-
I
biito to tbc fonnatiou of tho sympathetic nervo librcs of Uie nearest
bundle.
The construction of the sympatfaetic ^mghonic botliea is most
ilistiiietly Been in those of the p/satiia gangliformis of the pnenmo-
gttatric iierre. Still larger in circumference than those of the
spinal ganglia, their capsule shows a coarser and unmistakable net-
work, the meahee of which attain a diameter of about ysir mm. or
more. The ganglionic bodies "which lie, mostly in fjio form of
oblong groups, between the dark-bordered fibres of the nerve, are
here also connected with each other by the reticulated plexus of
their capsules. Thus tar I have not succeeded in discovering on
thcee bodies more than one process piercing the capsule. This
arises generally in tho long axis of the nerve, and ia, after a course
of about iV mm, or more, transformed into a dark-bordered nerve
fibre. As in the sympathetic ganglionic bodies before described, a
oousiderable unmber of fine fibrillte arise here also from the net-
work on the outer surface of tho capsule, a portion of which sor-
nunid the axis cylinder, and unite finally to form sympathetic
Morvo fibres, while the rest, in the form of a plexus, estublishes a
i-omniunication with the adjoinmg capsules.
In reviovring the above-described constrnction of the sympa-
thetic ganglionic bodies, it will at first appear more complicated
tium that of those of the central organa. By a closer examina-
tion, however, this seeming complication disappeors, and a certain
uualogy of their component parts, especially with those of the
oortinu layer of the brain, may be recognized. The gangUonic
Imdies of the cortical layer of the cerebrum, namely, send out some
pnieeasoa, the lateral and basal, the axis cylinders of which ore
tnuisformesl into dark-bordered nerve fibres, while the ramifications
of niioUier. the pointed process, terminate diredly in the terminal
fibrinous network, the meshes of which are filled up by small
«l<?iueutAry grauoks. Directly from thU network, as I have shown
HboTV, another set of very fine nerve fibres arises, which also pursue
tbtur course toward the periphery. In the cortex of the cerebellum
m meet the same arrangement ; the ramifications of the enormous
proo«era of the ganghonic bodies of Purkinje, namely, torminate
m tlw network of the grey layer, while their small haaal processes
wo tnuisformiid into dark-bordered nerve fibres, which finally
form A part of tlie white substance. From the terminal network of
Uio gn\v laver, the same oa in th« cerebriun. a wnsiderable numbei'
of lino fibrillai arise, which subsequently form thu axis cylinders of
d»rk-bt>t*lerwl nerve fibres, a part of which pass around the sulcus
to a u<>igfabouriug convolution, in order to foiiu a communicution
bt>tm>on tho ner>-ous elcmeutfi of two adjoining convolutions, while
tlie n«t j>tvceod tu the white suhstano.'.
Boy (d Microscopical Society. 9
In the sympathetic ganglionic bodies, finally, we may compare
the hody, enclosed within the capsule, to a ganglionic body of the
cortical layer of the cerebrum, while the capsule itself — ^representing
a fine fibnllous network, the meshes of which are filled with small
granules — is analogous to the terminal network in the granular
substance. From the body, enclosing its nucleus as all other
gangUonic bodies, we observe some processes arise, which, after
having pierced the capsule, giye rise to axis cylinders vrhich are
finally transformed into dark-bordered nerve fibres, while the ramifi-
cations of a number of smaller processes, also arising from the body,
terminate in the network of the capsule. From the outer sur&ce
of the latter, lastly, a number of fine fibrillaB arise, a part of which
estabUsh a communication with the adjoining capsules, while the
rest unite to form the ultimate sympathetic nerve fibres, going to
the periphery.
5. The Nerve Fibres and Oanglionie Bodies of Insects, — The
nerve fibres of insects .consist of fine granular fibrillsB, about
y^Vrr iiun. in diameter, enclosed within a structureless sheath, and
thus representing the entire nerve. In the nerve fibre of an insect,
therefore, we behold the conducting anatomical element of the nervous
tissues in its primitive form, that is, as a simple axis-cylinder fibre.
The history of the development of these tissues in the human embryo
justifies this view. The fibriUaB running parallel to each other in
the sheath of the nerve are not divided into subordinate bundlea
They are surrounded by a semi-liquid substance, resembling in
character the nerve-medulla of the dark-bordered nerve fibre of the
higher animals.^
The ganglionic todies of insects are round or slightly oval
bodies, from each of which a large process, composed of fine fibrillae,
arises. They consist of a mass of granules, surrounding a large,
clear nucleus. The latter, about 77 mm. in diameter, shows a
fine double contour, and contains a greenish shining nucleolus of
■^ mm., composed of several granules. From the surfece of the
granular mass surrounding the nucleus a great number of fine short
fibrillae arise, which slightly anastomose' with each other. From
these anastomoses others arise, the greater portion of which join in
forming the large process, while the rest pass over to the adjoining
ganglionic bodies to establish a'reciprocal communication. A sheath,
enclosing the whole body, seems not to exist. The ganglionic
bodies of a ganglion are, like those of the sympathetic nervous
system of the higher animals, divided into groups. The processes
arising from the bodies of a group, unite to form nerve-fibre bundles,
and i£ese, again, unite with those of other groups, forming still
larger bundles, from which, finally, the larger nervous trunks,
leaving the gangUon, arise. The whole ganglion itself is sur-
10 Transactions of the Boyal Microscopical Society.
ronnded by a structureless membrane, which extends, in the form
of the above-mentioned sheath, over the nerves. The interspaces of
the ganglionic bodies, and the bundles of nerve fibres within the
ganghon, are filled up by a semi-fluid substance containing in-
numerable granules.
[Errata, — ^In my paper on the development of the Wood corpnscles, in
No. LXIL, February, 1874, p. 49, line 10 from top, for •* blood," read *• brood";
and 18 lines from top, for ** blood/' read ** brood." Also the words '* nat. size '' on
Plate LI. is, of course, an error.]
( '-., k
T) /)
ijw
j^'/-"
\/7^'n ^^
Lfi/ --
// ^
ftr
( 11 )
11. — On Bog Mosses, By R. Brafthwaitb, M.D., F.L.S.
Plates LXVII. and LXVIU.
14. Sphagnum squarrosum Persoon in lit.
Weber and Mohr, Beise durch Sohweden, p. 29, Tab. II, fig. la,b (1804).
Plate LXVII.
Syn. — Smith Eng. Bot. t. 1498 (1804). — ^P. db Beauvois Prodromns p. 88
(1805).— La Marok et Oand. F1. Fianc. I, p. 443 (1805).— Sohultz FL Stargard.
p. 276 (1806).— Bbidel Sp. Mu80. I, p. 14 (1806). Mantissa p. 2 (1819). Bry.
Univ. I, p. 5 (1826).— Web. & Mohr Bot. Tasch. p. 73 (1807).— Bchkuhb Deutsoli.
Moose p. 14, t. 6 (1810).— Schwagb Supp. I, P. I, p. 13, tab. IV (1811).—
RdHLiNG Ann. Wetter. Geaells. I, p. 197 (1809). Deutsok. Fl. Ill, p. 36 (1813).—
VoiT Muse. Herbip. p. 12 (1812).— Hook. & Tayl. Muse. Brit. p. 4, tab* IV
(1818).— FuNCK Taschenh. t. 2 (1821). Zenk. & Dietb. Muse. Thuring. Fasc. I,
No. 21 (1821).— Nees Hsch. & &r. Bryol. Germ. I, p. 9, 1. 1, fig. 3 (1823).—
HObenek Muso. Germ. p. 23 (1883).— De Notabis SvU. Muse. Ital. p. 295 (1838).
—0. Mull. Synop. I, p. 94 (1849).— Wilson Bry. Brit.p. 23, tab. IV (1855).—
Habtm. Skand. Fl. ed. 6, p. 435 (1854).— Schimpeb Torfm. p. 63. tab. XXIC
(1858).— Synop. p. 677 (I860).— Lindbebo Torfm. No. 7 (1862).— Bebkel. Bandb.
Br. Mosses p. 308, PI. 2, fig. 4 (1863).— Bussow Torfm. p. 62 (1865).— Milde
Bry. Siles. p. 387 (1869).— Hobkirk Synop. Br. Mosses p. 26 (1873). Sph, Aconiense
De Notabis MSS. Sph, patuium Mitten MSS.
Monoicous, in loose deep glaucous grem, tufts. Stems robust,
6-15 inches high, generaQy^dichotomous, ri^d, reddish brown.
Cortical cells small, non^orosej in two strata^ the woody zone
rufous brown. Caviine leaves large, erect or reflexed. Ungulate,
not bordered, minutely auricled at base, apex rounded, slightly
fimbriate; hyaline cells elongated hexagono-rhomboid below.
EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
Plate LXVIL
Sphagnum squarrosum.
n, — Fertile plant.
1. — Part of stem with a branch fascicle and male inflorescence.
3. — ^Perichaetium and fruit. 4.— Upper bract from same.
5. — Stem leaves. 5 a a, — Areolation of apex of same.
6. — Leaves from a divergent branch. 6x. — Section. 6 p. — Point of game.
6 c.— Cells from middle, x 200.
7. — Basal intermediate leaf. 9 x. — Part of section of stem. 10. — Part of a branch
denuded of leaves.
Plate LXVIU.
Sphagnum teres.
a, — Female plant, a *o, — Male plant.
1. — Part of stem and a branch fascicle.
2. — Male inflorescence. 26. — Bract from same with anthcridium.
8. — PerichsBtium and fruit. 4. — Upper bract from same.
.5. — Stem leaf. 5 a a.— Areolation of apex of same.
6. — Leaves from a divergent brancli. 6a?. — Section. 6 p. — Point of same.
6 c.— Cells from middle, x 200.
7. — Basal intermediate leaf. 8. —Leaf from a pendent branch.
9 X, — Part of section of stem.
10. — Part of a branch denuded of leaves.
12 On Bog Mosses.
rhombic above, without fibres or pores, but here and there with a
transverse partition.
Bamtdt 4-5 in a fascicle, of which 2-8 are divergent , tumid
attenuated toward the points, with the leaves on the lower two-
thirds squarrose and recurved from the middle, those of the upper
third imbricated and elongated ; the other branches pendulous and
appressed, slender, terete, with all the leaves imbricated; cortical
cells elongated, in two strata, the retort-cells perforated but scarcely
prominent at apex. Branch leaves from a very concave hose,
broadly ovate, suddenly becoming lanceolate above, the margin
invdvie in the upper third, the apex minutdy 3-4 toothed,
bordered by 2-3 rows of very narrow cells ; hyahne cells with
numerous annular fibres and two rows of large pores, chlorophyll
cells compressed entirely enclosed by the hyaline.
Male ameniula terete, clavate, yellowishrgreen ; the bracts
slightly squarrose, oblong-lanceolate, the basal cells without fibres
and pores, the upper shorter, with annular fibres and small pores.
Fruit seated in the coma or in the axils of the Tipper fascicles,
moderately elevated ; the bracts somewhat distant, concave convolute,
the lower oblongo-elliptic, the upper very broad, obovate emar-
ginate and slightly fimbriate at apex, laxly areolate, without fibres
or pores. Spores yellow.
Var. y8, squarrosvlum, 8ph. squarrosulum Lesquereux.
Plants smaller, more slender, deep green above, pale below.
Stem pale green. Leaves small, more distant.
Hab. — ^About boggy springs and the sides of moorland streams.
^, in more shady alpine places. Fruits in July. Not uncommon,
and found throughout Europe and the middle and northern states
of North America. This nne species sometimes attains a great
size, becoming proportionately robust, and thus may be looked
upon as the grandest European representative of the genus. It
may be readily recognized by its squarrose leaves, and often bears
fruit abundantly. Lindberg considers squarrosulum Lesq. to be
rather a starved or undeveloped form than a distinct variety, yet it
is widely distributed, but does not appear to have been ever found
with fruit.
15. Sphagnum teres Angstrom.
Hartm. Skand. Fl. ed. 8, p. 417 (1861).
Plate LXVIH.
Syn.— LiNDB. Torfm. No. 6 (1862).— Mildb Bryol. Siles. p. 388 (1869). Sph.
porosum Lmi)B. MSS.
Sph. squarrosum var. y teres Schpb. Torfm. p. 64 (1858). Synop. p. 677 (1860).
— Russow Torfm. p. 64 (1865).
Dioicous, in small tufts or intermixed with other species, soft,
pale yellowish green often with a ferruginous tint. Stems slender.
The Optical Quality of Mr. ToUes' ^ Objective, 13
4-8 inehes high, pale rufous red ; the cortical ceUs non-porose, in
three strata, the woody zone red, Cauline leaves precisely like
those of 8. squarrosum. Bamuli distant, 4-5 in a fascicle, 2-3
divergent, terete; the leaves imbricated throughout, and only
having the apices slightly recurved ; broadly ovate, pointed, three
toothed, in structure agreeing with those of 8. squarrosum. Cor-
tical cells of branches in a single stratum.
Male amentula elongated, brownish, fertile and thickened in
the lower part, and beyond this extended into a slender sterile
branch ; the brads broadly ovato-lanceolate, pointed, agreeing in
structure with the branch leaves.
Fruit seated in the coma, or in the upper fascicles ; the bracts
resembling those of 8. squarrosum.
Hab. — About the edges of bogs and springs in subalpine dis-
tricts ; sparingly distributed. In this country it has been found
by Mr. Wilson at Knutsford Moor, Wybunbury Bog and New-
church Bog in Cheshire; by McKinlay at Doune; and by
Mr. Stabler at Staveley, Westmoreland.
This plant has usually been regarded as a variety of 8. squa/r-
rosum, and Professor Lindberg has recently expressed to me his
coincidence with this view; structurally there is absolutely no
distinction between them, but in external aspect 8. teres closely
resembles 8. strictum. The beautiful and instructive specimens '
collected by Limpricht at Bunzlau, and distributed under No. 1153
of Eabenhorst's Bryotheca, combine the characters of both, the
upper part having the imbricated leaves of 8. teres, the lower part
the squarrose leaves of typical 8. squarrosum. There is thus left
to us only the dioicous position of the inflorescence, and the slight
difference in the male amentula.
m. — The Optical Quality of Mr. Tclles' \ Objective.
By EOBBET B. TOLLES.
Further but brief discussion of the well-whipped subject of
angular aperture is> here offered on my part, being again sum-
moned to the front after repeated dismissals by Mr. Wenham, while
he imparts " further information " as to optical law concerned. I
EXPLANATION OF FIGURES.
Fig. 1. — m, Front surface of middle.
R, R, Outside rays of pencil from middle 60°.
R' R', Pencil traced from Focus of 82°.
Outside pencil at Focus of 90°.
„ 2. — Anglo reduced by closing the lenses.
i
The Optical Quality of Mr. ToUes' jt Objective. 15
Let the linea marked II, H in Fig. 1 represent the extreme marginal
rays of a pencil of 60^ angle proceeding from the iimet ayatems,
viz. the hack and middle combinations acting as one. Angular
apettute of mieh limited extent, 60°, certainly involvea no difficulty
as to meaanrement, and hoping no objection from any critic on
that score, I will assume the angle and focus-distance A of the
pencil emergent from tlie front siir&ce of the middle, m, to be
accepted on trnst. In support of the case, I will state here that I
can easily give more available angle to back-and-middle.
When the front, which is a hemisphere, is in position, as shown
in Fig. 1, the cone of hght bounded by 11, E is intercepted by it at
its convex sur&ce, and brought to a. focus at F directly, the frimt
being of common-crown glass, and " immersed " in balsam of the
same refractive-index, asaomed to be 1-525 for the case. The
focal-point F is obtained by projection, and Mr, Wenham is expected
to admit its correctness or show the contrary. The angle at F
And now to discuss the case of maximom air-angle under the
same circumstances.
The inner linea K' K', Fig, 1 , are drawo at an angle of 82°, or
41" vrith the axis. As this pencil of smaller angle cmanatea from
the same focal-point F in balsam, the rays R' It' must meet the
convex surface of the front at a lesa distance from the axis tlian
the larger pencil, as may be seen in the figure. But as this
reduced aperture of the lena at the front, and at the conves;
Btirfaces, is all that can possibly be used "dry," its limits being
shown by tracing the course of extreme rays for the equivalent
balsam pencil of the largest possible pencil transmissible to or from
sir; it follows that that portion of the front-snrfece between the
lines R' R must be nnoaed aperture, when the objeetivo is ased
dry, though the practical angle be infinitely near to 180°.
To illustrate a little further : Let the light be considei-ed as
proceeding down the tube from the eye-piece, and- the objective
being dry at the surface, s. Obvion^ the extreme ray of the
pencil of 82", and of balsam-focus at F, would meet the interior
plane and dry surface of the front at an incidence of 41°, and
necessarily have its course on emergence with a nearness to coinci-
dence with the front plane surface, involving only an inappreciablo
difference from a direction parallel, or 180^ of angle. ■
Mr. Wenham's small caps may perhaps properly enough apply
B to express his sensations, but tos fad becomes clear and india-
itable.
Dry, the surplus aperture from R' to R, i.e. beyond 41" of
'incidence, gives a silvery ring by total reflexion from the plane
surface as should' be expected. It trims the aperture tike a
The Optical Qualiiy of Mr. Toilet' h Ohjeetive.
^^Pnear-coiitact approach to middle. The samo back-and-middle and
angular pencil are concerned, and nothing changed except relative
position effected by closing the adjuatment. The clear opening of
the front being the same as before for 90°, its boundary is reached
1\}y the pencil indicated by the linea R" It" proceeding from the
fiddle. Projecting the course of tiiese rays their focus is found
it F, and shows a reduction of angle from 90° to 72°, or ahght
taction more. Although closed not the maximum balsam-
bgle.
t H
Sj)herieal Aberration.
corret
^^^bose,
^Btb{
^Bune,
Having shown that the closed point is not necessarily the
adjustment for maximum angle, I wish to call attention to tho
enormous aberration under which angle is taken ordinarily, without
" cover," and, 1 will assume, the systems closed.
With a diy front 8ur6u;e the same extreme rays it" K", Fig. 2,
will have, when proceeding from within to air, refractioa to the
corretponding air-angle ; but not any ray nearer to the axis than
3e, can have the same focns in air.
Take the case of Hght radiating from a small point in the axis
the microscope at the place of the eye-piece, or, which is the
ne, the longer conjugate focus. The focal point at the front
florfaca will move to a point of gradoally irwremeA distance, aa the
rays from the 10 inches distant radiant point are incident at the
convex-surface of the front at a gradually decreased angular distance
from the axis.
This enormous spherical aberration arises at the &ont plane
snr&ce, and for compensation, or corrsction rather, needs a covering
glass of suitable thicknees ; with a technically '" dry " objective this
would be sufficient. But with an immersion objective having
immersion contact with " cover " to a dry-moant, the dry fi-ont
surface of the ol;jective is in effect removed to the surface of the
covering glass next the object ; and tho focns of the earfreine mar-
ginal rays will then be very near to the focua of the viean and
nearly central rays, because all the rays of the cone emerge withm
a comparatively very small area about the axis. This is all very
welt blown and, though the demonstration is easy, that may be
omitted.
I do not care to comment on Mr. Wenham's precautions in
taking angles, as described in his jiccount of the j-inch. I will
only say that the whole seems to nae qnito nnneeesaary." What
I Mve said of interposition of " cover " is suggestive of the true
* Hr. Wenhnm, in bis diagrnm at p. 1 1 i, the lower one, dntira the ray d for
170° oF nperlure at an iniposiiibls emergence from, the convex surfsf e. It fails
outui<le of the perpHndimlu' and must be bent auttaard, the aurroce acting aa a
cunuavo, Peihnpn Mr. WddIibiu tbiakB this of no couBeqaeuoe luii! — so ilo 1 1
I
I
18 The Opiioai QuaiUy of Mr. ToOes' f Gbjeetive.
metJiod I judge, and it ia this — for a strict ied of angle let the
objective be measnred in position, as used on tlie object.
Mr. Wenham having adopted the semi-cylinder, I will remark
that this can bo very easily done with that, in all caaes ; but as
an effectual means to dismiss any anspiciou of false itght, " not
going to fonn images," let this, which he has well approved, bo
done, viss. put light down through the tube of tJie microaeope.
Then if a low eye-piece lie put in place in the body, and a beam of
sunlight be the light nsed and directed through the eye-piece down
the body along the axis, it will have emergence at the cyhndrical
snrface, and, if intercepted by a band of thin moist paper adhering
to the same snrface, the circular boundary of the emergent pencil
will be sharply defined, and the angle can be accurately and
instantly read there.
Of course, if a dry mount ia nsed, only 82° can appear emergent
at the suriace when the air-angle of the objective is infinitely near
to 180^, and reference index of cylindrical piece being 1 '525, as
Mr. Wenham nsed to stipulate ^r balsam, with a view, it is under-
stood, to simplily the argument, ite indes varying slightly from that.
"Whatever the angle read at the cyhndrical surfeice, the corre-
sponding air-angle is readily known or deduced from it ; for surely
it will not be claimed that other than " image-forming raya " vriU
have emergence from the objective-front when derived from a beam
of unmodified sunlight entering the eye-piece.
And now, though claiming- for that method that it is safa
against ialse light, yet I admit (or claim) that sunlight through the
eye-piece and thence through the objective is not necessary for
accurate results ; not at all ; for I have always found the results of
the reverse method to nicely correspond — without any diaphragming
of the field, such aa Mr. "Wenham describee in the ' Monthly ' iar
March last, it will be found that the limits of angle are the same,
■whether the light be put down through the body, or reverJay, the
Ught has direction from a radiant in front, and angC-liinita
observed at the eye-piece. I
There is especial convenience, however, in the latter method,
and having happily Mr. "Wenham'a endorsement of the semi-
cylinder for ancb purpose, I will particularize. Thus if the
cylindrical piece, balsam-mounted-object thereon, and objective be
in positioD, and the observer having the object in plain view
through the microscope, then, "with lamp in hand, while moving
the screw-ojllar forward or ba^k for the hmit of angle aa the
radiant is moved out from the asis, the focal adjustment being
maintained consentaneously, the real maximum angle will bo
ascertained by working for the greatest obhquity of the illu-
minating ray that bisects the field. When that greatest obliquity
of incidence is gained, measuring the angle can be attended to.
On ike Slrveture of Diatoma.
19
My test measurements of angle were made according to this
metliod. An exact Bemi-cylindcr in use, carefolly in proper posi-
tion, and an object mounted in balsam under covering gli^ imme-
diately on the plane surfiice of tie semi-cyhnder iliseli It was
«8Gd where a halsam-angle of 110° was shown, the method de-
scribed, and with the result published.* The method has not
been,' and will not be, impeached. The results were verified by
putting the light (sunlight) down through the tube.
When the maximum angle limits have been ascertained, then
the angle can be measured ia the way Mr, Wenham points out,
♦K. by rotating the microscope. Or, if the semi-cylinder be pro-
Tided with divisions to degrees, adjacent, a shutter shding over tho
I cylmdrical surface from the central parts outward will, under
' observation at the eye-piece, mark exactly the limits of angle on
I either side, and the corrraponding degree can be noted. According
to Mr. Wenham, only 82 can be seen there with an object-glass
I properly so called, with air or water or balsam contact at plane
I Snrfeices. Now, note the fact that in my hands in June last f this
I occurred — fis. when 81° closely was shown on the screen as the
I aperture of an objective "dry," then, by simply making the
I medium of contact at the plane surfaces water, or balsam, instead
|,0f air, the pencil-hmits on the screen were found at about 110^,
* the object in focus in both instances.
And then, to show that this additional pencil consisted of
" image-forming rays," the moist-paper screen was removed, and a
I fihutter, covering 82°, substituted, and on illuminating the object
Lthrough this outside portion only, behold, with the objective at
[-xaaximnm angle adjustment and itsed dry, total darkness was the
P rffect of course to the eye at the eye-piece, while if balsam or
L water contact was given, the light had access beyond 82^, and the
t object became in clear view well defined.
Thos fact and " theory " continue (!) consistent.
Jacksdntillb, FLoaroA, May H, 1871.
^V. — On (he Struciare of Diatoms. By Gr. W. MonEHOtrsB, U.S.A.
3.1 is hoped that the publication of the following memoranda will
iBTve the double purpose of elucidating the structure of the tests,
lad at tho same time demonstrating the utihty of microscopical
ctives of exceptionally high powers. The uncertainty of the
ing in this unstable and contested ground will necessitate many
ra, Mid may serve as an excuse for them. So many competent
• See ' M. M. J.' for June and Aiigiiat, 1873.
t See ' M, M. J.' for August, 1873.
On the Strvetiav of Diatoms.
microscopists kaye written upon this sabject, that the writer would
fain be Mlent were it not for a firm belief in the soperiority of the
instrument he used, for this kind of inveatigation. In tact this
excellent glass gives advanced work ou almost every teat tried, and
fully justifiea the confidence reposed in it. The observations re-
corded below, unless where otherwise stated, were made with a
Tolles' 3^0 immersion objective of 1 65° angle of aperturo, and gene-
rally a Tolles' 2-inch eye-piece, giving an amplification of 2500
diameters.
Eiipodisous Argus. — My attention waa especially called to thia
shell by having noticed the wide difference between the views of
Mr. Henry J. Slack, Mr. Samuel Wells, and Mr. Charles Stodder.
My observations are corroborative of the idea of two plates, as
asserted by Messrs. Stodder and Wells. Using a % objective with
power of 340 times obtained by high eye-piece and extending draw-
tube, and using a Lieberkiilm, the outside or coarser markings on
epecimeos mounted convex side uppermost are white with white
cloud illumination. An erased space on one shell and the holes or
depressions through which Slack's four large " epherules " are seen,
are now black. They, then, are not covered by the external
" crusts"
The slide was then turned over and the inside of the same
specimen examined by the same method, and on the more favour-
able portions of it the finer network of the inner plaie is also seen
in white, the " spherules " being perfectly black. By this reflected
light the " four spherules " are plainly seen to be dark openings in
the white plate, and the network is clearly traced across the areoltB
in the outside plate. The diatom looks like a piece of coarse white
netting laid over a finer piece.
Under the Tolles' -^ and with transmitted light, whether central
or obHque, it matters not, all portions of the surface of both the
upper and the lower plates are found to be covered with, or com-
3d of, a still finer network with irregular oval meshes like the
two coarser ones.
The place in the shell above referred to, where the layers are
erased, denuding an interior stractnrcless " vail," gives an oppor-
tunity to observe the edges of the fractured layers. The broken
edges of both plates bordering on the erasure show the jagging of
this finest net structure. The arrangement of the finest areol© is
more regular near the margin of the diatom, or appears so by
reason of the simpler character of the structure in that part. They
are easily setoi with the Vtr on any part of every specimen studied,
but are unusually distinct between the " four spherules " on the inner
plate looking through the largest openings in the outer plate ; at
may be rendered still more distinct on ehells with the concave side
up. Hiey are more difficult to be seen on the outeide crust with
On ihe Structure of Diatoms, 21
1 powers used, because of its greater opacity. Deductions
from focal changes with reference to the various markings lyin" in
different focal planes corroborate the conclnatons above expressed.
The disks esamiDed are on MoUer'a Probo-Platte, and on a slide
prepared by Mr. Wells.
Hyalodiacus subiilis Bailey.— On this beautiful little shell the
"engine ruHngs" are readily seen with almost any illumination,
and the inevitable concomitant of intersecting lines, whether real or
illusory beading is displayed. When wo use monochromatic light
the whole scene ia changed. The hyaline portion of the disk is in-
stantly resolved into perfectly well defined hexagons, radiating from
the central nucleus. The central part, because of ifa greater depth
and complexity, is only reaolved into irregularly shaped apaccs of a
more or leas hexagonal form. Every one of the five beads usually
seen represents the centre of an hexagonal plane exactly as in
Pleurostgma angulatum.
The hexagons are well defined with a power of 7000 diameters.
They may also bo seen with lamp or daybght.
Truxratiuni favus. — The two seta of markings on this fasci-
nating object certainly lie in ditlerent focal planes,* and probably
" belong to two distinct layers." The coarse hexagonal ridges axe
found to project from the outer or convex surlace, and the inner
plate bears the minute markinga. This is proved by the fact that
the fine markinga show decidedly the plainest on valves that are
mounted with the interior surface uppermost.
Under this superior objective the finer markings, like the larger,
I »re distinctly foveolate. Their hexagonal structure ia easily seen
V aven with lamp illumination. When examining comparatively thick
"^~"'" "xiBsessing a complex stmctnre, like the one in question, tbe
y for avoiding errors caused by too intense or by excessively
■ ohlique li^bt becomes at once apparent Tbe uueqnal refraction of
'he ught m passing through the external silicioua layer produces a
storted image upon and of the interior surface. In this manner
btorted small hexagons may be seen along the hnes of the larger
letwork by a lens incapable of clearly displaying the minute bexa-
p)nal markings above described.
The best results are obtained on the T, favits with a moderate
^bt nearly central.
StirireUa gemma. — This beautiful form has been subjected to
1 the different conditions of illumination in my possession. Like
iher relatively thick shells, the appearancea presented by tbe mark-
iga vary greatly with the changing; conditions of observation. No
roable is experienced in bringing out the longitudinal striae, nor in
tlnaking the little beauty seem "to " wear heads." At times the beads
^ve place to rectangles, and again after careful manipulation to
• Pee CurrBnter. ■ The J/lktOBCope,' 4th c*WioE, p. 282 and note.
On tke Sirveture of Diatoma.
sharply-defined elongated hexagona.* Hartnack'a besagoas as
figured are too much elongatixl ; although eometimes such an ap-
pearance is presented when the illuminating pencil ia at right angles
with the median line, the tranaverse lines being lees distinctly per-
ceptible. When the hght ia so arranged aa to show every aide with
equal perfection, the form of the markings is nearer that of regular
hexagona.
The Amici prism is found to work excellently on the Surirdla,
and when it is used with the eV objective and the blue cell the
slightly elongated hexagons are easily exhibited on an average
frustule.
Aulaeodiaeus KUtonii. — This splendid diak is traced with easy
angular figures evidently elevations, and the spaces between the
lines are undoubtedly depressions. Some of the markings are cir-
cnlar, others square, some pentagonal, some hexagonal, and others
heptagonaL Broken specimens of Bnglitwdlia Johnsonii with like
surface markings show the line of fracture running through the
areolie.
Nameula rkoviboides. — Individual frustalea of this species vary
considerably in degree of difficulty of resolution. Some of the
smallest valves when mounted in balsam tax the powers of excellent
instruments. The writer has foond all specimens, whether mounted
dry or in balsam, to yield readily transverse striaj with obhque illu-
mination direct firom the lamp. Under the same conditions an
average valve exhibits well-defined longitudinal striffi. With the
ammoni-sulphate cell it is instantly and clearly shown covered in
every part with squares, like Pleurosignia Ballicum,
Navicida erassinervis. — The specimens of this variety, in my
possession, are more difficult than Frustulia Saxonica, and even
rival A. ^dlucida under lamp illumination ; but any clean frustule
is satisfactorily resolved.
TJaing monochromatic hght with plain mirror and Wenham'a
paraboloid, longiivdinal hnes are discovered. After careful mani-
pulation both sets of hues are seen at the same time, and an appear-
ance of beading resnlta.
Navicula cmptdata.-~Soth sets of lines are easy, but the
lon^tudinal are much closer together than the transverse. Conse-
quently the light interlinear spaces are elongated and no semblanee
of beading is to be seen. In diatoms where the intersecting strice
I are of nearly equal fineness the little square spaces, when not well
defined, seem circular ; and if the illummation by transmitted light
ia intense, they present a raised appearance due to refraction.
Mr. Charles Btodder called my attention to this diatom with the
view of ascertaining with the ^ whether or not the two seta of
lines he in diilerent focal pknes. My observations, many times
* ■ The MioiDSCopB,' Cwpunter, iiago 11>2.
I
On iJte Structure of Diatoms.
■ repeated, Lave couvinced me that they are never both in focus at
the same time, and further that the longitudiual lines are on the
external suriace, and the tranaverae on the internal plate. If there
are not two plates, the lines may be on opposite Burlaces of the
same plate.
white cloud illumination is found to be much better than other
and more brilliant light for demonstrating these slight differences
in focal distances. Many errors of interpretation are avoided by
using an approximately central pencil when the inatrnment used
is capable of elucidating all the detaiJs of structure without greater
obliquity.
Fr-uslulia Saxoniea. — In addition to my observation of longitu-
dinal lines upon this test and resolution into dots,* it may be
■worth noting that even with lamp illumination the bV has displayed
the transversQ much clearer than they appear in Dr. Woodward's
photo-print.t With obUque hght du'ect from a small German
student's lamp, without mirror, prism, or condenser of a^iy kind,
a person entirdy unaccustomed to the microscope could distinctly
see them with Beck No. 3 eye-piece, power 7000 times. Witb
the ammoni-sulphate of copper cell the longitudinal lines and dots
are displayed with ease.
This is one of the most difficult test diatoms thus far studied,
ranking but little easier than A. pdlucida, N. crassinervis, and
Niizaehia cunmla.
Amphipleura peiludda. — Many times the writer has been able
to confirm the observations of longitudinal lines on this most
difficult test shell, but never has succeeded in seeing the dots except
with the blue cell and Wenham's paraboloid, and only then under
favourable circumstances-t When resolution is eifected, tie dots
are exceedingly minute and uniform in size, showing as mere points
of light whai magnified 2500 times. On one occasion the writer
has seen tme dark lines crossing betvreen the transverse strife like
the steps of a ladder, the dots or spaces plainly longest in direction
parallel with the median line, proving the longitudinal to be finer
than the transverse lines.
One obstacle in the way of resolution of the longitudinal stride
is the presence of diffraction linea The valves being so narrow
inereaeefl this difficulty. Only after much time is wasted, and
after many discouraging failures, will the patient observer receive
the reward of success.
Nitzschia curvula Sm. — The nnusnal number of spurious
appearances in thia object leads me to suspect that it possesses a
* ' AmoricMi NattinJiat,' July, J873, p. 413.
t ' Lens,' vol. !., p. li)7.
t Sael. KBinilb, ID the- I«UB,' April, 1873, 1>.JJ5. Seo als-j the -AmBriiau
NaUinklist; May, UHS, p. 316.
»
Gompticated etrnctare, us yet beyond tlie rcacli of tbe iDstmmenti.
The extreme finenesB of the longitudinal linea, as compared with
the transverse, reminds one of the Navimla cusjndaia, and as
is the case with the coarser shell, no efforts avail to develop a
semblance of beading,
Striaiella, unipuneiata.- — Two sets of §ne lines, and as tho
direction of the light ie changed, may be made to exhibit either
beads or squarea. In point of valne aa a teat, will be fotmd to
approach Surirella gemma.
Qraimnaiophora. — Of thia genna the writer has examined the
G. marina, G. suhtilissima, and G. serpentina ; all of which are
resolved into hexagons. Broken specimens of Q. marina ahow the
line of fractnre mnniog through the hexagonal planes and leaving
pointa of the network projecting. The markings continue com-
pletely illustrated as the stage is revolved, in whatever direction
the beam of light may fall.
iSaMrone-ia.— Some of the larger varieties of S. phcenicenleron
are covered with hexagonal areohe, easily exhibited with central
dajhght. The projecting points of the fractured partitions between
the hexagons may be observed.
Pleurosigvia angulaium. — Hexagona. The line of fracture
generally running around them, but quite often through them,
Plmroiigma, Balimim. — A (b-op of water slowly advancing by
capillary attraction shows thia shell to be covered with squares,
and proves that both aets of lines forming the boundaries of the
squares are on the aame aurface of the valve ; and the appearance
presented by an air bubble on the other side proves that aurface
to be smooth.
Pleurosigma formosum. — Near the ends of the fmstule it is
easy under certain adjustments of the light to make it appear like
a checker-board with alternate bright red and green squares.
Double rows of green and red beada altematmg may be seen on
this as well as on other apecies of the same genua." When we
resort to central hght from a white cloud, and thus lessen the
liabihties to err caused by refiaction, diffraction, decomposition of
light, and oblique projection of shadows, the conclusion is arrived
at that these various appearances are caused by two sets of inter-
secting diagonal ridgea, the finer ridges running np and down, over
and between the coarser, and aubject to considerable variation even
on the same fruatnle. This theory would also account for the
" beads " (?) being of different colours, and the same " beada "
chtmging colonr when the focns is changed. We see in many of
the mollusks shell-markings of a similar character.
Concluding remarks.— It would seem that the perfect box-like
&rm of the shells of the Diatomaceffi and their elaborate orna-
' I1r.Figntt,m'M.M.J.'
On the Btrudv/re of Diatoms. 25
mentation would exclude the -idea of a blind process of chemical
crystallization. Anajogy should teach that they are secreted tat a
Erotective covering for the tender animal-like plant, as among
igher forms. If this is true, the surface markings ought to be so
distributed as to give additional strength to the shell without
greatly adding to ite weight. It would also be expected that some
of the larger shells would be perforated with holes. This idea,
of course, would have to admit into the discussion considerations of
habits of growth^ and environments. Those contained in gelatinoua
envelopes should be less developed in strength of sheU and bracmg.
Those growing on algse, and m exposed localities, should be strong
to resist fracture. On those moving free the bracing would be
in proportion to the weakness of ihe shell; larger shells being
relatively more liable to be broken. Here as elsewhere nature,
without waste of material, combines utiUty with beauty.— TAe
American Naturalist^ May.
PBOOKESS OP MIOBOSCOPICAL SCIENCE.
I7ie MuKidar TV^soe of Goreihra plumicomis. — Ttis is very folly
described iii an article in a lato mtmbor of Mas Scliultze's ' Archiv,' •
by Herr G. R. Wagoner. He enters npon the aubject of ite develop-
luent, and bo poiots out many fcicts nhicli show that it is in its
deyelopmont not unlike the ordinary striated moecle of Tertebrata
animals, A couple of eicellent plates, done in the ' Archiv'a ' best
style, accompany the paper.
T^e Bevelnpmenl of the Ovtim in Anodonta. — Thia is a siibject
which is partly worked ont by Herr W. Flemming, who is Professor
of Anatomy in Fraguo. Ho shows among other things the peculiar
form of the zoosperms and tho mode in which they enter tlirongh the
micropyle. This paper, which extends over more than thirty-fiTa
pages, is illustrated by a good plate,')'
Hag Ihe so-called Microsporon Audounii any Existence f — This
question is very well disoiWed in the ' Archives de Phyaielogie '
(May, 187 i), by M. Malasaez, who, having debated the question very
fully, arrives at the conclusion that it is present, but diScra 1 1 some
extent from the conclusions already laid down by M. Gruby. M.
Malassez says that it is constituted of minute spores, of wlucb he
describes three type3:~(l) Those which measure from 4 to 5 nam.
have a doable contour and may possess buds : these are the large
spores. (2) Those measuring &om 2 to 2'5 nun. have no double con-
tour, and may have buds : these are the small spores. (3) Those have
an inferior diameter about 2 mm., have a single contour and no bads :
these are the spomlcs. He says that tho ovoid spores that one some-
times sees do not belong to this fungus, but most probably to some
other one. There ore no tubes, hot sometimes little chains of five vtc
six or even more spores. These results difl'er from those of M. Grnby
chiefly in the absence which they record of branches and stems, ■whidi
are described by M, Gruby to ba present.
The Zoological Position of the Hypopus is very clearly defined in a
memoir by M. Megnin in the ' Journal do TAnatomio ' (No. 3, May,
1871). These animals belong to the acari class of beings, and Orre
parasitic (so-called) on nearly every animal, from the common house-
fly upward. M, Mognin discusses their relations to each other, their
anatomy and their habits, and comes to some interesting conclusions ;
among others, that these animals are not truly parasitic ; for he says
that the animal on which they are situated merely acts as a " dia~
seminalor and preserver of their species." This paper is accompanied
by four good phites, in which sovoral species are figured in their
mature and immature conditions.
Tlie Structure of the Skin.
survey of the recent work i:
-Dr. P. H. Pye-Smith gives an excellent
this direction, which has been dune fay
PBOdSESS 07 KHmOBOaPIOii. BOIEKCB. 27
Professor Tomea, of Kiev, in Eufisia. Dr. Pye-Smitb says (' Medical
Becord') that the author, starting from the zones recently sketched
by Langera, deseribes the felted arrangement of the fibrUlro in the
papillary layer of the eorium, and tba looser texture of the deeper or
roticninr layer, where the great bundles of fibrous tissue form rhombic
and polygonal spaces by their intersection, which make on section a
kind of lattice-work. There is also a distinct, though not uniform,
arrangement of this tissue in auccesaire layers, parallel to the anrface.
All this struoturo the author finds equally in the zones, which more
or loss perfectly encircle the limbs and trunk, and in the spaces
between them. He then shows the arrangement of the hair-folUcles,
which are connected, not by their blind extremities, but by their edges,
with four bundles of fibres running obliquely up from the reticular
layer of outis, and crossing each other obliijaely before tboy expand in
the papillary layer so as to surroimd the mouth of the follicle. This
applies chiefly to the white fibres, as seen in tanned specimens of
haman skin. The elastic tissue is more irregularly disposed, while
the inter-fibrillar cement {KiUmbgtans) pervades all parts alike.
The author doea not find any contianons layer of endothelium
lining the spaces into which the cntaneons lymphatics open.
The arrangement of the muscles of the skin is next described wij,h
great minuteness, and illustrated by figures of a mechanical model
constrooted for the purpose.
The second- part of this paper deals with the blood-vessels of the
integuments. Tha plan omployed by the anthor was to iujeet firat
the veins and then the arteries with difierent coloured fiuida, so that
the place of meeting in the capillaries could be afterwards recognized.
Professor Ludwig's apparatua was naed ; the injections consisted of
size, coloured with eolation of Berlin blue, watery solution of hydrated
oiide of iron, dialyzed and afterwards concentrated by evaporation, or
forrocyanide of copper dissolved with oxalate of ammonia. Carmine
injections did not succeed ; the colours stained the surrounding tissues
in spite of all precautions. Pieces of skin in which the injection had
mn well, from the &ce, arm, foot, hand, acrotum, trunk, &c., were
hardened in alcohol : sections were made in various directions, and
cleared with acetic acid and glycerine, or with turpentine.
The most important residts of these observationa, which ore
illustrated by numerous well-executed ooloitred drawings, are as
follows :^
1. There is no direct communication between the cntaneoue arteries
and veins, as supposed by M. Sucquet; the capillary network is
complete throughout.
2. There is no special capillary aystom for the fibrous and elastic
tissue of the skin. Fine injections show that the capillaries aro
arranged as follows : (a) in the papillio, where their function is
supposed by the author to be the formation of epidermis ; (b) around
tlie convolated part of the sweat-glands, and the sacs of the sebaceous
and hair-follicles ; (c) among the arroctores pilorum and the muscular
fibres of the dartos ; (d) aurronnding tbo aervo fibres and the minuto
ganglioniform enlargements which have been described by the author ;
28 PROaBBBS OF mOBOSOOPIOAL BOElirOH^
(e) forming a somewhat loose and scanty network around the arteries
— external, yasa vasomm ; (/) supplying the lobules of adipose tissue.
Two points in the description of fiiese capillary systems are worthy of
special notice : one, that the sweat-glands are quite unconnected in
their blood-supply with the papill», so that there is no second capil-
lary network in the skin, as in tiie kidney ; the other, that the special
capillaries of the adipose tissue can be recognized in the foetal
integument before any fiett-cells hove been formedL
3. Three vascular layers may be distinguished in the human skin :
a deep one, supplying the subcutaneous &t and deepest part of the
corium, a mid-layer for the sweat-glands, and a superficial papillary
network. The last discharges its blood into a yenous plexus, which is
almost erectile in character. The three corresponding sets of yeins
finally open into common collecting branches, visible to the naked
eye.
4. The author confirms the observations of those histologists who
have frequently met with papillae which bi6 at once nervous and
vascular.
A New Sponge is described by Professor A. E. Yerrili as having
been obtained in the course of his recent dredgings on the coast of
New England. He says* it is a large species, of which several fine
specimens were obtained* This in general appearance and form some-
what resembles a Teihya, and in the character of the snicula it agrees
with DorviUta Kent. This sponge consists of a broad, convex, often
nearly hemispherical, upper portion, two to four inches in diameter,
supported on a broad, stout, but short, peduncle, usually two or three
inches broad in large specimens, and somewhat less in height, the
peduncle usually forming about one-half of the total height which
may be three or four inches. The peduncle is composed of very long,
slender, irregularly aggregated, mostly setiform' spicula, more or less
appressed to the surfSeMse^ but with the upper ends mostly free; together
with a few small dependent fascicles. The '' head " or upper portion
of the sponge mass is firm and rather dense, composed chiefly of
radiating bundles of large and long slender spicula, often more than
half an inch long, many of which, at the external layer, divide into
three horizontal or recurved branches or prongs, each of which usually
forks near the end into two acute divergent branches, serving to
support the cortical layer, which is more or less irregular and uneven,
but firm ; some of thejspicula referred to project beyond the surface,
and nearly the whole exterior is rudely and densely hispid, with long,
ibetiform, acute spicules, which project unequally from the surface, the
free ends of many of them being half an inch or more in length.
Among the projecting spicula, and supported by them, are small,
elongated oval, or fusiform, masses of soft; sarcode, which are probably
to be regarded as external gemm«e. Scattered irregularly over the
upper surface, and especially around the periphery, are large, often
very elongated, rounded, or angular, sunken areas or pits, often half
an inch across, surrounded by a more or less prominent margin sup-
* Silliman's Journal, May, 1874.
PB0GBBS3 OF UICROEOOPICAL SGIENCB.
29
ported by stiff projectmg spicula. Tbe bottom of these pita ia formed
hy a tliin membrane or diapbragm, perforated by very numerous small
round or oval openings, which are qaite variable in size, even in the
same area, and in many cases are so nnmerons and largo in the central
part aa to bo separated only by a mere network, when they become
polygonal. This perforated membrane is filled with minute, many-
rayed doiiblo-Btellate spicula, with a small number of much larger
ones having fonr or five acute raye. Beneath the diaphr^m the pits
become more or lesa funnel-shaped, and communicate with large round
anastomosing channels, which ramify through the sponge-moss.
It seems necessary to refer this remarkable form to the genus
DorviUia, and therefore be proposes to consider it a new species under
the name of DorviUia echinala.
Striated Mttecular Fibre. — At a recent meeting of the Bostou
Society of Natural History, Dr. Thomas Dwight read a paper on the
" Structure and Action of Striated Mueoular Fibre." His studies had
been made un the muscles of the legs of the small wator-bootlo Gyrtmig.
Their covering is q_uite transparent, njid after the leg has been out off
and put into a drop of water under a covering glass, the conti'actiona
can often be observed for over an hour. He found that the fibre, at
rest, consisted of narrow granular transverse stripes, with brood light-
coloured bands between them. Close to the black stripe there was a
glaring white reflexion, but midway between two stripes the fibre was
grey. When the fibre contracted the block bonds cameneorer together,
and tbeir granular strncture became more obscuro; the grey band
disappeared, so that there wos merely on alternation of blaok and
white stripes. The ends of the white stripes bulged out during cou-
traction. As the wave of contraction moved along, it was easy to see
that there was no interchange of poBition between the black and the
light substances, and no homogeneous transition stage, as is maintained
by Merkel. When one port of the £bre is in contraction, the part
£rom which the wave is running is put upon the stretch ; the black
"are divided into two rows of grannies, and there is less distiuc-
between the white and grey substances.
The CafxAility of the Microscope. — According to the researches of
Professor Abbe, published in a. late number of Mas Schultze's 'Arcliiv,'
and abstracted by one of our contemporaries, it ie made to appear that
tlie limit of capability of the microscope is almost reached by our best
microscopes, and thatnl! li.ipe i.f ri.lpptK^r Tipoptrfttion into the material
Gonatitntion of things. '"" ■ ■ '■■■'" Tiiiist be dis-
missed, [1 1] Eiperinii . tliecbanges
wrought by diffraeti'iii ■ ■ hires, whose
r
I
I
PBOaBSaS OF UICROSCOFIOAL SOniNCE.
ftppe&raticos as of morpbologicAl eigniGc4incc, but merely as physical
phenomena, from which nothing further can certainly be inferred than.
the pressnce of each structural conditions as are capable of producing
the diSractien effects obtained. The remark has notable applicationB
to many of the mtcrosoopical researches on markings of diatoms, and
on striated muscular fibre. And it affects not merely the morpholo-
gical relations of the objects, but the deductions, mado from microsco-
pical obseryation, as to properties (such as differences of transparence,
colours, polarization, &c,). The author lays down the following prin-
ciple aa basis for determination of a limit ; — By no microscope can parts
be distinguished (or the marks (MerkmaJe) of a really present structure
perceived), if they are so near to each other that the first bnudle of
light rays produced by diffraction can no longer outer the objecUvfl
simultaneously with the ludifiracted cone of light. Professor Abbe
has also recently described a new illumiuatiog apparatus for the
microsoopo, formed of a condensing system of twonnaehromatic lenses,
which are fised in the stage of the microscope, and transmit the rays
from the mirror below ; the purpose being that the object (inunediatdy
above the upper lens) may be illaminated by light from a great many
different directions,
la Eozoon Oanademe a Fwaminifer or not ? — This important qnes-
tion which was long ago discnaHed by Dr. Carpenter and Professors
King and Eowney, has recently been teken up by no less an authority
than Mr. H. J, Carter, F.It.8., who alleges that it presents none of the
features of an animal ; bo has been roplied to in a very able paper
by Dr. Carpenter, in the last number of the ' Annals of Natural His-
tory.' We propose to lay the former view of Mr. Carter before onr
readers in the present number, aad Dr. Carpenter's in the nest number
of this Journal. After giving the structure of certain fossil specimens
of NummnliteB and Orliitoides, he goes on to say, that " in vain do we
Beck in the so-called Eozoon Canadenge for the unvarying perpendi-
cular tubuli, sine qua non of for&miniferous structure. In vain do we
look for that regularity of chamber-formation which, in the amorphons
growth assigned to the so-called Eoaoon, might be equally well as-
sumed to bo identical with tho heterogeneous mass of chambers on each
side of tho central plane of Orbitoides dtspansa, accompanied by tho
transverse bars of stoloniferous structure uniting one chamber to the
other. In short, in vain do we look for the casts of trno foramini-
ferous chambers at all, in the grains of serpentine ; they, for the most
part, are not subglobular, but subprismatic. With such deficiencies, 1
am at a loss to conceive how the so-called Eozoon Canodeme can be
identified with the foraminiferous structure, except by the wildest con-
jecture ; and then such identification no longer becomes of any scien-
tific value. Having examined the slice of Laurentien limestone
which has been so courteously submitted to me, in thick and thin
polished sectioi^, monntcd in Canada balsam, by transmitted and also
refiected light, also the surface of tho ' decalcified' slice as it camo
from you, in all directions, with ono-quartor and one-inch focus com-
pound powers respectively, I must unhesitatingly declare that it pre-
sents no foraminiferous structure anywhere. Nor does its stmcture
FROGBBSS OF MICROSGOPIOAL SOIEKCE. 31
bear so much resemblance to that of a foraminiferbiis test as the legs
of a table to those of a quadruped ; while, if such be the grounds on
which geological inferences are established, the sooner they are aban-
doned the better for geology, the worse for sensationalism ! The con-
tents of this letter are open to no controversy. My knowledge of
foraminiferous structure has been obtained step by step, beginning
with the rec^it and then going to the fossilized forms, making and
mounting my own sections, from which afterward my illustrations and
descriptions have been taken. If others who have pursued a similar
course of instruction differ from me in what I have above stated, the
question can only be decided by a third party, not on verbal arguments
fJone, but on a comparison of the actual specimens, as prolonged dis-
putation, in matters of opinion, soon disgusts everybody but tibe com-
batants, and can end in nothing but a fearfal waste of time that might
be better employed."
The Air-cells in Limnanthemum, — Dr. T. G. Hunt contributes a
short account of the above to a recent number of the ' American
Naturalist.' He says that in the leaf of Limnanthemum lacwnoaum, or
floating-heart, may be demonstrated multitudes of peculiar stellate
bodies, apparently like those found in the stem of Nuphar, The
whole interior of the leaf is studded with them. There are no ordi-
nary large air-spaces so often found -in other floating-leaves, but all
through the parenchyma these curious bodies are irregularly scattered.
They vary in size and also in the number of rays given off by each.
These rays are smooth and not echinulate like those in Nuphar. In
the field of a f lens he has counted hundreds at one view. Under
the polarizing binocular microscope, properly illuminated, they are
revealed with startling distinctness and beauty. It is nearest the
under epidermis that they are located, and the best view therefore is
obtained from beneath. Their true physiological significance is not
doubtful. In the natural condition they contain air, and the floating-^
heart rides securely on the surfEice of the lake, buoyed up by innume-
rable life-preservers which are not likely to shift out of place. The
veins in the leaf ai*e present, of course, but are comparatively rudi-
mentary. The vascular bundles are faintly marked, and only a few
delicate supporting cells line their margins; thus giving another
example of nature*s economy, for where strongly developed organs are
not necessary there we do not find them.
Mr, W. Archer on the so-called Ague-plant, — It seems that the
editor of * Grevillea ' sent some of this plaiit to Mr. Ardier, of Dublin,
who. has explained its nature very distinctly by showing that it is
simply Hydrogastrum. He says (in ' Grevillea,' M&y), ^' On reading over
the more recent description of me ' Ague-plant,' comnmnicated by Dr.
Bartlett to the ^ Chicago Society of Physicians and Surgeons,'* one sees
how fairly it tallies with the known characters of Hydrogastrum,t but
it is undoubtedly surprising how he and the American observers of
the Society referred to (loc. cit.) failed to perceive the identity of the
♦ See * Grevillea,' No. 21, March, 1874, p. 142.
t See also Parfitt in » Grevillea,' No. 7, January, 1873, p. 103.
VOL. xn. D
32 FB0GBES8 OF HIOBOSGOPIGAL SOIENOB.
organism in qnestion, one which finds a place in so many botanical text-
books, boih by figure and description, as well as on lectnre-diagramB, as
a noteworthy example of a single-celled independent plant, and at the
same time endowed with the power to become copionsly ramified, so
to speak, * root,' ' stem,' and aerial portion combined in one ' cell ' only.
I venture to think it hardly less surprising to find this seemingly bo
passive and inert little chlorophyllaceous alga, met with, in suitable
situations, all over Europe, gravely tried and found guilty^ on so
slender evidence, of being the atrocioas ' cause of the ague.'
" In the mud-samples so kindly forwarded by the Editor, there
occurred some fragmentary examples of a plant wholly different from
the foregoing — so small in quantity as to be quite invisible to the
unassisted eye — but which disclosed itself amongst the dSbfis taken
up along with the Hydrogastrum. This was a Chthonoblastus, Kutz.
(Microcoleus, Harvey), and was most probably the same as CK. cerugi-
neu8, Kiitz. Just where one of these algsB would be found it woindd
not be very surprising to meet with the other. Can this latter be
chargeable with being the 'cause of the ague'? It is wholly a
different kind of alga from Hydrogastrum, without any point of homo-
logy or afi^ty therewith, except, perhaps, their common love for the
damp clayey substratum afforded by the partial drying of the swamps,
near which, unfortunately, from some occult cause, the ' ague ' is prone
to hover."
The Mucous Membrane of the Larynx. — Dr. W. Stirling contribntes
a note on this to a recent number of the * Medical Eecord.' He states
that Mr. P. Coyne has arrived at the following conclusions upon this
subject. The mucous membrane of the larynx is formed in a layer
subjacent to the epithelium, by a reticulated tissue analogous to
lymphatic tissue; it thus approaches the structure of the mucous
membrane of the small intestine. Lymphatic organs, analogous to
the closed sacs of the small intestine, exist in the superficial layers
of the mucous membrane. The author is of opinion that the presence
of these glands may account for the development of certain ulcerations
in the larynx during fever, as in typhoid. On the free border of the
inferior vocal cord certain vascular, and probably nervous papiUsd, are
to be found. These papillsB are specially developed on the anterior
half of the vocal cords. From the preparation of more than twenty*
five human larynges, the author has satisfied himself that the sub-
mucous serous sac, admitted by Foumi6, does not exist.
The Nerve of the Digestive Canal, — ^A paper on this subject which,
though short, is not devoid of interest, appears in the ' Medical
Eecord,' April 29th. It is really an abstract of Professor Amstein's
communication of the results obtained by Professor Gonjaens. It is
to the following effect : —
1. Ganglion cells occur in considerable quantities in the walls of
the oesophagus of the frog.
2. The nerve-stems of the mucous membrane of the oesophagus of
the frog lie generally in lymph-spaces. The fine nerve-fibres, devoid
of the white substance of Schwann, which branch from these nerve-
PBOaBESS OF MICBOSCOPICAL SGIENGE. 88
stems, nm within the SaftcanaU between the bundles of connectiye
tissue.
3. A thick net of non-tnedullated nuclei containing nerve-fibres is
distributed in the mucous membrane of the oesophagus of the &og.
From this net, fine nerve-fibres branch off and ascend vertically in the
direction of the epithelium, and can be followed to the interstices
between the epithelial cells,
4. The nerve-fibres of the mucous membrane of the stomach and
intestine of the frog arise from nerve bundles, which often pierce the
muscular coat in company with small arteries. In their further
course, two principal directions are to be made out. Part of the fibres
ascend vertically from the deeper layers of the mucous membrane and
reach the epithelium of the mucous layer. In this course, they give
fine threads to the gastric and intestinal glands. A connection
between the nerve-threads and the epithelial structures could nowhere
be made out. The other part of the nerve-fibres of the mucous mem-
brane ascend at first in the form of an arch, and later have a direction
parallel to the surface of the mucous membrane. In that the above-
named bondings occur at different heights, so that on a vertical section
there appear tibree or four parallel rows of nerve-fibres. These nerve-
fibres are destined for the capillary vessels of the mucous membrane,
and form, on making sections parallel to the surface, long drawn-out
nets around the blood-vessels; single nerve-threads touch in a
radiating manner the walls of the capillaries.
la Dichcena rugosa a Lichen or Fungus f — This subject is very well
discussed in a paper by Mr. F. C. S. Boper, F.L.S., which was lately
read before the Eastbourne Natural History Society. After some
introductory remarks, the author said the whole surface of the patch
when viewed with a low power is granular or minutely tubercular, of
a dull brownish-black colour, and in some cases tinged here and there
with green. On making a section, it is found that these granular
bodies arise from below the cuticle of the bark, but without any trace
of mycelium penetrating the bark itself, as is commonly the case with
Fungi ; they are of irregular outline, and enclose a cavity, opening by
a pore, or rather slit, at the summit. This cavity is more or less
filled with asci, or small sac-like bodies, which contain spores, sur-
rounded with a mass of filaments called paraphyses, which are septate
or jointed, and curiously bent or hooked at the summit. The number
of spores in each ascus is variable, generally from two to six, though
as the spores are large, it is not improbable that the normal number is
eight. The spores are oval, and the largest about TTrtnr^ ^^ ^^ ^^^^
in length ; they are filled with granular matter, of a pale brownish
tinge, variegated by a mixture of bluish green. These spores, when
mature, escape through the aperture at tibe summit of the granules.
Scattered over the edges, and at times imbedded between the plants,
we find masses of green bodies (Gronidia), which are very minute,
varying in shape from distinct circles to ovals or oblougs, encircled
by a hyaline or transparent border with a double-cell wall. The green
matter in the smaller of these bodies (which is probably chlorophyll)
is homogeneous. In the larger we find segmentation commenced, ana
P 2
34 PROGBESS OF HIOBOSOOPIGAL SOIENCE.
they are divided into two, four, or eight masses, separated by a dis-
tinct partition, but still enclosed in the hyaline cell walL It must be
remembered that each of these granular brownish-black bodies is a
separate plant, and it is only by their rapid increase and aggregation
into masses that the patch we see on the tree is produced. It is a
matter of considerable dif&culty to convey in writing a clear descrip-
tion of these minute forms of life; but I trust, by the help of the
specimens and drawings on the table, I have made sufficiently clear
all the data we have to enable us to find out its position in the vege-
table kingdom. I may, however, mention that no reaction is found on
the contents of the perithccium either by potash or iodine.
The question first arises, after having ascertained its stmctore,
Whore arc we to look for it ? The general appearance is certainly
that of a Lichen, and the black oblong or ovoid perithecia have mneb
the appearance of some of the Graphidea). The spores and asci give
us no help, as they may belong eitlicr to a Lichen or a Fungus. The
great difficulty arises £rom the presence of the green particles, termed
gonidia, which are identical with some of the AlgsB, and have been
figured and described under various names by Eiitzing, Hassal, and
others, as separate and distinct plants ; but similar bodies are also
found in Lichens; and we find the Bev. M. J. Berkeley, one of our
greatest authorities, in his introduction to Cryptogamic Botany,
defines Fungi as *' plants Hysterophytal (that is, Hving upon dead or
living organic matter) or Epiphytal (that is, growing upon another
plant), nourished by the matrix, never producing gonidia ;" whilst his
definition of Lichens is '' Aerial, nourished by air, and not by the
matrix, producing gonidia" Of course, with these definitions, anyone
would naturally expect to find our plant amongst Lichens ; but a most
careful examination of Leighton's ' Lichen Flora,' the latest and best
work on this tribe, together with Mudd's IJ/Eanual and other works,
failed to show me any description that would agree in all respects with
the appearance shown by the plant I have described. I then asked
Mr. Muller to examine it, and ascertain if it could be a Fungus. The
mixture of distinguishing characters was as great a puzzle to him as
it had been to me, and he was unable to make out from Cooke's Hand-
book its exact position ; but on carefully going through the ascomy-
cetes Fungi in Hooker's ' English Flora,' he found Hysterium rugogum
described as " Stroma, crust-like, innate, brown-black, perithecia elliptic
bursting through the living bark, at length running together into irre-
gular spots." This is said to be extremely conmion on the smooth
branches of birch and oak. And Mr. Berkeley, who prepared this
portion of the British Flora, states also that it is usually referred to
the order Lichenes, from which, however, Messrs. Borrer and Hooker,
in accordance with the views of Chevalier, Wallroth, and Fries, con-
sider it extraneous. Sir James Smith long since perceived its affinity
with Hysterium, from which it differs in the presence of a stroma, and
in its being produced on living bark. Beference is made to ' English
Botany/ t. 2282, and on loolang at the figure and description there
given, as well as to the works of Fries, Acharius, and other authors, it
was evident this was undoubtedly the plant we were in search of. The
PBOGBESS OF MIOBOSOOPIGAL SCIENCE.^ 35
STnonymy is carious, and well exemplifies the difficulty cryptogamio
botanists find in clearly defining the limits of these lowly-organized
plants ; for I find that ten well-known authors describe it as a Lichen,
and six, equally well known, place it amongst the Fungi ; whilst it is
rejected by both our latest authors on these plants, Mr. Cooke, in his
^ Handbook on British Fungi,' 1871, merely mentioning the name of
DichcBna rugosa, with the remark, *' I think it should be included with
Lichens," and the Bev. W. A. Leighton, in his * Lichen Flora,' pub-
lished the same year, taking no notice of it whatever.
Pseudo-Muscular Hypertrophy. — The 'Philadelphia Medical
Times ' contains a translation of an article on this subject. After
describing the usual symptoms and course of the disease, and the
microscopic appearance as being simply an atrophy of the muscular
fibre, accompanied by an enormous increase of the interstitial fatty
and connective tissue, the writer passes on to the consideration of four
cases, which, though presenting some points of similarity, were in
others markedly different from &e ordinary course of the disease. In
each of these cases the disease was consequent upon an injury. The
functional derangements were not so marked as in typical cases : in
place of being totally lost, the power of motion was only diminished.
The microscope revealed, in each case, what appeared to be a true
hypertrophy of the muscular fibres, without excessive growth of the
interstitial connective tissue. From this it would seem that the
hypertrophy spreads from the muscle to the connective tissue, and
the hypertr6phied connective tissue, pressing on the muscle, causes
atrophy afterwards. Schlesinger, however, reports a case of a man
with mental disease, in whom some of the muscles were hypertrophied.
The microscope showed the muscular tissue much diseased, but in
them there was no hypertrophy of the muscular fibre. Whether the
process is a simple inflammation, or what is its nature, is not known.
— See also the ' Medical Examiner,' Chicago, May 1.
The Microscopy of Gum Production has been fully explained in a
paper before the French AcadeiAy by M. Prilling. The writer divides
the subject into three heads, as follows : —
1. Production in vessels, — Li the wood of a tree so diseased as to
produce gum, a large number of vessels are more or less filled with it
either through their entire length or forming a coating more or less
thick around them, or on one side. The most recent observers have
admitted that the gum results from the disorganization and transform-
ation of the inside of the walls of the vessels, but an attentive study
of the production of gum in the vessels has led me to a different con->
viction. The gum shows itself first in very fine drops, which increase
in size, touch each other, become confluent and form irregular masses,
with sinuate edges. This mode of origin of gum contained in vessels
appears irreconcilable with the opinion professed by German ob-
servers. The examination of large masses of gum taken from the
vessels of the apricot has led to the same conclusion. These vessels
are marked with areolar cavities and a spiral projection formed by a
thickening of the cell-walls on the interior, and the masses of gum
36 PROGBBSS OF HIOROSOOPIOAL SGIEKOE.
present on their surface furrows corresponding to the spiral lines
which jut out from the walls of the vessel, and even little projectioiis
corresponding to the cavities. It is then very certain that, in this
case, tiie gum is deposited in the interior of the vessels, and has taken
the impression of the interior. This gum is of the same nature with
that M. Trecul calls c^aaone,
2. Production in Cells, — TransformaJtion of Starch, — Gum is often
seen in the medullary rays and there offers particular interest,
because its appearance is connected with the disappearance of the
starch originally contained in the cells. The change of starch into
gum has been noted by former observers, but never to my notion
precisely described. On the first appearance of gum in the cell, the
grains of starch, still entire, are gathered into little groups, around
which appears a thin layer of gum, also small portions of which majr
be seen deposited in other parts of the cell. The masses of starch
enveloped by gum diminish continually as the layer of gum increases
in thic^ess, but when treated by iodine the two substances preserve
their special properties without modification till the starch finally
disappears, usually leaving a small cavity in the centre of the little
mass of gum. When the production of gum commences in the tissnes,
an increased amount of starch is observable in the neighbouring cells
which seems absorbed, and inmiediately changed into gum, but ordi-
narily the gum in this case does not appear to be deposited in the
cells, but passes into the neighbouring reservoirs, where it accnmn-
lates in considerable quantity. *
3. It is neither in vessels nor cells, but rather in the lacunsd formed
in the interior of young tissues, the voluminous masses of gum accu-
mulate, which we often observe. These lacunaB are most frequently
found in the cambial zone, but may be seen at different depths in the
wood, disposed concentrically like successive annual layers. They
are formed in the germinal layer, and then occupy the interval between
the medullary rays. ^When not too largely developed, a new woody
layer forms outside (h them, and the growth is not sensibly altered.
On the contrary, if growth cease at this point, a flow of gum is caused,
the woody tissue necroses and cannot be covered except by the extension
of lateral portions where the germinal layer is uninjured.
The tissues next to these lacunsB suffer an important modification of
development ; the cambium, instead of forming woody tissue, produces
cells in which an abundance of starch is deposited. There arises then,'
wherever gum is developed, a particular tissue (woody parenchyma)
which does not exist in healthy stems, and whose appearance is so
intimately connected with the morbid formation of gum, that it may
be considered as a pathologic tissue. The starch, which accumulates in
this special woody parenchyma, is used, as in the medullary rays, to
form gum, which accumulates in large quantities in the lacunse. These
lacunsB increase at the expense of the neighbouring tissue, which is
disorganized; nevertheless, the cells which border the lacunas often
manifest extreme vital activity, and give birth to true pathologic
formations. They develop, multiply and ramify in the interior of the
lacunte, even when separated from the rest of the tissue, and absolutely
isolated in the middle of the gum.
PBOGBESS OF MIOBOSOOPIOAL SGIENGE. 37
What is the exact Definition of Leucocyte and PtLs-corpuscle?^
The following is an account of an amusing discussion which took
place at a late meeting of the Philadelphia Pathological Society.
'* Dr. Bertolet said he had not a clear idea of what was comprised by
the term * leucocytes,' and desired much to know its limitations.
Dr. Tyson replied that, after other better-known histologists, he had
always used the word leucocyte in a generic sense, as including all
that class of small, round, variously granular cells which, according
to the situations in which they were found, were variously called
white blood-corpuscles, mucus-corpuscles, young pus-corpuscles, or
the round cells of connective tissue, — in other words, dead amoeboid
cells. Dr. Bertolet said he thought this was an error in theory which
had been allowed to supplant practice ; that the white corpuscle and
pus-corpuscle were not 1^e same. Dr. Eichardson said the word leu-
cocyte had been originally.introduced by Charles Bobin, who applied
it to the class of bodies named by Dr. Tyson, whether alive or dead,
as well as to exudation-corpuscles, and he believed also, provisionally,
salivary corpuscles. He thought that if anyone would treat white
corpuscles contained in a drop of blood from his finger, first with
water by introducing a small quantity at the edge of the thin glass
cover, and then with weak aniline solution, in the manner described
in his report on the white blood-corpuscle,* he would have no difficulty
in finding many globules which exhibited two or three, and occasion-
ally those which displayed four or five, well-formed and strongly-tinted
nuclei, and which manifested a precise identity, in that respect at
least, with the leucocytes of pus, as described by older pathologists.
By this experiment it was easily demonstrated that the characteristic
formerly so much relied upon for the recognition of the pus-cell, and
quoted by Dr. Bertolet, — ^namely, that it possessed two, three, or more
nuclei, — was valueless as a means for its discrimination from the
leucocytes of blood. Dr. Tyson admitted that pus-corpuscles soon
became very granular from fatty degeneration, and then presented
objects which did not so closely resemble the white blood-corpuscle ;
but in their young state he did not think they could be distinguished,
and to acetic acid and water both responded identically. Dr. Bichard-
son said that about one white corpuscle out of thirty is ordinarily
more granular than its companions, and he was strongly inclined to
think that these white corpuscles were also the seat of fatty degenera-
tion. The President said it was very important to have clear ideas as
to the exact application of terms. He presumed, of course, that this
discussion referred simply to the morphology, and not the vital
properties or developmental tendencies, of the cells in question. He
said that he himself had been called upon to study cases where in-
flammation had obliterated the trunks of vessels, — a matter which
brought up directly the question of being able to distinguish between
the corpuscles in the surrounding inflamed tissue and the white cor-
puscles which remained in the softened clots. By no means which
were available could he distinguish between the two. Dr. Eichardson
thought the more he studied the subject in connection with Cohn-
heim*s observations, the more he was led to conclude that living len-
♦ * Amer. Med. Assoc. Trans.,' 1872.
38 NOTES AND BIEMOBANDA.
eocytes of pus and blood were identical physiologically as well as
morphologically."
The Mintde Structure of a Peculiar Fern, — At one of this year's
meetings of the Philadelphia Academy, Dr. J. G. Hunt remarked that
the structure of the Schizcea jpusilla differed widely from that of our
other indigenous schizsBceous ferns, viz., Lygodium palmatum, and its
morphological elements are imlike those of our ferns in general. Tho
barren frond of Schizcea pusiUa is marked on its epidermal surface
with a double line of stomata, and these organs extend the entire
length of the frond. The cells which make up the interior of this
delicate fern are cylindrical and vary in size, but their distinctive
characters lie in minute projections or outgrowths from all sides of the
cells, and these projections meet and are articulated with correspond-
ing outgrowth from adjoining cells, so that the cells of Schizcea have
penetrating between them in every direction intercellular spaces and
channels of"remarkahle regularity and beauty, and so characteristic is
this plan of cell-union that the botanist need find no difficulty in
identifying the smallest fragment of the plant. This morphological
peculiarity has not been noticed before.
Microscopic Crystcds, — These have formed the subject of a couple
of papers by Dr. Lea in the * Proceedings of the Philadelphia
Academy of Natural Science.' They are illustrated by a plate. The
minerals examined were garnets, asteriated sapphire, labradorite, a
black feldspar, barito, amethyst, ruby.
NOTES AND MEMOEANDA.
Photograplis of Microscopic Writing. — Tho following account is
given by Colonel Woodward in a letter to Mr. Ingpen, F.R.M.S.,
file Secretary of the Quekett Club, and is published by him in the
Journal of that Society: — "Two samples of Mr. Webb's fine writing
on glass have been received at the Museum since my communica-
tion of August 18th. Each consists of the Lord's Prayer, written
with a diamond, according to the label, in a space ^i?- X rhr ^^ *^
inch. In one of the slides the writing is blackened, and mounted
in Canada balsam ; in the other it is not blackened, and is mounted
dry. I send photographs of both herewith — the one magnified
650 diameters, the other 826. I find Mr. Webb's statement of the
dimensions in which this writing is executed to be substantially
correct, and he has certainly produced a most curious and interesting
object for microscopical study. To compare his work with the
coarser bands of Nobert's plate, I took a photograph of the first seven
bands of the Ninetcen-band plate with 650 diameters, which I also for-
ward herewith. This photograph, and that of the blackened writing,
were taken on the same day with the same objective, Powell and Lealand's
immersion ^th, at the same distance, and under identical conditions.
NOTES AND MEMORANDA. 39
The photograph of the writing was made first, and is the best of a
nnmber of trials. I then inserted the Nobert's plate, not even
changing the cover correction, as I shonld have done to secnre the
best definition, because this would have changed the power. The
picture sent was the result. A comparison of the two pictures will
render any remarks on the relative delicacy of Mr. Webb*s work and
that of Nobert unnecessary. It is evident that the point used by the
former is very much coarser than that used by the latter. The
picture of the Prayer, mounted dry, was taken on a subsequent occa-
sion, and is also the best of a number of trials. It is taken with the
same objective as the other pictures, but with a different cover correc-
tion, and somewhat greater distance. Both the samples sent me by
Mr. Webb are inscribed on such thick covers that they are seen under
a disadvantage, and my highest powers cannot be used on them. The
writing is, however, comparatively so coarse that it can hardly be
considered as a serious test for high powers. Either plate is easily
read with a good half -inch objective and central light. I am curious
to learn how this writing of Mr. Webb's compares with that of
Mr. Peters, described by the late Mr. Farrants in his address as
President of the Eoyal Microscopical Society. He stated that it was
executed at the rate of twenty- two Bibles to the inch. I would
greatly like to see such a specimen, and give it a photographic trial.
Will you kindly read this note to the Club, and present the photo-
graphs? I send also a full set of my last photographic analysis of
Nobert's plate for the Club, and a package for Mr. Webb, which I
beg you to hand him."
A Spherical Diaphragm is thus described in the 'American
Naturalist ' by Mr. F. B. Kimbal. He says : — " Wishing to use tubular
diaphragms with my microscope, and. knowing how clumsy the
ordinary ones are, I set to work, and endeavoured to devise a
substitute. I made a globe 1^ inch in diameter, and drilled holes
through it of the proper grade of sizes, and adjusted it so that
by a spring stop the holes will correspond to the axis of the micro-
scope when the ball is revolved on its axis by a milled head at the
right of the stage. The fittings are so arranged that the dia-
phragm may approach or recede from the stage so as to touch the
slide or be far from it. The globe may be made hollow and the
lower part cut off if the tubular wells are not desired. I think this
form of diaphragm offers many advantages over the ordinary piece of
apparatus."
A New Microscopical Society has been formed at Louisville, Ken-
tucky, XJ.S.A., which meets the first and third Thursdays of each month.
The following are the names of the officers for the ensuing year : —
President^ J. Lawrence Smith; Vice-Presidents, Noble Butler, Chas.
F. Carpenter ; Treasurer, C. T. F. Allen ; Cor. Secretary, E. S. Crosier ;
Secretary, John Williamson ; Eocecutive Committee, Thos. E. Jenkins,
James Knapp, W. T. Beach, E. R. Palmer, R. C. Gwathmey.
( 40 )
COERESPONDENOE.
Who Sbnt Mb. Tollbs' Objectivb to Mb, Cbisp?
To the Editor of the * Monthly Microscopical JournaV
Boston, May 19, 1874.
Mb. Editob,— I find in the May nmnber of this Journal that the
Bev. Mr. Brakey has indulged again in his fayoorite pastime of
describing the impossible, viz, the thoughts and motives of persons
three thousand miles * distant across the Atlantic Ocean. One wonders
if his clairvoyant medium is reliable ?
He writes, ** Mr. Tolles had constructed an objective which he
labelled with the astonishing angle of 180^, and not only constructed
it, but in an evil hour sold it to Mr. Crisp, little thinking that in bo
doing he was selling himself into the hands of the Philistines, to be
shown and made sport of."
The truth is that Mr. Tolles had little to do with the sending of
, that objective to England. It was sent by myself of my own motion,
expecting that some of the Philistines would break their heads against
it in their " sport"; and with a special request that it might be seen by
the most unbelieving Philistine of the Philistines — Mr. Brakey him-
self I Mr. Brakey should be acquainted with the history of the
Philistines, and may take warning by their fate after they aroused
Samson.
I may add that the objective was not purchased by Mr. Crisp
until after he had seen it.
In the future Mr. Brakey should be more cautious of writing what
he cannot possibly know, and then he may not so often be put into
such " ludicrous " positions.
Chables Stoddeb.
Mb. Pillisgheb's Beply to Mb. Bbooke.
To the Editor of the ^Monthly Microscopical Journal,^
8, Lower Hook Gardens, Bbiohtox, June 19, 1874.
Sib, — ^Having been indisposed and away from home, Mr. Charles
Brooke's letter in the April number of this Journal, in reply to mine
in the March number, has only just come to my notice.
Being still far from well, I should willingly allow Mr. Brooke's
letter to pass unnoticed, but for the glaring misrepresentation it con-
tains, which in order to refute, I have once more to ask your favour of
inserting this in the next issue of your valuable Journal, after which
I shall consider, as far as I am concerned, this matter at an end.
Mr. Brooke is astonished at the tone of my letter, and says : " First,
as to nationality : my authority was a juror at Vienna," and regrets
* Mr. Brakey says 2000 miles. His readers may wonder if his knowledge of
optics is any more accurate than his knowledge of geography.
GORBESPONDENOB. 41
•
having erroaeously repeated it. I assure Mr. Brooke that beyond the
questionable propriety of introducing my nationality at all in his
address to the members of the Eoyal Microscopical Society, to whom
I am by no means a stranger, I care not a button whether he believed
that I was a Prussian or a Turk.
With regard to Mr. Brooke's argument that native British optical
goods were wholly unrepresented at the Vienna Exhibition, I think
any schoolboy, if asked, will tell him that goods manufactured in
England, of English materials, by English workmen, under the super-
intendence of an English foreman, are to all intents and purposes
native British products.
As to deep objectives : somehow it pleases Mr. Brooke to remember
my telling him at the Exhibition that I had no higher power than
a ^inch, but I expected some, and he attributes to me extreme care-
lessness for not informing him personally of their subsequent arrival.
I emphatically deny in the most positive terms having had any con-
versation whatsoever with Mr. Brooke on the above subject, except
on the day when my microscopes and objectives were before the jury ;
it was there, I repeat, that he asked me what objectives I had to show,
and when telling him that a series ranging from 4-inch to ^^inch
were on the table, he replied, " I do not care for high powers," and left
it to me to show him what I liked. The day having been dark and
gloomy, and no artifici^ light provided, and convinced that under such
circumstances it would be vain to attempt to show a high power;
moreover, perceiving that the only test the jury had at their disposal
was a coarse angulcUum intermixed with* a specimen or two of
SurireUa gemma, I contented myself with showing the angulatum under
a ^-inch and Kellner's D eye-piece, evidently to the satisfaction of the
three jurors present
Apologizing for trespassing on your valuable space,
I remain, Sir, your obedient servant,
M. PiLLISOHEB.
[Out of a desire to exhibit fair play we have inserted Mr. Pillischer's letter.
Laving removed the more objectiouable passages. At the same time we camiot
but deprecate the tone of his observations. On oommunicating with Mr. Brooke,
he has informed us that his ** recollections ef Vienna are entirely at variance with
those of Mr. Pillischer."— Ed. • M. M. J.']
Immersion v. Dby Objectives.
To the Editor of the ^Monthly Microscopical JournalJ*
1, Bedford Square, June 20, 1874.
Sib, — I have no intention of asking you to devote more of your
valuable space to *' The battle of the Lenses," nor am I at all inclined
to enter into a controversy with the Rev. S. L. Brakey, "On the
Theory of Immersion," but if Mr. Brakey's practical experience of
the immersion system is too limited to enable him to say whether or
not " the immersion lenses do actually possess the superiority of defi-
nition which has lately been ascribed to them," I venture to think
42 OOBBESPONDENOE.
he will do well to visit some of our Metropolitan Medical Schools, or
the Medical Microscopical Society, where I know he would haye
ample opportmiities afforded him of hoth seeing and learning that the
immersion system has much simplified the whole process of obtaining
high-power definition ; and that students are now able to examine for
themselves with a magnification of a thousand diameters, where for^
merly such magnification was scarcely practical, or only known as of
difficult achievement.
Doubtless, if Mr. Brakey could see a fedr comparison made be-
tween immersion objectiyes, as those of Hartnack, or some other
equally well-known maker, and the old or even modem dry objeotiYeB,
he would at once admit that there is not much room for a play of
fancy, ^* as in judging the merits of wine," and he might '' exactly say
how much of the difference is really due to the immersion system,"
both as to practical results obtained, economy of time (probably also
of money), and what is due to a previously settled " conviction."
I have the honour to remain,
Your most obedient servant,
Jabbz Hoqg.
On Immebsiok Lenses.
To t?ie Editor of the * Monthly Microscopical Journal,*
Sib, — As an Immersion of some years' standing I should like to
say a few words on behalf of myself and of certain of my fellow-
objectives.
Your contributor on the Theory of Immersion suggests that we
have received undue praise for our merits, which he says are so in-
definite that he does not care to pledge himself either for or against
us ; he evidently inclines to the belief that the qualities claimed
for us, and on which we pride ourselves, are mainly imaginary.
I think your contributor might well admit that not everyone,
save himself, who has seen and examined, is still imconvinced of our
high qualities of clearness and definition. In this I would ask him to
believe it possible that others besides himself and Mr. Wenham have
given serious attention to the subject of Immersion, and that some
have had quite as much and possibly more varied experience than
either of them in the use of Immersion lenses. I venture to say that
neither of them would presume to be of greater authority on the
Theory of Optics than Sir David Brewster or Amici, both of whom
declared in favour of the Immersion principle. Sir David (then Dr.)
Brewster, indeed, claimed to be the inventor of the first compound
microscope involving the Immersion principle : he describes it in his
* Treatise on New Philosophical Instruments,' published at Edinburgh
in 1813 : while Amici not only spoke in favour of the principle, but
exhibited Immersion lenses made by himself, which he openly stated
would show minute structure that was invisible to the Dry Objective.
Since then, certain Paris opticians and others have given special
attention to the Immersion principle, and have not boon sparing of
CORRESPONDENCE. 43
their criticism of the way in which the Eoglish Jurors passed over their
work at the l^aris International Exhibition. I well remember being
there myself, but because the Test-object I was exhibiting was un-
known to the said Jurors, I was scarcely noticed by thenu I heard
too, that an English optician criticised us with some acrimony in the
' AthensBum *; he went so far as to say that the Test-object, which I was
exhibiting with a magnification of about twelve hundred diameters, was
altogether too coarse to use as a test even for a low power ; — but he
was beside the mark.
Very soon after this, myself and other Immersions were pitted
against some of the then best Dry Objectives in England, and we more
than held our own. The merits of our principle of construction being
thus brought prominently to the notice of English amateurs and opti-
cians, some of the latter were not slow in taking the matter up. Then
came the announcement that Dr. Woodward had made a series of
photographs of Nobert*s new Nineteen-band Test-Plate with Messrs.
Powell and Lealand*s -^th Immersion. This was immediately
followed by copies of the photographs which were exhibited at the
Boyal Microscopical Society. On comparison with the photographs
of the same Test-plate made with some of the finest and most power-
M Dry Objectives it was abundantly evident that the Immersion
principle would now take the lead. Dr. Woodward, with a zeal and
perseverance that were truly admirable, followed up tibese photographs
by others of the Podura, Amphipleura peHuctda, Frusttdia saaxmica,
Bhombotdes, &c., &c., produced by various Immersion lenses ; and
these photographs can be referred to in the collection of the Eoyal
Microscopical Society by any one interested in the subject.
So far as I am concerned personally I shall be glad to have our
merite judged by our works. On the p^ of many of my fellow Im-
mersion lenses and myself I accept Dr. Woodwaid's photographs as
fairly representing our capabilities up to the date of their produc-
tion ; and I venture to believe that in them we show results idiead of
anything that has hitherto been done of a similar kind by any Dry
Objective.
Since that date, and notably as exhibited at the Vienna Exhibition,
improvements have been made in our construction; our younger
brethren have had a fourth combination added ; that is, have a single
front (which the oldest of us have had — aye, even that made by
Dr. Brewster in the beginning of the century ; — I hope Mr. Wenham
will pardon this slur on his claim to be the inventor of single fronts I)
and three doublet achromatics progressively increasing in diameter.
In this construction a zone of peripheral rays is gained and made
available in the formation of the image; — which we believe will be
an advantage in high powers.
The close study of M. Pouillet's experiments to determine the
conditions of the production of difiEraction in the passage of light
through various forms and parts of prisms has led one of the most
learned of the Paris opticians to aim at extending as much as prac-
ticable the introduction of marginal rays into the formation of the
image : the new objectives of four combinations that were shown at the
Vienna Exhibition were practical examples in this direction.
44 * PROOEEDmas of booieties.
In the meantime your contributor has touched on an important
point in stating that our excellence (which he grudgingly says may be
assumed for the present) is partly due to the greater intensity of the
rays of light we transmit. He may now forestall the Paris aoranly
in whose conversation the statement and demonstration of these in-
vestigations has formed an integral element during ten years to my
knowledge, and show experimentally and mathematicidly that the
theory of the production of the minutest ontical images requires the
greatest possible preponderance of peripheral over central rays in the
objective : that the immersion principle greatly assists in the attain-
ment of this condition : that we thus inherently possess greater freedom
from errors of diffraction that necessarily exist in the Dry ObjectiTeB.
At this date, with lenses already made on the Immersion principle
of focal lengths varying from i& to ^th of an inch, we do not Mk
to have our merits assumed ; we point to our series of Dr. Woodward's
photographs as conclusively proving that we possess photometric
powers and other qualities most higMy valued in microscopic defini-
tion, in a degree quite beyond those of Dry Objectives.
I am, Sir, your obedient servant.
Immersion Lens.
PKOCEEDINGS OF SOCIETIES.
KoYAL Microscopical Society.
King's College, June 3, 1874.
Charles Brooke, Esq., F.K.S., President, in the chair.
The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and confirmed.
A list of donations to the Society since the last meeting was read
by the Secretary, and the thanks of the meeting were voted to the
donors.
The President announced that the reading room and library of
the Society would be closed during the mondi of August. He also
regretted to inform them that a paper* which it was expected would
have been read before the meeting that evening, had unfortunately
been lost in transmission through the post, and they were consequently
unable to read it.
The Secretary called attention to a slide exhibited by Mr. Baker,
just received from Herr MoUer, and a very remarkable specimen of
his extraordinary skill. In a square, with sides only -j^^th of an inch,
were 80 clear circular spaces in a dark framework of photography,
and in each space a fine specimen of a diatom, with its name, and the
authority for the name, plainly photographed below it. The whole
series could be well seen at one glance under a l^inch objective, and
the names read, though very small with that power unless a B eye-
piece was employed. Beck's ^th had a considerably larger field than
one of the spaces, and Powell and Lealand's knmersion ^th just took
one in, and showed in one view a name as long as " Triceratium for-^
mosum" the letters being beautifully sharp with that magnification.
PBOOEBDINCIfi OF SOCIETIES. 45
It was stated that Herr Moller prepared slides with 100 as well as
those with 80 specimenSy and was about to introduce similar slides of
Echinoidea, Holothnridsd, &o. With difficult objects like diatoms, the
advantage of having a well-assorted series in one slide with the names
attached was obviously great, and would no doubt be appreciated by
all students as well as by collectors of microscopical curiosities.
Mr. Slack also said tiiat he was asked at the last meeting if he had
seen silica solution in the milky condition described by Mr. Bead.*
Since that meeting he had received from Mr. Bead a specimen, the
whole of which was milky, and the question was whether the particles
could be seen. He had examined some of the fluid with various
powers and under different illuminations, but had not succeeded in
seeing the particles. If a drop or a thick film were put upon a glass
slide and evaporated, the result was a film of the silica with the cracks
in it; but if a thin smear only were put on the glass, then they got
thousands of spherical particles. The deposit was probably a hydrate
of silica, and he thought it possible that particles ought to be seen if
the power employed was good enough. He had sent some of the
solution to Dr. Aiithony, and it appeared that he did see numerous
aprticles with a ^-inch objective by Boss, in a dark room with a beam of
light let in through a hole in a shutter, but he was unable to see
them with a higher power. This reminded him of some remarks by
Professor Tyndall, who had stated that if a little mastic dissolved in
alcohol was added to water in sufficient quantity to produce a sky-blue
effect, the particles could not be seen by any known microscopical
powers ; but if a small drop of it were taken and put into a little
water, then they could be seen. Why was it that they could be seen
in the small quantity, and yet not in the large? He had not yet
material enough to write a paper on the subject, but thought he
might mention it as being one of interest.
The President believed that it was entirely a matter of molecular
aggregation. He remembered that some years ago the late Professor
Faraday gave him a bottle of liquid containing gold in a minute state
of subdivision, so that the fluid appeared of a rose colour. He sub-
mitted it to examination with the highest powers, and illimiinated it
in all ways, but was not able to trace any sign of the particles. It
remained so for many years, and at the present time there was a
quantity of the minute particles of gold at ^e bottom of the bottle as
a sediment; but if shs^en up, they remained merely mechanically
suspended in the liquid, and could be seen as molecules, which settled
again to the bottom in the course of a short time. In dissolving a
substance it might be that its molecules were so widely separated that
they passed beyond each other's sphere of attraction, and that if placed
in a small quantity of fluid they might be brought nearer, and thus
within the sphere of mutual attraction. He believed another instance
was famished by the preparation of chromate of lead which was used
for injections* These injections it was found could only be made
with a solution of the precipitate which was freshly prepared ; if it
were allowed to remain a long time, the molecules became larger, and
the finest capillaries could not any longer be injected with them.
♦ * Monthly Microeoopical Journal,' June, 1874, p. 272.
r
46 PKOCKEDIKaS OF EO0IETIE8.
Mr. Chas. Stewart commanicfttod to tho mooting a short note upon
the poBition of the toiich-corpnsclea in the human akin. His uttontion
had been drawn to the eubjeot hy a paper written by Dr. Thin, and
though he agreed generally with the writer ae to their stmctore, he
could not do so altogether as to their position. Mr. Stewart then
proceeded to osplain by meana of drawings upon the black-board the
atnicturo of the palmar skin of the liand and the plantar skin of the foot,
as distingmahed from that of the other parte of the body, and showed
the peculiar position in the Bkin of the finger of the tonch-corpaeclos.
The resulta of many observations showed that they were invariably
situated in those papillse which were nearest to the farrows of the
skin, and never in those nearest to the sndoriferous ducts. He did
not yet see why thoy should be so placed, but their position there he
had found to Iw invariable.
Mr. Stewart alao called attention to some prepared sections of an
oscidian (Botryllua) which he exhibited in the room. Hia method of
killi ng them was to place them first in a glass of water until they
opened out and were in full action, and then to plnnge them imme-
diately into strong methylated spirit. The change was so sudden
that thoy opened thoir mouths in tho now element, and immediately
died the death of tho drunkard. If weaker spirit were used, tJiey
took some of it in, but inuuodiately closed up, and would have uo
more to do with it. The mounted section exhibited had been killed
in this way, and was stained slightly with hixnatoxylin. Mr. Stowort
then drew upon tho blnck-board the section referred to, and osplatnod
tho Btructuro and action of the various ports as ho proceeded. He
thought that it might be of interest to some persons to know that
many moat beautiful forma of these creatures could be easily prepared
and preserved.
On the motion of the President, votes of thanks to Mr. Stewart for
his interesting communications were unanimously passed.
Dr. Matthews said he should like to hear Mr. Stewart's opinion as
to the Pacinian bodies of the mesentery.
Mr. Stewart thought there woa rcaUy very little rcaemblnnce, but
the preparation was perhaps worth mentioning. He had found a good
way was to cut out a piece of mesentery, put it into Muller's fluid for
three weeks. After that dissect off one half, and place it in a little
weak spirit and water; then traosfor it to absolute alcohol for the
purpose of hardening, and afterwards into a very weak solntion of
hematoxylin to stain it. On taking it out of the staining fluid it
should be put to harden again iu spirit, and afterwards mounted in
balsam in the usual way.
Dr. Braithwaite said he should like to observe that in the first
diagram drawn by Mr. Stewart (that of the section of skin of human
finger), olUiough ho had every respect for Mr. Daiwin, it seemed to
that those little tncti were really placed in just the very best
or the purpose tor which they were intended, and that they
as not to interfere with the sweat-gland appeared to
ptive of design. He thought the mooting was very
Mr. Stewart for the very lucid manner in which he
c very interesting bodies.
PBOGEEDINaS OF SOOIEIIES. 47
Mr. Stewart was hardly prepared to say why the corpuscles were
placed as above described ; they might, for instance, have been placed
upon the top of the ridge and nearest to the surface which first came
in contact with the objects touched. In their actual position the dis-
tance was greater from the surface of contact than it otherwise might
have been. He confessed that he could not quite as yet see why they
were placed in that particular position.
Mr. Slack thought that, as a mechanical question, the top of the
ridge being thicker than the intermediate space, these little bodies
might be really in the position of greatest impression.
Mr. Sanders asked Mr. Stewart how the ascidian was hardened.
Mr. Stewart said that at the time of killing them he put them into
strong methylated spirit 80° over proof, and then afterwards put them
into absolute alcohol.
Dr. Matthews said that in killing these creatures suddenly he had
adopted the plan of introducing the spirit through a tube put down to
the bottom of the vessel, and thus displacing the sea water.
Mr. Stewart had adopted this plan sometimes in killing zoophytes,
adding the spirit very carefully drop by drop ; but with the ascidians
he found that any plans of this sort did not answer so well as putting
them suddenly into strong spirit, and letting them get a good mouthfid
of it before they knew where they were.
Dr. Matthews said part of his plan was to cork the end of the
funnel, and to let the spirit go in with a rush : the difference in the
specific gravity of the two fluids rendered this necessary.
The President wished the Fellows of the Society a pleasant vaca-
tion and many opportunities of increasing their stock of objects ; and
the meeting was then adjourned to October 7th.
Donations to the Library since May 6th, 1874 : —
From
Nature. Weekly The Editor,
Athensemn. Weekly Ditto.
Society of Arts JoumaL Weekly Society.
Sixteenth Report of the East Kent Natural History Society
for 1873 Ditto.
Proceedings of the Bristol Naturalists' Society. New
Series. Vol. I. Part I Ditto.
Journal of the Quekett Club. No. 26 Club.
The President's Address, &c., of West Kent Natural History
Society for 1873 Society.
The Canadian Journal. No. 80 Canadian Institution,
Bulletin de la Societe Botanique de France Society,
The following gentlemen were elected Fellows of the Society : —
Frederick William Hembry, Esq.
Dr. Arthur Jukes Johnson.
William James Lancaster, Esq.
Samuel Petty Leather, Esq.
Dr. William Kadford.
Roland Dunn Smith, Esq.
Walter W. Eeeyes,
J 8sist. 'Secretary,
VOL. XII. E
^^f48 proceedinqs of societies. ^^^^
^P Medical Miciioscopical Society, ■!
The twelfth meeting of Hub Society was held on Friday, Marcli
20th, at the Boyol Westminster Ophthalinic Hospital, Jabez Kogg,
Esq-, Preeidont, in the chair.
I'he minutes of the last meeting having been read awl confirmed,
Mr. George Giles read a paper " On Staining with Aniline Dyea for
Balsam Mounting."
The author of the paper was first led to study this aabjoct from
reading the following passage in Frei's 'Technology'; —
" It is very unfortunate that oleohol soon extracts tho colour [of
aniline-red], so that it is impossible to preserve tho specimen in
Canada balsam."
To obviate this inconvonienoo lo tried a 2 per cent, solution of
aniline in spirit, and then found that by staining sections that had
been in spirit with this solution for three or four minutes, rinsing in
spirit and placing subsequently in oil of cloves, the colour was per-
fectly preserved when the specimen was mountad in Canada balsam.
Oil of cloves was preferable to turpentine, the latter at times pre-
cipitating the colouring matter ; but should this occur, brushing with
a camel's hair pencil would removo tho deposit. Mr. Giles claimed
three advantages for this method : 1st, Its cleanliness ; 2ad, That one
has the most perfect control over the depth of colour obtained by re-
gulating the time of the subsequent washing in spirit ; 3rd, That the '
colour is less trying to the eyes than that of carmine. Its selective ,i
power was greater than that of Frei's aqueous solution of aniline. Tho '
nerve fibres of the spinal cord, as well aa the nuclei of cells, being
vividly brought oirt.
The Secretary then read a paper by Mr. E. 0. Eabor— who was
unavoidably absent — upon " Sta.ining with Pioro - Carminato of
Ammonia."
PnEa-AHiTiON OF Pioro-Cabminb.
Pure Cftrmine 1 grme. U
Liq. AmmouiiB 4 c. ceutrea. I
Water 200 grmes. |
Uiz ; and then add H
F[cric Hoiil 5 grmea.
Agitato from tune to time dnriag two days : allow riaiduQ to settio ; decant nnd
evapoiBto decnnted liquor at the temperature of the air ; rodiBsolTe the crjBlala in
"■ iter (strength, 2 p. c.) ; and filter if Deceaaary.
In tho discussion that followed, —
Dr. Matthews remarked that some tissues attract rod rather than
purple colours : thus, nuclei generally were more easily stained by tho
former. Judson's dyes he had found useful. Referred to Frei's
methods of employing picro-carmine ; had obtained good results from
first staining in carmine, and subsequently in a solution of picric acid.
He had found Stevens' writing fluid a ready and useful stain for
sections.
Mr. White had found a section of epithelioma, stained with log-
PBOOEBDINGS OF SOCIETIES. 49
wood, and then with pioric acid, showed the yellow centres of the
<< birds' nests/' described by Mr. Baber, while the surrounding parts
were tinted by the hsematoxylin. Had only used carmine and picrio
acid as separate solutions, but by this means had seen yellow channels
of communication from one '^ bird's nest " to another.
Mr. Eesteven asked if aniline dyes were permanent.
Mr. Atkinson found that crystallized magenta, when first used for
staining sections, became blue, and then after a time disappeared;
but mounting in ^ per cent, of corrosive sublimate prevented this.
Mr. Schafer had given up carmine because of its too brilliant
colour, and always used logwood, which he found selective in pro-
perty. Thought osmic acid better than picro-carmine for nerve
tissues ; and remarked that Dr. Sharpey had long ago used magenta
for staming the axis cylinders of nerves.
Mr. Miller had found a solution of carmine and a 4 per cent,
solution of picric, and in alcohol and water especially, good for spleen
and unstriped muscular fibres. He preferred carmine to logwood.
Mr. Groves, except in the case of nerve structures, preferred
logwood to carmine. The double staining of logwood and gold
chloride was good for nerves and nuclei, and especially, for such
structures as firog's bladder.
Mr. Golding Bird mentioned Dr. Moxon's use of Stevens* writing
fluid for staining nerve structures, and mentioned a fact communi-
cated to him by Dr. Malassez of Paris, that aniline dissolved in spirit
was especially good for studying ossification of cartilage ; for it stained
the cartilage, but not the newly-formed bone ; while an aqueous solu-
tion of aniline stained the cavaliculi and not the bone substance, but
was not permanent like the alcoholic solution.
The President, in proposing a vote of thanks to the authors of the
papers, and which was duly accorded, remarked that more investiga-
tion was required on the subject of staining fluids, and recommended
it as an object of special study, that would certainly be productive of
useful results.
Mr. W. B. Eesteven then read a paper upon " Miliary Sclerosis."
The subject of this paper was a form of grey degeneration occurring
in the brain and spinal cord, and designated by Drs. Batty, Tuke, and
Butherford, " Miliary Sclerosis." The author showed examples of this
lesion by sections and drawings. The change, he stated, is associated
with a wide range of diseases of the nervous centres. He enumerated
as many as twenty morbid conditions in which he had met with the
so-called miliary sclerosis. The essential characters of this lesion
Mr. Kesteven showed to consist in the absence, in circumscribed
patches of the normal nerve tissue, and its replacement by an altered
and degenerate state of the neuroglia. The spots vary in size from
3^th inch to 3^|fth inch in diameter. Their physical characters
were described in detail, and the author then proceeded to discuss the
question of how this change was connected with previous symptoms,
and whether it is possible that they could be the result of mere post-
mortem changes. These questions, he submitted, were as yet im-
answered. Judging from the great diversity of pathological con«
E 2
VKOczEDisas ov soonmzs.
in which this dogeneration is met with, he deemed the solution
S the prohlom impoBsiblo with our present amount of knowledge in
lenro-pathology.
Dr. Payne asked whether Mr. Kosteven had found miliaiy Bcle-
1818 in a spinal cord or brain, otherwise quite healthy, and discusBed
the question a8 to whether the changes described might not bo tho
(X)mmoncemeut of secondary degenerations of nerves, as is seen to
result from inactivity of a nerve arising from any caueo ; or of the
wasting of certain nerve fibres, that might go on to worse changes,
Mr. Schafer toot exception to tho name, aa giving the idea of
fibrous or cecatrioial tissue, whereas what had been described ^as
rather colloid in nature ; for at times it could be stained intensely.
He had seen " miliary sclerosis " in the brain of a supposed healthy
dog, that had boon hardonod in chromic acid ; and from tiiis he con-
cluded that the alcohol used to preparo the specimens could not bo
the causa of the " sclerosis," as had been alleged, seeing that ho had
nsod none. Aa the disease followed no special tracts, he considered
St could not b© simply degeneration of nerve fibres.
■ Dr, Matthews asked wJieflier coiocident disease — as atheroma — of
ft the vessels of the brain had boon noticed.
Tho President had seen miliary sclerosis accompanied by calca-
reous change in the vessels, and in a case where death resulted &om
cerebral hemorrhage ; also in preparations of brain made by Dr. Orisp
from the lower animals, and hardened in chromic acid.
Mr. Keateven, in reply, considered the term " Bclerosia " more
applicable to the cases where the disease occurs en pJaqueg. There
was nothing of fibrous nature in the condition he had been describing ;
still, Dr, Tidce bad given the name originally. He did not consider
the alteration colloid, though at first sight resembling it ; nor hod ho
noticed the change in oonneotioa with atheromatous vessels, though at
times the bodies described were calcareous and gritty {" brain sand ").
Agreed with Mr. Schiifer in not considering the condition as one of
neive fibre degeneration, and was in fact still seeking an explanation.
With a vote of thanks to Mr. Keateven, by the President, tho
election of new members, and an announcement of a gift of slides to
the Society's cabinet, the proceedings terminated.
The principal specimens exhibited under microscopes during the
■ tokening were in illustration of tho papers read.
At the meeting of this Society, on April 18th, Jabez Hogg,
Esq., President, in the chair, Dr, Greenfield rend a paper upon
" Diphtheria."
In this paper, which was founded upon the microscopical exami-
nation of specimens from five cases of diphtheria, which was illu^
trated by preparations, the author, in remarking upon the obscurity
and doubt which still seemed to exist upon the origin and structure of
the diphtheritic false membrane, stated his belief that this aroso in
part from the confusion in the nomenclature in common use, eajw-
cioUy the fact that " croupous" and " diphtheritic" were terms used
in different senses, clinically and histologically.
An examination of his cases showed in all, in the larynx and
PBOOEEDINQS OF SOOIBTIE& 51
irachea the mucous membrane and usually the deeper tissues in a
state of more or less intense inflammation of ordinary character;
whilst the false membrane consisted for the most part of a stratified
network of a substance giving the reactions of fibrin, in the meshes
of which were contained altered epithelial cells and corpuscles.
The amount of adhesion to the mucous membrane was various,
but in no case did the exudation actually pass into its substance;
although in some cases it appeared adherent by fibrinous bands to the
papill».
After describing the views of Wagner and of other German patho-
logists, the author stated his belief that the false membrane consisted
in part of a catarrhal process, with modifications in the epithelium ;
and in part of a true fibrinous exudation. These views were sup-
ported by the comparative examination of specimens taken from cases
in various stages.
In the pharynx the inflammatory process was stated to extend
much deeper than in the trachea, and to be accompanied by a more
rapid destruction of tissue. The false membrane was believed to
consist in a larger measure of altered cells.
The question of the occurrence and importance of fungous growth
in the mucous membrane was then discussed, and the author showed
specimens from the pharynx containing numbers of minute fungous
spores and a delicate mycelium deeply penetrating the inflamed
mucous membrane. He had not, however, been able to find a similar
appearance in the larynx and trachea of the same or other cases ; and
he considered it therefore still an open question how far the fungus
was an accidental occurrence and what was its relation to the disease.
The President, after proposing a vote of thanks to the author
of the paper, stated his belief that fungous growths might be always
found in the mucous membranes in certain low states of health, and
considered a fungus in diphtheria an accidental rather than an essential
occurrence. He could not agree with Dr. Oscar Giacchi, who held that
the disease was owing to the presence of a fungus. He had examined
more than one case of diphtheritic conjunctivitis, in which disease the
exudation forms very rapidly, but had never found any fungus. The
position of a vegetable parasite upon the body had much to do with
its influence upon the disease it accompanied, or of which it was the
cause. Hence some importance might be attached to the specimen
shown, where the fungus was deep in the inflamed mucous membrane.
Dr. Bruce remarked that croup is generally defined as owing to a
false membrane, on the removal of which healthy mucous membrane
is left ; this, however, the paper would disprove, since Dr. Greenfield
had shown that not only the mucous and submucous tissues were at
times reached in croup, but that even the tracheal rings might be in
part destroyed. He had also noticed the small cavities or vacuoles
described in the false membranes, and thought them owing to the
exudation from the ducts of mucous glands; indeed, these spaces at
times were filled with exudation cells. The mucous epithelium is not
necessarily destroyed by the false membrane; it may sometimes be
seen covered by the latter. Exudation of fibrin would fully account
I
I
02 PBOCEEDINaS or SOdBItBS.
A>T the jalse membrane upoa the mncoua membraue, witliout inter-
foring with the epithelium covering the Intter, tli rough nhioh wandering
cells might easily pass : aud a precedent for fibrinous exudation on a
macoaa sni'faco might be found in ctonpouB pueumonia.
Mr.-Needhftm thought tliat as pus could come from a serous, Sbriu
might from a mucong memhraue.
Dr. Couplond thought the different layers iu the false membrane
ehowed a mixed origin ; thus the surface of it was more coarsely
fibrillated thaD the deeper parts, which were much finer, as though
there had been first a catarih, destroying the epithelium, and then
fibrinous exudation last of all.
Mr. Stowers asked for a Terificatiou of tho observation made, that
tho histological appearances in the angina form of scarlatiEa and in a
blistered surface were those of diphtheria.
Mr. Miller referred to Bindfioisch's remark that the exudation in
pharyngeal afiections was more cellular and less fihrillated than in
laryngeal ; as well as to the existence of apertures in the basement
noemhrane of the affected parts.
The -President thought the non-bomogeneity of the false membrane
might be explained by the different agea of its component parts, and
suggested that the fungus found in throat diphtheria might owe ita
presence to the open-mouthed mode of respiration in diphtheritic
patients. In the two cases of diphtheritic conjunctivitis already
mentioned, the eyes had been kept bandaged, and, as stated, no fungus
had beeiL found.
Dr. Greenfield, in reply, quoted German authority for the constant
presence of fungus in diphtheria ; and since fungi in the kidney had
also been described, they might serve to explain the renal complica-
tion so constantly present. The only way to get at a life history of a
felso membrane was to examine in tlie same subject the patches in all
etages of growth. He had done this, hut hod only found at first a
catarrhal state, and later on pus - globules and fibrillation on the
deeper sur&ce of the membrane. The fibrinous exudation in pneu-
monia was no precedent for the sanne process in diphtheria, since th^
air-cells might bo proved, and were by some thought to he, part of
the lymphatic system. Epithelium in place would not allow fibrin to
exude; but once destroy the former, and then exudation was easy.
Two theories existed with regard to the part played by fungi in
diphtheria ; one, that they were its cause, tho other only the cause of
the rapid disintegration of the membrane : it was a subject still svb
Judice.
Numerous specimens in illuEtration of Dr. Greenfield's paper wero
exhibited, as well as others of now growths, and of the glandular
stomach of the crow,
Friday, May 15, 1874,— Jabez Hogg, Esq., President, in the chair.
Mollutcum fibrosK'm {? Chelmd). — Dr? Prif chard mentioned the casa
of a negro, who for twenty years h»d been subject to a growth, ori-
ginating behind one ear, and gradufllly extending over nearly all the
body. Aft«r death, a portion of th& skin, with growth, was forwarded
to lii'm (&om America) as illustrating " Cheloid simulating mollnscum
) OF BOCTDTIES. 53
" Bbrosum." Mioroscopically the cutifi vera waa found hypertrop5iied ;
Iierc and there maBsea of cells butween tho fibres of the areolar tiBsue.
Epidermis much thickened — Lair-fullicles normal. FapillEB had
grown irregularly and sidowaya, and not vertically na normal. Ho
considered it simply a case of mollnecum fibroauin, not of Cheloid.
EngraringB of the patient, with specimens of the disease, were exhi-
bited. The President inquired if any fungus had been noticed ; it
was by some bolievcd to exist in moUuscum. Mi. Needham thought
this condition of the pnpillte normal in the negro. Dr. Pritchard, in
reply, had observed ao fungus.
Perivaecular Spaces in the Brain. — Mr. Kesteven read a paper on this
Hnbject, illustrated by drawings and specimens. These spnces had been
considered normal structures, intended to relieve intracranial blood
pressure ; but Mr. Kestoven had never seen them in a really healthy
brain : bad often noticed them asaooiated with chronic cerebral
mischief, and hence concluded they were owing to absorption of
brain substance by the irregular circulation that goes on in chronic
disease : the vessels being at one time full, at another nearly empty.
Thougb the mode of preparation in chromic acid might render these
spaces more evident by the shrinking of the blood-vessel, he did not
think it sufficient to account entirely for them. He could find in the
perivascular spaces no resemblance to normal lymphatic structure,
whUe Dr. Batty Tuke had now abandoned tho idea that they denoted
a healtby condition of brain. Dr. Pritchard considered them entirely
owing to the mode of preparntion in chromic acid ; he had never found
them in sections made by freezing the brain. Mr. Needham argued
tboir belonging to the lymphatic system, tbongh not strictly speaking
" lymphatics." The President explained them in some cases by the
giving way of the capillaries around which tliey were found : he had
Been the brain aubatonce stained with hoeniatin io their vicinity ;
hence an explanation, perhaps, for sume of the anomalous convolaions
of childhood : thought proof was wanting of tbeir connection with
the lymphatic system. Mr. Tirrard asked if, in injected brains, these
spaces were seen, or were obliterated by tho distension of the vessel.
£1 reply, Mr. Golding Bird stated that he bad never seen tbem in
injected specimens. Mr, Groves asked if Mr. Eestoven bad ever
examined the spaces by staining witb nitrate of silver. Mr. Kesteven,
quoting Dr. Batty Tuke, stated that the spaces had boon found in the
lower animals (e. g. cats) after Btrtvngulation ; and that, thougb the
vessels thus remained full, a space could be seen beyond. Ue had
never seen anything to warrant the supjioeition that they were owing
to hemorrhage. He knew of no anatomist having tracod these spaces
into lymphatics ; they had beon injected by Hia by the puncture
method.
Multiple Cystic Tumour of Heart. — A specimen of this, exhibited
by Mr. Needham, seemed to show, from the excess of epithelium
in the mammary tubules, and tlie epithelial infiltratiou of but*
rounding parts, at once a cystic, an adenomatous, and cancerous nature.
Mr. Needham founded bis idea of cancer on the arrangement, and not
a the intrinsic form of the oells composing it.
FBO0BEDIKO8 OP BOOIKFIBe.
Beiohton and Sdssex Natukal History Society.
April 23Td. — Microscopical Hooting. Mr. HuBclwood, Preeident,
in the chair,
Tho receipt of eleven micro-photographs, by Dr. Hallifas, for the
Society's album, was announced, and a vote of thanks given to Dr.
HaUifax for tho same.
Mr. Wonfor on " Plant CryatalB.'"
In moat of the mannals on botany or tho miuroBOOpe, certain crys-
talliuG bodies found within the cells -of plants were designated by the
name Bapk'idea, or needle-shaped bodies, a term inapplicable to some,
becanse they were not needle-ehaped, and on the whole misloading,
beuiLuao in the lists of plants generally given as containing thorn, it
would seem as though their appearance was an accidental cironin-
stance in the economy of tho plant, instead of a constant quiuitity, not
confined to one period of the plant's growth, but fonnd in all stages
of its existcnco.
The first to rednce to aomothlng like order and to indicate tbo
value of plant crystals in determining the differences between plants
of otherwise cloeely-alUed families was Professor G, Gulliver, by
whom they had been arranged into the three groups — BajiAides,
Sphreraphides and Crystal Pritias.
Rapkides were transparent colotirless crystals, needle-shaped,
and tapering to a fine point at each end, loosely connecteil in bundles
of twenty or more in oval or oblong cells of slightly latter dimen-
sions than thcmsclTea. The slightest pressure on the tissues of a
portion of a plant, when under exotnination, caused them to escape
from their cells. Examples could easily be obtained either by
making thin aections or simply tearing with needles a portion of
the tisanes of any member of the balsams, woodruffs, evening prim-
rose, arum, orchis, and some of tho iris family.
Spkaraphideg were moro or less rounded, often spherical bodies,
mado up of white or opaqno crystals or cryatalline matter. In some
tho ends of tho component crystals projected and gave them a star-shaped
appearance. They were much smaller than their cells, and, in some
casea, were thickly studded throughout the cellular tissue. This was
tho case with many of tho cactus family, some of which, when aged,
had their tissues so filled with them, as to render the plants very
brittle. It was mentioned that plants of C. senilit, reported over a
thousand years old, when sent to Kew Gardens, had to be packed in
cotton as carefully as if they were delicate glass or jewellery. The
&uit of the prickly pear was full of sphtBrapkidee, esamplea of which
were easily seen in tho crane'a -bills, elni, beet, spinach, or violets.
Crystnl prisms were found either singly, or two, three, or, at moat,
four together, in combination in tho same cell. Wliilo under a low
power rapliide* did not present angles or £ices, crystal prisms pre-
sented both ; instoad, too, of tapering to a point at both ends, they
were wedge-shaped or angular. Some were tlireo or four sided, while
othoTH wore oetuhedrons. They woro larger than raphideg, and were
nut, as a rule, easily separated from the tissues in which they v
PBOOEEDmaS OF SOCIETIES. 55
seated. Examples might be found in the green-pea shell, the garlic,
green fig stem, gladiolus, &c., and very abundantly in the soap tree of
South America, used in Peru as a substitute for soap in the cleansing
wool or hair, or in washing.
Chemically, plant crystals were chiefly composed of oxalates of
lime and magnesia, or phosphate of lime.
Professor Gulliver's researches showed that so persistent were
raphides in certain families of plants, and so absent in others, that it
was possible to differentiate, at all stages of their growth, between
plants otherwise apparently allied. Thus OnagracecB and GalliacecB
abounded in raphides, while none of their near neighbours contained
them. So likewise the red berries of black bryony and cuckoo-pint
could be distinguished from those of red bryony and guelder-rose, by
the presence in the first two and the absence in the last two of
raphides.
To the botanical student characters such as those indicated were
of very great value, and to the microscopist a wide field of research
was opened, for not only would he find plants containing one or other
of the plant crystals described, but great difierences in their shape
and size ; many of them, too, under polarized light were very beau-
tiful; while a lesson was to be learnt by all, that they were not
accidents of decay or disease, but part of the economy of life in the
plants in which they were found.
After a discussion, in which Drs. Hallifax, Corfe, the President,
Mr. Glaisyer, and others took part, Mr. Henry Lee, who had been
recently elected an honorary member, presented for distribution spe-
cimens of the skin of the rough-hound, and explained the mode of
mounting and also of separating the spine-like scales, by dissolving
away the animal matter by means of liquor potasses ; by this method
the spines with their socket attachments were well shown. Ho
hoped in time to bring down from the aquarium skins of all the dog-
fishes, so that the members might each Lave a perfect series in their
cabinets.
A vote of thanks was given to Mr. Lee.
EEADiNa Microscopical Society.*
March 3. — Mr. Tatem exhibited an ant-like insect, from Ceylon,
belonging to the order Heterogyna, sub-order Mutilla, insects of solitary
habits, each species being composed of winged males and apterous
females ; the latter always armed with a powerful sting. The insertion
of the antennsB near the mouth would indicate the affinity of the speci-
men with the genera Dorylus and Lahidus, Indian, African, and South
American insects, found in dry sandy districts, running with great
speed and actively predaceous. The large eyes, long legs, and stout
anterior tarsi, with claws developed into powerful chehe, show epiinent
fitness for the pursuit and apprehension of living insect prey, so far
agreeing with the genera referred to. There are, however, some points
* Roport furuisbotl by Mr. B. J. Austin.
I
I
L
56 PBOOEEDDJGS OF BOCIETIES.
of divergence wliicli render it queetiouablo wLotlicr the Bpecimen can
be correctij referred to either ; e. g. tho head is not BmaU, nor ie the
abdomen ejlindric.
The Bpecimen is to be Bnbmltted to competent authority to
determine whether it may not be generically or epecifically new.
Captain Lang exhibited an arranged elide of Stamimeis acuta is
filaments and both aepecta, from a gathering near Warwick (sent by
Mr. Staunton) ; also diatoms from a gathering by Captain Perry, on
the west coast of South America, the most noteworthy being what
Beemed a perfectly now epocios of Auliscaa, and a group of Aiilaa>discua
formosae ; one buing evidently a newly-formed inner valve of a dividing
frustule. He alBo showed 6 and 8-rayed Bpeoimene of Aulacodiscaa
Killottii.
Majiqatb Mickoscopical Clob.*
The members of the Margate MieroBcopical Cluh gave their first
public soiree at the Koyal Asaembly Eooms on Thnreday, March 26th.
Owing to Uluess Prof. Gnlliver waB unable to attend and give his
lecture "On Eaphides and other Plant CrystalB." However, Col.
Cos, of the East Kent Natnral History Society, discoursed on
" Agates," and explained the gnthcring and polishing of his beau-
tiful collection of British agates, many of wJiich, although very
valuable, were found on Hastings and Dover beaches, being prin-
cipally derived from the lower chalk formation,
Mr. Henry Lee detailed the observations made at the Brighton
Aquarium upon the "Ova of the Dog-Fish," including the habits
of the fiah, the mode of deposition of eggs, duration of hatching, and
the nature of the studies now being undertaken by Prof. Huxley and
Dr. Kitchen Parker on the nervous development and skull formation.
The speciality of the evening was the display of living marine
organisms, which were very Bueeessfully exhibited, and, whilst they
charmed and fascinated the eye, nothing could exceed the interest
taken by all the large company present in watching the beautiful
movements and ciliary action of life.
It is by no means an easy task to prepare and exhibit to advantage
a living object for a soirfie, but the following were sncceesfully dis-
played ; — Mombranipora, Bowcrbanlda, Pedecejlina, barnacles, nume-
rous egga of annelids, doris spawn, young whelks and periwinkles
I the point of hatching, fish and crab spawn, entomostraca, small
The Margate Club has only been established three years, and
nnmbers forty members.
Its principal aim is to study the marine life of the Thanet coast,
and, whilst it entertains its folio w-rosid cuts with successful gatherings
like the present, it also trains men to observe and be acquainted with
the various forms of marine life, so that, if the proposed aquarium,
designed upon the Brighton scale (although less oraate in appearance),
and by the same engineers, be successfully established, few clubs can
be more favourably situated for valuable and scientific observation,
• Report fumialicd by Mi. F. B. Kyngdon, Hon, Sac
PROOERDINaS OF SOCIETIES. 67
QUBKETT MiOROSCOPIOAL ClUB.
April 24tli. — Ordinary Meeting. Dr. Eobert Braithwaite, F.L.S.,
President, in the chair.
After the formal business was concluded, a paper by Mr. G. J.
Burch, " How to make Thin Covering-glass," was read.
The mode adopted was to seal up the end of a glass tube of about
^-inch bore with tiie blowpipe, soften it in the flame, then remove it,
and blow through it as strongly as possible, so as to form a large
and very thin bubble ; this was to be broken and the pieces cut to
shape with a writing diamond. If required flat, a piece could be
placed on a perfectly flat piece of platinum foil, and depressed for a
moment into the Bunsen flame. In this way Mr. Burch produced
glass TTTHF^^ ^^ ^^ ^^^ ^ thickness.
Mr. Ingpen read a paper " On a False-light Excluder for Micro-
scopical Objectives." This consisted of a cap, having a perforation
a little larger than the field of view of the objective ; when this was
slipped on close up to the front lens, it diminished the angle of aper-
ture ; but when brought into contact with the covering glass, it allowed
the ^1 angle to be used ; while in either case no rays but '< image-
forming rays" were admitted, and the milkiness caused by stray light
was completely got rid of. This method occurred to Mr. Ingpen upon
reading Mr. Wenham's letter in the March number of the ' Monthly
Microscopical Journal,' describing his mode of measuring the true
angle of a Tolles' ^th objective.
A paper by Mr. James FuUagar, " On the Development of Hydra
vulgaris from Ova," was read, and illustrated with several beautifully
executed drawings of Hydra in its various stages. Hydra wlgaria
differed in several respects from Hydra tnridis ; the egg being larger,
and studded with what appeared to be short spines, and surrounded
with a gelatinous envelope, which it retained to the time of hatching.
The development of a single ovum was traced from the time of its
extrusion. After about flfty-flve days a protuberance appeared, a
slight rupture was seen in the shell, and a portion of the Hydra
slowly emerged. In about two hours rudiments of tentacles appeared
as rounded lumps, and in twelve hours the Hydra was fully developed,
with seven tentacles, being however still attached to the inside of the
shell by the suctorial disk at the posterior end of the body. After a
time, varying from twelve to sixty hours, the Hydra finally quitted
^0 ogg, and fixed itself to the weed or the side of the aquarium.
The growth of the Hydra was very slow, and it could not be observed
to feed. After a month, some small entomostraca were put into the
cell, which were seized, but not absorbed ; these, however, died from
the effects of the stinging power of the tentacles. The ova were not
easily found, after extrusion, their gelatinous envelope speedily be-
coming covered with extraneous particles. After the extrusion of the
ovum, the parent Hydra gradually diminished, and in about twenty-
one days the whole body dissolved. The sperm cells continued to dis-
charge spermatozoa into the water for some days after the separation
of the ovum. The ovisac and sperm cells were generally found on the
FBOO^DISOB OF BOOIETIEB.
same Hydra, but sometimes there wore sperm colls only, wlien the whole
body was seen, to be qtudtled with them. The dirunoter of tho ovum was
abont j^th of an inch, that of Hifdrn viridiis aboat ^tb. Hydra vulgaria
is reprodnced &om ova in tho aotnmn. Hydra viridig in tbe spring.
Mr. ^gpen exbibitod and described an aehromatio bull's-eye con-
donser, forinod out of the objectives of a binocular opora-glasa. One
of the lenses was reversed in its coll, and the two screwed into the
opposite ends of a short piece of tube, bo that tho flat sido of one
nearly touched tho convex eido of the other. The light thrown by
this condenser was very pure, and those who possessed a biuocnlttr
opera or fiold-glaes conld construct one at a small expense, while the
lenses wore not spoilt for their original purpose.
Tbe President announced that at tho next moeting lie would read
the fifth of his series of papers " On tho Histology of Plants."
Tho mooting concluded witli the naiial conversazione, at which
several interesting objects were exhibited.
May 22. — Dr. Robert Braithwaito, F.L.S., President, in tho
Twonty-throe mombere were duly elected.
The death was annonnced of Mr. T. W. Burr, F.B.A.S., F.R.M.8.,
an old and valued member and a Vico-Presidont of the club.
Dr. George Hoggan read » pajier " On a New Section-cntting
Machine." This instrument differed in many respects from any of
those in ordinary use, and was designed by him for cutting both bard
and soft substances. Two of these instruments were exSibitedj and
minntely described, A stout plate of brass, sliding in a double dove-
tailed groove, waa moved backwards and forwards by a micrometer
screw. TJpou this plate tho substance to be cnt, if hard, was fixed by
one or more clamps ; if soft, it was inserted in a cub© of carrot, cat to
fit a brass trongh, which conld be similarly clamped to the plate or
" table," so as to move with it. Hard substanceB were cnt with a very
fine-toothed spring saw, which was guided between strong supports, so
as to be capable of cutting a series of perfectly parallel sections. In
one of the instruments shown, there were three of such sections from
a tooth, cut very nearly through, but BtUl attached to the rest, from
which many more sections could be made. These sections were
ready for mounting, the saw mEtrks being scarcely, if at all visible.
Stress was laid upon using the saw with the teeth reversed, so as to
cut while pulling, and not while pushing it. Soft substances, after
being imbedded in the cube of carrot, and wedged up, if required,
with pieces of elder-pitb, were fixed to the plate by means of the
trough, and the knife or razor was guided by two parallel bars of
steel, instead of sliding over a plate, by which method tho edge was
less liable to injury, and sections of largo masses of nnequal con-
sistence could be cut with great facility, from the possibility of
making a number of short cuts, instead of single sweeps only. The
blade of the knife was straight, tho under side fiat, and the upper side
deeply hollowed, so as to contain enongh fluid to float off the section
OB soon as it was cut. The moclilne was rather complicated, but this
was necessory, from the desire that success should depend as little as
possible upon the skill of the operator.
The thanka of the meeting were nnaiiiinonBly voted to Dr. Hoggan,
and a Bhort diBcosBion followed. A number of beautiful Bpecimens,
both of hard and soft Bubstances, cut by the machine, were exhibited,
and much interest was shown in them.
A paper by Dr. Braithwaite, " On the Histology of Plants," being
the fifth of a series written for the club, was taken as read ; and it
was annonnoed that the demonstration of it, by the eihibition of a
Dumber of mioroscopioal preparations of pith, bark, cuticle, &c., would
take plaoe at the next conversational meeting, on the 12th of Juno.
AnnonucementB of meetings, excursions, &o., were made, uid the
meeting oontdnded with the usual conversazione.
MioBosoopicAL Section of the Aoadeux of Katubal Sciences
OF pHUiADELPHIA.
Jannory 6, 1874. — Director W. S. W. Roschenberger, M.D., in the
ohair. — Mr. Holman's " siphon slide " for the microscope was exhibited
in operation by Dr. Joseph G. Eichardson, who remarked that the
apparatus was composed essentially of a strip of plate glass, of the
ordinary length and width (namely, three inches long by one inch
wide), but donble the nsual thickness, in the upper snrface of which
had been ground a shallow groove, elliptical in both its transverse and
longitudinal section, and deeper toward one extremity. The excava-
tion was so arranged as to receive a small fish, tadpole, or triton, and
retain it without, on the one hand, injury from undue pressure, bnt
without, on the other, permitting any troublcBOmo gymnastics beneath
the thin glass cover, which, when applied, formed tho ceiling of the cell.
The great improvement of this slide consisted, however, in the imbed-
ding of a small metallic tnbe (communicating with each extremity of
the groove), in either end of the slide, and the adaptation to these two
tnbes of pieces of slender caoutchouc pipe, about eighteen inches in
length, one of these being intended for the entrance and the other for
the exit of any fluid, cold or hot, which it might be desirable to employ.
r
I
60 PROOEEDIMaB OF 80CIETIEa
For cxaminntioa of larger reptiles, aud for demonstTatioDB with the
gaB toicruscope, a glide four isclies loug, with two oval concavities, and
a narrow grooTe more deeply cut for the body of the creature, as
shown in the figure, has been devised. With such an apparatus,
through which a current of ice-water con bo passed, the injurious
heating effect which ordinarily attends the use of calcium or clectrio
light to illnminate living specim^is is entirely counteracted.
When in use it is only necessary to place the animal (in the case
before us a little triton) with some water in the groove of the slide,
cover him with a ebcct of thin glass, inunerse the end of one of the
caoutchouc tubes in a jar of water, and then, applying the mouth to
the extremity of the other rubber pipe, make sufficient suction to set
up a flow of the liquid through the apparatiu. The stream of fluid
(of course bathing the animal in the cell during its passage) can readily
be kept np as in any other sipboa for hours or days, and its rapidity
exactly regulated by graduated pressure upon the entrance pii>e, bo
that in thia way a triton may be oxaminod continuously {as stated by
Dr. J. Gibbons Hunt, who had kindly furnished and prepared the slide
and specimen) for a whole week without material injury.
Among the great advantages of this very ingenious contrivance
may ho enumerated, — first, its security— the animal being prevented
from escaping, and the joints of the apparatus being kejit tightly closed
by the pressure of the atmosphere ; second, its portability, — the whole
preparation, for example, one for showing the circulation of the blood,
being made at home,— as was done in this instance, — carried to h lec-
ture'room in the pocket, and exhibited to an audience hours after-
wards; and third, its convenience, — this arrangement permitting the
removal of the slide at any time from the microscope stage, to make
way for other experiments, and its instant readjustment when desired.
Dr. Eichardson invited the attontion of members to the remarkably
clear and distinct view of the circulation displayed by tlie aid of this
apparatus in the caudal extremity of a triton, beneath one of the micro- -
Bcopea upon the table, and pointed out as especially worthy of note
the marked prominence of nuclei in epithelial cells covering a portion
of the tail, where blood-stasis had occurred, in consequence of a minute
puncture, purposely made before incarcerating the reptile ; snggesting
that this change was doubtless the visible exponent of that patholo-
gical alteration of the circumjacent cellular elements, which conatitntes
such an important, although as yet but imperfectly understood, iactor
in the inflammatory process.
The Lottisville MiCEOscoPiciL SocmTY.
The Louisville Microscopical Society was organized on Thursday,
January 15, 1874. The following are the ofiiccrs for the ensuing
year : — FTesident, Prof. J. Lawance Smith ; Vice-PresidenU, Noble
Butler, Dr. C. F. Carpenter ; Treasurer, C. J. F. Allen ; Secretary,
John Williamson ; Corresponding Secretary, Dr. E. S. Crosier ; Exeat'
tive Commiliee, K. C. Gwathmey, Dr. E. E. Palmer, Dr. James Knapp,
W. F. Beach, D. T. E. Jonkins.
ThfiMunOilyMicroscopical Journal . Au§ . 1. 1874'
PI .LXK.
^._MV. crd, not df?
W. West Ad irrqo.
Ne
r\
THE
MONTHLY MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL.
AUGUST 1, 1874.
I. — The Presence of BalbianCs Nucleus in the Ovum of
Osseous Fishes, By Dr. Van Bambeke.
We know that according to M. Balbiani the ovule is not so simple a
structure as is generally believed ;* by a series of researches extended
over nearly every class of animals the distinguished French em-
•bryologist is assured that besides the germinal vesicle considered
as the nucleus of the egg-cell, one fin(£ a second nucleus whose
function " consists essentially in bringing about the separation of
the elements, till then indifferent, of the protoplasm of the young
ovule into a germinal part, and a nutritive part, grouping around
the one the materials destined to form the plastic part or the germ
whence is later formed the embryo, while the other or simply
nutritive material remains around the germinal vesicle."t Hence
the name vesicule embryogene given by M. Milne-JJdwards to
Balbiani's vesicle.
We know then generally the great importance from the point of
view of embryology of Balbiani's discovery. But, as he says himself
in his last work, " his conclusions have been combated by various
authors." And in a very recent memoir upon the egg and its
development in osseous fishes, published by one of the first embry-
ologiste in Germany — Herr W. His — there is no mention whatever
of Balbiani's vesicle.^ This it. is which leads me to communicate
the present paper to the Society of Medicine at Gund.
In studymg the ovarian egg of osseous fishes I am certain that one
finds in ovules of a certain age, besides the germinal vesicle, another
nuclear mass, viz. le noyau de Balbiani.^ Without stopping for a
♦ ** On the Constitution of the Germ in the Animal Ovum before Fecimdation "
(•Oomptes Bendus,* 1864, t. Iviii., pp. 584-588, 621-625). A short expose of
Balbiani*s mode of view, accompanied by three figures (after the author), has
been inserted in the form of a note by Dr. Banvier in his translation of fVey's
'Treatise on Histology/ p. 103.
t Balbiani, ** M^moire sur le Developpement des ALran^ides " (' Annales des
Sciences l^atureUes/ 5® S^rie, tom. xviii., p. 33).
X Wilhelm His, ' Untersuohungen iiber das ei und die Eientwiokelung bid
Enocken-fischen,* mit 4 Tafeln, Leipzig, 1873. We think we recognize Balbiani's
yesicle in the egg of the Barbel, Fig. Id of Plate II. of His' essay.
§ I have rarely found the vesicular form, but generally that of a more or less
ffranular mass. For this reason, and not to prejudge the function of the organ, I
nave replaced here the expressions vesicule de Balbiani and v^sictUe embryogene by
that of noyau de Balbiani,
VOL. xn. F
62 Olservaiions on ike Tolles' ^ih.
^V 62
^^B moment) to speak of the intimate structure of this s^t, and being
^^V still reserved oo iis geneais and function, the following is what
^^V I have found :—
^^1 (1) Genemlly Balbiani's nucleuf; is not readily distingnishable
^^B in ova esamined in the fresh state, or in indifferent hquids. Bat
^^B it soon appears under the influence of certain reagents, such as
^^M chloride of gold, picro-carmine, and, above all, acetic acid,
^^p (2) It exists m even the smallest ovules.
^" (3) It is always eccentric as regards the germinal vesicle, and
it is generally very close to the periphery of the egg.
(4) Its volume, which is generally inferior to that of the germinal
vesicle, increases with the age of the ovnle.
(5) It disappears with the maturity of the ovum, conseqoently
its disappearance precedes that of the germinal vesicle. Neverthe-
less, I admit this last proposition provisionally and with some doubt.
I
II. — Observations on ike ToUes ^tk.
By E. B. Tolles, Boston, U.S.A.
This paper is written as a supplement to what was sent the
Journal from Florida last month. I offer items of proof and
illustration not available there, the record of the -J-inch traversed by
Mr. Wenham in the March issue of the ' M. M. Journal ' being in
Boston. Of course I desired to speak accnrately from the record,
rather than trust to recollection in any important particular.
First, I wiU speak of the proof I have to offer of the claimed
balsam angle beyond 82^ as pertaining to the K-inch named.
With a view to doing what I could not wait to do on the eve
of my departure South, I have had a ^-inch made closely to the
formula of the ^-inch concerned. My plan for proof of outside
angle was to cutoff or intercept all the (cone of) light entering the
objective — d7y, by means of a central stop placed upon the posterior
surface of the back system. A stop of 0-39" diameter accomplished
this, while the clear aperture of the back system being ■ 44" a
ring of clear aperture remained, of appreciable breadth, beyond
the opaque circular stop. And now, observe, — with air as the
front external mediom it is afaet no light came through the objec-
tive to the eye at the eye-piece.
With no matter what obliqnity, the light could not be made to
pass the stop to the eye. With balsamed alike with dry object
darkness was the effect. To test the question of admissibility of
Oheeruations on ths ToSes' ^th. 63
more than 82° of pencil with a balsam-mounted object, something
more has to be done, as obviously only 180^ could enter the front
surface of the slide.
To give access of more pencil to the object I used the semi-
cjlinder. This simple piece of apparatus applied to the liront
surface of the slide dri/, should, if the objective have 180'' of air
aperture, show 81° (-j-) of pencil on the cylindrical surface thereof.
Without the stop on the back such was the feet, viz. 81° at the
cyhndrical surfece, and that being the internal angle of ISO" of air
angle (or infinitely near that) at the plane dry sur&ce of the shde,
aa also at the plane front surface of the objective, when dry. Ke-
placing the "stop" on the back enrfece, again no light passed to
the eye. A perfect eclipse existed. And next, to teat the qneation
of more than equivalent pencil for ISC external angle when the
object is immersed in balsam or other preservative medium, — air
was replaced with water above and below the slide containing the
object mounted in balsam. And now, darkness no longer, but a flood
of light illuminating the object with good definition of its features.
The object actually usal was a fine Rhomboidea, of which the
cross-lines were sharply defined, using an eye-piece abont one inch
equivalent focus. Image-forming rays, evidently and certainly out-
side of the interior or balsam pencil of 180° external, and prac-
tically utilizing decidedly more than that. The balaam pencil
obtained was more than 9B^. I might rest here and leave
Mr, Wenham to appropriate reflections over (bo it appears to me)
his very hasty edict against my innovating J-mch objective.
But, aa it seems rather necessary, I will state, aa explanatory,
that I used ^s" covering glass (rather lees), and the systems were
but slightly closed from the extreme open-point.
Very Afferent indeed from the forced ease he made of it. In
ihia matter a singnlar precipitating tendency to be either at one
extreme or the other extreme, fully " open" or fully closed, seems,
with my critic, a dire necessity when he assumes the judicial.
Mr. Weiiham had not adjusted for maximum angle at all, nor
tried to. Just and merely " closed" to avoid "after (inibbles." This
is verily amazing. HowaboutjiWo)' "qnibbles," Mr. Wenham? Who
M at fault ? Bnt to the point again. The suggestion that ■ 013
focal diy«nce as in thefiguremakiugnecessarylimit of angle toll8°
falls to the ground in view of the recited experiments. As already
stated, the objective (in the experiments described) was adjusted nearly
entirely open. This of itself anuihilated the ■ 013" distance, sending
hia figure to the realms of fancy. Not "abstruse," this teacher
encouragingly says. It is less than that, sir, and worse, — it is
tpurioua. There is no such thing in the case. With a dry object
aounted on the cover there is no distance involved (very possibljr
'" leed, and as will occur in every such dry-mount). As there is
F '1
1
64 (Aoervattom on the Tollea' \ih,
no distance, you are invited to "plain measurement" of whatever
triaugle ill tlie case. Cony if you can.
1; urtliermore, anyone having under such covering glass a, dry
object in view with this (London) ^-inch, when it ia adjusted to
good definition of the object by eikremest obliqnity of the mdiant-
light, and using this light directly, i.e. without intervening con-
denser of any sort, — then, it vfill be found, that the extremegi
obliquity that can be made incident npon the bottom snr&ce of the
slide will enter the objectiTe, an.d it will be manifest enough that
the onl^ limit of obliquity of incidence of illuminating pencil ia
parallelism with the aurfeee of the slide.
Prove (do not fail to do that) that the most obhque rays actaally
traverse the object and constitute an image of it at the eye-piece.
How ? — by eimply passing a cord, or hke thinnjdged body, upward
toward the slide untU the very thinnest wedge of light passes between
the edge of it and the slide, or the stage, as the case may be. (Plainly
for ihis purpose a shde-holder below the stage ia necessary to reach
the estremest angle.)
On my way South last Ifaich, the Journal for that month
came into my hands, and I read Mr. Wenham's article with no
little surprise, and I determined that on my return I would imme-
diately subject the ^-inch to the " atop" proof, which I knew right
well would be conclusive. Meantime I could only send the illus-
tration and seemingly necessary tnsirtidion how to make mazimTim
angle at open point, while diminishing it with elosurs of the
systems. Mot new in my practice by any means.
And in this connection I vrill gladly assure Mr. Wenham that
he is not being " hoist of his own pttard." Not so bad as that.
The bitter reflection may be dismissed. He has had nothing to do
with the machinery of the hoisting, if that operation is going on ;
has not furnished ammunition, nor plan, in any particular. I have not
even read his " writings " referred to.
I invite Mr. Wenham's plainest comments, without considers
tions of any sort other than to settle the point at isane, viz, practical
objective angle over 82° for objects mounted in balsam or other
preservative media.
Business, business relations, " income," absence, or absent
health, need not stand in the way or affect the discossion.
Since writing the above, I have noted more particularly Mr.
Wenham's remarks about " getting no further than the iront lens"
with a diagram.
Now, in the paper sent yon last month, the back and middle
systems nd given are assumed to be of angular aperture = 6U°. I
did not mention, what is true, viz, the "Museum" yo-inch to
which Dr. Woodward ascribes 87"^ hard-balsam angle, has, inner
systems, back and middle Now this is good as a
On the Nervous System of Actinia. 65
diagram for the argument. It is a matter oi fad. Focus, clear
= • 10", angle 60° + . Obviously the outside rays of this cone can
be traced from behind the front to its inevitable focus in front. But,
if considered requisite, a back and middle appropriate shall be given.
P.S. — I have rigged two semicircles divided for degrees to the
bottom of my zinc stage, with a shutter between^ movable through
180° of arc. The object-slide is also held and moved against the
lower surface of the stage. The very least and last light admitted
by the shutter to impinge on the face of the slide gives an image of
the object, — with the choked, and smothered, and scouted ^inch
objective.
[It appears to us that a simple question is now involved in a needless mass of
Ebiaseolugy. Mr. Tolles objects to the measurement described by Mr. Wenham
aving b^n taken at the closed point, always considered that of greatest aperture.
If this is a mistake it may surely be tested. We have no doubt that Mr. Crisp
will permit the apertures of the ^th to be measured at any other position of the
adjusting collar that Mr. Tolles may suggest. — ^Ed. * M. M. J.']
III. — On the Nervous System of Actinia.
By Professor P. Martin Duncan, M.B. Lend., F.B.S., &c.
Plates LXIX. and LXX.
I. A Notice of the Investigations ofHomardy Haime, Schneider,
and BotteJceUy and others on the subject
MM. Milnb-Edwards and Jules Haime* wrote as follows in 1857
concerning the nervous attributes of the group of Coelenterata
called Zoantharia : — " They (les Coralliaires) enjoy a highly deve-
DESORIPTION OF THE PLATES.
Plate LXIX.
Fig. 1, which is an outline of a chromatophore, with two small ones close to it, is
magnified 10 diameters ; aU the rest are drawn fix)m nature under
the magnifying power of a ^inch immersion lens and a medium eye-
piece.
„ 2.— Bacilli.
„ 3. — Granular and cellular protoplasm between bacilli.
„ 4. — Large refractile cells. Uaimean bodies.
„ 5. — Type o of a Rotteken body.
» 7.— " 7 " !» with a thread.
^ 8. — Granular and cellular tissue between the Haimean bodies.
„ 9. — Same kind of tissue in contact with a Rotteken body.
,j 10. — Some cells with refractile nuclei in the tissue.
,, 11. — Portion of tissue from amongst the Rotteken bodies.
„ 14.— The same, with a forked end. [Fig. 12.
* * Hist. Nat. des CoraUiaires,' vol. i., p. 11.
On &» Nervova Stfttem of AeitTiia.
loped sensibility ; not only do they contract forcibly upon the slightest
touch, but they are, moreover, not iusenaible lo the influence of
light. Nevertheless, neither a nervona Hystem nor organs of special
seose have been discovered in them. It is true that Spix described
and fished ganglions and nervous cords in the pedal disk of
ActinisB ; bat the observations of this naturalist, so far as the polypes
are concerned, are not entitled to the least confidence.
" Some naturalists have supposed that the ' bourses cahciuales '
of the Actinite are eyes, and M. Buschke beheves that certain
capsules in the trunk of Verdilfa, which contain calcareous bodies,
are the organs of hearing. But these hypotheses do not rest npon
any proved fiicts."
In 18fj4 Husley noticed that, with regard to the Coelenterata,
" a nervona system has at present been clearly made out only in
the Ctenophora." "
Homard, f an admirable observer, contributed to the histology of
the Actinozoa in* 1851. He corrected Erdl's mistake concerning
the supposed striation of the muacular fibrillse of the tentacles, and
also Quatrefages and Leuckart's notion concerning the rupture of
the tentacular ends previously to the passage of water from them.
Giving very good illuatrationa, he proved himself to be a very
reliable investigator.
Amongst other parts of the Actinozoa, he paid especial attention
to the minute anatomy of the " bourses cahcinales." These bead-like
appendages, situated just without the tentacles in some genera, but
Fio. 12. — Three portiiina of iTiterme-lisle tisaoe oiidinR ia the lajer of granular
cells which unilerliea the B<>tttkeii bndiea.
— HftiLoean and Rottaken bodies and the intermediate tiaaue in position.
—A diagrajn, hnb very close to nutnre, of tliD relative position of tho biato-
logicnl olouents of the cliromntupliona.
— BainieaD and Kiitt«I:en bodies iDfurmiiigled.
— Haimeon hodii^g Barronnded by pigment c«lla, and nitli bsuilli Sot upon
them, owing lo preseure.
aod 19. — Fusiform nerve cells.
-A nerve cell.
—Nerve eells oonnected and with fibres.
—A apherteal nerve cell with proceeses joining the plextu.
— Bamiflealiona of tha plezifotni uord.
— Merve cell acd fibres.
Plate I.XX.
, — Nerve in relation to the small cnUBOnlur fibrils of the base,
^Norve ramifyins and auppljing wide muscular fibro.
,— A loop of nervoua fibre.
— ^Terininat ends of the plexna pasaing over muscular fibre,
iiid BO. — The name, mort; highly magnified.
-The plexus under the endotlielium.
♦ Hoiluy,' Elements of Comparative Aaatomy,' p. 82. See Dr. Grant, FJB5-,
io., on Beralpileia, 'Zool. Trans.,' vol, i., -p. 10. See also 'A Manual of the Snb-
kingdom CcelBnterato,' by J. H. Greene, B.A., 3861, p. 165.
f "Snr leE Actiniie," 'Ann. des Sciences Nat.,' 1851.
TkeMontblyMcroscopical Journal Ai^l 1874
PL LIS
K
<^r''
Xy^ fty-^
On the NervoOB System of Adinia. 67
not in all, are also called cbromatophorea and " bourses marginales " ;
and their beautifal turquoise colour had rendered them attractive
to previona anatomists, who had, as haa already been noticed, guessed
concerning their function.
Homard determined that they were folded elements of the skin
in which the capaaka (nematocysts) were enormously developed.
He stated that the thread of these gigantic nematocysts waa seen
with difficulty. He noticed the transparency of some large cells in
the bourses, and stated that, in his opinion, there was " some
physiological relation between theas httle organs and the light."
.Tales Haime (probably in 1855) examined the minute anatomy
oi Actinia meanvArijanthemum, and his colleague, Milne-Edwards,
quotes him in the ' Hist. Nat, des Coraliiaires,' vol. i., p. 240, The
lamented young naturalist found out that the chromatophores bore,
BO far as their number is concerned, a decided numerical relation
with the number of the tentacles. He decided that they contained
bnt few muscular fibres, and had navicular-shaped nematocysts,
"diversement contournes," with indistinct threads within them.
However, he recognized large transparent cells and pigmentary
granules in them. The nematocysts of the chromatophores are
larger than those of the tentacles. He was evidently not aatisfied
with the data upon which these coloured masses were decided to be
of importance as organs of special sense. In ail probability Haime
was aware of Homard's work,
KoUiker and the German histologista added about this time,
and later, to the exact knowledge respecting the histology of the
muscles, skin, endothelium, and tentacular apparatus, bnt no advance
was made towards the discovery of a nervous system in the Actinia
for many yeara.
In 1871 the popular idea of the extent of the nervous system in
Actinia was expressed by Ales. Agassiz,* who wrote : — " Notwith-
standing its extraordinary sensitiveness, the organs of the senses in
the Adinia are very inferior, eonsistbg only of a few pigment cells
accumulated at the base of the tentacles."
But in this year a great advance was made towards discovery by
Profe. A. Schneider and Kotteken.t The first-named naturahst paid
especial attention to the development of the lamellie and septa in
Corals and Actiniie, and his coUeaguo laboured in the histology o"
Adinia especially.
Working at a very great disadvantage, with specimens which
had been preserved in alcohol, Rotteken produced a series of
researches which added greatly to the knowledge already granted to
68 On the Nervous System of Actinia.
science by Homard and Haime. So &r as they bear on the
nerrons system, the result of his researches may be stated as
follows: — "The bourses marginales" (chromatophores) are nn-
doubtedly organs of sense, and, indeed, compound eyes. They are
pyriform diverticula of the body- wall, standing between the tentacles
and the outer margin of the peristome ; they are constructed after
the fashion of a retina, and the following layers of structure may be
distinguished in them : — 1, externally a cuticular layer broken up
into ** bacilli" by numerous pore-canals; 2, a layer of strongly
refractile spherules, which may be regarded as lenses ; 3, cones —
hollow, strongly refractile, transversely striated cylinders or prisms
roundeid at tbe ends; these have hitherto been confounded with
urticating capsules (nematocysts) : at the exterior end of each cone
there is generally one lens, and sometimes two or three may stand
in the interspaces; 4, a granular fibrous layer occupying the
interspaces between the cones ; 5, a layer which is deeply stained
by carmine, and contains numerous extremely fine fibres and spindle-
shaped cells, probably nerve fibres and cells ; 6, the muscular layer ;
7, the endothehum, which bounds the perigasiaic cavity.
Actinia mesembryanthemum was the species examined, and tke
diagram (PL LXIX., Fig. 15) will explain the relative position of
the layers.
Botteken could not determine the position of the pigment of the
chromatophores &om the alcohoHzed specimens. An examination of
the minute anatomy of the tentacles of Actinia cerevs, Ellis and
Solander, determined that the re&actile spherules and large cones
were to be found on the tips of these organs.
Dana,* in his popular work on Corals and C!oral Islands, appears
to accept the statements quoted above. He states that " they some-
times possess rudimentary eyes"; and elsewhere, '*they have
crystalline lenses and a short optic nerve." He then observes : —
** 1 et Actinias are not known to have a proper nervous system ;
their optic nerves, where they exist, are apparently isolated, and
not connected with a nervous ring such as exists in the higher
Badiate animals."
II. A Description of the Morphology of the Chromatophores.
During the summer of 1871 the author of this communication
was examining into the minute anatomy of Actinia mesemhry^
anthemum, and had the advantage of possessing Uving specimens.
Having satisfied himself of the general correctness of Eotteken s
admirable work, he relinquished the inquiry until 1873, when he
resumed it.
Everyone who has endeavoured to anatomize one of the ActiniaB
'*' ' CoTola and Coral Islands/ by James D. Dana, LL.D., 1872, pp. 39, 41.
On the Nervous System of Actinia. 69
must acknowledge the excessive difficulties which accompany the
attempt. The irritabihty of the muscular tissues, their persistent
contraction during manipulation, the confusion caused by the
abundance of different cellular histological elements, and the general
sliminess of the whole, render the minute examination very trouble-
some and usually very unsatis&ctory. Beagents are useful for
rough examinations ; but when the most deUcate of the tissues are
to be examined they must be iSoated under sea-water, and this must
be the medium in which they must be examined under the
microscope. Carmine solution, osmic acid, and spirits of wine in
weak solutions are useful after the natural appearances have been
determined, but they exaggerate some histological elements and
destroy others.
Great care must be taken in making the thin sections, and no
tearing must be allowed ; for it is of paramount importance, in
endeavouring to trace the nervous system, that the relative position
of parts should be retained.
It is useless to rely on any observation made with object-glasses
lower than rff-inch focus (immersive).
In examining the chromatophores, Actinies with very bright-
coloured ones, and other specimens with these organs dull in tint,
should be selected. Fresh subjects should be obtained, and it is not
necessary to kill them first of all. The blades of very delicate
scissors should be allowed to touch the desired ohromatophore dose
to its base, and then as the Actinia commences to contract, they
should be brought together gently and without wrenching the
tissues. By this method the chromafcophore will remain on the
blades. Two or three chromatophores may be removed, with their
intermediate tissues, without injury to the animal ; but, of course,
the excision must not be too deep, or the endotheUum will be cut
into.
A dropping tube should be used to wash the ohromatophore oflf
the blades on to a glass slide, where a drop of sea-water awaits it.
Sections are by no means easy to make, but they are best
performed under a power of 10 diameters with fine scalpels. The
lorceps must not be employed, as it crushes the tissues. If possible,
very shght pressure should be exercised on the thin glass, which is
to be placed very carefully and wet over the object. After the
examination, carmine should be added, or osmic-acid solution, 1 per
cent, in strength ; but no results can be relied on which are derived
from the examination under the influence of reagents alone, as they
modify the natural appearance greatly.
So far as the chromatophores are concerned, my investigations
took the following course : — 1. Kotteken's researches on the alco-
holized Actinia were followed in recent specimens. 2. The tissues
of the chromatophores, of their margins, and of the spaces between
70 On the Nervoua 8ydam of Admia,
them were examined in a large specimen of a living pale-gref'n
Tariety of Actinia meseinbri/antkemum from the Mediterranean.
3. The tissues of the clu-omatophores of the Actinia mesembryan-
ihemum were again examined with a view to explain tlie differences
between M. Eotteken's and my own results.
The ronnded, free, coloured, external layer of a cbromatophote
was carefully disengaged from the gi'auular tissue beneath it, bo
that the bacilli of Kdttekeo, the refractile corpuscles, and his so-
called cones were separated from the rest. This turquoise-coloured
film was floated and carefully placed on a glass slide, the bacillary
layer being inferior and on the glass, whilst the proximal ends of
the cones were free in the water. No thin glass was placed over
the film, and an object-glass of ^-inch focus was used. The appear-
ance presented under tiiis low power {by transmitted light) was
very remarkable, for a great number of brilliant points of light
were seen surrounded and separated by dark opaqne tissue. When
a J-inch object-glass was used, tlie appearance was leas striking, for
the points of light were more diffused. No trace of an object could
be seen through the refractile tissues.
The transparent and refractile tissues were the so-called bacilli,
the globular bodies and the " cones " already noticed ; and the tissue,
wlii(3i was impermeable by light, consisted of the colouring matter
in small dull granules, cells small and round in outline and granular,
and also the cell-walls of the cones.
Sections through a cbromafcophore were made at right angles to
the point of the greatest convexity of the surface, and thin shcea
were floated off carefully from the line of section on to glass sHdea.
The slices included (a) the coloured outside of the chromatophore,
(t) the tissue beneath it, and (e) some musenlar fibres which limi t
the endothelium. Sea-water was used as the medium, and a thin
glass cover was applied after the specimens had been examined with
a low power.
Externally was the bacillary layer (PI. LXIS., Pig. 15). Eotteken
describes this as a cuticular layer broken up into baciUi by numer-
ous pore-canals. Examined, however, in the fresh subject, this
external layer consisted of a vast multitude of small rod-shaped
bodies, sharply rounded but conical at both ends, very transparent,
and resemblmg the smallest nematoeysts of the tentacles without the
internal thread (PI. LXIX., Fig. 2). These are placed side by side,
and the external rounded end of each is separated by a small space
from the terminations of its neighbours. These ends are free and
are in contact with the water iu which the Actinia lives. The rods
are cylinders, and are separated from each other by a very delicate
fibu of protoplasm, in which are numerous dark opaque granules and
a few flat simple colourless rounded cells (PI. LXIX., Fig. 3), The
inner ends are shaped like the e^-*- ^ and are imbedded in the
On (ke Nervoaa Sysiem of Actinia. 71
__ ai layer of tisane. Eacli of these bodies ia a simple ceil filled
Tfith a transparent fluid. When a thin film of the surface of a
chromatophore is removed and examined under a 75-inch, the bacilli
may be observed to crowd fogethor over a layer of large refractile
cells. The thin glass cover is generally sufficient to crush down
the bacilli, so that their sides may be seen as they rest in all kinds
of poaitionfl on the deeper cellular layer (PI. LXIX., Fig. 17),
The bacilli are not found universally over the cbromatophores,
nor do they invariably cover the layer of large refractile globular
cells.
It will be noticed, on examining excised portions which include
two or three cbromatophores and tbeir intermediate tksue, that not
only are they marked on their surface by foldings of their super-
ficial tissue, but that between them there axe others which are
microscopic. These last rarely have bacilli. Moreover, in some
parts of the margins of the chromatophore, other pigments are
visible than the turquoise, and the red often predominates ; the
bacilh are not usually present there.
Beneath the superficial layer of bacilli and their separating
protoplasm, which is faintly granular, there ia some granular
tiesne with a few small spherical cells containing granules, and the
inner ends of the bacilh are imbedded therein (PI. LXIX., Fig. 3).
This granular tissue is very thin, but it covers and dips down
between the large refractile cells, which form the next layer
(PI. LXIS., Figs. 4, 13, 15, 16, 17).
These cells are more or less spherical ; the cell-wall ia very thin,
and the contents are transparent, colourless, and refractile. Some
have a pale grey tint, and one or more extremely faint nuclei are
attached to the inner surface of the cell-wall. The ovoid shape is
These large cells, which transmit light so readily, are univ<
found on" the chromatophores; and when there are bacilh upon them,
the spherical shape is common.
At the margms of the chromatophores, and where the red pig-
ment commences, these refractile cells assume much larger dimen-
sions and more irregular shapes. These refractile cells are, as baa
already been noticed, imbedded in a tissue of granular and shghtly
cellular protoplasm, and this occasionally is dilferentiated into some
pecuhar structures.
Where there are no bacilh this granular tissue is increased in
thickness and becomes superficial ; moreover the granules then con-
tribute to the colour of the chromatophore, and probably they
always do so to a certain degree.
The refractile cells are not invariably confined to the layer above
the so-called cones of Eotteken, although they are often thus limited
in their position, especially if there are baciUi covering them. In
On GteNervoaa System of Aetmia.
parte of the same chroinatophore, where thia apparently normal
Brrangement is seen, and especially on the microBcopic chromato-
phorea hetween the larger kinds, the krge reliracHle ephernlea
are fonnd between and in the midst of groups of the cones
(PL LXIX., Fig. 16),
In the chromatophores there is considerable variety in the size
of the refractiie ceUs ; they appear to be developed from the small
cells with a circnlar outline, which contain a few dark grannies, and
which are found in considerable abundance amidst the enveloping
grannlar tissue (PI. LXIX., Fig. 8).
The most striking of all the histological elements of the chroma-
tophores are the cones of Rotteten, or the nematocysts with imper-
fectly visible threads of Homard. They are divisible into three
series: —
a. Elongated simple cells, cylindrical in shape, vrith rounded and
somewhat pointed extemities, bonaisting of a tough cell-wall which
ia capable of being bent without being broken or ruptured, and of
colourless trausjiarent contents which are rather viscid (PI. LXIX.,
Fig. 5). They are fotir or five times the length of the bacilli, and
three times their width. The cell-wall is faintly tinted vrith the
peculiar colour of the cbi'omatophore. These elongated cells are not
conical, nor can they be really termed cones vriUi any propriety ;
when observed through their greatest length, or when the light
traverses their long axis, the cell-wall appears dark and the centre
very refractiie. They exist in vast multitudes over most parts of
the chromafophore, and also in the intermediate tissue and its
microscopic chromatophores.
0. Cells of the same shape as " a," but the cell-wall is feintly
striated, the appearance being very distinct under a power of 2000
diameters (PI. LXIX., Fig. 6). These cells are very numerous, and
were noticed by Riitteken ; they appear in the same position, and
often amongst the cells with simple walls.
7. Cells of the same shape and sine as " a and 0," with a well-
deveJoped thread within them, which usually has no barb (PL LXIX,
Fig. 7).
These cells are common where there are no bacilli, but they
occur here and there in all parts of the chromatophore circle.
In some rare instances the " Rotteken bodies " (for thus I would
name these remarkable cells) are closely approximated, side by side,
without the intervention of any structure ; but, nsnally, there is a
very thin layer of grannlar proioplasm, containing small cells,
between them.
As the bodies are cylindrical and more or leas closely applied by
their sides, there is more space between them in some places than
in othera ; and it is in these spots, where the bodies cannot come
in direct contact, that their intermediate structures are elongated
On the Nervous System of Actinia, 73
and filiform (PI. LXIX., Figs. 9-14). The filiform arrangement
of the granulo-cellular protoplasm is often branched, and a set of
elongated masses may unite above or below the bodies. The cells of
this intermediate tissue are small and usually spherical ; in one kind
there is a large refractile nucleus, but in the commonest varieties
the cells simply contain granules. It is necessary to study this
tissue, because of its close agreement to what I presume to be the
nerve structure, in some, but not in the essential, points. This
tissue is clearly continuous with that which has already been
noticed as separating and bounding the larger refractile cells outside
the Eotteken bodies, and it is continued amongst the small closely-
set granular cells which underlie these interesting histological
elements (PL LXIX., Fig. 13).
The intermediate tissue binds together the bacilli, for it is con-
tinued upwards and between them, the large refractile cells (which
I propose to term " Haimean bodies "), and the " Eotteken bodies,"
and it becomes lost in the cells upon which the proximal ends of
these last rest
It contains the granular structures which give, in the mass, the
colour to the chromatophore, and it is evident that the Haimean
bodies are developed from it
The proximal ends of the Eotteken bodies retain their sharp
and rounded contour amidst the dense layers of small granular cells
which everywhere underlie them.
Those granular cells form a tissue through which light passes
with difficulty under the microscope. They are regularly placed
in series near the Eotteken bodies ; but deeper they become less so,
and then other anatomical elements may be observed between them
and the muscular fibres upon which the whole chromatophore
rests, and which in their turn limit externally the endothelium.
III. A Notice of Botteken's discovery of Fusiform Cells and of the
different appearances of the Nervous Elements now first
observed in the ^^Pleodform Tissue.*'
Eotteken describes these nervous elements as extremely fine
fibres and spindle-shaped cells, and asserts that they are probably
nerve fibres and cells. But he has not traced them in conjunc-
tion, nor have the fibres been seen of sufficient length to anasto*
mose.
I have found the fusiform bodies and their long ends — the fine
fibres mentioned above. Moreover the connection of these irregular-
shaped cells has been determined in these investigations, and the
anastomosis of their processes and their connection with parts of a
plexiform nervous tissue also.
These structures are in the midst of a mass of viscous proto-
74
On the Nervous System of AdtnvL.
I
plasm, gmnaleB, and f^anular cells, wbich merge gradually into the
close layers of granular cells under tlie Eotteken bodies, and they
tranagreas here and there on those layers.
The fusiform cells are numerous (PI. LXIX., Figs. 18-24), and
maybe divided into two kinds: — (a) Those with irregolar shape-a
and short terminal processes, which are prolongations of the cell-
wall and are rounded off. These cells contain either highly refrac-
tile nuclei, or several nuclei with granular niicIeoU. The fusiform
shape is not invariable, and in Plate LXIX., Fig. 20, a large cell
twice the diameter of a Eotteken body is seon amidst the granular
plasm. It has a tail-shaped prolongation and some highly refrac-
tile nuclei.
/3. Those which are rounded in outline, and whose projections
are long and continuous with those of others. The outlines of these
cells are soft, and without definite and sharp margins, and the
colour is a very pale blue-grey. They contain one or more very
distinct nuclei Our type, illustrated in Plate LXIX., Pig. 21, has
its cells rather wider than a Bdtteken body, and they we connected
by a process with sharply-defined wells — the cell, with many nuclei,
having a long caudal fibril of a pale grey colour and rather sharp
margmal lines which had suffered disruption.
A second type has large spherical or elliptical cells, which do
not have proeeaaea paaain}:; out in opposite directions, but they are
restricted to one part, tisually the cells have only one procesa,
but Bometunra t^vo eiist close together (Fig. 22).
These cells are granular within and have very indistinct nuclei ;
the cell-wall is extremely dehcate, and the whole is of a pale grey
colour. The fibrils of these aells are particularly connected with
the plesiform tissue. In Plate LXIX, Fig, 22, there is a cell with
two fibrils — one is short, for it dips down and is foreshortened,
and the other is very long; it bU'urcates, and one end joins a
rounded mass of the plexus, and the other the rugged fibrillar
part.
In Plate LXIX., Fig. 24, a, cell with one fibril is shown. The
fibril swells slightly, and then passes down to join a transverse
fibre belonging to the plexus.
The plexiform tissue is probably continnons around the Actinia
beneath the chromatophores, for it is found between the circular
band of muscular fibres and every chromatophore. It consists of
an irregnlai" main structure and of lateral prolongations, which
either anastomose with the filirila from the fusiform and mora
spherical cells, or are directly continuous with the cells (Fig, 23),
The main structure resembles, in its indistinctness of outhne
and its pale grey colour and indefinite marginal arrangement, the
fibre of the sympathetic of mammals, but it is less coherent and
smaller. The usual appearance (PI LXIX, Fig. 23) is that of s
On the Nervous System of Actinia. 75
grey film with definite branches, and the whole has few grannies
here and there and a very few nuclei. It is intimately associated
with the surrounding cell structui-es, but they may be separated by
accident or compression. Here and there the structure enlarges
and a ganglion-like cell is seen (PL LXIX., Fig. 22).
I have traced this structure almost across the whole field of
the microscope in some sections.
It appears that this portion of the nervous system of Actinia
i namely^ the fusiform and spherical cells with fibrils and the plexi-
brm structure) is distinct histologically from the fibrillar and
cellular structures amidst the Haimean and Botteken bodies. These
structures are connective and developing ; but it must be remem-
bered that it is possible for both series to come in contact in the
midst of the layers of granular cells which underUe the Eotteken
bodies.
IV. Examination into the Physiological Relation between the
ChromatophoreSy the Nerves, and Light
The question arises, Are these nerves of special sense ? MM.
Schneider and Botteken answer that the small portion of the
nervous arrangement they described, I e. the fusiform bodies and
their fibrils, are optic nerves. They are satisfied with the physical
arrangement of the bacilli, Haimean and Botteken bodies, and
the nature of the colouring matter imitating that of an organ of
vision.
The discovery of the anastomosing fibrils and the plexiform
arrangement favour this theory ; but there are reasons to be con-
sidered which throw much doubt on the views of the distinguished
investigators. All Actinia have not chromatophores, and closely
aUied genera may or may not have them. Thus, amongst the
Actinia with smooth tentacles, there is a group with non-retractile
and another with retractile tentacles: amongst those with non-
retractile arms are the genera Anemonia and Eumenides without
chromatophores, and Comactis and Geratadis with them ; amongst
the Actinia with retractile tentacles are Actinia with, and Paractis
without, chromatophores.
Amongst the tubercular division, the genus Phymactis has
chromatophores, but its close ally Gereus has them not.
Whatever may be the value of this classification of the Actinia,
it is quite evident that to group together those with and without
chromatophores in separate divisions would be the reverse of pro-
ducing a natural arrangement. It is therefore difficult to believe
that these ornaments, with something resembling an optical arrange-
ment, can be the seat of special sensation.
MM. Botteken and Schneider have observed the large refractile
VOL. xu. a
76 On the Nervous 8t/siem of Aeiinta.
Htumean bodies in the teutacles, and, as will be noticed farther on,
I have found them of enormous size in the peristome.
They are aurronnded in those places, Imt not covered, with
pigment cells and granules, and are situated just beneath the nema-
tocyst layer in the tentacle, and beneath a corresponding layer, or
one of l«cilh, in the peristome. I hare failed to recognize any
nervous elements in the tentacles save the fusiform bodies, and there
are none in the peristome except these irregular cells.
Again, the Haimean bodies are found in the chromatophorea, in
some places, amidst the Rotteken bodies, separating them.
Nevertheless it is trae that light fidling on the snrface of an
Actinia will reach farther into its structures where there are
Haimean bodies, and farther still if the Rotteken cells underlie
them. Where there is no pigment intervening between the bodies
when placed side by side, or between the Eotteken cells, a diffused
glare of light would impinge on the grannlo-cellular layer below
them, in which the nerves ramify and the nerve cells exist. But
when the pigment granules and cells exist, they break up the
general illumination and confine it to a series of separate bright
rays. Each of them is brighter than the corresponding space of
diffused Kght ; and it would appear that the bacilli, the Haimean
bodies, and the Botteken cells in combinatioD, concentrate light.
Two or three bacilli are placed side by side and behind each
other over a small Haimean refractile spherical cell, and perhaps
twenty or more cover a large cell (PL LXIX, Fig. 15). Usually a
Haimean body is placed immediately over a Eotteken body ; bat, as
Botteken has pointed out, this is not an invariable arrangement, for
some cover the spaces between and over them. The reftactibility
of the Suid contents of the Hahnean bodies and Ilotteken cel&
appears to be the same ; but the elongated form of the last-mentioned
stnicturea may act upon light aa if their internal fluid were more
viscid,
In every instance there is a more or less opaque tissue between
the pioxiEual end of the Botteken body and the nerve cells ; and,
moreover, the delicate protoplasmic layer, which is slightly impervious
to light, sarroandB the Haimean bodies.
In my opinion the Haimean bodies, wherever they exist, cany
light more deeply into the tissues than the ordinary epithelial
structures. This is also the case with the bacilh and Botteken
bodies, even when they exist separately and with or without the
Haimean bodies. There are three ordinary constituents of the skin,
and through their individual gifts and structural peculiarity they
place the Actinia in relation with Ught. When they are brou^t
together in this primitive form of eye, they concentrate and convey
light with greater power, so as to enable it to act more generally on
the nervous system — probably not to enable the distinction of objects,
On the Nervous Sifstem of Actinia. 77
I but to cauflo the light to stimulate a rndimentary nervoua system to
I »ct in a reflex mmmer on the nnifiCTilar system, which is highly
[ 'developed. The Actinia, therefore, may feel the light by means of
I the transparent histological elements when they are separate and
B^oonstitnte integral portions of the ectoderm ; but this sensation
T will be intensified when the three kinds of cells are placed in such
I order as has been observed in the chromatophores.
The evolution of an eye, which can distinguish outlines, shadows,
and colours, prohably took the path which is thus faintly indicated
in the AcUnta, which doubtless has an appreciation of the difference
between light and darkness.
V. On the Nerves of the base of Actinia mesembryanthemnm.
A large specimen of a pale green variety from the Mediterranean
was examined.
The baae being free and expanded, a rapid incision cut out a
triangular piece comprehending the ectothelium, the muscular layers,
and the mucous endothelinm. The apex of the triangle reached the
centre of the base of the Actinia, and the base of the triangle, which
was covered, corresponded with the basal margin of the animal.
Sections were made parallel with the original aspect of the base
of the Actinia, and then some others at right angles.
The histological elements were Btudied separately and compared,
BO that the following tissues could be distinguished readily : —
1. A fibrous-looking tissue like ordinary white fibrous tissue
with dark nuclei, to which the muscular fibres are attaehod and
from which they originato,
2. A dense layer of muscular fibres, or rather fibrils, which
originates at right angles to the fibre of the fibrous tisane. Each
fibril is refractile and nucleated. Each is separate from its neigh-
bours, and lies in the midst of grannies and small cells which
contain granules, all being highly xefractile. In some places the
fibrils are gathered together in masses, so as to leave areolse between
them.
3. Large mnscular fibres in contact laterally, so as to form a
thin layer. Each fibre is long, broad, haa several pale elongate
nuclei and a distinct lateral dark line. There are no strise.
4. The elements of the endothelium and ectothehum, which, as
they do not bear on the immediate snbject, will be described in a
L 'fiitnre memoir.
'_ The object of the investigation being to discover some trace of
a nervous system, which waa presupposed to resemble somewhat
the traces observed below the chromatophores, the necessity of
becoming famihar with the fibrous and muscular tissues, so as to
decide miat was not muscle and fibre, is apparent.
78 On the Nervous 8y«tem of Actinia.
I have not found any isolated fasiform cells amongst the tissues
of the base ; but under the endotheUum, and also between the layers
of muscular fibres, there are structures which I feel disposed to
believe must belong to the nervous system. 1. They are in the
position of nerves. 2. Their structure is not that of muscle or fibre.
3. Their structure resembles, in some instances, the plexiform
tissues beneath the chromatophores.
The nervous structures are found to present three characteristic
shapes: —
1. A thin layer of muscular fibrils of the small and separate
(see 2 above) kind, with well-defined dark nuclei in them, was
examined. The whole was very transparent and well defined under
the -iV-iiich objective.
Underlying this layer, and extending on either side beyond it,
so as to appear in one of the meshes between groups of these fibrils,
was a ramified pale grey tissue, which was less pervious to light
than the muscular fibrils (PI. LXX., Fig. 25). Swollen in one part
and faintly granular throughout, it had its margins very fidntly
visible. It was flat, and had a definite resemblance to the widest
portion of the plexus already mentioned.
2. A large section of muscular tissue was examined. It consisted
of one layer of large muscular fibres (see 3 above) in close lateral
contact. Eunning obUquely over the layer was an irregular but
continuous cord ramifying here and there, the branches breaking up
into fibrils. In one part the cord was swollen (PL LXX., Pigs. 26
and 27). A second ramification passed from the opposite end of
the field of the microscope and broke up into ultimate fibrils, and
in this structure there was a fasiform ceU.
Careful manipulation separated a portion of the upper cord
from the musculo: fibres, but a part of it evidently dropped down
amongst them.
3. A layer of muscular fibres of the same kind as those just
mentioned was examined. It was marked, a^ usual, with the lateral
dark Hues and pale elongated nuclei.
Three long and irregular fibres passed more or less obliquely
over the muscular tissue (PL LXX., Figs. 28-30). They had
distinct lateral or marginal lines, were swollen out in several places,
and their texture was faintly granular.
I believe that these fibres were continuous with the fine
ramifications of the plexiforin arrangement just described.
4. Above the muscular layers, and under the folds of the
endotheHum, I found an inosculating series of ramifications arising
&om a common cord. It was situated upon the layer of muscular
tissue, with small and separate long fibrils.
The structure was faintly granular, pale grey in colour, with
faint outlines, and was swollen in a^rno places : it covered a con-
On Diapedesia. 79
siderable portion of the field of the microscope ; and portions pf it
had a close resemblance to the ramifying stmctnre mentioned as
having been observed below the mnscular layer (PL LXX., Pig. 31 ).
The multiplication, if it be justifiable, of ^ese structural elements
in the other segments of the base which were not examined would
give a fidr notion of the plexiform arrangement of the basal nervous
tissue. I presume that it consists of a reticulate structure beneath
the endotheUum, which sends large branches between the vacuities
of the most delicate muscular layer, and which communicates with
a ramifying tissue in contact with the other muscular layers, and
that this ends in long fibres which supply the wide fibres of this
last-mentioned layer.
The diffused nature of this nervous tissue is what might be
anticipated would be found in animals possessing such general
irritability of tissue, and probably its function is to assist in the
reflex movements of the animal, and to produce expansion of the
disk on the stimulus of Ught. — Proceedings of the Boyal Society,
vol. xxii., No. 151.
IV. — On Dtapedesis : or tfie Passage of Blood^orpuscles through
the Walls of the Bhod-vesselSy and how to observe it.
By Joseph Nbedham, P.K.M.S.
The importance of the subject of diapedesis cannot be overrated,
for one can scarcely attend a course of lectures on physiology,
pathology, surgery, or medicine, without hearing, over and over
again, a description of, or a reference to, this process ; surely, then,
you will not regard tiie time spent in verifying for yourselves so
important a fact as wasted, ^before proceeding to the substance
S roper of my discourse, 1 wish to observe that, although I may
raw now and again on physical facts, or encroach too much on
the domain of pathology, yet those digressions will only be made
to render the explanation of the subject more lucid, or to testify to
the importance of a right conception of it.
We will, for convenience, consider our matter under four
headings.
1. Mode of demonstration.
2. Description of process.
3. Explanation of phenomena.
4. Concluding remarks.
I. As to the modes of demonstration, various observers have
made use of difierent animals. The material has been drawn
chiefly from the Batrachians and their tadpoles. Fish have occa-
sionally been -employed ; recently warm-blooded animals have been
r
80 On Diapedesia.
used ; bnt the study of the capillary circulation of mammalia is
attended with Bach great diffictilty that they are seldom employed.
We will dismiss the fish and mammalia in a few words. An
oblong box of gutta-percha, with glass top and bottom, is generally
employed for studying the circulation in fiah. A constant supply of
fresh water is conveyed to, and the deoxygenated water from,
the box, by means of two pipes. As regards mammalia, there is
but one external part — viz. the wing of the bat (used by Paget) —
sufficiently transparent for oba«rvation ; hence it is necessary to
employ some internal structure. The meaentfiries of small rodents
have been used by Strieker ; but the«e are not to be compared with
the omentum, and particularly with that of the guinea-pig. It
differs from that of man in consisting of only two layers of peri-
toneum, in being much more delicate in structiu'e, and containing
very Uttlo fat. The observations on these serous membranes have
been productive of no good results, for the injurious effects of
exposure are much greater than those which occur in Batrachians.
Therefore, to overcome these difficulties, it is necessary to have
recourse to complicated appliances and expensive apparatus, and
even then so vulnerable a tissue as that of the peritoneum cannot
be exposed even for a few minutes without injury, so that, although
the greatest care is taken in demonstration, only a momentary
glimpBe can be obtained.
Batrachians and their larvie. Four parts of these itnimftlq may
be used, as follows: — (1) The web of the frog's foot. (2) The
mesentery of the frogor toad — preferably of the toad, whose mesen-
tery is longer. (3) The tongue of the toad or frog. (4) Tadpole's
tail. These animals may or may not be curarized. If curara be
employed, one drop of one-sixth per cent, solution is injected under
the skin of the back with an ordinary hypodermic syringe. If not
curarized, the brass frog-plate sold by opticians, or a large flat piece
of cork with a hole at one end, must be employed; but these
arrangements are only fitted for examining the. web.
1. The web of the foot must be extended over the glass in the
brass plate, or the hole in the cork, by means of thread tied to the
toes and fastened to the plate, or by means of pins to the cork ; but
the web is not well fitted for observing diapedesis. The epithelium
soon becomes dulled by the action of reagents, and often the
extension of the web impedes or entirely prevents tiie circulation,
2. The mesentery. Although the preparation of the mesentery
is not so simple as one might anticipate, yet it is well suited for our
purpose. The animal must be under the influence of curara, and
the use of a stage frog-plate is necessitated, the construction of
which is as follows : — A piece of cork, having a circular hole in the
middle, is lastoned to one end of a plate of glass or cork with a
corresponding hole; a circular piece of thin glass is fixed to the
I
On Dittpedesis. 81
projeotiiig cork, above the hole, partly covering its snrface. An
inirisifin is made parallel to the median line on the right side of the
belly. Care mnat be taken not to sever any large veasela. A
Bimikr incision ia then made in the exposed muscles, still avoiding
the blood-vessels. Should there be any bleeding from a large vessel
it mnst be restrained by torsion or hgatare. All traces of blood
having been removed with bibulons paper, the intestines and
mesentery are drawn out carefnUy and placed on the projecting
cork. The animal must lie supine. The intestine is covered with
bibulous paper, and a thin "cover " glass placed on the mesentery.
Tlie whole ia kept moist by the frequent addition of a few drops of
a ^ per cent, solution of chloride of sodium. The mesentery should
be exposed for two or three hours before required for observation.
3. The tongue was first used by Cohnheim. The animal in
this esperiment must also be curarized. A plate, similar to that
last described, is used. The tongue is drawn out and ligatured
near its root. Forty-eight hours after, the ligature ia removed, and
the circulation generally recovers in a short time. Dr. Mitchell
Bruce aaggests interposing a piece of leather between the ligature
and the tongue, to prevent injury to the organ. The animal ia
placed on its back, the tongue dra-wu forwards, spread over the thin
glass, and secured in position by meana of small pins. The dorsum
of the orgaa will be directed apwarde.
4. The tail of the tadpole can be arranged with great iiacihty,
and affords a most interesting object. Dr. Klein recommends
cnrariziug the animal hy placing it in a moderately strong solution
of curara until motionless. It is then placed on an ordinary glass
Blip, the tail covered with a thin glass, and kept moist by the
addition of salt solution when necessary.
II. The examination should be commenced with a low power,
80 that a moderate-aized vein can lie easily selected. The low
power is changed for a No. 7 Hartnack, corresponding to an
English quarter inch. The chosen vessel muat now be closely
watched.
In every vessel, so long aa the parts are natural, the central
part of the current ia occupied by coloured, and the periphery by
colourless, corpuacles. The coloured pass along with their long
axes pardlel to the long axis of the vessel, whilst the colourless
assume a spheroidal fonn, and move more slowly, or, as Dr. Burden
Sanderson nas aptly Ukened them, to " ronnd pebblea in a shallow
but rapid stream."
A column of fluid may be supposed to consist of several strata,
and the friction of the fluid against the wall of the vessel causes
the external layer to move more slowly ; hence the slow onward
progress of the colourless, and the quicker transit of the coloured.
Aft^ a while the relation will be seen to he altered ; the vessel
T
w t
Oh IHapedesis.
I
I
becomes filled with coloured corpoaclee, which have a tendency to
reach the estemal layers of the fluid, whilst the colourless are
adhering to the walls of the vessel. Frequently they are loosened
and swept onwards by the current, but many remain stationary, and
in a short time elevataona will be observed on the outer aide of the
wall of the vessel These gradually increase in size at the expense
of the corpuscles on the interior, nntd at last the perfect corpuscles
are seen wandering away from tie vessel into the tissues by means
of their delicate hyaline processes or pseudopodia.
III. We will BOW consider the fallacies, and the various
explanations, of these phenomena.
Fallacies. — One great 8om-c« of error is the rupture of some
vessel accidentally or Irom operation. The blood-corpuscles spread
over the field of the microscope, and a ialse impression is conveyed
to the mind of a superficial observer, viz. that they have escaped
fiom the vessel under observation; but careful focussing will soon
reveal the mistake. Very often a small vessel may partly corer, or
be concealed by, a corpuscle. Again, the observer imagines he sees
a corpuscle emerging from the vessel ; but no errors of this descrip-
tion can ever be committed if the following simple rule be rigidly
observed, viz. that all corpuscles on their passage through the
capillary walls consist of three distinct portions — one on the
exterior, another on the interior, and a third or neck uniting
them ; in fact, a distinct constriction should be seen.
Explanaiions. — Observers do not agree on the manner in
which the corpuscles escape from the unruptured vesseb.
Cobnheim considers that by virtue of the amoeboid motion
they possess, their exit ia readily effected through the false stomata
between the endothelial elements of the vessel. He also states that
the molecular arrangement of the conatituente of the endotheUum
ifl altered ; hence it becomes sticky or viscid, and the onward course
of corpuscles is retarded. Billroth behevea that it is due to some
chemical or some molecular changes producing softening of the
vascular walls.
Cohnheim stated that pressure assisted materially in the process ;
but if the atteria-media of a rabbit's ear be exposed, the corre-
sponding vein opened, and distilled water injected through the
artery at a lower pressure than that of the blood, it will produce
inflammation, although no fluid has been expressed irom the vessels.
The introduction into the circulation of a small quantity of
2 per cent, solution of common salt will also produce an abundant
migration.
Strieker and Prussak conaiiler the process due to an " active
state " of the walls of the vessels, which consist of a homogeneous
extensile protoplaam, and adduco aa proo& that all colloid sub-
stances allow other colloid substances to pass through without their
Om IMipifrwff
SS
integrity bong broken, » jvmd lijGialiini, and hait^ fifcofeed tW
piooesB to tiie pnaBige of bog's blood-corpogdes throogli die mifecli
smaller inteistioeB of a fine filla: Ericfasm thinks that the nemos
and other tissues ha^e an important infinence.
In silver stained pgepaniions the ooipnscles alirays lie in the
inter-endotheiial fines.
The coloured oofpnadeSy which can also be obeerved to migrate,
are either taken np by the colonilesB corpuscles, or are disint^rated,
producing pigmentatian. ..
ly. Intimately connected with this subject is the origin of pus.
We now know that migrated Uood-corpnscles form the chief
source; but, if we carefully review the subject, we shall agree
with Dr. Payne's remarks on the subject before the Medical Micro-
scopical Society, yiz. that **Virchow's idea of the origm of
pus, though now old-feshioned, is fer from being overturned by
tlohnheim," for the observations of Strieker and Becklinghausen
go directly to prove origin, in part at least, by proliferation of
connective-tissue corpuscles.
( 84 )
NEW BOOKS, WITH SHOET NOTICES.
On Spectrum Anali/ei* as applied to Microecopical OhnervatioaK :
the subject of a Lecture delieered at Ike South Ijondon Microscopical
Oliih. By W. T. Suffolk, F.R.M.8. London: John Browning,
Strand, 1873. — It will etrite the reader with souio aBtouiahment that
this book has not been noticed before, but the fact is that it was sent
to the Editor's former address, and was there detained. Hence the
delay. There is not of course very much to bo fluid in critique, for
the work is extremely elementary in character ; still, in the absence
of any cheap essay on apectroscopie operations, IJie microscopist
will find in it all that he requires to make hiin understand the
construction and principles of action of the epectroscope, and to
enable him to perform a number of osperimeuts with accuracy.
Besides this, it really contains in the series of plates that accompaay
it, the spectra of most of the substances that have been examined op to
the data of its publication. It \a of course to be regretted that the
colours of the spectrum were not in all cases given, but this is a
trifling fault to find, the more so when the cheapness of the little
volume is concerned. Besides, the frontiapiece consists of well-
onlonred spectra of the sun, of ten. of the elements, of one of coal-gas,
of one of Siriua, and of one of th« nebula. The author first gives a
popular account of the peculiarities of spectroscopy, and explains, we
thuik very eatisfiictorily, what is a puzzle to some people, viz, the
peculiarity of the bright lines becoming black ones under certain
conditions. Hia explanation of the apparatus is clear also, and is of
course confined to mioro-spoctroeoopy; and his account of the different
spectra is lucid and to the point. Lastly, ho gives a useful list of the
several papers which have been contributed on the subject of micro-
spectral work to English journals. We have no feult to find with,
but a good deal of praise to award to, Mr. Suffolk fur his useful little
volume.
On Uie Origin and Metamorphosis of Insects. By Sir John Lubbock,
Bart., MJ*., F.B.S., with numerous illustrations. London : MacmilLm
and Co. 187i. — Of the many workers on the subject of entomology
which we possess in this country, thero is none who has a greater
right to come forward as one thoroughly qualified to speak on the
complex questions relating to the development of insects than Sir John
Lubbock. We fancy that many people, even among those witli
zoological taatea, are not aware how thoroughly qualified is the author
of the present treatise for the work he has taken in hand. We ttiinlr,
therefore, that he was quite wise in publishing a list of Lis papers on
this subject. And from this list we sec that ho has written no less
than thirty-five valuable memoirs on this subject, many of them being
contributions to the Boyal Society of London, and all extending over a
period of twenty years. It may be said, then, that wliatever the views
he expresses, they have not been hastily formed; and from the nature
of hia writings, having to do chiefly with the structure and development
of insects, they are entitled to every confidence. For ourselves, we
must say that wo have road the work with a great deal of pleasure,
NEW BOOKS, WITH BHOBT NOTIOSS.
li from the tnarkod clcamcB^ of tLe writei' as an instructor, and
1 the exoellent aeries of illustrations which, it presents. But it
would indeed be very poor criticism which confined ita observationB
by such limits as these. There is a philosophical tone about the
Tolame which is its highest quality, ajid it is this, we thinfa, which will
be mast highly valued by the thinking reader, more especially if his
tendencies be Darwinian. In fact, the author has tried the very
difficult task of atteniptiug a Eyetem of classification which will show
the force of the theory of evolution us it applies to the class lusecta.
He hna endeavoured to show how the class was originally developed,
and then to trace out ita several raodifications, and its relation to the
neighbouring claeaea. And this he does, it appears to the writer, in a
very successful fashion. Indeed, Sir J. Lubbock's appears to be un-
questionably the most successful attempt that has been made in the
application of Darwinism to the group he has taken in hand. He
attempts to do for this group what Fritz MiiUer has so splendidly
performed for the class Crustacea. Bat besides this geneml feature of
the work, it is interesting from the number of remarkable passages it
contains referring to the more peculiar habits of certain of the group.
We aboil quote one or two remarkable casea, and not the least
important is that relating to the aolitory hf menoptcra. " The solitary
bee or wasp," he says, " forms a cell generally in the ground, places
in it a sufGciont amount of food, lays an egg, and doses the cell. In
the case of bees the food consists of honey ; in that of wasps, the
larra requires aniinal food, and the mother therefore places a certain
L.Bumber of insects in the cell, each species having its own especial
r^ey, some selecting small caterpillars, some beetles, some spiders.
F Cereeris Oajiretticida, as its name denotes, attacks beetles belonging to
the genus Bnprestis. Now, if the Cerceris were to kill the beetle
before placing it in the cell, it would decay, and the young lai'va
when hatched would find only a mass of corruption. On the other
hand, if the beetle were buried nninjurod, in its struggle to escape it
would be almost certain to destroy the egg. The wasp has, however,
the instinct of slinging il» prey in llie centre of the nervoug tyatem,
thus depriving it of motion, and let us hope of Buffering, but not of
life ; consequently when the young larva leaves the egg it finds a
sufficient store of wholesome food." A not less remarkable, though
more questionable fact, is that relating to the habits of Clavigera and
Ants ; but this we may pass over. And indeed, many other equally
remarkable instances might be quoted if our space was illimitable.
We shall therefore pasa on to what we consider the important part of
Hie little book before us. It is that relating to the origin of the
Insecta ; and this is of course a most difficult problem for the naturalist.
As the author shows, Palteont^logy supplies Tory little evidence
indeed. As for ae it goes, however, it supports the idea that " the
Orthoptera and Neuroptcra are tho most ancient orders," though it
affords small testimony as to which is the older of these two groups ;
and beyond this it is valueless as a means of research. It is, then,
upon embryology and development that the author rests his several
ciraeliisions ; for he points out that very many cases occur where
iusocts ore related in early life which have no connection whatever ii
1
HEW BOOKS, WITH
^V S6
^^M the mature condition. Sir J, Lnbbock gives a plate wliich illustrates
^^B this in the samo manner as Eaeckel doee ivith regard tu Cruetocea ;
^^H Bud thia Tory circumstance will sliovs' how difficult it is to place before
^^1 our readers any fair explanation uf the views of the author; for in
^^B many cases he simply points to the woodcut as bearing out bis view of
^^M the close relatiuBBhip, and in these pages of course we cannot follow
^^B him. He says that the stag-beetle, the dragon-fly, the moth, the bee,
^^U the ant, the gnat, and the grasshopper, although they differ much from
^^K each other, being dissimilar in size, form, colour, and in habits of life,
^^H have been proved by those naturalists who have followed Savigny's
^^H method to be "constructed on ono common plan." And further, our
^^H author shows that other groups, as, for instance, Crustacea and
^^V Arachnida, are " fundamentally similar." In the author's words, " wo
^^^ find in many of the principal groups of insects, that greatly as they
differ from one another in their mitture condition, when they leave
the egg they more nearly resemble the typical insect type, consisting
of a head, a three-segmented thorax, with three pairs of legs, and
a many-jointed abdomen, often with anal appendages. Now, is there
any mature animal which answers to this description ? We need not
have been surprised if thia type, through which it wuuld appear that
insects must have passed so many ages since (for winged Neuroptera
had been found in the carboniferous strata), had long ago become
cstinct. Tet it is not so. Tha interesting genus Campodea still
lives ; it inhabits damp earth, and closely resembles the larva of
Oliloeon, constituting, indeed, a. type which occuia in many orders of
lecte. It is true that the month-parts of Campodea do not resemble
either the strongly mandibulate form which prevails among the larvre
of Colooptera, Orthoptera, Neuroptera, Hymenoptera, Xiepidoptera, or
the suctorial type of the Homoptera and Keteroptera. It is, however,
not the leas interesting or significant on that account, since, as I have
elBewhere* pointed out, its mouth-parts arc intermediate between the
indibulate and haustellate types, a fact which seems to me moat
ggestive." From these observations we gather that the author sup-
poses the group of insects, both mandibulate and haustoUate, to have
arisen from ancestors somewhat resembling the Campodea type ; and
hence this form is, as he states, of " remarkable interest, since it is
the living representative of a primeval type, from which not only the
Collembola and Thysanura, but the other great orders of insects have
derived their origin," We think that in regard to the minor question
of which particular form the class sprang from — always admitting
that they did spring &om some one form^the author's ideas have
■re in them than those of Professor Haockel, though of course every
weight must he given to the distinguished German's opinions. We
may Gum up the author's opiuions expressed fully and clearly in this
interesting and well-illustrated little volume, by stating that he
believes the insects generally are descended &om forms lilie the present
existing genus Campodea ; and finally, that tbe^o in their turn have
been derived from a typo rosombling the living genus Lindia.
' 'Liuniean Joiunnl,' vnl, xi.
( 87 )
PEOGEESS OF MICEOSCOPICAL SCIENCE.
Pie American Hydrce, — A note has been read before the Society
of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia by Professor Leidy on the two
species of Hydra common in tie neighbourhood of Philadelphia.
One is of a light brownish hue and is found on the imder side of
stones and on aquatic plants in the Delaware and Schuylkill rivers,
and in ditches conmiunicating with the same. Preserved in an aqua-
rium, after some days the animals will often elongate the tentacula
for several inches in length. The green Hydra is foimd in ponds and
springs, attached to aquatic plants. It has from six to eight tentacles,
which never elongate to the extent they do in the brown Hydra, In
winter this animal is frequently observed with the male organs de-
veloped just below the head as a mammal-like process on each side of
the body. He had not been able to satisfy himself that these Hydros
were dfiffierent from H. fusca and H viridis of Europe. Professor
Agassiz had indicated similar coloured forms in Massachusetts and
Connecticut, under the names of H, camea and H gracilis. Of the
former he remarks that it has very short tentacles, and if this is correct
under all circumstances, it must be different from our brown Hydra,
which can elongate its arms for three inches or more.
BemarJcs on Adinophrys Sol, — Some observations made by Professor
Leidy at one of the recent meetings of the Society of Natural Sciences
of Philadelphia are not without interest.
Professor Leidy, after describing the structure and habits of this
curious rhizopod, said that he had recently observed it in a condition
which he had not seen described. He had accidentally foimd two
individuals including between them a finely-granular rayless sphere
nearly as large as the animals themselves. These measured, indepen-
dently of the rays, 0*064 mm. in diameter; the included sphere
* 06 mm. He supposed that he had been so fortunate as to find
two individuals of Actinophrys in conjunction with the production of
an ovum.
Preserving the animals for observation, on returning after an
absence of tliee hours, the animals were observed connected by a
broad isthmus including the granular sphere reduced to haK its
original diameter. Two hours later the granular sphere had melted
in the isthmus, leaving behind what appeared to be a large oil globule
and half-a-dozen smaller ones. The isthmus in the former time
measured ^^3^ mm., at the later time -^^ mm. Shortly afterwards, the
isthmus elongated and contracted to 3V ^^^^^* ^^ ^^ ^^^) while the
right half, retaining the oil globules, remained as thick as before.
At the same time the animals became flattened at the opposite poles.
The latter subsequently became depressed, so that the animals assiuned
a reniform outline. The isthmus, now more rapidly narrowed and
elongated, became a mere thread, and finally separated about one hour
from the last two hours indicated. The oil globules were retained in
I
PBOGRSSS OP MICBOSCOPICAl, SCIBNPK.
the right-hflnd indiviilual, which, with the remaining projection of the
isthmus, appealed broadly coniforra in outline. In the left-hand indi-
vidual all remains of the isthmus at once disappeared, and the animal
appeared reniform in outline, but now coutraotiDg on the same side it
oasumed the biscuit form. The constriction rapidly increased, and in
thirty minntes from the time of twparation fi-om the right-hand indi-
vidual it divided into two separate animals presenting Ihe ordinary
appearance of A. Sol. Thus this second division took place in an
opposite direction from the first. The right-hand individual, retaining
the oil gliibnles apparently unchanged, more slowly assumed the reni-
form outline, and then became constricted all around. The cnnatriction
elongated to an isthmOB, in the centre of which were the oil globules.
Three hours after the separation of the right-hand animal, the isthmus
was narrowed to about half the diameter of the two new individnals
which were abont to be formed. At this moment other engagements
obliged me to leave the examination of the animals. 8ii hours after,
in the onimalonle cage, I observed only half-a-dozen individuals of
the A. Sol.
The Fresh-water Algce of Nortli ^menVd.— Students of our fresh-
water alga) will find in the beautiful and interesting work of Dr. H. C,
Wood, jun., says the ' American Naturalist,' ' A Contribution to the
History of the Frosh-watcr A]g» of North America,' a ready means of
identifying their specimens. It is a large quarto volume, with many
cDlonred plates, and ia taken from the Smithsonian GontribationB to
Knowledge.
Develc^Tnent of Ferns teithmt Fertiluation. — At a Inte meeting of
the American Academy of Arts and Sciences, Prof, Gray communicated
a paper by his former pupil. Dr. W. G, Forlow, now in Germany, on
the development of ferns from the prothallium irrespective of fertili-
zation, by a sort of parthenogenesis. The growUi observed took
place, not from an archegonium, but from some other port of the
prothallium.
Migration of White Blood Corpuscles. — Dr. Thomas read, before
the (Jerman Association of Naturalisls at Wiesbaden, a paper on the
migration of the white corpuscles into the lymphatics of the tongue of
a frog, which is thus abstracted by the 'Lancet': — He injected the
lymphatics of the living animal with an extremely dilute solution, not
containing more than n^^th to gfl'^o th part of nitrate of silver, and
found that, with certain precautions, this did not lead to stasis of the
blood in blood-vessels, but only to a lively eiodus of the white cor-
puscles from their interior. AAer the lapse of some time, when the
parts had begun to recover from the injorious effect of the injection,
he was enabled to observe the re-entrance of the eorpuacles into the
lymphatic vessels, through certain stomata in their walls, now marked
and rendered distinct by a precipitate of the silver salt. In a second
Beries of researches the lymphatice were injected with a dilute emulsion
of cinnabar, in a J per cent, solution of common salt. The cinnabar
was in part deposited in the stomata of the lymphatics, and partly
passed through thero, and was deposited in the tissues in tlie form of
PB0QKES8 OF mOBOBOOPIOAL Sd&KOB.
lall, round, cloucly patches. The evidcuco of the identity of the
■'Btomntn, brought into view by means of the cinnabiir, with those
rendered evident by the nitrate of Bilvor, is obtained by observing
their peculiar grouping, and by the subsequent isjectiou of nitrate
of silver into the some vessels. The injection of the cinuabar
CBuaea very little distuibanco of tho oirculation. If a lively exodus of
the white corpuacles from the blood-Tesaela bo produced by making an
nbrosion of the surface, the migrating cells quickly make their appear-
ance in the stomata of the lymphatics marked out by the cinnabar.
They theu take up the particles of the cinnabar into their interior,
which, causes them to lose their activity and accumulate in tho stomata.
They then appear in the form of cauliflower excrescences, projecting
into the interior of the lymphiitics, which gradually break up into
their constituent cisnabar-holding cells. These may be traced into
the larger vessels, and Irom them into the blood. In these researches,
a remaj'kable regularity, or uniformity, in tho track pursued by the
white corpuscles, was observed. They pass away from the blood-
vessels nearly at right angles into the tissue, their course, however,
being in a series of short zigzags. They all appear to travel about
the same pace.
Persistence of Sens&ility in the Peripheric Ends of Cut Nerves. — -
A paper on this by MM. Arloiug and Tripier, is thus abstracted in
the ' Medical Eecord,* Junfi 17th, by Dr. B. MacDowal :— 1. The facial
and the spinal nerves of solipeda and rodents possess recurrent sensi-
bility OS well as those of camivora.
2. To find recnrrent sensibility most readily, one must go to the
periphery,
3. The peripheric end of the branches of the trigeminus nervo ie
sensible. This sensibility is somewhat difQcuIt to demonstrate; still
it exists.
4. The peripheric end of the nerves of limbs is also sensible. The
sensibility may, however, disappear towards the nerve trunks,
6. In any cose, the sensibility of the peripheric end is due to the
presence of nervo tubes, the relations of which with the trophic and
perceptive centres have not been interrupted by the section.
6. The absence of these tubes implies sensibility of the peripheric
end.
7. These tubes proceed from tho fifth pair, for the facial ; from
neighbouring nerves, and occasionBlly from nerves of tho opposite
side, for sensitive nerves ; from neighbouring and homologous nerves,
for tho miied nerves.
8. These recurrent nerves rise more or less high in the trunk of
the nerve to which they are connected; their number diminishes from
the periphery to the centre.
t). The return of these fibres may take place before the termination
of the nerves, but tho termination is the part where it is made by
^^^ 10. For several reasons, MM. Arloing and Tripier think that the
^^KWneibility of the perijihorie end belongs to all nerves ; and that it
90 PBOGBBSS OF MIOBOSGOPICAL SOIEKOB.
The Condition of Heart and Kidney in an obscure form of Disease^
which lately occurred in America, is thns described by Dr. L. Curtis :
— ^ The piece of heart presented on the outside simple atheromatous
and calcareous degeneration. The muscular fibres appeared healthy.
The kidney presented a mottled appearance, part being of a cream-
colour, other portions being of a natural colour, except much paler. I
took two small pieces of this kidney and placed them in a weak solu-
tion of chromic acid, te harden. After a day or two, I cut some thin
sections, both in a longitudinal and a transverse direction, and stained
them in an alkaline solution of carmine. On examining the sections
with the microscope, the whole field appeared confused, and it was only
after repeated and prolonged examination that I was enabled to make
out anything at all satisfactory. This was particularly the ease over
the greyer portions. The cauL of this indistinctness was the infiltr^
tion of the organ with a granular substance. In some pkces this gra-
nular substance was replaced by round bodies resembling, in sise and
appearance, pus corpuscles ; in other places there were collections of
round bodies from one-third te one-half the diameter of the former ;
neither of these collections had well-defined boundaries. The edges
of some of the sections, which were extremely thin, showed, where the
granular material had been washed out, that the connectiye tissue of
the kidney was somewhat thickened, and contained many more mus-
cular points than in health. The Malpighian tufks were, in many
places, contracted down inte little compact knots, of cicatricial-like
tissue. The uriniferous tubules were filled with a granular material ;
the cells lining them had lost their distinctive characteristics, and were
cloudy and opaque. Most of the straight tubules were wasted to mere
irregular, nodulated cords. These appearances do not correspond
altogether with any specimen that I have met before, or with anjr de-
scription that I have seen published. I should dislike, at present, te
give a decided* opinion as to their nature ; they correspond, however,
more closely with what Eindfleisch calls ceUuIar hypertrophy of the
connective tissue, than anything else with which I am acquainted."
On Tube-huilding Amphipoda, — ^In * Silliman's American Journal '
for June, 1874, Mr. S. I. Smith gives the foDowing account He
says, " In examining recently an alcoholic specimen of a species of
Xenoclea, I noticed a peculiar opaque glandular structure filling a
large portion of the third and fourth pairs of thoracic legs, which
in most, if not all, the non-tube -building Amphipoda are wholly oc-
cupied by muscles. A further examination shows that the terminal
segment (dactylus) in these legs is not acute and claw-like, but trun-
cated at the tip, and apparently tubular. In this species, a large
cylindrical portion of the gland lies along each side of the long basal
segment, and these two portions uniting at the distal end pass through
the ischial and along the posteriojr side of the moral and carpal seg-
ments, and doubtless connect with the tubular dactylus. There can be
no doubt that these are the glands which secrete the cement with which
the tubes are built, and that these two pairs of legs are specialized for
that purpose. A hasty examination revealed a similar structure of the
corresponding legs in Amphithoe maculata, PtUocheirus pinguis, Cera-
PROGBESS OF MIOBOSOOPICAL SOIENOB. 91
pu8 rubricomis, Byhlis Gaimardi, and a species of Ampelisca. In all
these except the last two a very large proportion of the gland is in the
basal segment. In the Amphithoe this segment is thickened and the
gland is in the middla In the Cerapus it is very broad and almost
entirely filled by the gland, with only very slender muscles through
the middle, and the orifice in the dactylns is not at the very tip, but
sub- terminal on the posterior side. In the Ptilocheirm the gland forms
three longitudinal masses in the basal segment and is also largely
developed in the moral and carpal segments. The dactylus is long
and slender and the orifice sub-terminal. In Ampelisca and Byhlis
(which, like Haploops, are tube-building genera) the meral segments
of the specialized legs are nearly as large as the basal, and contain a
proportionally large part of the gland. In these genera the remark-
able elongation of the two distal segments in the third and fourth
pairs of legs is perhaps a special adaptation to enable them to reach
back over the deep epimera,
Betrogression of the Graafian Follicle. — M. Slavjansky has re-
cently written a paper in the 'Archives do Physiologic,' which is
thus abstracted in the 'Medical Eecord/ June 15th: — "1. The
Graafian follicles are developed from the primordial follicles, and
acquire a greater or less degree of maturity during the whole of life,
from the first month after birth till about the age of 40. 2. The
greater part of the follicles are not ripe, do not burst, and do not
discharge their contents, but undergo atresia, presenting an almost
complete analogy with that of the formation of the corpora lutea.
8. The development and maturation of the Graafian follicles are not
produced periodically in a regular manner, and no connection exists
between them and menstruation. 4. Menstruation constitutes a
physiological phenomenon, quite independent of the development and
maturation of the follicles. 5. The rupture of follicles more or less
mature always bears a certain relation to congestions of tho genital
organs, produced by any cause whatever. 6. There exist certain
maladies (ague, poisonings, &c.) 'which produce atresia of the follicles
at different periods of their developments, after a parenchymatous
inflammation of the ovary."
The Termination of Nerves in the Lips. — Dr. Pallidino (Bull. delV
Assoc, dei Natural di Napoli) states that in the lips of the horse, which
are richly supplied with nerves, many isolated, non-medullated fibres
run from the subcutaneous connective tissue into the deeper layers of
the epithelium, when they have a straight course and terminate by
free extremities after they have traversed the deepest layer of the
pavement epithelium, occasionally exhibiting a terminal dilatation or
enlargement. Pallidino has not been able to discover any connection
of the nerve fibres with peculiar stellate cells of the rete Malpighii, as
described a year or two ago by Langerhaus.
Distinction between Mammalian and Beptilian Blood. — The * Ame-
rican Journal of Medical Sciences ' says that Dr. B. M. Bertolet, M.D.,
Microscopist to the Philadelphia Hospital, refers to the great difficulty
VOL. XII. H
92 PROGRESS OF MIOROSGOPICAL SGIENGE.
which is experienced in determining the kind of blood, by the ordinary
methods of examination in medico-legal cases.
If examined with the microscope, as it is ordinarily found in the
dried state, the corpuscles are shrivelled and deformed. The addition
of water extracts the colouring matter, and though it causes them to
swell up, does not restore them to their original condition. It causes
the red corpuscles to lose their bi-concave shape and approach the
spherical. The oval disks of reptiles, birds, &c., lose something of
their peculiar shape, and become more like mammalian blood.
In moistening such blood he uses a solution of sulphate of soda,
or, better still, slightly acidulated pure glycerine. This preparation
'" is carefully irrigated with a properly prepared alcoholic solution of
guaiacum resin: then, when a very small quantity of the ethereal
solution of the peroxide of hydrogen (ozonic ether) is introduced
beneath the glass coyer," the red corpuscles are changed to an uniform
colour, which varies in the different corpuscles, '' from a light sapphire
to a deep indigo blue."
In the nucleated corpuscles of birds, reptiles, &c., however, " the
nucleus is seen as a sharply-defined, dark blue body, while the protoplasm
surrounding it assumes a more delicate violet hue.*^ The distinction
between the two kinds of blood, by this means, is so plain as to be
evident even to an ordinary gentleman of the jury.
What Pvs is noL — The following interesting paper is contributed
to the * Medical Examiner ' (Chicago, U.S A.) for April, by Dr. Lester
Curtis, M.D. : —
'' A few years ago Conheim published some observations on the
white blood corpuscle, which confirmed the older observations of
Waller and Beale, and called attention to them ; for previous to tiiis
time they had attracted little notice, especially on the continent of
Europe. These observations showed that, in inflammation, many of
the whit^ blood corpuscles pass through the walls of the capillaries,
and appear outside of them. The corpuscles outside the vessels
continue their amoebiform movements, and possessing the power of
locomotion, were called * wandering cells.* (?)
'* At the time of these observations it was well known that the
fresh pus corpuscle also had an amoebiform movement similar to
that of the white blood corpuscle. Pus occurs as the result of inflam-
mation ; and where there is inflammation there are large numbers of
wandering cells. Conheim concluded, therefore, that pus corpuscles
came from the wandering cells, and, as the wandering cells came from
the white blood corpuscles, therefore that a pus corpuscle was a white
blood corpuscle. He rejected as erroneous the previous opinion that
pus could be derived from any other source l3ian the white blood
corpuscles.
" Conheim's conclusion, that the pus corpuscle and the white blood
corpuscle are identical, has been widely accepted. It is due partly to
the acceptation of this theory that the name * leucocyte ' has arisen — a
name wluch is applied indiscriminately to the white blood corpuscle,
the lymph corpuscle, the wandering cell, and the pus corpuscle.
Some, in publishing their acceptation of the theory, have added the
PROGRESS OP MICROSCOPICAL SCIENCB. 93
saving epithet * morphologically ' to the * identical* evidently implying
some donl^t, after all, as to its correctness.
" In spite, however, of the general acceptation of the opinion, it
appears to me to be inconsistent with certain well-known facts. It is
my purpose to present some of these facts, and show wherein they are
inconsistent with the theory. I shall consider the subject from
Conheim's standpoint : supposing that all pus originates from white
blood corpuscles, although I consider the proof of such sole origin as
far from complete.
'^ In the first place, it by no means follows that, because a pus
corpuscle is derived from a white blood corpuscle, it is identical with
a white blood corpuscle. The white blood corpuscles are mere stages
of growth, just as a chrysalis, or a tadpole, is a stage of growth.
They have no particular function of their own, as, for instance, the
red corpuscles have ; they only exist in order that they may be deve-
loped into something else. If this is the case, it is not only supposable
that, under the changed conditions of nutrition to which the wandering
cells are subjected outside the vessels, they should undergo a change ;
but it is di£&cult to understand how they should continue to be the
same that they were within the vessels.
*^ Mere similarity of form and appearance is, as we all know, one
of the least reliable of resemblances ; and the fact that a pus cor-
puscle appears to be like a white blood corpuscle can surely go but a
short way towards establishing their identity. The sporulcs of fungi
can often be crushed, and l£e softer, central portion can be freed
from the envelope. When this is done, the central portion of the
sporule may resemble a white blood corpuscle so closely in every
particular, except, perhaps, in size, that even an experienced observer
would be unable to distinguish them apart. Would anyone, on this
account, consider them to be identical ? There must be other resem-
blances between two bodies besides form and appearance merely, to
render them identical. They must correspond in all essential parti-
culars ; and if they differ in any essential particular, they plainly are
not identical. Now let us see if pus corpuscles correspond in all essen-
tial particulars with white blood corpuscles.
" The white blood corpuscles of every healthy person correspond
in every particular with which we are acquainted, with the white
blood corpuscles of every other person ; and while there may be, and
probably are, points in which the corpuscles of every individual differ
fromi those of eveiy other individual, these differences are so slight
that the corpuscles of one person may be substituted for those of
another, by transfusion of blood, without disturbance of function.
If, then, pus corpuscles are the same thing as white blood corpuscles,
all pus which has not a specific origin should be similar. I need
hardly say, however, that this is notably not the case. Mo one would
suppose for an instant that the pus from an ordinary abscess, and
that from a purulent ophthalmia were the same. Yet the bland
and unirritating pus from the abscess, and the highly contagious pus
j&om the purulent ophthalmia, may have had their origin in a simple,
and perhaps similar irritation ; and the white blood corpuscles of tho
H 2
94 FBOGBESS OF MIGBOSCOPIOAL SOIENOB.
two indiyidnals may preserve their similarity at the same time that
the pus shows snch great differences. Can things which differ &om
each other both be similar to the same thing ?
" Again, the physiological action of pus differs from that of a white
blood corpuscle. White blood corpuscles may easily, and with safety,
be transferred from the vessels of one individual to those of another ;
but if pus is injected into the vessels, the result is a serious disturb-
ance. The experiment has been tried of injecting pus into the veins
of an animal ; a febrile action, dangerous to the l3e of the animal, is
the result ; and if some of the blood of this animal is injected into the
veins of a second animal, a still severer disturbance than in the first
animal is set up. If the blood of the second is injected into the veins
of a third, a similar disturbance is set up ; and so of a fourth, and so
on. The introduction of pus into the veins of the animal has given
rise to profound changes in its blood — an effect differing widely from
the harmless result of the introduction of the blood corpuscle.
^^ Again, the white blood corpuscles can become organized, aad
form tissue ; or, at least, the wandering cells outside the vessels can
become organized; and it is a well-known fact, that from these
wandering cells all inflammatory new formations arise. Some, indeed,
maintain that &om such wandering cells are produced all the new
growth of connective tissue, and all the new formations in the body.
Pus, however, cannot become organized, as anyone who has observed
the mischief done by a small quantity of pus beneath the periosteum
of a finger can well appreciate.
'* If pus, then, originated from a white blood corpuscle, it has lost
the power of organizing ; and who can tell how great is the difference
which has resulted from that loss ?
*^ Again, if the pus from our purulent ophthalmia, which may have
arisen from a simple irritation, be introduced beneath the lid of a well
person, it will, in all probability, set up a disease similar to that in
the eye from which it was taken. If a white blood corpuscle had the
property of setting up disease, what surgeon would be skilful enough
to avoid purulent ophthalmia? The pus from purulent ophthalmia,
then, has not only lost the power of organizing, but has acquired
noxious properties, which render it hurtful to the person in whom it
originated, and dangerous to those with whom it may come in contact.
Can any two things differ more widely than the blood corpuscle and
this pus — the one a useful and necessary part of the body, and the
other a breeder of disease, and an object to be dreaded ?
*' In what I have said, granting what I do not believe, that all pus
originates from white blood corpuscles, I have tried to show : —
** 1st. That white blood corpuscles, being in a transition stage, we
have no right to expect that, in the changed condition of nutrition to
which they are subjected, outside the vessels, they would continue to
be the same that they were within the vessels.
" 2nd. That mere similarity of appearance was insufficient evidence
of identity.
" 3rd. That different samples of pus are unlike each other ; which
they would not be if they were white blood corpuscles.
PROaRESS OF MIOROSCOPIOAL SOIENOE. 95
'' 4th. That pus differs from white blood corpuscles.
<' a. — In the disturbance which it sets up when introduced in these
vessels.
" 6. — In the loss of the power of organizing.
" c. — In the frequent acquisition of contagious properties.
"These are some, though by no means all, the reasons why I
consider that pus is not the same thing as a white blood corpuscle.
If I have established the point, it will be something gained; if I
have failed, I would esteem it a favour to be shown my error."
Structure of Boehmeria nivea. — The structure of the aerial stem of
Bcehmeria niveau a plant belonging to the nettle family, yielding the
well-known China grass or Ehea fibre, was described by Mr. H.
Pocklington, at a late meeting of the Leeds Naturalists' Field Club,
as follows : — The central pith is peculiarly white and glistening to
the naked eye. This is doubtless due to the excessive tenuity of the
walls of the cells composing the medulla, to their being devoid of all
proteinaceous contents, and to their inclusion of nothing but air when
in the dry state. Most of the light incident upon them when viewed
in situ will be totally reflected from the surfaces of the air within the
cells, and thus give them the appearance of being illuminated by a
clear lunar light from within. The medullary sheath is well
developed, and consists, excluding the ordinary woody fibre, of large
triple-spiral vessels, boldly -barred hothrenchyma and long cylindi'ical
ceils containing a yellowish fluid soluble in alcohol. The fibre of the
spiral vessels is strong, and easily separates from the primal wall of
the cell, and the " barred " vessels are somewhat remarkable for their
coarseness when contrasted with the vessels of the woody zone. The
yellowish oil has not been investigated as yet, but appears to be a
chlorophylloid product. The woody zone is well developed, and is
remarkable for the nature of the cells of which it is composed. The
normal spindle-shaped inactive much-thickened wood fibres are here
replaced by thin- walled prosenchymatous cells containing, beside pro-
teinaceous matter, large quantities of starch granules, and by less
obviously wood- cells, minutely porous and also containing starch.
Starch-bearing wood-cells have been described by Hassall* and myself f
as occurring in certain roots and rhizomes, but they have not, so far as I
know, been hitherto described as occurring in aerial stems. The occur-
rence of them in roots is entirely unnoticed in our text-books, and is
unknown to many botanists of extensive knowledge. The medullary
rays are not evident in transverse section, but may be easily recognized
in longitudinal sections. They are very much longer than broad,
sometimes thickened, and contain little beside sap and starch. The
bothrenchyma is interesting. The pits are oval, sometimes complete
pores, and in the centre of a discoid, rhomboidal, or polygonal ternary
deposit, with an irregular spiral of secondary deposit running between
them. These are in fact very good examples of what are known as
bordered pits, but must not be confused with the glandular pleuren-
chyma of conifers. The starch granules are varied in shape. The
♦ * Adulteration DetecteJ.' t ' Pharmaceutical Joiurnal/ 1872-3.
96
PBOOBZB8 or WDBOeOOPIOAI. SOIEHOZ.
larger number are round or civuiil, sgme are semi-muasel ahaped, a
few &lmoet bocilliform ; many are compunnds of two, most are single
granules. All give a black cross with considerable distinotoess by
polarized light. The cortical Injere are chiefly remarkable for the
libor fibres which conBtitute the China grass oi commerce, and the
Hmall ephteraphides that accompany these linearly. The liber eella
are, as shown long since by Quekett, very much stouter than those of
flax, and are easily to be distinguished from them by means of a power
of 300 or 400 diameters, the traDsverse markings in the two fibres
being very difierent. The China grass fibres are very tnugb, their
walls are considerably thickened, hut they have a large central cavity
filled with a mixture of gummy and proteinaceons matter. The lesnlt
of this is that when tlie fibres ore exposed to moistui'e after being dried
then the contents absorb moisture, the fibres expand laterally and
contract longitudinally, so that if they he woven into a fabric the
chances are the fabric puckers in a very disagreeable fashion. Thia
is certain to be the case if the fibres he mised with wool as in certaiu
Bradford manufactures. China grass fibres, however, will doubtless
come into use provided a machine can he invented by which they can
he economically removed from the hard woody stem. This lattOT will
probably be utilized in the paper mannfacture, and some mechanico-
chemical moans that will preserve the fibres uninjured whilst preparing
the pleurenchyma for the paper-maker will probably be discovered one
of these days. The other cortical cells do not require any notice.
Their contents are chiefly what Mr. Sotby calls etidochrome, granulat
mutters of uncertain composition, and the small sphieraphides already
referred to. These latter ai^ almost certainly an impure oxalate of
lime. The radochrome chiefly consists of yellow xanthophylL Blue
chlorophyll and, probably, small quantities of licbno-xanthiue, passing
by deoxidation into a pinkish-brown chromule, colouring iho bark
Tlie Etiology of Madv.rO'fooL—ThQ ' Indian Medical Gazette '
says it has recently received a pamphlet on this subject from Di. H.
Vandyke Carter,* but after careful study of its contents has not been
able to alter its opinion in the slightest degree. '■ This pamphlet and
its accompanying plate may, we presume, he taken as an epitome of
the author's previous writings and drawings in connection with this
malady, doubtless embodying also the experience gained during the
dozen years or so which have transpii'ed since bis views were first
placed before the profession.
" These views are so well known that it is scarcely necessary to
refer to them at any groat length. SiifRce it to say that Dr. Carter
believes that he has shown that the disease is cansed by a distinct
fungus — a peculiar red moulii, which has not been seen except In
connection with Madura-foot, This mould was first observed h^ Dp.
Vandyke Carter in May, 1861, ' upon part of a diseased foot which had
been placed in water for maceration The next occasion of its
PROGRESS OF MICROSCOPICAL SCIENCE. 97
occurrence was during the following year, in the month of April, in
connection with a specimen of mycetoma preserved in spirits, and
again, also about the same date, the mould was seen on some rice
paste in which some fresh black fungus particles had been placed in
order to ascertain if they could be made to grow artificially.'
" It will be observed that the mould referred to as having developed
nnder these varying conditions was identified as one and the same
kind of fungus — a fact which per se contains a sufficient refutation of
the whole theory; for it is a physical impossibility that spores of
fungi which had been preserved in spirits should retain their vitality,
consequently the mould which grew on the spirit-preserved specimen
must have been of extraneous origin ; not only having germinated after
the evaporation of the alcohol, but which must have originated from
some source other than the interstices of the macerated tissue. We
are therefore compelled to infer that the red mould, of various shades,
described as having spread over portions of these three and other
Madura-foot specimens, was but some developmental form of our
ordinary pink-tinted moulds, bearing no relation whatever to the
black, yellow, or orange-coloured particles frequently found in diseased
tissues of this nature — ^no closer relationship, in fact, than a crop of
various tinted mould on the surface of rice paste does to any coloured
particles which may chance to be in its substance.
"No monld with which we are acquainted, however, presents' the
slightest resemblance to the pink-coloured objects figured in the plate,
purporting to represent ' the structure of the red mould found in con-
nection with mycetoma (JJhionyphe Carteri)* — figures, by the way,
differing materially from those appended to the original text in the
* Bombay Transactions,' or any ofiiers which we have seen elsewhere,
and which, we presume, must be considered as representing the
Chionyphe Cartert more accurately than the early figures. So long as
the forms here delineated are associated in the mind with the idea of
moulds, one is certainly puzzled to account for their presence ; fortu-
nately, however, a sentence in the descriptive text, attached to the plate,
snppHes ns with a key : the objects depicted are referred to as repre-
senting * a fragment of the new growth as this appeared upon a
specimen of the foot-disease placed in water to macerate/ and a very
good representation it is of ' fragments ' which may very frequently be
obtained in some specimens of tank water in which, however, no
diseased foot need necessarily have been macerated.
" Looking at the drawing, without reference to the text, we should
describe the objects as being, probably, some confervoid growths, and
the * spore capsule,* filled with pink-coloured globules, as the encysted
gonidium of some Alga, not very unlike the gonidia of Pandorina,
as figured in late editions of the * Micrographic Dictionary,' or
Pritchard's ' Infusoria.' To the Alga articles and plates of either of
these volumes, or, better still, to some neighbouring tank at certain
seasons of the year, we refer our readers for further explanation con-
cerning the objects figured in this plate.
« It is with mucji regret that we write in this manner concerning
any of the labours of so industrious and accomplished an observer as
98 PBOGBESS OF MIOBOSGOPICAL SCIENCE.
Dr. Carter is known to be; but when we find a doctrine, which we
believe to be altogether erroneous — the result of a misinterpretation of
microscopic appearances — ^nsed by men of eminence (who themselves
may not have the opportunity or possess the special training necessary
for this particular branch of study) as a basis upon which to found the
etiology of other diseases, we feel that the time has arrived for giving
free expression to our opinion regarding it."
On the Smallpox of Sheep, — Dr. E. Klein, Assistant Professor at the
Laboratory of the Brown Institution, in a paper read before the Eoyal
Society in June, 1874, says that Variola ovina, or smallpox of sheep,
is a disease which, although it is not communicable to man, and
possesses a specific contagium of its own, very closely resembles human
smallpox, both as regards the development of the morbid process and
the anatomical lesions which accompany it. This correspondence is
so complete, that it cannot bo doubted that the pathogeny of the two
diseases is the same. The present investigation was iierefore under-
taken in the confidence that the application of the experimental method
to the investigation of the ovine disease would not only yield results
of value, as contributory to our knowledge of the infective process in
general, but would throw special light on the pathology of smallpox.
The paper consists of four sections. In the first, the author gives
an Account of his experimental method, which consisted in communi-
cating the disease by inoculation to a sufficient number of sheep, and
in investigating anatomically (1) the pustules produced at the seat of
inoculation, and (2) those constituting the general eruption. The
lymph employed was obtained by the kindness of Prof. Chauveau, of
Lyons, and Prof. Cohn, of Breslau.
In the second section, the organisms contained in fresh lymph, and
the organic fonns derivk from them by cnltivation. are ^de^ribecL
The author finds that fresh lymph contains spheroidal bodies of
extreme minuteness, which correspond to the micrococcus of Hallier
and to the spheroids described by Cohn and Sanderson in vaccine
lymph. It also contains other forms, not previously described, which
in their development are in organic continuity with the micrococci.
The third section contains a complete anatomical description of
the skin of the sheep with special reference to those particulars in
which it differs from that of man. "^
The remainder of the paper is occupied with the investigation of
the changes which occur in the integument at the seat of the inocula-
tion, and with the anatomical characters of the secondary pustules.
The most important results are the following : —
1. The development of the primary pock may be divided into
three stages, of which the first is characterized by progressive thicken-
ing of the integument over a rapidly increasing but well-defined area ;
the second, by the formation of vesicular cavities containing clear
liquid (the " cells " of older authors) in the rete Malpighii ; the third,
by the impletion of these cavities with pus corpuscles and other
structures. It is to be noted that the division into stages is less
marked than in "human smallpox.
2. The process commences in the rete Malpighii and in the sub-
PROaRESS OF mCROSGOPIOAL SOIENOE. 99
jacent papillary layer of the corium ; in the former, by the enlarge-
ment and increased distinctness of outline of the cells, and by
corresponding germinatiye changes in their nuclei ; in the latter, by
the increase of size of the papillsB, and by germination of the epithelial
elements of the capillary blood-vessels.
3. It is next seen that the interfascicular channels (lymphatic
canaliculi) of the corium are dilated and more distinct ; that the lining
cells of these channels are enlarged and more easily recognized than
in the natural state; and that, in the more vascular parts of the
corium, the channels are more or less filled with migratory, or lymph,
corpuscles. At the same time, the lymphatic vessels, of which the
canaliculi are tributaries, can be readily traced, in consequence of their
being distended with a material which resembles coagulated plasma.
4. About the third day after the appearance of the pock, the
contents of the dilated lymphatics begin to exhibit characters which
are not met with in ordinary exudative processes. These consist in
the appearance, in the granular material already mentioned, of
organized bodies, which neither belong to the tissue nor are referable
to any anatomical type — viz. of spheroidal, or ovoid, bodies having the
characters of micrococci and of branched filaments. These last may
be either sufficiently sparse to be easily distinguished from each other,
er closely interlaced so as to form a felt-like mass.
5. The process, thus commenced, makes rapid progress. After
one or two days, the greater number of the lymphatics of the affected
part of the corium become filled with the vegetation above described ;
and on careful examination of the masses, it is seen that they present
the characters of a mycelium, from which necklace-like terminal
filaments spring, each of which breaks off, at its free end, into conidia.
In most of the filaments, a jointed structure can be made out, and, in
the larger ones, the contents can be distinguished from the enclosing
membrane by their yellowish-green colour.
6. At the same time that these appearances present themselves in
the corium, those changes are beginning in the now much thickened
rete Malpighii which are preparatory to the formation of the vesicular
cavities already mentioned. By a process which the author designates
homy transformation, having its seat in the epithelial cells of the
middle layer of the rete Malpighii, a homy expansion, or stratum,
appears, lying in a plane parallel to the surface, by which the rete
Malpighii is divided into two parts, of which one is more superficial,
the other deeper than the homy layer. Simultaneously with the
formation of the homy layer the cells of the rete nearest the surface
of the corium undergo very active germination, in consequence of
which the interpapillary processes not only enlarge, but intrude in an
irregular manner into the subjacent corium. At the same time, the
cells immediately below the horny stratum begin to take part in the
formation of the vesicular cavities, some of them enlarging into
vesicles, while others become flattened and scaly, so as to form the
septa by which the vesicular cavities are separated from each other.
7. The vesicles, once foimed, increase in form and number.
Originally separate, and containing only clear liquid, they coalesce,
100 PROGRESS OF MIGROSOOPIOAL SOIENCB.
as they get larger, into irregular sinuses, and are then seen to contain
masses of vegetation similar to those which have been already de-
scribed in the lymphatic system of the corimn — with this difference,
that the filaments of which the masses are composed are of snch
extreme tenuity, and the conidia are so small and numerous, that the
whole possesses the characters of zooglsea rather than of mycelium.
However, the author has no doubt that these aggregations are produced
in the same way as the others, viz. by the detachment of conidia from
the ends of filaments. In the earlier stages of the prooees the cavities
contain scarcely any young oells. Sooner or later, however, so much
of the rete Malpighii as lies between the homy stratum and the papillaB
becomes infiltrate with migratory lymph-corpuscles. The process can
be plainly traced in the sections. At ihe period of vesiculation, i. e. at
a time corresponding to the commencement of the development of the
vesicles in IJie rete Malpighii, the cutis (particularly towards the
periphery of the pock) is infiltrated with these bodies. No sooner
has the coalescence of the vesicles made such progress as to give rise
to the formation of a system of intercommunicating sinuses, than it is
seen that the whole of the deep layers of the rete Malpighii become
inundated (so to speak) with migratory cells, which soon find their
way towards the cavities, and convert them into microscopical col-
lections of pus corpuscles, the formation of which is proved to be due
to migration from the corium, not only by the actual observation of
numerous amoeboid cells in transitu, but by the fact that the corium
itself, before so crowded with these bodies, becomes as the pustulation
advances entirely free from them.
8. The concluding section of the paper is occupied with the
description of the secondary eruption, the anatomical characters of
which closely resemble those already detailed.
On the Morbid Anatomy of Progressive Muscular Atrophy. — In a
very valuable pathological contribution,* Dr. Lockhart Clarke has
described the microscopical appearances observed in a case of muscular
atrophy, accompanied by muscular rigidity and contraction of the
joints. The parts received for examination were a slice of one of the
cerebral hemispheres, the cerebellum, pons Varolii, medulla oblongata,
and spinal cord. The white substance of the brain was rather thickly
interspersed with corpora amylacea, from about twice the diameter of
a blood disk to fourteen times that size. In the grey substance only a
few of these bodies were present, and they were confined chiefly to the
deeper layers. These are thus detailed by Mr. W. B. Kesteven in the
* Medical Eecord,' June 24th : —
It is here worthy of note that in chronic disease of the brain and
spinal cord the presence of bodies, of varying size and far from uniform
aspect, to which the name of amyloid bodies is generally given, is by
no means uncommon. At the same time there are forms of degenera-
tion of the neuroglia which give rise to appearances so closely re-
sembling the so-caUed corpora amylacea that it is an extremely difiOLcult
thing to distinguish between them. Minute spots of miliary sclerosis,
* • Medico- Chirurgical Transactions,* vol. Ivi. 1873.
PROQBBSS OF MIOBOSGOPICAL SOIENGS. 101
and of colloid, are often to be seen in the same sections with the
supposed amyloid bodies. Tlie chromic acid, or other means employed
to harden the nerve substance, so far alters its condition that the
reactions of iodine or other tests for cellulose are controlled or
obscured.
Dr. Clarke notes a dilated condition of tiie Tessels, and in some
parts a disintegration of these to the extent of causing their entire
disappearance, with a consequent production of large, empty, and
smooth-walled tubular spaces, which, according as they were cut
transversely or obliquely, presented an appearance of round or oval
▼acuities. This appearance was first described by the author in a case
of general paralysis of the insane,* and has since been noticed also by
other observers. It formed the most prominent feature of the lesions
described by Dr. Dickinson in the medulla oblongata from several
cases of diabetes. Dr. Clarke also refers to the dilated condition of
the vessels, in connection with those spaces around them which have
been spoken of as '^ lymphatic spaces," or ^^ perivascular sheaths "; but
which, the reporter has endeavoured to show, are the results of patho-
logicid, or even of merely post mortem changes.
The cells of the cerebral grey substances in this case were not
altogether healthy. Some of them had lost their natural sharpness of
outline; others contained rather more pigment than usual, or were
somewhat granular at their surfaces. The pigmentation of cells was
still more observable in the medulla oblongata. This change is con-
sidered by Dr. Clarke to constitute the first stage in the degeneration
and subsequent disintegration of nerve cells. The medulla oblongata
was one-fifth below the average size, and the diameter of the spinal
cord was reduced by at least one-fourth ; so much was it reduced that
when first seen by Dr. Clarke, without any explanation, he thought it
was the cord of a child of fourteen years of age.
The grey matter of the cord presented a variety of lesions. Con-
gestion of the white columns was present. Hypertrophy of the con-
nective tissue, with proliferation of its corpuscles, and aggregation of
these in masses at the angles of junction in the network, are described
by the author, and illustrated in an engraving. Several patches of
disintegration were observed. One of large size consisted of small
remnants of partly disintegrated grey substance, irregularly connected
with each other, and forming together a kind of reticular or honey-
comb structure. Several large areas of disintegration and haemorrhagic
clots existed, involving large portions of the cord in destruction. In
all regions of the cord, the nerve cells had undergone degeneration
and disintegration. Some were completely, others only partially,
fiOLled with dark-brown pigment granules, which in many instances
enveloped and concealed their nuclei. All the remaining cells were
reduced in size ; many seemed to have been lost by gradual atrophy,
and numbers had wholly disappeared by complete disintegration, or
fallen into granules. The several stages of the process could be
followed.
We have very imperfectly followed Dr. Clarke in the details of
* ' Journal of Mental Science/ January, 1870.
102 PEOGRESS OF mOBOSCOPIGAL SODSNOB.
the changes he records. They are well and clearly shown in the
drawings by which the paper is accompanied. As the author remarks:
'' The symptoms in this case are very clearly explained by the morbid
changes that were formed in the medulla oblongata and spinal cord.
Lesions were traced in the nuclei of the facial, hypoglossal, vagus,
and spinal accessory nerves, and explained the symptoms of glosso-
pharyngeal paralysis. The extensive loss of substance in the anterior
and lateral grey substance of the cervical and dorsal regions, more
especially of the tractus intermedio-lateralisy explained feebleness of
respiratory movements, while progressive changes of similar character
in the lumbar and dorsal regions of course explained the paralysis of
the upper and lower extremities."
Bone-Ahsorption by means of Giant- Cells, — ^Mr. Alexander Morison,*
taking up the researches of EoUiker on absorption of bone by means
of giant-cells, finds, says Mr. Klein, in * Medical Record,* July 8th,
1874, on examination of sections through the jaw prior to the forma-
tion of the tooth-sac, that many giant-cells contain clear round or oval
holes of various sizes. The larger and more distinctly defined ones,
in the centre of which a debris resembling fatty particles is sometimes
to be detected, appear to be originated by a disintegration of minute
portions of the protoplasm of the giant-cell. Froln this the author
takes it as possible that the giant-cells, after having ceased to exer-
cise their destructive, i. e. absorbing function, become disintegrated.
Morison takes it also as probable that sequestra are separated from
living bone by means of giant-cells, for, on examining a fresh seques-
trum, from a case of necrosis of the tibia, there were found Howship's
lacunae covering all aspects of the sequestrum, and the blood and pus
around the preparation containing multinuclear giant-cells floating
about.
As regards the origin of giant-cells, Morison agrees with KoUiker
and others that many of them are in genetical connection with the
osteoblasts, but that others probably develop from embryonic con-
nective tissue ; for there occur bone spaces with here and there a giant-
cell entirely destitute of osteoblasts, but containing the nuclei of
embryonic connective tissue. These nuclei, generally scattered, are
here and there closely aggregated and show an intemuclear opacity,
which, however, has not the distinctly granular appearance of the
opaque cell-substance of a fully developed giant-cell ; but this appear-
ance is in variable degree, even in fully formed cells. It is possible
that the aggregation of nuclei may be the first stage in the formation
of a giant-cell ; one has only to imagine that these nuclei prepare a
cell material each around itself, which, coalescing with that round its
neighbours, produces the multinuclear giant-cell.
Morphology of the Saprolegniei, — The ' American Naturalist,' June,
1874, says that this doubtful family, that seems now finally deposited
in the Algae, has considerable economic interest from the destructive
efiects produced upon fish eggs in the hatching trays, supposed to be
caused by Achlya proUfera, The following summary is translated
* • Ediuburgh MedicaJ ' ' - October, 1873.
PBOaBESS OF BnOBOSOOPIOAL 80IEN0B. 103
from advance sheets of '^ Contributions to the Morphology and Sys-
tematic Eolations of the Saprolegniei," by N. Pringsheim.*
The results of my investigations on the Saprolegniei may be con-
densed as follows : —
1. In all the Saprolegniei the male organs of generation develop
from the well-known antheridia, that are formed near or grow toward
the oogonia.
2. Those in which antheridia or their equivalents are wanting,
are not, as has been supposed, distinct species, with modified organs,
but paiihenogenetic forms, whose sporangia ripen and bud witiiout
fertilization.
8. In the Saprolegniei there is but one kind of sporangia ; those
which develop parthenogenetically, and those which are fertilized are
identical, and show no difference originally. The unfertilized zoospores
grow sooner and more readily than those which are fertilized.
4. Several peculiarities in the formation of zoospores, which have
been considered sufficient specific distinctions, are not important as
such, but are merely evidences of a greater or less tendency to di-
morphism, representing various stages of development in the zoospores.
5. Also various sexual forms of growth may appear in the same
species, which are not reliable as specific distinctions.
The Histology of the Brain in the Insane. — Very many physi-
cians who have given attention to this subject are of opinion that the
structure of the brain is not materially, if at all, altered in disease.
Now, however, a different view is expressed in a paper read before the
Chicago Society of Physicians and Surgeons, and reported in the
'Medical Examiner' (a Chicago paper) for June 15, The paper in
question was prepared by Dr. Walter Kempster, of the Northern
Asylum for the Insane, at Oshkosh, Wisconsin, formerly of the New
Tork State Lunatic Asylum, at XJtica, and he -had made microscopical
examinations in forty-nine cases. Numerous slides were exhibited of
Bections, made mosdy through the third left anterior cerebral con-
volution, illustrating the lesions of acute mania; the large sclerous
patches in chronic mania ; the dementia of syphilitic paralysis ; one
section through the olivary body, and one through the pons Varolii —
each illustrative of acute mania.
Numerous micro-photographs were likewise shown, illustrating the
lesions of cerebro-spinal meningitis ; of numerous colloid masses in
the medulla oblongata, and large degenerated masses with dense
fibrous investing membrane in the spinal cord, opposite second cervi-
cal vertebra — each illustrative of acute mania. Also, a section through
the olivary bodies, in a case of puerperal mania, showing fibres and
connective tissue in degenerated masses.
After acknowledging the great abilities and researches of Lockhart
Clarke, Virchow, Meynert, Schultze, Deiters, and others, in the study
of the nervous system, Dr. Kempster remarks that, so far as he is
aware, none of them have directed especial attention to the abnor-
malities found in the brains of those who die while insane.
* ^ Jahrbuch fur wissenschaftlicher Botunik,* ix, Bd. 2tr. Heft
I
104 FBOOBESS OF VICBOBOOPIOU. BCraKOB.
Eaforenoe was mnde to an article in tlio ' Edinbiirgh Medical
Journal' for September, 1868, by Dr. J. B, Tuko, as being the only
esception which Dr. Kerapeter was able to finii.
The stmlent ia met with the stereotyped phrase that there' are
no discernible leaions peculiar to insanity. For a number of years
Dr. Kempstcr has been making systematic microscopical study of the
brain, and lias examined the lesions of all forms of insanity, from
acute mania to dementia. Including puerperal and epileptic insanity.
In each and all forms he has found a marked lesion — so that certain
lesions may be grouped together ae common to certain forms of in-
sanity, and to which lesions any particular type of insanity is palpably
due. There is a wide difference between the lesions of acute and
chronic mania,
I. In certain forms of insanity, and notably in dementia, the finer
capillaries showmarked indications of disease, the perlToecuIar sheath
surrounding the vessel is distended, so much so, that sometimes the
vessel itself appears to lay in a tnnnol, its calibre being much less
than the sheath, doubtless dae to rex>eated capillary congestions of the
vessels often diseased — irregular in calibre, suggesting the idea of
anenrismal dilatations, but entirely distinct from the miliary aneu-
risms so ably described by Charcot.
n. Nest, there ia a degeneration, best studied in cases of dementia
of syphilitic origin, and in the medulla oblonguta, in the wall of the
capillary, presenting dark red patches at various poiuts outside its
walls, whicli gradntJly thicken, and appear to bo duo to a fatty meta-
morphosis or atheroma. The description by Meynert, though accurate,
is by no means so complete as could be desired.
UI. In 1871, while examining a section taken from the grey
and white matter of the third left anterior convolution, there was a
peculiar appearance of the tissue. Situated in the white substance, but
very closely to the grey matter, there were a number of small tahUe
spots, some round, some ovoid, clearly defined, in sharp contrast with
the nerve tissue, varying in size, from 1-50 to 1-200 of an inch in
diameter — these appeared to be of a gronular consistence, and much
more dense in structure than the surrounding brain substance ; each
disconnected from the other, and normal white matter intervening.
They did not absorb carmine, and were not connected with tho capil-
laries. On the surface of some of tbo spots are fibres of connective
tissne and crystals of margarine. To determine the true characl<3r of
■ e spots and the degeneration, certain very elaborate and extensive
'o-cbemical manipulations were made, not here necessary to be
stated. On allowing a section to dry, either with or without tho nitric
acid treatment, these spots appear to project above the surface of the
section. By teasing, fliey may with difficulty be removed. None of
these spots have been observed in tho grey matter. They are most
numerous in the modnlla oblongata, and may be found in tho white
matter of tho spinal cord.
IV. There ia another form of degeneracy, one which was found in
cases of acate mania. Tho spots are less in size ; are for mure nu-
merouB than in the other variety (3j ; te^' ' 'e staining ; do not
PBOORESS OF HICROSOOPICAL SCIENCE. 105
possess the granular characteristic ; there are no spindle-shaped fibres
of connective tissues about them ; they behave very differently under
the micro-chemical tests applied to the other variety of spots. The
points of resemblance are mainly in colour and apparent density.
Neither of them have any investing membrane.
Y. A fifth variety, as large in size as the third, possesses a dense
investing membrane, which resists carmine staining and is less gra*
nnlar than the third and fourth. It exists in the same brain with the
fourth variety. These spots or masses of the fifth variety are called
" c611oid," because of their resemblance to such growth, and are found
in the medulla oblongata and pons Varolii. The last three varieties
of degenerated masses, or spots, have one feature in common — a well-
defined edge, a clean-cut margin, easily made out.
VI. A sixth variety, common in cases of dementia, and where the
atheromatous capillary is found, is one in which the mass passes in-
sensibly into the surrounding normal tissues. This form is larger
and less distinct than the others. It more nearly resembles normal
brain tissues. Sometimes these masses are lobulated. They are
granular and dense, loss numerous than in the other varieties, and do
not appear in clusters. They appear to destroy or transform the
tissues, and if surrounding a capillary, destroy its walls. A point
of resemblance in common with the third variety is, that connective-
tissue fibre appears in both.
The condition of the cellular structures of the brain, of the nerve
fibres and so-called lymph spaces, are all fields rich in results not
here spoken of.
The Development of Bone, — ^Perhaps the first authority on this
subject at the present moment is M. Kanvier, who lately read a paper
on it before the French Academy of Sciences. This* paper forms the
subject of the following note, which is communicated by Mr. E. Klein
to tiie * Medical and Surgical Recorder ' for July 15th. To study the
growth and development of bone tissue, Ranvier uses the bones of the
embryo, which are placed in absolute alcohol for twenty-four hours,
having previously been freed of the surrounding soft parts (except the
periosteum). After that, they are transferred to a saturated solution of
picric acid, in which fluid they are kept until they become soft enough
to be fit for sections. In order to make thin and successful sections,
the softened bone is plunged into a thick solution of gum-arabic for
forty-eight hours, and then into alcohol of forty degrees. Now it is
easy to obtain very uniform sections through all parts of the bone, i.e.
bone matrix, medulla, and periosteum. The sections having been
washed in distilled water for twenty-four hours or more, in order to
dissolve the gum, they are stained with picro-carminate of ammonia,
and finally mounted in glycerine. In a longitudinal section through
a long bone of an embryo of a manunalian animal, passing from the
periosteum towards the axis, it is easy to see a well-marked boundary
between the periosteal bone and the cartilaginous bone. The latter
occupies the centre, and has an hour-glass shape in the longitudinal
section, whereas the periosteal bone forms on each side a semilunar
mass. The long bone at this stage of development may be correctly
106 PBOGBESS OF mCBOSOOPIOAL SCIENCE.
compared to the following scheme : an hour-glass shaped cartilaginoas
bone is suspended in a cylindrical tube — the periosteum ; that part of
the space of the tube wMch is not occupied by the former is filled out
by periosteal bone. This arrangement, although not found in all
stages, is always present in a certain stage of the development of the
bone. If one examine in a longitudinal section above mentioned the
line of ossification, which represents at the same time the boundary
between the cartilage and bone, there is found at the extremities of
that lino a notch penetrating into the cartilage. It is very easily
understood that this notch represents the transverse section tlurough a
circular groove. From the convexity of this notch (" encoche d'ossifi-
cation "), fibres take their origin, which, at their basis being identical
with the matrix of the cartilage, bend round to the side of the
embryonal bone and penetrate into the latter. These fibres, which
Eanvier calls ** fibres arciformes," become in time identical with those
fibres known as Sharpey's fibres. Amongst the mammalian animals,
the embryonal bones of sheep are best suited for the study of those
fibres. As soon as these fibres have left the cartilage, they appear to
be separated by rows of spherical or slightly pplyhedral cells, which
Eanvier believes to be derived from cartilage cells after their capsules
have become opened. These cells gradually assume the characters of
osteoblasts, and they lie all along the arched fibres, the latter becoming
covered with bone substance, and thus representing the first traces of
subperiosteal bone. The arched fibres represent the directing fibres
of the ossification ; they can be recognized in the interior of the bone
in transverse sections, where they appear as small dotted circles in
the systems of the intermediary lamellae.
On the external surface of that part of the cartilage belonging to
the " encoche d'ossification," a primary osseous lamella is formed, which
Eanvier calls the perichondral bone-crust ; it forms later on the
boundary between the cartilaginous and the periosteal bone.
Variation in the Condition of the External Sense Organs in Fcetal Pigs
of the same Litter, Mr. Burt G. Wilder, of Ithaca, N. Y., says that in
comparing foetal mammals of unknown age, it is natural to estimate
their relative age, partly according to the degree of closure of the lids
and the direction of the pinnae ; since it is &own that the former are
at first mere folds above and below the uncovered balls, which are
gradually covered by them ; and that the pinnae are first formed as
little triangular folds behind the meatus, which at first project directly
forward, and then, as they increase in size, gradually rise to the erect
position, and only later are retroverted upon the neck.
While forming a collection of foetal pigs at the large abattoir of
J. P. Squiers in East Cambridge, Mass., during the summer of 1872,
I compared the individuals of the same litter, carefully avoiding any
artificial displacement of the parts.
In the five pigs of the same litter * having an average length from
vertex to anus of '067, mm., and an average weight of ,017*5 grams,
♦ Marked 296 to 300 on the Catalogue of Neuroloffv and Embryology of Domesti-
cated Animals at the Museum of Comparat' Cambridge, Mass.
OF UIGEOBCOFICAL SOIBNCB.
e direotion of the pinna ranges from n. alight bnt decided aiUev^tlon,
■ to an aJmoBt complete retrovemion.
In, the BGven pigs of another litter* averaging '040, in length,
the lids rango from folds ooyering slightly the upper and lower
margins of the hall, to complete closure. The sizes and degrees of
closure do not exactly coincide. It would be interesting in both these
eases to know the relative position of the individuals in the mother's
uterine comua ; but these facts indicate the need of far more extended
oomparisons than have been made.
I have also observed some striking changes in the form of the
nostril in fcetal pigs ; it is in its eai'liest condition a notch, whoso
lower margins then como together forming a hole ; this elongates
laterally and is indented above so as to become more and more cres-
centic ; but at or before birth the circular form is regained and
retained through life.
To what Choup ia Peripatug rekUed f — In the very last number of
the ' Proceedings of the Royal Society ' is an admirable paper on this
subject by Mr. H. N. Moseley, M.A., of the 'Challenger' expedition,
Mr. Moseley enters into details concemi)ig certain points in anatomy
which appear to have been wrongly or imperfectly described before.
Thus he describes fully the Intestinal, Tracheal, and Reproductive
systems, and gives an outlinear sketch of the development. Then he
goes on to say that " in tho present state of our knowledge concerning
the Btrncture of Peripatus, the most remarkable fact in its structure ia
the wide divarication of the ventral nerve cords. The fact was con-
sidered remarkable, and dwelt upon in all accounts of Peripatus
before the existence of trachea in the animal was known, and when
it was thought to be hermaphrodite, but it is doubly remarkable now.
The fact shuts off at once all idea of Peripatus being a degenerate
Mjriopod, the evidence against which possibility is overwhelming.
The bilateral symmetry and duplicity of the organs of the body, the
absence of striation in the muBcles, of periodical moults of the larval
skin in development, and of any trace of a primitive three-legged
condition, taken in conjunction wilih tho divarication of the nerve
cords, are conclusive. The parts of the mouth are not to be regarded
as degraded to any great degree ; and homologies for some of them,
at least, may perhapB be found amongst the higher Annelids. The
structure of the skin is not at all unlike that in some worms, especially
in its cliitinons epidermic layer, which occasionally strips off in large
pieces as a thin transparent pellicle. The many pointe of resemblance
of Pvripalug to Annelids need not be dwelt upon; they led to its
former placing in classification ; but it is difBcult to understand how
the very nnannelid-like structure of the foot-clawa did not lead
others, beside De Quatrefages, to draw a line between Peripatut
and the Annelids. In being unisexnal, Peripatus is like the higher
Annelids, as well as the whole of the higher Tracheata. To Insects
Peripatus shows affinities in the form of the spermatozoa, and the
elaboration, structure, and bilateral symmetry of the generative organs,
* Mark<!<l 30^ to 309 In tho earns oatalogitc
lUU PBOaBBSS OF laOBOBOOPIOAI, 80IKN0B.
though there ie a very eliglit tcndoncj towards the unilaterulity of
Mjriopods in the mnlo orgtiiiB.
"To Inseota, again, it ia ulLied hj the fiTO-jointiug of the feet and
oral papUlffi and the form and nomber of its claws. It Bhoold be
remembered that spiders' feet are two-clawed, as are those of soma
Tardigrades, and that some of theee latter forms have ttvo-clawed
feet in the early condition even when they possess more claws in the
adult state. In Newport's well-known figure of the yonng lulus
with three pairs of limbs, the tips of these latter are drawn with
tmo hair-like claws ; these aro not mentioned in the test. To the
ordinary lepidopteroua larva the resomblances of Peripatus are striking
— as, for example, the gait, the glands (so like in their function and
position to silk'^landa), the form of the intestine, and the less perfect
concentration of the nervous organs, as in larval insects. To Myrio-
podfi Peripatu* ia allied by the great variety in number of segments in
the varions species, in its habits, and in those cspocially to luliu.
The parts of the mouth perhaps show a form out of whioh those of
Scolopendra were derived by inodifi.catioQ ; but the resemblance may
be superficiaL Our knowledge is not yet sufficient to determine such
points. The usual difficulties occur in the matter. Segments may
have dropped out or fused, and their original condition may not be
represented at all in the process of development. In Btmctnre Pert'
patm is more like Scolopendra than lutus, viz. in the many jointe to
the antennfti (in Chiloguaths never more than fourteen), in the form
of spenuatozoa, and in being viviporouB, as are some Scolopendrm ;
further, in the position of the orifices of the generative glands and in
the less perfect concentration mosially of the nerve coida in Scoto-
pendra.
" Peripoiua thus shows affinities, in some points, to all the main
branches of the family tree of Tracheata ; bnt a gulf is fixed between
it and them by the divarication of the nerve cords : tending in the
same direction arc such &cts as the non-striatiou of the muscles, the
great power of oitonsion of the body, the arrangement of the digestive
tract in the early stage, the persistence of metamorphosis, and the
nature of the parts of the mouth, the full history of the manner of
origin of these being reserved.
" There are many speculations as to the mode of origin of the
trachcffl themselves in the Tracheata. Professor Hiickel • follows
Gegenbanr, whose opinion is espressed in his ' Grundziige der verglei-
chenden Anatomie,' p. 441. Gegenbanr concludes that trachete were
developed from originally closed tracheal systems, through the inter-
vention of the tracheal gills of piimieval aquatic insects now repre-
sented as larvs. If PeripaiuM he as ancient in origin as is here
supposed, the condition of the tracheal system in it throws a very
different light on the matter. Peripalns is the only Tracheate vriQi
tracheal stems opening diffosely all over the body. The Pro-
trachoata probably had their trachea) thus diffused, and the separate
small systems afterwards became concentrated along especial lines'
and formed into wide main branching trunks. In some forma the
* ' Biulogiacht Studien,' p. 191.
PBOGBESS OF MIGBOSOOPICAL SCIENCE. 109
spiracular openings concentrated towards a more ventral line {Itdus) '
in others they took a more lateral position (Lepidopterons laryaB, &c.)«
A concentration along two lines of the body, ventral and lateral, has
already commenced in Peripatus, The original Protracheate being
supposed to have had numerous small trachese difPused all over its
body, the question as to their mode of origin again presents itself.
The peculiar form of the tracheal bundles in Peripatus^ which consists
of a number of fine tubes opening into the extremity of a single short
common duct leading to the exterior of the body, seems to give a clue.
The tracheaB are, very probably, modified cutaneous glands, the homo-
logues of those so abundant all over the body in such forms as Bipalium
or Hirudo» The pumping extension and contraction of the body may
weU have drawn a very little air, to begin with, into the mouths of
the ducts ; and this having been foimd beneficial by the ancestor of the
Protracheate, farther development is easy to imagine. The exact mode
of development of the trachesB in the present form must be carefully
studied ; there was no trace of these organs in the most perfect state
of Peripa;^ which I obtained.
"^ftofessor G^genbaur's opinion on the position of Peripatus* is,
that its place among the worms is not certain, but that, at any rate, it
connects ringed worms with Arthropods and flat worms. The general
result of the present inquiry is to bear out Professor Gegenbaur's
opinion; but it points to the connection of the ringed and flat worms, by
means of this intermediate step, with three classes only of the Arthro-
pods — the Myriopods, Spiders, and Insects, i. e. the Tracheata. From
the primitive condition of the trachece in lulusy and the many relations
between Peripaius and Scolopendra, it would seem that the Myriopods
may be most nearly allied to Peripatus, and form a distinct branch
arising from it and not passing through Insects. The early three-legged
stage may turn out as of not so much significance as supposed. If these
speculations be correct, the Crustacea have a different origin from the
Tracheata. Peripaius itself may well be placed amongst Professor
Hackel's Protracheata ; Grube's term, Onychophora, becomes no more
significant than De Blainville's Malacopoda. Some notions of the
actual history of the origin of Peripatus itself may be gathered from
its development.
'' In conclusion I would beg indulgence for the many defects in this
paper, due to the hurry with which it was written (all available time,
almost up to the last moment of our sailing for the Antarctic regions,
having been consumed in actual examination of the structure of
Peripatus), and due, farther, to the impossibility of referring to original
papers in any scientific library. At all events it is hoped that Peripatus
has been shown to be of very great zoological interest, as lying near
one of the main stems of the great zoological family tree, and that
farther examination of the most minute character into the structure of
this animal will be well repaid."
Lesions of the Brain in General Paralysis, — Dr. J. Batty Tuke
gives the following instructive account of recent researches on this
♦ * Grundzuge der vergleichenden Anatomie,' p. 199,
I 2
110 FB0QBEB8 OF UICBOSCOFIOAL BOIBHOB.
fiabject. He says that LnbimofT'e paper, pnblisbod in Yircbow'e
'Arohiv,' toI. Ivii., 1873, is founded on fourteen carefally reported
cases of general paralysis, which presented themBelveB in Meynert's
' Psychiatric Cliniqne.' The full bistory of each case is given, along
with the pogl mortem appearances, naked eye and microscopic. Thin
sections were made from specimens hardened in a 2 per cent, solution
of bichromate of potaaa; they were colonred with carmine, and set np
in gum Damar. The cortical aubatance of the frontal lobes was
usually examined, and in some CEises that of the parietal, occipital, and
insular lobea, the cornu Ammonis, and other portiona of the ence-
phalon. Lubimoff reports one caee in which a sort of cicatris, or
wedge-shaped induration, was found on the right hemisphere of the
cerebellum, implicating two lobules which were glued together by a
sobHtance which unmistakably consisted of connective tissue. Tha
molecular and nucleated Inyers were thinned, and Purkinje's cells
almost obliterated. For the normal structure a dense "felt-like"
substance was substituted, in which nuclei were imbedded, and which
was intimately connected with the walla of the blnod-vesHela. Aronnd
it the nndestroyed cells of Pui'kinje appeared plainly scleroBed.
Lubimoff supports Meynert'a obsoi'vationa aa to the intimate relations
of brain lesiona with bypenemia, that they never occur apart from it,
and may be regarded as a consequence. In some cases the vessels
showed indications of obstruction during life by means of thrombi,
due to mctamorphoaia of blood-corpuacles into molecular maaaea, with
here and there distenaions filled with corpuscles, and in extreme cases
actual rupture of the vascular walls and diffusion of the periphery
(Zeretreaung im Umkreis) in the parenchyma of the organ. There were
also found, in all the fourteen uasea, on and around the vascular walls,
pigment deposits of various sizes, and sometimes of very considerable
extent, which ore taken to be evidences of previoualy esisting con-
gestions. Apart from these consequences of hypenemia, the walls of
the vessels presented themaelvea altered and thickened ; their normaj
coats and muscular strim being destroyed, and the thickened walls
appearing to consist of a homogeneoua mass, wasy in appearance. On
this Lubimoff bases his term of " waxy degeneration " of the vascular
walls. The nuclei, especially at the bifurcationa, appeared proliferated.
Lnbimoff cannot determine whether in general paralysis the vessels
thicken themselves by an absolutely new growth.
The special oharacteriatic of paralytic dementia presents itself in.
the changes of the nuclei of the neuroglia, which show themselves in
the brains of ench subjects wonderfully increased in quantity, to n
degree which, according to Lubimoff, must he accepted as a patho-
logical product, as preparations of healthy brains and of those taken
from the subjects of other neuroaea (e.g. extreme melancholy and
mania), abow but a alight amount of neuroglia corpuscles in the cortical
substance. (Tn the opinion of Boll, who has inspected LubimofTB
preparations, this observation is of the highest pathological value).
What Lubimoff deacrihes &b nuclei of neuroglia are very fine
Deiters' cells, which are well to" " ^ngh the works of Golgi,
PROSRBSa OF HIOBOSCOFIOAL BdEITCB.
Ill
. Taatrowitz, and BoU ; his description is entirely in consonance with
'that of these writers, and he arrives independently of tliem at the
result, that a. peenlinr intimate connection exists between the vuBciilar
walls and the Deiters' cellfi, aa in these cases their processes are
peculiarly well pronounced.
Lnbimoff found the Doitera' cells moat abundant in the inner
layers of the grey matter bordering on the medullary auhatance, and
on the outer layer contiguous to tho pia mater ; in which position
they were ao numerous, that the normal appearances of the stmuturea
were loat, and their place taken by the felt-like network, which, as in
the case of the cerebellum previously described, can only be aacribed
to the interlacement in varioua directiona of the processes of the
Deiters' cells.
The morbid changes of the norvo cells are placed under two beads ;
ley are liable either to a degree of swelling and subsequent collapse,
'or to a tendency to sclerosis. In the first case, the changes of the
nndei consist in dilatation of the nucleus and diminution of the
qnantifn^ of the " eurrounding protoplasm " ; occasionally the nuclens
subdivides so that two are found in one cell, and are not readily
amenable to carmine, which Hofhnaik already has shown to be charac-
teristic of the morbid ganglion- cell. Meynert considers that the
protoplasm of such cells shows different dogreos of molecular degene-
ration. The sclerosis of the cells changes them into a homogeneous
wai-like mass, in which the nucleus is no longer to be distinguished,
but occasionally the nucleolus. The protoplasm of each cells loses its
normally fine granular appearance, the cells appear strongly refracting,
with sharply defined dark contours. The changes in the asis-cylinders
found by Lnbimoff consist in thickening and hypertrophy.
It is dednced from these anatomical facts that as regards the
pathological processes in general paralysis, the origin of the physical
disturbances is to be sought for in tho anomalies of blood- distribution
and its consequences. With the incidence of hypertemia begin the
changes in the nutrition of the nuclei of neuroglia, which leads to an
increased development of their elements, which, in their turn, take on
morbid action. This is proved by the modification of the morbid
appearances, aeoording to tho length of time during which the case
has lasted. The treatise concludes with deductions as to how the
clinical symptoms of the individnal cases are explicable by their
special anatomical conditions. Lnbimoff agrees with Westpbal that
disease of the cord is a constant accompaniment of general paralysis ;
but he differs &om him and Simon in holding that the disease can exist
without pathological changes in the brain. On the contrary, ho
endeavours to establish a chronic inffammatory condition of the con-
nective tissue of the cortical substance as tho anatomical lesion of
general paralysis. — See also 'Medical Eecord.'
Hay-fever, Us Microecopy and Treatment, — This has been very well
^aonssed by Professor Binz of Bonn in a letter recently addressed to
"Kftture.' He says, " Prom what I have observed of recent English
tblieationa on the subject of hay-fever, I am led to suppose that
PROQ&E8S OF VICBOeCOFTCAZi SOIHHOBL
pEngliah onthoritieB are innccumtcly acquainted with the discovery of
ProfosHor Helmholtz, as far back as 1 868, of the csiatenco of Tmcoimnon
low orgaiiiamB in the iiaeal secretioUB in this complaint, and of the
possibility of arresting their action by the local employment of quinine.
I therefore parpoae to republish the letter in which he originally
annonncod these facts to myael^ and to odd some further observations
on this topic. The letter is as follows;* —
" ' I have suffered, as well aa I can remcmher, since the year 1647,
from the peculiar catarrh called by the English " hay-fever," the
speciality of which consists in its attacking its fictim regularly in
the hay soaaon (myself between May 20 and the end of June), that it
ceases in the cooler weather, but on the otljer hand quickly reaches
a great intensity if the patients expose themselves to heat and sunshine.
An estraordinarily voilent sneezing then sets in, and a strongly
corrosive thin discharge, with wliich much epithelium is thrown off.
This increases, after a few honrs, to a painful inflammation of the
mucous membrane and of the outside of the nose, and escitea fever
with severe headache and great depression, if the patient cannot
withdraw himself from the heat and the sunshine. In a cold room,
however, these symptoms vanish as quickly as thoy come on, and there
then only remains for a few days a lessened discharge and soreness, as
if caused by the loss of epithelium. I remark, by the way, that in all
my other years I had very little tendency to catarrh or catching cold,
while the hay-fever has never failed during the twenty-one years of
which I have spoken, and has never attacked me earlier or later in the
year than the times named. The condition is extremely troublesome,
and increases, if one is obliged to be much exposed to the sun, to an
excessively severe malndy.
" ' The curious dependence of the disease on the season of the
year suggested to me the thought that organisms might he the origia
of the mischief. In examining the secretions I regularly foimd, in
the Iflst five years, certain vibrio-like bodies in it, whidi at other
times I could not observe in my nasal secretion. . . , They are very
small, and can only be recognized with the immersion-lens of a vei^y
good Hartnack's microscope. It is characteristic of the common
isolated single joints that they contstin four nuclei in a row, of which
two pairs are more closely zmited. The length of the joints is 0'004
tnillimetre. Upon the warm objoctive-stnge they move with moderate
activity, partly in mere vibration, partly shooting backwards and
forwards in the direction of their long axis ; in lower temporatores
they are very inactive. Occasionally one finds them arranged in rows
upon each other, or in branching series. Observed some daya in the
moist chamber, they vegetated again, and appeared somewhat larger
and more conspicuous than immediately after their excretion. It is
to he noted that only that kind of secretion contains them which is
expelled by violent sneezings ; that which drops slowly does not
t contain any. They stiek tenaciously enough in the lower cavities
iknd recesaes of the nose.
" ' When I saw your first notice respecting the poisonous action of
* See Virchow's ' Arehiv,' vol. ilvi.
L . •
I
NOTES AND MEMORANDA. 113
qniniDe upon infuBoria, 1 determined at once to make an experiment
with that Bubstance, thinking that these vibrionic bodies, even if they
did not cause the whole illness, still conld render it much more un-
pleasant through their movements and the decompositions caused by
them. For that reason 1 made a neutral solution of sulphate of
quinine, which did not contain much of the salt (1 * 800), but still was
effective enough, and caused moderate irritation of the mucous mem-
brane of the nose. 1 then lay flat upon my back, keeping my head
very low, and poured with a pipette about four cubic centimtoes into
both nostrils. Then 1 turned my head about in order to let the liquid
flow in all directions.
^' ' The desired effect was obtained immediately, and remained for
some hours ; 1 could expose myself to the sun without fits of sneezing
and the other disagreeable symptoms coming on. It was sufficient to
repeat the treatment three times a day, even under the most unfavour-
able circumstances, in order to keep myself quite free. There were
then no such vibrios in the secretion. If I only go out in the evening,
it suf&ces to inject the quinine once a day, just before going. After
continuing this treatment for some days the symptoms disappear com-
pletely, but if I leave off they return till towards the end of June.
" * My first experiments with quinine date from the summer of
1867; this year (1868) I began at once as soon as the first traces
of the illness appeared, and I have thus been able to stop its develop-
ment completely.' "
NOTES AND MEMOEANDA.
Precions Stones in the Construction of the Microscope. —
M. H. Brachet addressed a note to the French Academy (June 22nd)
on the employment of artificial precious stones in the compound
microscope. This paper, which has not yet been published, was sent
to the * Commission du Prix Tremont.'
A Eemedy for Phylloxera. — At a meeting of the French Aca-
demy of Sciences, June 29th, a paper, forming a Beport, was read on
the administrative measures to be taken for the preservation of terri-
tories threatened by Phylloxera^ by the Commissioners. It is sug-
gested to the Academy that a special law should be made compelling
proprietors to declare the first appearance of the scourge, that experts
should then be appointed to examine into the state of the infested vines,
and that these should be destroyed when thought necessary by minis-
terial decision, the proprietor receiving adequate compensation. It is
further suggested to destroy the vines surrounding the districts ac-
tually invaded, to disinfect the soil by chemical methods, and to bum
the cuttings, leaves, and roots of the diseased plants as well as the
plants themselves in the same district where the uprooting has taken
place, and finally to prohibit with the utmost rigour the exportation
COBBBSPOKDSITOB.
How to make Sections of the Potato showing Stmctnie. — Mr.
Taylor has given tJio following method in 'Science Gossip' for July.
He hue recently shown that the vascular bnndlee in a potato may of
course he easily seen by cutting K potato in two through its axis (the
section also passing through some of its "eyes"), and coating the cut
Burface, first with a solution of hichromate of potash, and afterwards
several times with a strong tincture of iodine, which will stain the
atarcli blue, but leaves the vaBciUar bundles yellow. The air-ducts
wUl then be seen to eitend invariably to the eyes. For microscopical
study these sections are to be mnde and treated with a strong acid or
caustic alkaline solution, which will dissolve the starch, but leave the
bundles unaltered. The sections may then be mounted us usnal. To
isolate the vascular bimdles, place a potato, skinned without wounding
the " eyes," in a solution of sugar and water (two onnces to the pint)
and keep it at a temperature of 72^ F. for nearly a fortnight. The
fungus of fermentation will reduce the potato t<) a pulp, eicept the vas-
culai- bundles, which may he monnted in gum or balsam, and studied
with a power of one hundred diameters.
COKEESPONDENCE.
Immeksion Apertuee on Objects is Balsam.
To the Editor of the 'Monthly Micioscopiad Journal,'
Sm, — Further discnasion with Mr. Tollcs on tliis question is
needless, because by his own worlc he has settled it to my satisfaction.
Ho has probably secured some believers in his triumph and demon-
strations, and to their congrattilations I now leave him. So long
as imaginary diagrams are used evading the true form of an object-
glass, with wrong dimensions and focal distbuces, futile and endless
nrgumeuts may be advanced. Including Mr. Tolles' last illnstia-
tions in tbis category, I do not care to be at the trouble of translating
his text to arrive at his probable meaning, though I jKirceive that
he is now struggling for a fein degrees only. He long ago stated that
in practice he had actually secun^ the disputed extra theoretical im-
mersion apertures on balsam-mounted objects, with glasses of his own
construction. His recent production having been placed in my hands
by Mr. Crisp, I have shown by actual measurement, and by cutting
off all false rays by a suitable stop, that such apertures had not been
produced, so that " the fact becomes clear and indisputable."
It is very easy for Mr. Tolles to remark that this stop is " a mere
contrivance to express my sensations," and "that the whole seems to
him quite unnecessary." This I might have expected. But this stop
alKayt is the focal plane of the object, and admitting all rays up to 180°
from that point, will serve as a salutary check against any optician
who nmy choose to vauut his glasses on the questionable merits of
OOBBESPONDia^OE. 115
extravagant apertures.* This point might still give rise to long
disputes, but confined to the subject of Mr. Tolles' last communication
on "the optical quality of his (Mr. Tolles') ^th objective," there remains
the singular fact, that the diameter of the front lens compared with
the focal length proves the aperture endorsed on the mount to be
jnmjply iinposatble. There "can be no reasoning against this but to
assert that my dimensions of diameter of front lens, position, and focal
distance are imtrue. Then I have no doubt that the challenge will be
accepted, the measurements repeated, and comparisons made by other
hands than mine.
I do not wish to shirk the discussion of the aperture if any further
improvement can result from it, but if I am to be at liberty to select
my antagonist, it will not be one that af&rms that 180° is possible, or
that even 179° is practicable.
In justice to Mr. Tolles I will say that throughout all the argu-
ment he has comported himself with exemplary good humour, not even
resenting the chaff that he has endured during the discussion. A con-
trast to the conduct of his acting agent, who, without a ray of science
to enlighten the subject, or to justly his authority, has done nothing
but throw dirt at all opponents, of such an odour, as to cause them to
hurry past on his windward side rather than stop to argue with him.
I am. Sir, your obedient servant,
F. H. Wknham.
Bkduction of Aperture in Object-glasses of Telescopes.
To the Editor of the ^Monthly Microscopical Journal,*
Boston, U.S.A., June 19, 1874.
Sir, — While, substantially, declaring it unlikely that any intelli-
gent reader of the Monthly would confound contraction of field in an
eye-piece with reduction of aperture in the object-glass (and with
which I fully agree, but must suggest the irrelevance of the allu-
sion to beneficial reduction of aperture in ohject-glasses of telescopes 1[
as of some sort of parity to this case of the microscopic objective).
Dr. Pigott in concluding his note (your Journal for June, p. 268)
says, '^ that in a limited field of view the definition ... is superb ;
beyond the central area the definition is very indistinct. This seems
to indicate that the very oblique pencils are not as free from aberra-
tion as the central." While thanking Dr. Pigott heartily for having
discovered that " very oblique pencils " were concerned at all in form-
ing the image with that objective (!) 1 am bound to suggest that
when we contract the field-bar of llie eye-piece, the " central area "
continues to have all the rays, " very oblique pencils " included, that
reached that central area before contraction. This does not '' seem to
indicate," &c. V . j. „
' Yours respectfully,
E. B. TOLLBS.
♦ In my diagram, p. 114 of Journal (March, 1874), I had " drawn** ray d cor-
rectly, but the final deviation without the normal appeared so small on the
reduced scale that the wood engraver failed to notice it, and continued the line
straight.
t " This everybody knows well enough ! "
116 aomLBBPosDmick.
T
^H Mb. Tolleb' VjTH a.nd j^th Objectives.
^^H To the Editor of the 'Monthly Microscopical Journal.'
^^m BoBroK, Jmie 23, 1S74.
^^r Sir,— The paragraph on p, 264 of the Jonrnol for June, current,
and copied from the Boston 'Journal of Chemistry,' in reference to
7^5 and -g\j inch objectives is erroneous, in one particular I hiote, viz. in
implying that only one ^th of 165° angle was constructed, whereas
three were made eimuttaneouBly or carried along together to com-
pletion.
In the next place, it is not litely that any comparison with
Englisli objectives of like powers or power bad been made, and tho
I statement implying such compariHon was made under nuBapprchenston.
Bat reported rcaults of separate trial are available, of couTBe, for
comparison.
Tours respectfully,
EOBT. B, TOLLBS.
■
Dr. Pigott's (?) Intektions.
To the Editor of the 'Monthly Microsc^ical JourvaV
4, MVLNB Btbeet, E.g., Jane 25, 1S74.
SiE, — The invention which Dr. R, Pigott claims as his own in the
Joumid for this month, has been public property since Jnly, 1870.
At that time I read a paper on, and exhibited, an apparatus, at a
meeting of the Q. M. C, in every respect but one identical with that
described by Dr. Pigott. Moreover, I then expressly stated that tbo
plan in qaestion had been foreshadowed by Mr. Sollitt and others.
But I think that I am correct in afBrming that no one before my-
self has over publicly described or used it. Tho employment of an
achromatic objective as a condenser, set obliquely to tiis axis of the
microscope, at angles varying with the nature of the object to be ex-
amined, is what I claim. But I am of opinion that my method of
using it is better than that of Dr. Pigott — inasmuch as I added a
graduated circle to the carriage of the objective, in order to measure
the angles of use, so aa to repeat them exactly in future observations.
Dr. Pigott may have privately used this apparatus before my time,
but then it was scarcely possible for those who, like myself, had not
the advantage of intimacy with him, to be aware of the fact. More-
over, I venture to think that Dr. Pigott does but sctinty justice to the
labours of others in the same field, when he bestows upon thorn such
faint notice as he has done in my case — even after he had his atten-
tion called to them by Mr, Frank Crisp when his pap^ was read.
I, Sir, yours obediently,
John Maithxwb.
correspondence. 117
Mr. Brooke's Beply to Mr. Pillisoher.
To the Editor qf the ' Monthly Microscopical Journal^
16, FiTZROT Square, W., July 8, 1874.
Snt, — ^I shonld have treated Mr. Pillischer's last letter with the
silent contempt that its " schoolboy" tone justly merits, but that my
silence might have been taken as an admission of its misstatements.
" Mr. Brooke's argument that native British optical goods were
wholly unrepresented at the Yienna Exhibition," is not Mr. Brooke's
argument at all, but a pure and simple development of Mr. P.'s
inner consciousness. Mr. Brooke's argument was (see May number
of Journal, p. 231), that native British optical Uuent was unrepre-
sented ; and I think the proverbial " schoolboy " will tell Mr. P. that
" goods " and " talent " are by no means synonymous terms.
It is very likely I might have said to Mr. P., " I do not care for
your high powers," and the reason of my saying so is obvious ; but
my recollections of what passed between us are utterly at variance
with his. After all, the question is not what A said to B, or B to A,
twelve months since, but whether Mr. Pillischer exhibited at Vienna as
his own manufacture objectives that were not so. We know very well
when, where, and by whom his \ objectives were made ; but if he will
satisfy any trustworthy third person (for example yourself, or one of
our Secretaries) when, where, and by whose hands he has ever manu-
factured any power deeper than a ^, I shall be happy to apologise to
him for having entertained any doubt on the subject.
I remain, yours faithfully,
Chas. Brooke.
A Eeply to Mr. Stoddbr.
To the Editor of the * Monthly Microscopical JournaV
Sib, — The purpose of my paper on Immersion is not to establish
the superiority of the method, but to determine the cause of it assumed
as already established. I am sorry to find it has been taken up at the
wrong end, and by the wrong class of persons. As in making my
assumption I go chiefly on the testimony of others allowed to be
authorities, from myself asserting only a desire to be cautious of over-
stating,. I should have thought that in this there was nothing in which
the most diligent seeker could find a pretext for controversy. That
whatever its degree the difference is real and to be relied on is all I
asked to be granted; an assumption, indeed, necessarily involved, and
without which my work would have no meaning. But I cannot go
into controversies about what is not my subject. My paper is on a
question of Theory, and was meant for those who are competent to
follow investigations of that kind.
Mr. Stoddor, I observe, has written to charge me with having
118 PBOGEBDmOS OF 800IETIES.
fallen into a great error, — an error so great as to be even called
ludicrous. When commenting on the angle of a now celebrated glass
I referred to it as one which had been sold by Mr. ToUes to an
English purchaser. Mr. Stodder writes a special letter to take me
to task ; for it is he who sends out the glasses not Mr. ToUes. And to
have written in ignorance of this makes the writer, in Mr. Stodder's
opinion, ludicrous.
Now that the correction has been made it may perhaps be asked
how is the question affected by it ? How many degrees of the 180°
will it account for ? And is there any just reason for introducing into
the scientific part of a scientific journal a thing which is not scientific
or of public interest but only private and commercial ? No fault had
been found with the sale ; nothing was made to turn upon it ; no
reference was made to its terms about which nothing was Ibiown ; the
question concerned not the terms of the sale but the width of the
angle ; and the expression used is the common form always employed
and never misunderstood. Other opticians do not, any more than
Mr. ToUes, make use of their own hands or pens in sending off their
glasses; but no distinction is drawn — it is always understood and
spoken off as coming to the same thing. An English optician's book-
keeper would no more think of writing to explain that it is he who
sends off the glasses than of writing to explain how the books are
kept. Such details have no interest except for the persons immediately
concerned ; and no other firm, English or foreign, puts them forward
as an element in scientific discussions.
This perhaps was plain enough to require no answer for its own
sake. I have noticed it because it is a typical case ; illustrative of a
practice more common that it ought to be, which may be called
frivolous objecting ; — that is to say the making of objections which do
not in any view of the case or on any supposition touch the question
in hand. Such making of objections for the sake of making them is
much to be deprecated. It is wearisome and can serve no purpose
except obstructing the progress of knowledge.
Yours obediently,
S. L. Brakxy.
PEOCEEDINGS OF SOCIETIES.
Medical Mioboscopioal Society.
Friday, June 19, 1874.— W. B. Kesteven, Esq., F.E.C.S., Vice-
President, in the chair.
Osteo Sarcoma. — Mr. Needham read a paper upon this subject,
taking as a foundation the case of a young man who entered one
of the metropolitan hospitals with what appeared to be an osteo
sarcoma of the head of the tibia. Hard tumours, small in size, were
PROCEEDINGS OF SOCIETIES. 119
felt in ihe groin, as well as deeply beneath the muscles of the thigh.
The patient eventually died from chest complication, frequent haemop-
tysis being a leading symptom at the post mortem. The growth on
the leg was found, as diagnosed, to be osteo sarcoma, while similar
growths were found on various parts of the body, and especially in
the lungs. Microscopically, the growth on the tibia, which was sub-
periosteal, had the characters of true osteo sarcoma ; but elsewhere only
calcareous material was found instead of bone with lacunsB.
Specimens and drawings illustrative of the case were exhibited.
The case will be published fully elsewhere.
Mr. Golding Bird objected to the term osteo sarcoma, since cal-
careous deposit in lieu of bone was found except in one place. He
considered the earthy deposit as accidental rather than essential to
the growth, and as indicatiag degeneration.
Dr. Fritchard did not consider calcification in all cases a degene-
ration : from its early appearance at times in morbid tissues, he con-
sidered it as much a part of the growth in which it occurred as was
true bone in an osteo sarcoma.
Mr. Needham, in reply, agreed with Dr. Prilchard in not consider-
ing the calcification as degenerative ; and was willing to confine the
term osteo sarcoma to the parts of the growth only where osseous
tissue with lacunae could be found.
Imbedding in Elder Pith. — Mr. Grolding Bird read a paper on the
method adopted abroad of cutting sections of tissues imbedded in elder
pith and packed in a microtome especially adapted for the purpose.
The various steps in the operation were exhibited and explained at
the same time. The principle on which the process depends is the
expansion of the dried elder pith on the addition of water, so that if
packed in the tube of the microtome in the dried state, and then
allowed to imbibe moisture, anything previously imbedded in it is
firmly gripped.
In file discussion that followed, —
Mr. Needham thought the pith would not give su£&cient support
on all sides.
Mr. Groves approved of the combined use of pith and wax in the
way that had been shown as overcoming many difficulties in the use of
wax for imbedding in a microtome, and as rendering the pith more
efficient in some cases. Did not prefer a microtome that had to be
held in the hand.
Mr. Giles thought the small size of the bore of the instrument
might be at times objectionable. Suggested the use of dried carrot if
pitib could not be obtained : it would swell and soften, on the addition
of water, like pith.
The Chairman objected to the pith packing in the case of diseased
spinal cord, though in a healthy specimen the pressure exerted might
not be deleterious. On the whole he thought the method described
simple, quick, and one giving comparatively no trouble ; while the
microtome being held in the hand was for some reasons an advantage.
He should certainly adopt the pith process in future.
Mr. Grolding Bird, in reply, stated, that if properly arranged equal
120 PBOOEEDINGS OF SO0IETIB3.
support could be giyen to the specimen on all sides of the pith, or
even the combined use of wax with pith would overcome every diffi-
culty on that point Thought that carrot on swelling would be too
hard to cut conveniently, or would exert too much pressure. The only
reason for using a microtome with small bore was to save pith ; and
large specimens he did not as a rule imbed, but cut by luuid. Had
never used pith with diseased, and therefore softened, spinal cord, but
for fresh nerve tissue had seen it used with the very best results : a
proper degree of hardening in some fluid first was aU that was
required.
QUEKETT MiGBOSGOPIGAL ClFB.
Ordinary Meeting, June 26, 1874. — ^Dr. Braithwaite, F.L.S.,
President, in the chair.
Eight members were elected.
The President announced that Dr. Matthews, F.E.M.S., had been
nominated by the Committee as the President for the ensuing year.
The nominations then took place of gentlemen proposed to fill the
vacancies on the Committee.
A promised paper, by Mr. S. Holmes, " On Binocular Microscopes,"
was not forthcoming, and Mr. T. Charters White, in place of it, made
some interesting remarks upon some slides which he exhibited, show-
ing the gritty tissue of pear in a very beautiful manner.
Mr. Ingpen described a form of achromatic prism, designed to
replace the plane, as well as the concave mirror. In this form, the
lens for condensing the light was separate, instead of being cemented
to the prism, and consisted of a plano-convex achromatic doublet, the
flat side of which could be placed close to one of the sides of a plane
right-angled prism, or removed at pleasure, thus getting rid of the only
objection to the ordinary form, viz. that it could not be used in place
of the flat mirror; while its performance in other respects was
unimpaired.
Various announcements of excursions, meetings, &c., were made,
and several interesting objects were afterwards exhibited.
W
THE
MONTHLY MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL.
SEPTEMBER 1, 1874.
I. — On the Morbid Growths from a case of Osteoid Cancer
of the Left Femur.
By Joseph Nbbdham, F.R.M.S., London Hospital.
{A Paper read hefwe the Medical Microscopical Society, Jtme 19, 1874.)
Plates LXXI. and LXXII.
The case from which these growths were obtained is described fully
by Mr. W. J. Smith in the * Medical Press,' July 8th, 1874.
The specimens presented for examination were : —
1st. Portions of the tumour surrounding the lower third of the
left femur.
2nd. Portions of diseased popliteal lymphatic glands.
3rd. Part of mass representing the lumbar lymphatic glands.
4th. Several pieces of lung tissue, in which were imbedded
several morbid deposits varying in size from a millet-seed to a
walnut.
EXPLANATION OF PLATES LXXI. AND LXXII.
All X 200.
Fio. I. — ^From tumour around femur, matrix of dense uncalcified portion in
transverse section — cellular elements partly brushed out,
a, Radiating fibres.
&, Irregular branching fibres.
c, Blood-vessel partly blocked up.
,, II. — Similar preparation in longitudinal section.
a, Kadiating fibres.
hj Irregular bramohing fibres.
„ m. — ^From tumour around femur.
a. Zone of calcified fibres surrounding
6, a vessel whose walls are formed of
c, fibres and cells.
„ IV. — ^From tumour around femur.
a, A large peripheral space filled with
hy masses of celb in difierent stages of disintegration.
„ V. — Secondary deposit in lung.
a. Growth invading and distending
6, air-cells of lung.
„ VI. — Secondary deposit in lung.
a, Soft stroma resembling hyaline cartUage.
6, Preserved hyaline cartilage of bronchus.
VOL. XIL K
122 Oil the Morbid Growths from a case of
1st. The consistence of this mass varies considerably ; the
greater part immediately snrrounding the bone is very hard, whilst
the external portions are soft, the density increasing from without
inwards. The matrix of the dense portions consists of large
irregular fibres varying in size from r^^nr to ^^Vir of an inch in
diameter, arranged in parallel bundles, radiating from the surface
of the femur to the periphery of the tumour, but also presenting in
some parts a dense irregular network, due to those radiating fibres
crossing each other and uniting at various angles ; each of these
fibres gives ofi* at irregulaif intervals branches, which radiate in
various directions and join other fibres and their branches. The
elements of the matrix in the central portions are so closely im-
pacted that few interspaces can be discerned ; but proceeding from
this position to the circumference the fibres become more and more
separated, so that they form large irregular alveoli varying in size,
in which the cell elements are enclosed. In the softer parts of the
tumour, more especially at the periphery, the bundles of large fibres
are separated by wide intervals ; the large spaces thus formed are
filled by masses of the softer elements. Externally the tumour is
covered by a dense layer of connective tissue, from which processes
representing trabeculae can be traced even into the dense central
calcareous parts ; but these processes are distinct from the fibres
proper of the matrix, and in no place are they observed united.
Tracing the fibres from without inwards, their structure is seen to
be — first, apparently homogeneous, then faintly fibrous, and finally,
calcareous ; but, although this is the predominant arrangement of
their structural peculiarities, yet all the blood-vessels are surrounded
by a zone of calcified fibres. No true lacunaB nor canaliculi are to
be seen, objectives up to tjV ii^ch revealing nothing in the so-called
" osseous tissues," but minute calcareous granules and a few small
badly-formed cavities. The soft elements consist of spheroidal or
elongated oval cells, from ^Tr^^nr to ^3^17 of an inch in diameter, each
containing one or two well-defined nuclei. These cells are best
seen in the large alveoli situated in the peripheral portions of the
tumour; advancing to the centre, the cells become gradually
smaller and more elongated, and are firmly attached to the fibres.
Tracing them still further, their nuclei only are to be seen, whilst
in the central calcified portions nothing approaching the character
of either cell or nucleus is visible: but the cells are scattered
throughout the calcareous zones surrounding the blood-vessels;
closely attached to the wall, and projecting into the lumen of some
of the blood-vessels, are small collections of such cells. The large
peripheral spaces already described are filled with large masses of
cells in different stages of disintegration; some spaces contain
nothing but granular debris, in which minute oil-globules occupy
a prominent position, while in other spaces the cells are very
Osteoid Cancer of tlie Left Femur, 123
granular, but little altered in shape. The tumour is not very
Yascular^ the blood-vessels being few in number and rather large
in size ; their walls are very thin, and are composed of fine fibrous
tissue surrounded by round and fusiform cells corresponding to
those found in other parts of the growth.
2nd. Not even a trace of glandular arrangement remains to
indicate the original nature of the mass; it is extremely dense,
much more so than the primary growth, and consists of numerous
calcareous spicules radiating from the centre to the circumference,
forming long, narrow meshes, wherein are to be seen, closely
packed, numberless round cells, agreeing in character with — but
rather larger than — those of the primary deposit. In no situation
do they show signs of fatty degeneration. The glands are fused
together and surrounded by a capsule composed of loose connective
tissue which is firmly adherent to the mass. The blood-vessels are
more numerous than in the first specimen, and their walls are
calcified.
3rd. In structure these glands are identical with No. 2.
4th. The structure of these masses, small and large, corresponds
to that above described. The calcareous matter is deposited prin-
cipally in the fibres surrounding the vessels, which are here (as in
Nos. 2 and 3) more numerous than in the growth from the femur.
The stroma is more loosely arranged, and in some parts it is soft, and
dimly granular, resembling the matrix of hyaline cartilage ; multi-
tudes of cells are seen filling up the alveoli of the growth and
distending the adjoining air-cells of the lungs; the growth thus
seen invading the pulmonary alveoli consists of round nucleated
cells without stroma. All that can be discerned in these morbid
masses, of the normal structure of the part, is a beautifully preserved
plate of hyahne cartilage, here and there the only landmark of an
obliterated bronchua The lung tissue and the morbid deposits
therein are much pigmented.
The appearance of these growths (with the single exception of
the absence of true lacuiim) agrees with those usually described
under the name of peripheral osteo-sarcoma, or osteoid cancer of
Miiller, and as such I should regard them.
K *J
IT. — Diaeusaion of the Formula of an Immergton Ol^'edtve oj
greater Aperture than corresponds to the Maximmn poss^le
for Dry Objectives. By Mr. li. Keith.
Plats LXXUI. (Lower portion).
Dit. WooDWARp having received from Mr. ToUea, and placed in my
huods, the etementa necessary for the coniputatioii of the aDgnlar
aperture of the iV-inch objective, described by him iu the number
of this Journal for November, 1873, p. 214, 1 have made the com-
putation with five figure logarithms. A computation of this kind
ifi much more satisfactory to mathematieiana and more easily re-
viewed than an enlarged drn\¥ing.
The objective ia composed of seven lenses. The first four, com-
mencing at the back, are united by balsam into one combmation, the
next two into a middle combination, and the seventh is a hemi-
sphere of crown glass. I give below the elements in a tebnlar form,
and annex a figure accurately drawn to a scale. Where dietancea
are given, the unit is in all caaes an inch.
a.
b.
c.
s. 1
..
/.
9-
RefrftcCiTo index ..
1-525
1-620
1-525
I-B20 1
fl?5
IG.-)*
Ratlins of let tiurfaae
0-265
0-20O
0-200
„ 3»d „
0-200
0-200
0-.W0
\m
0-500
TliiokneaaBt centra
0-M8
0-027
0-033
0-047 1
ora
0-020
0035
rHameter .. ..
0-200
0-2OO
0-200
0-200
llii
0-165
0-066
The distance between the first combination and the middle one
ie D'008, and the radiant is aBsnmed 10, from the first surface.
From these elements I find that the extreme ray enters the first
combination ■ 09250 from the axis, at an angle with the axis of
0^ 31' 45" ; and enters the middle 0-U7391 from the axis at an
angle of —11° 1' 3", the negative sign indicating convergence of the
light. Adjusting the collar so that the distance of the front lena
firam the middle ia - 00528, I find that the same ray enters this
lena " 033 from the axis, at an angle of — 29° 44' 7", and makes,
after refraction, an angle of — 55" 17' 35" vfith the axis.
Thus the extreme aperture, in fluid balsam, no allowance being
made for the setting of the snaall front lens, is 110° 35' 10". By
computation the spherical aberration for tbia position of the collar
is practically nothing. If an allowance of only 0-00162 be made
for the setting of the front lens, the aperture is reduced to 87", and
this is doubtless a proper allowance,
1 append a Table giving the distances from the axis (A) at wHoh
the hght crosses each surface, numbered in order, and also the
^H SDgl
Final Bemarhs on Immersion Apertm
125
BDglea (E) which the ray, before crossing, makes with the axia,
nntubered in the same order.
Throngh the kindness of Dr. "Woodward I am enabled to send,
to the eare of the Editor,* several photographic copiea of the whole
compatation for the inspection and review of those having sofScient
interest in the matter.
.».n«»
*. 1 K
...^.\ . , K.
lit
2iid
3rd
■ 4th
Sth
0-09250
0-09139
0- 08742
0-0862S
0-08318
+ 31 45
- 6 51 51
-4 37 23
- 4 51 42
- 2 57 30
6th
7th
8th
9th
10th
0- 07391
0-06625
0-05324
O-O3S00
0-00000
-U I 3
- 21 37 5
-20 8
-29 44 7
- 55 17 35
[" Any gentleman who ia deairoaa of possessing one of these
I niay do so on communicating with the Editor. — Ed. ' M, M. J.'J
Geoboetown, D.C, Ju/y 9, 1874.
III. — Final Remarks on Immersion A-periurei.
By J. J. Woodward, Aseistant-Sargeou U. S. Army.
In hia reply to my article " On Immersion Objectives of greater
Aperture than corresponds to the Maximum possible for Dry Objec-
tives," t Mr. Wenham aska me : " Can he show us the passage of the
rays through one of the object-glasses such as he advocates in a
diagram of correctly enlarged dimensions? I shall then have
tangible material before me, and will enter upon the consideration
with enthnaiflflm."t To this demand I replied: "If Mr. Tolles
thinks proper to deviate from the ordinary practice of those who
make objectives for sale, and to communicate for pubhcation the
details of the construction of either or both the objectivea described
in my November paper, it will be an easy matter for me to gratify
Mr. Wenham, and 1 will endeavour to do so. Not that I think
this additional testimony needed to show the accuracy of my mea-
surements of the immersed apertures of these objectives, but be(ause,
beaidea the value of the information to objective makers, I should
be happy to be the means of adding to the scanty store of facts
which the objective makers have placed at the disposal of science."
The paper in which I made these remarks § having been communi-
cated to Mr. Tollea before its publication in England, he generously
^
t Tliia Jonrrnl, November, 1873, p. 210.
i Ibii., DecHmber, 1873, p. 257.
S Ibiil., Murch, 1874, p. 121.
126 Final Beniarhs on Immersion Apertures.
placed at my disposal, in a letter dated January 22nd, 1874, the
details of the construction of both the objectives described in my
paper in the November number of this Journal, with permismon to
publish so much with regard to either or both of them as might
in my opinion be essential to the demonstration of the matter in
dispute.
Of the two I have selected the -nyth belonging to the Museum,*
both on account of its superb definition (see, for example, the
photographs of Amphipleura pejlucida sent with my November
paper), and because, as this lens has a simple hemispherical front,
it is an excellent example of the class of objectives with regard to
which the possibiUty of a balsam aperture of more than 82° has
been most strenuously denied. The data with regard to this objec-
tive I placed in the hands of my friend Professor E. Keith, of
Georgetown, with the request that he would trace the course of
the rays through the combination by the trigonometrical method,
which is of course more rigidly exact than Mr. Wenham's plan of
making an enlarged diagram, and tracing the rays through geome-
trically, and not so much more diflScult as he seems to suppose, t
Mr. Keith's engagements did not permit him to undertake the task
at once, and after he commenced the discussion some delay was
caused by lack of information with regard to one or two points,
which could only be suppUed by Mr. Tolles, who was absent from
home on account of sicfaiess. But for these unavcidable circum-
stances the results of this discussion would have been ready some
time since. As it is, Mr. Keith has prepared a paper which
accompanies this, and which gives the elements of the objective,
and lus results in detail, together vrith a figure reduced photo-
graphically from an enlarged diagram accurately constructed in
accordance vrith the computed results.
It will be seen that Mr. Keith obtains in the position of the
screw-collar which gives the maximum aperture, a calculated
balsam angle of 110° 35' 10". Now, it will be remembered, that
in my account of this objective I stated its balsam angle at the
point of maximum, as measured by my method,^ to be only 87°, or
twenty-three degrees and a half less than the calculated angle. A
moment's examination of Mr. Keith's diagram will show the reason
of this, for it will be seen at once that very trifling encroachments
on the diameter of the hemispherical front by its setting, will
produce a considerable reduction of the angle. In feet, Mr. Keith
states that he has found by actual computation an encroachment
of '00162 of an inch (^^rth very nearly) on the periphery of the
front will reduce the calculated to the observed angle. .
I desire also to call attention in this place to the fact, that the
♦ This Journal, November, 1873, p. 214.
t Ibid., April, 1873, p. 164.
X Ibid., June, 1873, p. 268, for the method referred to.
Final Remarks on Immersion Apertures, 127
front discussed in my November paper * was not a complete hemi-
sphere posteriorly, but the curve ceased at 78° from the optical axis,
or 12° less than the posterior curve of the front lens of the com-
bination discussed by Mr. Keith ; as a consequence the rays pro-
ceeding backwards, after having passed through the front, will
diverge less from the optical axis for any given balsam angle, in
the case of the latter lens, than they do in the case of that figured
in my diagram.
Mr. Keith further states that he has computed the spherical
aberration of the combination, adjusted as above, and finds it prac-
tically nil. This being the case the objective ought to perform well
when adjusted to the point of maximum aperture, if balsam be used
as the immersion fluid in lieu of water, and the thick cover ordina-
rily employed at this position of the screw-collar. Accordingly, in
company with Mr. Keith, I tested the objective in this way on
Orammatophora suhtilissima by lampUght, and we both thought
the definition unmistakably better than with water immersion.
Mr. Keith has not considered it important to discuss the slight
chromatic aberration which this combination is admitted to possess,
because it was constructed with special reference to freedom from
spherical aberration when used with monochromatic sunlight. I
may say, however, that this residual chromatic aberration is not so
great as to interfere in the least with the definition of the objective
when used with white-cloud illumination or lamp.
I have also to record of this objective, that although it was con-
structed for use as an immersion lens only,t yet I have recently
found by trial, that if the screw-collar be turned nearly to the open
point, it performs admirably when used as a dry lens, on objects
mounted dry, as well as on those mounted in balsam, provided the
covers select^ are of suitable thickness.^
Let me now remind my friend Mr. Wenham of his recent
promise on the subject of this controversy. " I should have been
glad if Col. Woodward had given us an illustrative figure, having
some relationship to a reality with the rays carried to their final
destination. The passage of all his rays should have careful con-
sideration, and if I saw no error I could not state that there is one,
and trust that I have the candour to admit accuracy." §
With this I dismiss the subject ; nor can I be expected to pay
attention hereafter to the assertions of anyone who may continue to
hold that it is " theoretically impossible " to construct immersion
objectives with a balsam aperture greater than 82° " of image-form-
ing rays," unless he can show some material error in Mr. Keith's
computations. Before I conclude this paper, however, I feel called
♦ This Journal, November, 1873, p. 211.
t Ibid., p. 214.
X See Mr. Wenham*s remarks, ibid., March, 1874, p. 119.
§ This Journal, April, 1874, p. 171.
r
I
128 Final Reviarka on Immersion Jip^vtra.
upon to Bay a wort! or two with regard to certain matters which
have been publiahed in this Journal during the last few months.
And firat, as fo the following pnaaage in Mr. Wenham's letter
in the April number (p. 171). " The immersion focus ia therefore
the outer one, and the dry focus the nearest to the lens : now CoL
Woodward has dra\vn the reveree of this, and In his diagram made
the angle for immersion rays the inner one, or closest to the lens."
To this I reply, that the focal point F* of the balsam angle 82°,
corresponds necessarily to a dry angle only a differential less th^n
180°, m which the radiant must be at a point infinitely near W on
the front of the objective, and that therefore in my drawing the
" immersion focos is," in point of fact, " the outer one, and the dry
focus the nearest to the lens," as Mr. Wenham says it ought to be,
notwithstanding the circumatanee that the fod of the correspond-
ing baLiam angles occupy precisely the opposite relations.
The next point to which I desire to refer briefly, is Mr. Wen-
ham's new method of measuring apertures t by placing a vertical
slit in the locus of the objective. This method might perhaps be
used without giving rise to material inaccuracy when the objective
ia adjusted for uncovered objects ; but when it is closed to the point
of masimom aperture, that is in the very position about which
alone there ia any dilute, its spherical aberration is of course no
longer corrected for uncovered objecta, and if the attempt be made
to focus upon them, as for instantw upon the glass between the jaws
of Mr. Wenham'a slit, it is quite possible to make such errors in
endeavouring to approximate the correct focal distance as to destroy
the accuracy of the result, and lead to the unintentional cutting off
of more or lees of the actual angle of aperture.
Lastly, I feel compelled to refer to the paper by Mr. Brakey in
the May number of this Journal (p. 221). TMb writer, whose
peculiar style of wit owes whatever poignancy it may possess to the
ready miscrupulousness with which he misrepresents the views of
those whom he attacks for the purpose of trying to mate them
appear ridiculovis, devotee four pages to a comic presentation of my
opinions, and of the part I have taken in this discussion, which is
characteristically inaccnrate. If I could suppose that he had mis-
understood my former articles, I should feel called upon to explain,
but OS it is evident that the misrepresentations are intentional, I
flhnll accord to the article no further notice than this brief para-
graph.
IV. — Refracting Priam for Binocular Microseapes.
By P. H. Wenham, V.P.B.M.S.
On June 13th, 1860, before the Microscopical Suciety, I described
a Binocular Microscope with an achromatic prism of the form of
Fig. 1. My commuQication
was published in the ' Trans-
actions ' at the time. The
mdy prism made on this plan
was tne one exhibited on that
occasion.
I remarked in my paper
that the drawback ia this pnsm
wiB " the great diffica% at-
tendant upon its construc-
tion," for it will be seen that ,
the upper or erown-glaas prism I
hfia four facets, which have to
be worked separately with all
the angles exactly parallel to
each other. Having made i
this prism myself, I liad no
desire to construct another of
this form, and therefore in
order to simplify the arrange-
ment I transposed the compooente as repreacnted by Fig. 2, in
which the flint prisms are the uppermost. The angles of this
diagram are drawn on the original steel templates.
Messrs, Smith and Beck fitted about a dozen microscopes with
these prisms. The first was for the late Mr. Lutwidge, and the
next for Mr. Jan^on, of Exeter, The original one, worked by my-
self^ is now in the hands of Mr. Crisp, who has made a collection
of the different forms of binoculars. Immediately afterwards the
present form of rejle&ting prism was devised, which entirely super-
seded the last. Ihis was described before the Microscopical Society
December l'2th, 1860, In that paper I state, with reference to the
late refracting prism, as follows : — " Having still further advanced
the definition, by a modification in the construction of the (refract-
ing) prism, the performance was bo superior to anything preceding
it tiiat several were made for parties who had seen the results,
and which instruments proved satisfactory to their owners."
I find that this was the only allusion made to what I considered
at the time an obsolete contriyance, and not having given a par-
ticular description, it appears to have been twice reinvented ; and as
in a late arrangement of erecting binocular I have only recently de-
I
^" 1
130 Oil {he Value of Bii/h Powers
scribed the prism,* I seem to have incurred the charge of plagiarism.
The prism last employed of tliis form was made fourteen years ago,
as I found that it could be conveniently edged down, so as to be placed
deep in the setting, close behind the \mik lena of the object-glass.
I have no wish to disparage or criticise forms of binocular
microscopes designed by others, as refracting prisms perform excel-
lently, and perhaps the only condition that haa made the now
nniversal form so popular, is that it leaves the single body of the
microscope intact, not in any way requiring a difference in the con-
Btrnction, or interfering with its ordinary use.
Other known constructions are aJl more complicated, and as theone
Erinciple appears to be the divisioTi or bisection of the object-glaas
y usmg half for each eye, and if in the main tube the direct
image is straightway obtained, I do not see how definition can. be
improved by any intervening contrivance. The only question ia
whether the image in the incHned tube can he brought to the eya
bjr fmj. more simple means than tbe present refiecting prism.
I
V. — On the Value of High Powers in ihe Diagnosis of Blood
Stains. By Joseph G. Eichakdson, M.D., Lecturer on Pa-
thological Anatomy in the UniverBity of Pennajlvania, and
Mioroscopist to the Pennsylvania Hospital.
(Haul be/ore the Bif)i.osicAi, Asn MicnoscaricAi, Rectios ot the Amebican
Aladeuv >.f Natuiial ^cjesceb.)
Plate LXXIII. (Upper portiou).
In the pages of the ' American Journal of the Medical Sciences '
for July, 1869, apijeared an article on the detection by the micro-
scope, of red and white corpuscles in blood stains, in which I advo-
cated the employment of high jKiwers in such esamination, and
asserted that by their aid I had been able to demonstrate that tha
residunm of a dried blood-clot, left after the action of pure water,
BO long mistaken by Virchow, Kobin, and their followers, for "pure
fibrin,' was composed chiefly of the cell-walls of tie red bfood-
corpusclea, and tnat by proper management these capsules of the
led disks could be brought clearly enough into view to enable mo
to measure thorn accurately, and eo distinguish the dried blood of
jnan from that of an ox, pig, or sheep, with a certainty disputed by
Caspar, Wyman, Fleming, and other previous observers.
This possibility of recognizing blood -globules when dried en
iiiasse, is of course closely associated with, if not actually dependent
upon, thfflr possession of a cell-wall, as maintained in my paper on
the cellular structure of the red blood-corpuscle, in the ' Trans, of
the Am, Med. Assoc.' for 1870 (tbe theory being mainly deduced.
• ' M, M. J.,' SI«.v, 1S7S, ji. 2IS.
ca
■r-
in /he Diagnosis of Blood Stains. 133
■&om exporimenta upon the gigantic blood-disks of the Menobran-
chns, in which crystals of htemato-cryatallin were seen to prop
out a visible membranona capsnle). Indeed, as I have elsewhere
remarked, if the red blood-globulea are simply homogeneoua lumps
of jelly-like matter, the chance of discovering any individual cor-
puscles in a Bsasa of dry blood-clot, however moistened, seems
almost as hopeless as the search after individual rain drops in a
cake of melting ice.
Notwithstanding this, however, we find in the third edition of
'rof. A. S. Taylor's work on Medical Jurisprudence,* figures of red
ilood-corpuscles of ten different ammals, as they appear under a
low power, with the statement (strictly accurate in r^ard to blood-
disks thus fedily magnified) that "there are no certain methods of
distinguishiig, microscopically or cTiemically, the blood of a human
being from that of an auimoj, veh^n it has been once dried on an
article of clothing." This declaration seems to show that more
complete and conclnaive proof is still needed of the superior advan-
tage derivable fixim the application of high objeetivea to the diagnosis
of blood stains.
The a priori arguments against the value of this microscopic
for distingmshing human blood from that of the os, pig, horse,
p, and goat, may be grouped under three heads, viz. : — 1st. It
objected, as by Taylor, Caspar, and others, that the difference
the red blood-corpuscles of man and of these domestic
is too minute to render their positive discrimination
le, and too insignificant to admit of its being used as the
means of condemning a fellow-creature to death. 2nd. That even
if the average diameters of these various corpuscles were shown to
be so different that we might sometimes by this means distingmsh
them, yet the variations above and below the mean diameter are so
frequent and irregular, that they must render the determination of
any such averages by mere micrometric measurement umeliable ;
and yrd, many investigators beheve, with Virchow and J3rucke, that
no microacopist can " hold himself justified in putting in question a
man's Hfe on the uncertain calculation of a blood-corpuscle's ratio
of contraction by drying."
In reply to the first of these objections, it may be urged that
the blood-corpuscles are just as much characteristics of the different
kinds of living beings in which they occur, as are the coverings of
the body, the shape of the legs, or the number of joints in the
antenna, so that exactly as we may tell, for example, a bird's skin
from an animal's, by the former being covered with feathers, whilst
the latter is furnished with hair, so wo may distinguish a bird's or
« camel's blood from that of a man, by the former having oval cor-
puscles, whilst those of the latter aie rounded in their outline,
• Vol. i., p. 5i8,
134 On the VaJve ofBitfh Prmvrs
Further, in regnrd to the red blood-diskB of animals with
rounded rarpuscles, I can perhaps beat illuatrate the principles that
guide as in their diflcrimiiintion by snggeetinf; that these bodies
may be aptly compared to different sizes of shot. Thus, for
insiance, the red glohnlea of man's blood are nearly twice the size
of the sheep's, and aliout four tinaea that of the inuak deer's, just as
No. 1 shot is perhaps double the magnitude of No. 5 and quadruple
that of No. 8.
It is obvious, too, that a shot dealer in the latter case, or a
skilful microscopist in the former, woald more quickly and surely
distinguiih two analogous sizes of red blood, or of leaden globules,
from each other, than could an inexperienced apprentice in either
occupation.
Hence it follows, that whilst we might be in doubt whether the
shot dissected out of the body of a wounded man wiis a No. 1 or a
No. 2, we could have no hesitation, after me-aanring it with a gauge,
in declaring it was too large for a No. 5 and a fortiori for a No. 8,
precisely as the corpuscles of man's blood might be confounded with
those of a monkey's, but on measurement are seen at once to he too
large for those of an ox or sheep. Nor can it be disputed that
mere measurement in either instance, when practically correct, is
quite sufficient to decide a doubtful case, as, for example, if I
was to shoot myself in the hand, and then assert that it bad been
done by some one else, whose pun was known to be loaded with
Na 8 shot, whilst the grains in my flesh were actually of the size
of No. 1.
It must be remembered, too, that whilst the relative differences
between corpuscles of human, os, and sheep's blood remain the
same, the absolute difference becomes more perceptible in proportion
as the disks are magnified above, for example, those represented iu
Dr. Taylor's work, so that when the former corpuscles appear f of
an inch and the latter ^ of an inch across (as they do under
the bV), they can hardly be mistaken for another, any more than a
12-inch shell could be mistaken for a 6-inch shell, even by a
careless person, who would call a No. 1 a No. 5 shot.
Ordinarily in criminal cases the microscopist is called upon to
determine, not whether a particular specimen is human, as distin-
guished from all other kinds of blood, but to discriminate simply
between the blood-corpuscles of a man and an os, a man and a
liorsc, or a man and a t^hecp, and so establish or disprove the
defendant's story as to how hia clothing or other articles became
stained with blood. Sometimes the much easier task is imposed
(as in a recent case wherein I was engaged) of diagnosing between
the blood of a human being and that of a bird.* In this instance
^^V in the Diagnosis of Blood Stains. 135 I
^^H many of the saBpected stains occurred on the prisoner's boots, and I
^^r proved npon that article of clothing singularly easy of detection. I
Finally, I would remind those who demur at the idea of allowing 1
I
Finally, I would remind those who demur at the idea of allowing
a man's life to hang upon such seemingly insignificant circuniBtancea
as a difference in size of blood-corpnscles, how often the reactionfl
of arsenic, afforded by a quantity of the metal too excessively trivial
to he accurately estimated by tlie most delicate halahce, have
snfficed to bring out the crime of murder, and to aid in securing
that just punishment for violation of law in which we all have so
deep an interest, beeanse on it all our enjoyment of life and property
depends.
To the second objection, viz. that the variations above and
below the standard size of coi-puscles from any particular animal
are too great and irregular to permit us to obtain an accurate result
by measurement, I would answer, that this difference in size is
more eBpecially observable in corpuscles dried in a thin film upon a
glass shde, and is then probably in part a pathological change due
to external violence in spreading and drying. These variations are
comparatively sbght in fresh blood, as is proved by the following
experiments, made with my ^th inch objective, which gives with
the micrometer eye-piece an amplification of 3700 diameters.
When thus magnified the human red blood-disks appear about one
inch and one-eighth in diameter, bo that even slight differences in
their size can be accurately measured. Among one hundred red
corpuscles freshly drawn from five different persona, the maximum,
mean diameters were
as follows
_
Mil.
Mln.
MwnB.
ft white male aged 30
1-3500
1-3355
1-3281
1-3529
1-3375
„ female „ 41
1-32*9
1-3.100
1-3381
nnAMcan „ „ 50
1-31B2
1-3559
1-338*
a white male „ S
1-3231
1-3500
1-3398
Average of meana
1-3378
The measurement of twenty corpuscles from part of tlie first of
these specimens dried in a thin film upon a shde gave a maximum
of THTnr. * minimum of mnrr. ^^^ ^ mean diameter of stV? of an
inch.
Moreover, if it can be abovm that the smallest red disks of
man, as usually met with in mechanically unaltered blood, whether
dry or moist, are larger than the largest corpuscles of an ox, and
a fortiori of a sheep, such an objection, as regards these particular
animals at least, becomes valueless, and that this is the case I pro-
pose to presently demonstrate.
As illustrating the accuracy which some practical experience in
measuring minute objects, Hke the red blood-disks, with the cobweb
micrometer enables us to attain, I may instance the following fact,
VOL. xn. L
I
On the Value of Eigh Powers
wluch my friend, Prof. Theodore G. Wormley, M.D., of Colnmbna,
Ohio, kindly permits me to mention here, but which may appear
more in detail in his appendix on blood stains to the nest edition
of hie splendid -work on ' Micro-Chemistry of roisons.' During a
recent visit to Philadelphia Prof. Wormley brought with him a
ahde of human blood, upon which wexe seven corpuscles (designated
by nombera on an accompanying drawing), which he had meaaured
under several different objectives and forms of apparatus. These
corpuscles Dr. W. requested mo to measure under my ^g immersion
lens, and after doing so I fonnd that my results agreed very closely
with his own, and that in two or three instances they were precisely
identical. The mean diameter of the seven disks, according to m^
computation, was ^st-b against ^5^ of an inch, the average of his
measurements. There was thus a total deviation from the true size
of only tisbVtii of ^° inch in my results, which were those of an
independent observer, seeing the objects for the Erst time, and
determining their magnitude under a magnifying power, and by
the aid of apparatus entirely different from those Prof, Wormley
had employed.
Thirdly, the assertion of Tirchow, that a man's hfe should not
bo put in question on the uncertain calculation of a hlood-corpuscle'a
ratio of contraction by drying, does not seem to me a fair statement
of the point at issue ; because since the red blood-corpuscles of
oxen, horses, piga, sheep, deer, and goats are all much smaller than
those of man, no degree of contvaciwn which they could undergo
would render the stains in which they occur more liable to be
mistaken for man's blood ; and if, as is rarely, if ever, the case,
human red blood-corpuscles in a stain were by any means contracted
BO afl to resemble those of an 01, for instance, in size, the evidence
from microscopic examination would only midead ns into assisting
in the acquittal of a criminal, and could not betray us into aiding
to convict an innocont person.
Had Prof. Yirchow worded hia statement so as to read, " the
uncertain 'calculation of a blood-corpuscle's ratio of contraction or
expansion by drying," his objection would have been strictly logical,
alfliougb, as I believe, it would not have been founded upon fect^
because if a corpuscle of ox blood could expand during the process
of desiccation or of moistening so as to even approximate to the
human red disk in magnitude, it might mislead us into testifying
erroneously to the presence of man's blood, when beef blood idone
had been shed, and thereby endangering the life of an individual
who was entirely guiltless.
Bat my observations, made upon many different kinds of blood,
and under a great variety of conditions, clearly indicate that the cell-
i wall of a red blood-globule is nearly or quite inelastic, and incapable
i of any marked espansion by the process of drying or moistening
■
■
m fh^ DiagnoBis of Blood Stains. 137
with the fluids I recommend for the esamiaation of blood stains.
The flhght increase of size previoasly mentioned as occurring in the
desiccation of a thin filni of blood, forms, I believe, only an
apparent exception, and is probably due to a change of shape taking
place during the complete flattening out of the disks as they lose
their contained water. The experience of Prof. Leidy and Prof.
Wormley accords with mine, in that they have never seen the drying
or remoistening of red blood- corpuscles cause them to expand, and
I therefore conclude we may affirm that when the corpuscles remain
uncontracted, their indications are perfectly reliable, and if they
shrink (as I beheve they rarely do), that being tho only serious
modification which they can undergo, the sole danger ia that by a |
possible, but not probable, mistake in diagnosis of the origin of a
blood stain through contiaction of its corpuscles, we might contri-
bute to a criminal's escape, never to the punishment of an innocent
party.
But all these theoretical considerations are of very secondary
importance in comparison with the positive fact, as to whether
practically we cau or cannot discriminate the stains of human blood
from those made by the blood of oxen and sheep. I have therefore
endeavoured to work out a conclusive answer to this question,
obtaining it by a method which will, I trnst, carry conviction to
the miud of every honest aeeier a.fter trnth.
On the 16th of May, 1874, my friends, Prof. J. J. Reese and
Dr. S. Weir Mitchell, each kindly prepared for me three packages
of dried blood from stains made by sprinkling the fresh fluid from
an ox, a man, and a sheep, upon white paper. The two series were
simply nvunbered 1, 2, and 3, and a memorandum preserved by each
gentleman, specifying which kind of blood composed each sample.
By this plan it is obvious that I was prevented from having any
cine to the origin of the specimens save that afi'orded by the
microscope, and my examinations and measurements were therefore
entirely tree from bias.
Some small particles from specimen No. 1, handed me by Prof,
Eeese, were broken np into a fine dust, with a sharp knife upon a
shde, and covered with a film of thin ghiss. A few drops of the
ordinary three-quarter of 1 per cent, common salt solution were
then successively introduced at one margin of the cover, and
removed from the opposite edge, as they penetrated thither, by a
little slip of blotting-paper, thus washing away the colonnng
matter from the tiny maasES of dried dot. When those particles
were nearly decolourized, a drop of anihne solution was allowed I
to flow in beneath the cover, and, after remaining about half a J
^M minute, was in its turn washed away, and ita place suppUed by a J
^H forther portion of weak salt solution. ■
^^1 On adjusting the specimen as thus prepared, under a gV immer- I
r
On the Value of High Potoers
138
flion lens (giving (in ampUfication, with the A eye-piece, of 12j)0
diameteiH), a fragment of the blood stain waa soon discovered, which
displayed the deliciite cell-walls of its component red and white
corpoaclea, as fignred in my 'Handbook of Medical Microscopy,'
p. 284. Ten consecutive red cliska from these, selected simply as
among those which had become bat little distorted, were found to
measure as noted bt;low in the first column. The second and third
figures show the result of similar experiments, performed
on samples 2 and 3,
all the magnitudes being given in
English inch.
Bpedmen No. 1.
Spodm-n No. a.
BpB:lra«. No. 3
1-34*8
1-4702
1-5555
1-3572 (minimum)
1-47G2
1-6060
1-3572
1-4878 (minimum)
1-5405 (m
1-3572
MGal
1-5880
1-3333
1-4878
1-6666 (m
1-4444 (maximum)
1-C060
1-3448
1-4444
1-5777
1-3278
1-4762
1-5355
1-3833
1-4651
1-S448
1-4762
1-5777
1-3407 (mi
1-1694 (m
18 Cm.
n)
Since the red corpuscles of human, ox, and sheep's blood
meftanre, according to Gulliver, ^Vmfi Ta'sr. aa^ Worr oi an inch
respectively, and previous experiments of my own had demonstrated
a disposition to sligM contraction in the corpuscles of blood stains
which have been dried and moistened again, I of course concluded
that sample No. 1 waa human blood. No. 2 waa os blood, and
No. 3 was sheep's blood. On reporting these diagnoses to Prof.
Reese, I had the satisfaction of learning that they were " entirely
correct,"
Oarefiil examination of the three specimens furnished me hy
Dr. Mitchell, and prepared in a manner similar to that detailed
above (except that diluted liq. iodinii comp. was used instead of
aniline liquid for tinting the cellular elements), led me to analogous
conclusions, as will bo seen from the following table of measure-
1-^545
1-6230
1-3573
1-4762
1-6250
1-3390
) 1-6060
1-3175 (maximum)
1-4347 (mniimun
) 1-6450 (miQimum)
1-3278
1-4414
1-5880
1-3448
1-4762
1-5777
1-3:J:53
1-4651
1-5555
1-3572
1-4878
1-5406 (maximum)
1-3390
1-4545
1-6260
l-4S7a
1-5880
1-3636
in the Diagnosis of Blood Slain
From these results, I of course decided that No. 1 was ox blood.
No. 2 was sheep's blood, and No. 3 waa hiimftn blood, and on
reporting my coaclusiona to Pr. Mitchell, I was again very much
gratified to receire a reply informing me that they were perfectly
correct.
It is interestiug and important to observe, that in no instance
do the minimum diameters of the human blood-corpuscles closely )
approach the maximum diameter of even those from ox blood. It
is true that corpuscles are occ-oflionally to be met with both in fresh
blood and in dry clot, which fall much below the general average
of the specimen, but these are comparatively rare (not amounting
to over one in a hundred), and they so generally in fresE^blood i
'Bear 8iicG"nia?ks"^f tmimatie injury or paUioIogical change, that it
is only fiiir to disregard them in making up our estimates. If my
views are correct respecting the osmotic processes constantly going
on through the cell-wall of both the red and the white corpuscles,"
alterations in the specific gravity of the hqnor sanguinis, surround-
ing the corpuscles, produced by desiccation at the margin of the
thin glass cover, must cause slight changes in the diameter of the
Nevertheless, as these variations necessarily lie between .
their normal size (^As ?)> "■Q^ their magnitude when dried upon i
a slide (siVs ?), they can never lead to confusion in diagnosis even i
from ox blood.
In regard to the practical minutiio of the examination of
blood stains, I have little to add to the description given a page
or two back, except concerning the menstrua advistd by various
authors.
The saturated solution of sulphate of soda recommended by
Prof, Charles Robin, and endorsed by numerous authorities, has the
disadvantage of rapidly crystallizing around the specimen, and
must, I think, owe its popularity chiefly to the fact that it often
contains large quantities of a pecnliar fungus, the spores of which
closely resemble red blood-corpuscles both in size and general
appearance, and have, I doubt not, frequently been mistaken ibr
blood-cells. Diluted albumen and solution of hypophosphite of
soda have not in my hands seemed to possess any peculiar ad-
vantages, and the method of Erpenbeck. quoted by Prof. Taylor,
of gently breathing on the fragments of blood-clot mitil they are
sufficiently moistened to liquefy, will not, I beheve, in general
Ktmable us to demonstrate any corposcles except the leucocytes of the
eoagulum. These leucocytes have probably often been mistaken by
observers for " decolourized red disks."
The highly refractive properties of glycerin and its solutions
advised by Dr. Taylor and others, render it in my judgment less
t
e
I;
i
140 Vcdiie of High Powers in the Diagnosis of Blood Stains.
applicable as a liquid for moistening blood stains and bringing into
Yiew the delicate oell-walls of their constituent corpuscles thaii the
75 per cent, salt solution. I can, however, folly agree with my
friend, Dr. E. M. Bertolet, that for preservation and prolonged
study of specimens of blood stains, glycerin forms the best medium
at our disposal, although it seems to me that his suggestion, that
we should before mounting them tint the cell-walls and nuclei
of oviparous blood-corpuscles with the reagents employed in the
admirable guaiacum t^ for blood, will be found in practice less
advantageous than my own plan of using aniline solution. And
this in ?^ on accoJt of th^ difficulty o? procuring tiie etiiereal
proportion of peroxide of hydrogen, and of applying it to micro-
scopic specimens, and partly because it will prove so much harder
to convince the average juryman that a bright blue material (instead
of a crimson-red substance) is actually clotted blood.
In examining spots of blood more than one-tenth of an inch in
diameter, I would advise that fragments should be scraped from the
edges or thinnest parts of the stain, because specimens from the
central portions sometimes exhibit numerous fibrm filaments which
have appeared before the desiccation of the drop. These of course
interfere with the investigation by forming a more or less complete
meshwork around the cell-walls, and so confosing the delicate
outlines which the latter present when the view is uninterrupted.
As a contribution towards answering the question of how long
after their deposit upon objects blood stains may be detected by
microscopic investigation, I may mention that a fragment from one
of the twenty blood spots used in May 1869 "for estimating the
delicacy of the microscopic test for blood "^ (determined at r^hru of
a grain, as stated in my paper in vol. Iviii., N. S., of the ' American
Journal of the Medical Sciences,' p. 57) was recently examined as
above described, and found still at the end of five years to exhibit
multitudes of corpuscles, which could be clearly distinguished from
those of the ox or sheep, as will be seen by the followmg record of
measurements made May 23, 1874 1 —
1-3572 of an inch.
1-3448
1-3278 „
1-3125 ,, maximum.
1-3390
1-3509
1-3448
1-3509
1-3572 ,, minimum.
1-3448
»
»»
»
1-3425 „ mean of ten corpuscles.
The corresponding average of my measurements five years ago
was ^-iTi of an inch, so that no further contraction seems to result
An Account of certain Organisms in the Liquor Sanguinis. 141
firom age, and as the ontUnes of the corpuscles appear ^uite as
distinct now as they did soon affier the blood was d^wn, it seems
probable that this microscopic evidence of human bloodshed will be
equally unmistakable twenty or even fifty years hence, provided due
care continues to be exercised in its preservation from moisture and
external violence.
In conclusion, I submit, that the results of my experiments
above narrated prove that, since the red blood-globtdes of the pig
Crhir), the ox (irsW)> the red deer (tAt), the cat (tAt)* the horse
(t^), the sheep (y^), and the goat (^^ of an inch), are all so
much smaller than even the ordinary minimum size of the human
red disk, as measured in my investigations, we are now able hy the
aid of high powers of the microscope, and under favourable circum-
stances, to positively distinguish stains produced by human blood
from those caused by the blood of any of the animals just enume-
rated, and this even after the lapse of five years from the date of
their primary production.
No. 1620, Ghestvut Stbeet, Phtladelphta.
yi. — An Accovmi of certain Organisms occw&ing in the Liquor
Sanguinis. By William Osler, M.D.
Plate LXXTV.
In many diseased conditions of the body, occasionally also in per-
fectly h^thy individuals and in many of the lower animals, careful
investigation of the blood proves that, in addition to the usual
elements, there exist pale granular masses, which on closer inspec-
EXPLANATION OF PLATE LXXTV.
Fia. 1. — Common forms of the masses from healthy blood. (Ocular 3, Objec-
tive 5.)
„ 2. — ^A mass from healthy blood, in saline solution, showing stages of deve-
lopment; a, at 10 A.M.; 6, at 10.30 A.M.; c, at 11 a.m. (Ocular 3,
Objective 7.)
„ 3.— Mass from blood of young rat (in serum) in full development, after two
hours* warming. (Oculiir 3, Objective 7.)
„ 4. — Mass (young rat) with blood-corpuscles about it, to show the relative
sizes. (Ocular 3, Objective 5.)
^^ 5. — Some of the developed forms as seen with No. 11 Hartnack. (See text.)
„ 6.— Form watched for four hours. (Ocular 3, Objective 9.)
„ 7. — Form watched for five hours. (Ocular 3, Objective 9.)
^^ 8. — Small vein in connective tissue from the back of a young rat, showing
the corpuscles free among the red ones. (Ocular 3, Objective 7.)
^^ 9. — Small vein from the counective tissue of a rat (in serum), showing oor-
pusoles and developed forms. (Ocular 3, Objective 9.)
I
142 Xii Aceouni of ceriain Organisms
tion present a corpuscular appearance (PI. LXXI V., Fig. 1), There
are probably few observers in the habit of examining blood who
have not, at Bome time or other, met with these strnctuies, and
have been puzzled for an esplanation of their presence and nature.
In size they vary greatly, from half or quarter that of a white
blood-corpuacle, to euormoua massea occupying a large area of the
fieldj or even stretching completely across it. They usually assume
a somewhat round or oval form, but may be elongated and narrow,
or, from the existence of numeroua projections, oflcr a very irregular
outline. They bave a compact solid look, and by focussing are
seen to possess considerable depth ; white in specimens examined
without any reagents the filaments of fibrin adhere to them, and,
entangled in their interior, white corpuscles are not unfrequently
met with.
It ia not from every mass that a judgment can be formed of
their true nature, aa the larger, more closely arranged ones have
rather the appearance of a granular body, and it is with difficulty
that the individual elements can be focussed. When, however, tlie
more loosely composed ones are chosen, their intimate composition
can be studied to advantage, especially at the borders, where only a
single layer of corpuscles may exist; and when examined with a
high power (9 or 10 Hartnack) these corpuscles are seen to be pale
round disks, devoid of granules and with well-defined contours.
Some of the corpuscles generally float free in the fluid about the
mass ; and if they turn half over, their profile view has the appear-
ance of a sharp dark line (Fig. 5, a and b). In water the indi-
vidual corpuscles composing the mass swell greatly; dilute acetic
acid renders them more distinct, while dilute potash solutions
quickly dissolve them. Measurements give, for the large propor-
tion of the corpuscles, a diameter riinging from gajrcth to jriiiTrth
of an inch ; tne largest are as much as EnViith, and the smallest
from Triouth to ^^-uimth of an inch ; so that they may be said to
be from ^th to 5 the size of a red corpuscle. In the blood of cats,
rabbits, dogs, guinea-pigs, and rats, the masses are to be found in
variable nombers. New-born rats are specially to be recommended
as objects of study, as in their blood the massea are commonly
both numerous and large. They occur also in the blood of fcetal
kittens.
Considering their prevalence in disease and among some of the
lower animals, they have attracted but little notice, and possess a
comparatively scanty literature. The late Professor Max Scbultze *
was the first, as far as I can ascertain, to describe and figure the
masses in qaeetion. He speaks of them as constant constituents of
the blood of healthy individuals, but concludes that we know
nothing of their origin or destiny, suggesting, however, at the same
* Archiv f. tnik. Aiiaf., Bil. i.
TteUontl.lylijt
r , 11 14 tl.nXBT.
'#'
o o
o o
u
o 'J . P
o'n'\^ o'i'n' ir. ; >> vVw>
I ri'^.iii.^.iiijiiitlj.v liLfi_i'3<;-ii.;\xvm.-- - V^'!
occurring in the Liquor Sanguinis. 143
time that they may arise from the degeneration of granular white
corpuscles. Schultze's observations were confined to the blood of
healthy persons, and he seemed of the opinion that no pathological
significance was to be attributed to them.
By fer the most systematic account is given by Dr. Eiess,* in an
article in which he records the results of a long series of observa-
tions on their presence in various acute and chronic diseases. His
investigations of the blood of patients, which were much more
extensive than any I have been able to undertake, show that, in all
exanthems and chronic affections of whatever sort, indeed, in almost
all cases attended with disturbance of function and debility, these
masses are to be found. He concludes that their number is in no
proportion to the severity of the disease, and that they are more
numerous in the latter stages of an affection, after the acute
symptoms have subsided. The former of these propositions is
undoubtedly true, as I have rarely found masses larger or more
abundant than I, at one time, obtained from my own blood when in
a condition of perfect health. These two accounts may be said to
comprise everything of any importance that has been written con-
cerning these bodies. The following observers refer to them
cursorily : — Erb,t in a paper on the development of the red cor-
puscles, speaks of their presence under both healthy and diseased
conditions : he had hoped, in the beginning of his research, that
they might stand, as Zimmerman supposes (see below), in some
connection with the origin and development of the red corpuscles ;
but, as he proceeded, the fallacy of this view became evident to him.
BettelheimJ seems to refer to these corpuscles when he speaks of
finding in the blood of persons, healthy as well as diseased, small
punctiform, or rod-shaped, corpuscles of various sizes. Christol
and Kiener§ describe in blood small round corpuscles, whose
measurements agree with the ones under consideration ; and they also
speak of their exhibiting slight movements. Eiess, || in a criticism
on a work of the next-mentioned author, again refers to these
masses, and reiterates his statements concerning them. Birsch-
HirschfeldlT had noticed them and the similarity the corpuscles
bore to micrococci, and suggests that under some conditions
Bacteria might develop from them. Zimmerman ** has described
corpuscular elements m the blood, which, with reference to the
bodies in question, demand a notice here. He let blood flow
directly into a solution of a neutral salt, and, after the subsidence
♦ Reichert u. Dn Bois-Reymond's Archiv, 1872.
t Virchow*s * Archiv,' Bd. xxziy.
X * Wiener med. Presse,' 1868, No. 13.
§ 'Cmnptes Rendus.' Ixvii., 1054. Quoted in * Centralblatt,* 1869, p. 96.
II * Centralblatt,' 1873, No. 34.
t * Ibid., 1873, No. 39.
** Virchow's ' Aroliiv,* Bd. xviii.
144 An Account of certain Organisms
of the coloured elements, examined the snpernatant sernm, in which
he found, in extraordinary numbers, small, round, colourless oor-
puscles with weak contours, to which he gave the name of ** elemen-
tary corpuscles." These he met with in human blood both in
health and disease, and in the blood of the lower animals ; and he
found gradations between the smaller (always colourless) forma
and full-sized red corpuscles. He gives measurements (for the
smaller ones, from nAnrth to ^ii^th of a line ; the largest, T^th to
^^th of a line), and speaks of them also as occurring in clumps
and groups of globules. It is clear, on reading his account, that m
part, at any rate, he refers to the corpuscles above described.
Gradations such as he noticed between these and the coloured
elements I have never met with, and undoubtedly he was dealing
with the latter in a [partially decolourized condition. Lostorfer's *
corpuscles, which attracted such attention a few years ago, from the
assertion of the discoverer that they were peculiar to the blood of
syphilitic patients, require for their production an artificial culture
in the moist chamber, extending over several days. They appear
first after two or three days, or even sooner, as small bright cor-
pnscles, partly at rest, partly in motion, which continue toLreaae
m size, till oy the sixth or seventh day they have obtained the
diameter of a red corpuscle, and may possess numerous processes or
contain vacuoles in their interior. Blood from healthy individuals,
as well as from diseases other than syphilis, has been shown to yield
these corpuscles ; and the general opinion at present held of them is.
that they are of an albuminoid nature.
The question at once most naturally arose. How is it possible
for such masses, some measuring even ^^th of an inch, to pass
through the capillaries, unless supposed to possess a degree of
extensibiUty and elasticity, such as their composition hardly
warranted attributing to them ? Neither Max Schultze nor Biess
offer any suggestion on this point, though the latter thinks that
they might, under some conditions, produce embolism.
During the examination of a portion of loose connective tissue
from the back of a young rat, in a large vein which happened to be
in the specimen, these same corpuscles were seen, not, however,
aggregated together, but isolated and single among the blood-cor-
puscles (Fig. 8) ; and repeated observations demonstrated the fact
that in a drop of blood taken from one of these young animals, the
corpuscles were always to be found accumulated together ; while on
the other hand, in the vessels (whether veins, arteries, or capil-
laries) of the same rat they were always present as separate elements
showing no tendency to adhere to one another. The masses, then,
♦ * Wiener med. Presse/ 1872, p. 93. * Wiener med. Wochenschrift,' 1872,
No. 8. Article in Archiv f. Dermatolog., 1872.
I
oeourringi in ihe Liquor Sanguinis.
Me formed at the moment of the withdrawal of the blood, from eor-
piiBcles preyionsly circulating free in it.
To proceed now to the main Btibject of my communication. If
a drop of blood containing thrae masaea is mised on a shde with an
equal quantity of saline aolntion, g to | per cent., or, better still,
perfectly fresh serum, covered, sorrounded with oil, and kept at a
temperature of about 37° C, a remarkable change begins in tbe
masses. If one of the latter is chosen for observation, and ite out-
line carefully noted, it is seen, at first, that tbe edge presents a
tolerably uniform appearance, a few filaments of fibrin perhaps
adhering to it, or a few small corpuscles lying free in the vicinity.
These latter stiU exhibit apparent Brownian movements, frequently
'tuming half over, and showing their dark rod-like border (Fig. 5,
o, h). After a short time an alteration is "noticed in the presence
of fine projections from the margins of the mass, which may be
either perfectly straight, or each may present an oval swelling at
the free or attached end or else in tne middle (Fig. 2, h). It is
further seen that tbe edges of the mass are now less dense, more
loosely arranged, or, if small, it may have a radiant aspect. Some-
times, before any filaments are seen, a loosening takes place in the
Seripbery of tbe mass, and among these semi-free corpuscles the first
Bvelopment occurs. The projecting filaments above-mentioned
eoon begin a wavy motion, sua finally break off from the mass,
moving away free in the fluid. This process, at first limited, sooq
becomes more general ; the number of filaments which project
from the mass increases, and they may be seen not only at the
lateral borders, but also, by altering the focus, on tbe surface of
the mass, as dark, sharply-defined objects. The detachment of the
filaments proceeds rapidly, and in a short time the whole area for
some distance irom tbe margins ia ahve with moving forma (Fig. 2,
0, and Fig. 3), which spread themselves more and more peripherally
as the development continues in the centre. In addition to the
various filaments, swarming granules are present in abundance, and
give to the circumference a cloudy aspect, making it difficult to
define tbe uidividual forms. The mass baa now become perceptibly
smaller, more granular, its borders indistinct and merged in the
swarming cloud about them ; but corpuscles are still to be seen in
it, as well as free in the field. A. variable time is taken to arrive
at this stage ; usually, however, it takes place within an hour and
a half, or even much less. The variety of the forms increases as
the development goes on ; and whereas, at first, spermatozoon-like
or spindle-shaped corpuscles were almost exclusively to be seen,
later roore irregular forms appear, possessing two, three, or even
more, tail-like processes of esk'eme delicacy (Fig. 5, k). The more
active ones wander towards the periphery, pass out of the field.
146 An Account of certain Organisms
and become lost among (he blood-corpuscles. The process reaches
its height within 2^ hours, and from this time begins almost imper-
ceptibly to decline ; the area about the mass is less densely occu-
pied by the moving forms, and by degrees becomes clearer, till at
last, after six or seven hours (often less), scarcely an element is to
be seen in the field, and a granular body, in v\rhich a few corpuscles
yet exist, is all that remains of the mass. The above represents
a typical development from a large mass in serum, such as that seen
in Fig. 3.*
We have next to study more in detail the process of development
and the resulting forms. Commonly, the first appearance of activity
is displayed by the small free corpuscles at the margins, which,
previously quiescent, begin a species of jerky irregular movement,
at one time with Jtheir pale disk-surfaces uppermost, at another
presenting their dark hnear profiles (Fig. 5, a and b). Not
unfrequently some of these are seen with a larger or smaller
segment of their circumference thicker and darker than the other
(Fig. 5, c).
Earhest, and perhaps the most plentiful, of the forms are those
of a spermatozoon-like shape (Fig. 5, d), attached to the mass
either by the head or tail ; while, simultaneously, long bow-shaped
filaments appear (Fig. 5, e), having an enlargement in the centre.
Straight hair-like filaments (Fig. 5, f) may also be seen, but they
are not very numerous. The time which elapses before they begin
the wavy movement is very variable, as is also the time when they
break away after once beginning it. Filaments may be seen per-
fectly quiescent for more than half an hour before they move, and
others may be observed quite as long in motion before they succeed
in breaking away from the mass. Commonly it is in the smaller
masses, and where the development is feeble, that filaments remain
for any time adherent. The spermatozoon-like forms appear, at the
head, on one view flattened and pale, on the other dark and linear
(Fig. 5, d) ; consequently the head is discoid, not spheroidal. The
bow-shaped filaments also present a dark straight aspect when they
turn over (Fig. 5, e), and are by far the longest of the forms, some
measuring as much as ^xyth of an inch. Many intermediate forms
between me round discoid corpuscles and those with long tails are
met with in the field, and are figured at Fig. 5, g.
Small rod-shaped forms are very numerous, most of which,
however, on one aspect look corpuscular ; but in others this cannot
be detected, or only with the greatest difficulty ; slight enlarge-
ments at each end may also be seen occasionally in these forms
(Fig. 5, h).
Usually late to appear, and more often seen in the profuse
♦ The mass from which this sketch was taken was seen in full development
by several of the foreign visitors to the British Medical Association last year.
oceurring in the Liquor Sanguinis. 147
ivelopmente from large maseeB, are the forms with three ot more
tail-like processes attached to a Bmall central body (Fig. 5, h).
Among the granules it is extremely difficult to determine accurately
tho number of these proceasea, the apparent number of which may
also vary iu the different positions assumed by the element. As to
the ultimate destiny of the individual forma, I have not much to
offer; I have watched single ones, with this view, for several
consecutive hoars without noticing any material alteration in them.
The one represented at Fig. 6 waa watched for four hoara, that at
Fig. 7 for five, and the changes sketched. The difficulty of
following up individual filament* in. this way ia very great, not only
from the ensuing weariness, but from the obstacle the red corpuscles
offer to it.
With regard to the movement of tho filaments, this, at first
eight, bears some resemhkuce to that known as the Brownian,
exhibited by granules iu the field, or sometimes by the red
corpuscles ; but an evident difference is soon noticed in the (act that,
while the former (also the small corpuscles) undergo a change of
place, the latter remain constant in one position, or vary but little.
Movements like those of the ordinary rod-shaped Bacteria ore
not exhibited by them.
(Hrcumsiancea which influence the development. — In blood,
without the addition of saline solution or serum, no change takes
place in the masses even after prolonged warming. A temperature
of about 37^ C. ia necessary for the process ; none occurs at the
ordinary temperature, with or without the addition of fluid. Fresh
serum is the medium most fiivonrable to the process, added in
quantity equaJ to the amount of blood. Not everr m^s develops
when placed under conditions apparently favourable ; but for this
no good reason can, at present, be offered.
Fig. 8 represents tne corpuscles among the red ones while in
the vessel; and, as is there seen, they appear somewhat more
elliptical on the profile view, and more elongated, than in blood
after withdrawal, but present the same disk-like sur&cea when they
roll over. On adding sahne solution or serum, and warming the
preparation, development proceeds, but not to such an extent aa
from the masBes. The individual corpuscles become elongated, some
fjuled, and they move about in the vessel. At Fig. 9 they are seen
in the vessel after three hours on the warm stage : the remarkable
form seen at a was Ts'inrth of an inch in length, and had moved up
from the opposite ejid of the vessel.
It must still be confessed, with Mas Sclmltze, that we know
nothing of the origin or destiny of these corpuscles ; and once admit
their existence as individual elemonts circulating in the blood, his
suggestion, and Bier's asaprtinn "' ' r. Ttusaee arise from the
diaintegmtion of dile. We
148 An Aecotmt of eertain Organisms in the Liquor Sanguinis.
mnst also confess the same ignorance of the reasons of their increase
in disease ; nor do we know at all what influence they may exert
in the course of chronic affections.
Finally, as there is no evidence that these bodies are in organic
continuity with any other recognized animal or vegetable form, or
possess tne power of reproduction, nothing can at present be said of
their nature or of their relation to Bacteria.
These observations were carried on in the Physiological
Laboratory of University College, and my thanks are due to Prof.
Sanderson and Mr. Schafer for advice and valuable assistance. — A
Paper read at the last meeting of the Royal Society.
( 149
NEW BOOKS, "WITH SHOKT NOTICES.
The MicTographic Dictionary. A Guide to the Ex:aminfition and
Invatigalion of the Structure and Nature of Microeeopie Objects. Bj
J. W. Griffith, M.D., M.E.O.P., and Arthur Henfrey, F.E.8., F.L.S.
Third Edition. Edited by J. W. Griffith, M.D., M.R.O.P., and Pro-
fessor Martin Duncan, M.B. Lond., F.R.9., F.G.S. Assiatod by the
Rev. M. J. Berkeley, M.A., F.L.8., and T. Rupert Jones, F.E.S.,
F.G.8. PftTts XI., XII., Xni., and XIV. London : Van Tooret, 1874.
— Of the four parts of this Dictionary now upon our table, those
numbeted XI. and XII. have not been issued under the editorship of
Dr. Martin Duncan, who has DOt appeared among the editorial staff
till No, XIII. made ita appearance about three montha since. He
must therefore not be held responaiblo for the earlier issue, though
we believe he will boar almost entirely the weight of editorship for
all the numbers which complete the work from and inclusive of the
thirteenth part. Of the four parts now under nottoe it may be ob-
served that but ono of them possesses plates. This is the eleventh,
which contiduB four pages of iUustrations, many of them coloured,
and most of them of the Infusoria. We have to observe, however,
that these are, if we mistake not, exactly the same as those issued m«ay
years ainco, and they are therefore very far behind-hand. We not
only refer to the size of the figures, which is on vastly too small a
scale, but to the fact that out increased knowledge of the structure,
due to the observations of Claporede and Laclmiann, and of several
English workers, especially Mr. E. Ray Lonkoster, is not portrayed as
it certainly ought to be. But if these objections be accepted, it must bo
admitted that the numbers are in other respeots very well executed.
It is, however, when we come to consider the matter in these four
numbers that wo perceive the great difference in many respects
between Nob. XI. and XU., on the one hand, and Nob. XIII, and
XIV. on the other. In the fii'st place, wo may remark that in the
first two numbeiB the articles alone which have to do with either
fungi or fossitB are unqueBtionably good ; most of the others are
undeniably behind the time, having been left pretty nearly as they
were when the last edition of the Dictionary made its appearance.
Let us take two or three examples of the part of which wo complain.
The paragraph on the eye is by no means sufficiently full, even in re-
gard to the microscopio subjects which the writer proposes to discuss.
Tho question of the ciliary muscle, for instance, is almost untouched
upon ; and OS to the question of the norvo supply of the cornea, which
has been so fully deolt-with even in these pages, the writer appears to
have no knowledge of it whatever. And many other points might be
alluded to. Tho article Fermentation, i^ain, is vastly too brief; no
allusion whatever is made to Pasteur's researches, though his name
is mentioned in the bibliography appended to tho paper ; yet of
course chemical readers aro aware of the immense extent of Pasteur's
researoheB, and of their bearing on eome of Pouchet's inqairies in the
some direction. Under the heading of Spontaneous Generation also
NBW BOOSB, WITH 8B0BT K0HCE3.
we obeerve a lamentnblo deficiency of information. This qucRtion has
of lato yearg had an amount of attention paid to it by Bostian, Sander-
eon, and others, which has given it a considerable interest to the micro-
ecopic observer. Therefore it is a subject which ought not to be dealt
with as it was in the old edition, with merely the title of the " Begin-
nings of Life" added. Again, under the heading of Glands, some re-
ference should have been made to the esBayB in the splendid treatise of
Dr. Strieker, and for this absence the less escuse ia to be ofibred, aB
the book has been for some years in an English dress. There are other
articles of less importance, which, however, we shall not refer to.
Of the better parts of these two numbers we may particnlarly refer
to the botanical portions, and ospecially to those of the numerous in-
stances of fungi. These arc, as we might have imagined, invariably
lucid, to the point, and as advanced as possible. There are articles
too of a geological character which are particularly well done. We
may refer to the article roraminifera, as one which is thoroughly
well written and arranged. In this the author enters upon their
general history, describes very fully their minute structure, tells
where the recent and fossil forms are each to bo found, and finally gives
. an ample synoptical list of the genera and sub-genera, with references
^^_ to the figures of nearly all those enumerated. Finally, he appends
^^^ an admirable bibliographical list of the various works necessary for
^^H consultation, from that of D'OrbJgny in 1826, to those of Parker, Jones,
^^V and Brady, in the ' Transactions of the Linnean Society,' 1870.
Now, having said so much about tho older aumbere, lot us osamine
what has boon dono for us in the two latest issues which have been
brought out under the supervision of Dr. M. Duncan, F.K.S. We find
in the first place the conclusion of the article Hydra, which is not
quite as full as it might be, having taken little or no notice of the
more recent Austrian inquiries. This article, too, seems somewhat
hastily written, as the following sentence will show. " On placing tho
plants subsequently in a glass jar containing water, they will be found
I at the end of some hours with the tentacles fully ostended in search of
prey, when they are easily recognized." Of course we have no doubt
that the author means the Hydra, but it is the plant to which he refers.
The article on Hydrodyction is good, as is also the paper on Hypho-
mycelm, which is capitally illustrated. The section devoted to Illumi-
nation is extremely short, and though the editors may make np for it ~
by increasing tho length of Polarization and Teat^bjects, yet we think
the subject of illumination should have been in itself more fully written ;
indeed, we think the writer would have done well not merely to have
referred to one of Mr. Wenham's papers in this Journal, but to have
gone fully into the whole subject, aad to have given the results to hia
readers. Tbe paper on Inflammation is, we are bound to say, in
every respect worthy of its position. It is a condensed account of the
entire subject, giving even the latest researches, and stating as much
as possible facts to the osclnsion of useless hypotheses ; indeed, it is
one of tho best contributions to tho present edition. Next in order
come the Infusoria, and as these arc perhaps the most important groups
with which the Dictionary has to deal, no less than ten pages are
BBW BOOKB, WITH SHORT NOTTCBa.
151
' devoted to them. And certainly we think the work is very cscellently
done. Donhtlesa some will any it ia not snfficiently minute, bnt we
venture to think that nn nrticle which doale with the entire subject
ehonld avoid Bpecialitios and deal more with generalizations. And
this is what we find in this contribution. The author first gives a
general account, and then proceeda to deal with the integument iu
which the tmler aUiele, the carapace, the cortical layer, and its peculiar
thread-cells are minutely described ; then the locomotive organs, under
which heading are detailed the various forms, Ruch an cilia, flagdliform
jilammds, retracting cilia, tetm, slyles, and uacini ; then the nervous
system, under which are related the various indications of a nervous
MTangement, although no traces of it have been yet distinguished ;
and likewise the circulating, the digestive, and the reproductive
syetems, especially the last, are minutely described. In the next
place their diffusion is spoken of, and a very full account of the syetG-
matic classification is given. Under this latter head tho two syBtoms,
those of M, Dujardin on the one hand, and of MM. Claparedc and
liachnmnn on the other, are given, and finally tho bibliography which
concludes the paper is as full as needs be.
The next subject that we may refer to is that of Injection, which ia
by no means so novel as we should have anticij>ated. The part devoted
to tho opaque injection fluids is of course very good, but that which
describes tho different transparent liquids whieh are now almost
exclusively used for preparations, is meagre and short ; and in the ro-
ferenoea to books on the subjeet, one of the very best, as well as the
cheapest books, viz. thatof Davies, is, wo observe, omitted. Thedescrijv-
tion of the method of performing the operation ia extremely fully given,
and this is a point of some importance, for there is no subject in which
tho young micrOBCopist is more liable to fall into errors. We observe
that the authors have described an apparatus for injection which per-
forms its own work, thus leaving tlie hands &eo for the purpose of
stopping any escape of the fluid, &c. This may doubUcss prove
useful in some eases, and it can be readily put up by any ingenious
person in the course of half-an-hoiir. Nest in order we come to tho
Intestinal Canal, which has not be«n very much brought up to the
time, although it ia very good, and well illustrated. The bibliograjihy,
BO far as it refers to Yorson and E. Kloin, is good, but the succeeding
reference we do not quite understand, the moio so, as tlio title given is
really tliat which should have followed JUTVI. Verson and Klein. Tho
~ Iber papers in thi' 1' ,■■.' ■ ■ .m! would call attention
1 those on Igoein-. • n Lar, which is a little
) brief, and on J.- ilic importance of tho
fhysauora t^.i the jj- ■,- uivvn-
IntliL-lii. . . ■.i.mbtcdly those
I Lichi,r ;l,ly well and
lilly wtci ■ I . i L-iiict account
Iftheui"!-
ktiouKli
152 ssw soose, with shobt kotiobs.
of the lft8t-mentioned two groups, is verj eliort and imperfect. In tlie
paper on the liver the text is indeed ver;^ g<3od, and is amply UIub-
trated by woodcuts. Still we think that hod the author dwt^t a little
oa the distinction between HandliBld Jones's views and Botile's, and on
the recent foreign development of the former's notions, ho would have
given additioaal interest to the subject. The lunga too ara not badly
done, but had there boon more space given to the lymphatics we think
it would have been better. Hotvever, this ia more than made up for
by the way in which the lymphatic system is described. In this
article the author has dealt briefly, hut yet cloarly, with the entire
subject, and be has entered on a discussion of tho views recently pat
forward by Dr. Elein. Measuroment, too, is not badly done, as Iik&'
wise are " Micro-Spectroscope," " Migration of Cells," " Monera,"
"Motion of Cells," and lastly, "Mosses," which are given at some
length, and with numerous illustrations. The bibliography of mosaes
is, however, insufficient, and is erroneous in the fact that the only
reference to Dr. Braithwaite'e numerous papers in these pages is to
the ' Quarterly Microscopical Journal.' This should be corrected.
But it will be judged from what we have already stated that the
last two numbers of the Dictionary exhibit a marked superiority of
matter over those previously issued, and we doubt not that the parts
which are yet to be published will be even better. In this way wo
may hope that the work will, as a whole, be worth purchasing ; and if
the publisher proposes adding to the plates and improving figures
which require alteration, while the editors continne to Bupply new
material, we have no doubt that a capital companion to tho microscopiat
will be supplied. E. H. 8.
Microscopie Examinations of Air. By D. Douglas Cunningham,
M.B., attached to Sanitary ComraisRioner with Government of India.
Calcutta : Superintendent of Government Printing, 1874. — In the work
which Dr. Cunningham has published with the aid of the Government
printer, we have a copious summary of the different views pro and am
which have been held by those who have already considered the
questions concerning atmospheric germs. This constitutes at least
one-half of the volume, and as it is nuiterial already before our readers
we need aot do more than advert to it. The latter portion of the work
contains the author's own observations, and is illustrated by fourteen
nearly folio plates, exhibiting coloured illustrations of the different
results obtained, magnified iOO diameters. Tho book is, of course,
altogether most elaborately executed, and would have been nttorly im-
possible to produce save as a Government matter, from the very great
expense it must have involved. And, indeed, here we would blame
Dr. Cunningham for estravagance, for it is perfectly clear to anyone
who understands the matter that a single folio page of illustrations
would have been ample, inasmnch as there is no possible difference
between many of his drawings. With this, however, we have nothing
to do. But of the actual value of the results achieved we cannot say
much. In point of fact, the author has not been able to prove that any
season of illness in Hindostan has had anything whatever to do with
the preseuoo of microscopic vegetable matters. Indeed, he has half
PROaRESS OF MIOROSOOPIOAL SOIBNOB. 153
shown that one or two instances of cholera were connected with the
presence of certain organisms in the air ; but on going into the matter
he has been assured that this has not been the case.
Dr. Cunningham has been at considerable pains in carrying out
his experiments, and indeed on this subject we must say that he has
taken every precaution to avoid failure. Especially would we refer to
the excellent modification of Dr. Maddox's apparatus which he has
employed in his experiments, for this is an instrument which may be
used with excellent results in some future inquiries. We must also
award very high praise to the author for the care and discretion which
he has shown in conducting his experiments, and for the accuracy with
which he has stated the results. Beyond this, however, we have little
to say in his praise ; for it seems to us that he has gone over ground
that ought to have been pregnant with valuable results if the experi-
menter had employed the proper means of research, and those we
think Dr. Cunningham failed to apply. Why, for instance, should he
have used such low powers in his observations ? Surely he did not
expect to find many organisms with objectives magnifying 400 dia-
meters; the microscopist of the present day would not be so well
employed with such a magnifying power as Leiiwenhoek was with his
lens. And so far as we can see, the author, save in one or two instances,
used no higher object-glass. How he could expect to see everything
that was present with such amplification is to us perfectly unintel-
ligible. If Mr. Dallinger had had Dr. Cunningham's opportunities, we
doubt not he would have found many organisms, as we may judge by
his published papers. So far as he has gone, Dr. Cunningham has
nothing to tell. But may we not say to him, look again ? With a
T5" ^^ Tir> ^^^ proper arrangements for light, we may expect much
better results than those he has laid before us in his present by no
means uninteresting volume. J. D.
PEOGEESS OF MICEOSCOPICAL SCIENCK
Dr. Carpenter's Views on the Subject of Eozoon, — In our last
number but one we gave ample space toward an explanation of
Mr. Carter's opinions on the subject of Eozoon ; and it will be
remembered that he takes the same view of this structure as that
held by Messrs. King and Eowney. We have now the opportunity of
laying Dr. Carpenter's views forward, accompanied by an excellent
woodcut of one of the calcareous lamellsB of Eozo(Hi, which the editor
of ' Nature ' has kindly placed at our disposal. In Dr. Carpenter's
recent paper in the * Aimals of Natural History' for June (1874),
the subject is very fully gone into, and to that we must refer those
of our readers who are interested in this question. However, with the
aid of the woodcut we may extract some of the author's remarks
which bear on the point of controversy. Dr. Carpenter says —
" My true * nummuline wall ' is the representative of that which,
M 2
PBOOBBSS OF UICB08C0?I0AL SCIBXCB.
in reoeot Foraminifera, immediately Burrounde the chambora (see
Fig. a o). ^ It is noJ B layer of cIiTysotilo aciculic, as asserted by Pro-
fessors Eing and Eowney, but ia a caletireous lamelln, perforated by
ThlB represents a vertiool flection of a portion of one of the calcareous laraellin
of Eoioon canadense, showing the tubular ''nummnline layer" ua, the " intar-
meiliRto skeleton" s c, and the lelatioiiB of the origin of the oanala Ab to the
tnbuli of the nammaline layer, the fleiurea of which are seen along the line
u' a' : lOD diameters.
minute tubnli, which usually lie straight and parallel, but are often
more or less curved. These tubuli, like the chambers and canal- system,
are usually filled with serpentine, which has passed into them from
the chambers in which they originate ; and thus it happens that the
original tubulation is generally obscured, being only represented
microscopioally by the difference in refractive indes between the
calcareous shelly layer and the serpentine which has filled its tubes, —
just as in a specimen of fi-egh bone or dentine mounted in Canada
balsam, the tubuli are only reprfaented by the different refractive
indices of the matris and the balsam. But in the specimen of Eotooa
figured above, many of the tubuli remain empty ; and tkey can be dig-
tingaithed as tubuli under any ma^v,ifying power that ihe thickness of the
covering glass allows to be used. Further, they have the somewhat
Binuoas conree of the tubuli of organic structures ; and they present,
at what was probably a plane of interrupted growth (a' a'), the sharp
flexures which Professor Owen first pointed out in the tubuli of den-
tine, and which I described and figured twenty-seven years ago in the
hard dentine-lite substance of the end of the Crab's claw."*
And after some further remarks a propos of the histological
powers of his opponents, Dr. Carpenter says :—
"I now pass on to a second probative fact of at least equal
cogency, — the relation exhibittd in the samo sjxicimcn between tho
' and the tubuli of the ' nummulino layer.'
• Eeport of the Britisli Association for 1817, pi xx., flg- SI.
^B iccrards thi
PB0QBES8 OF UICBOSCOPICAL SCIENCE,
la my original description of OalcaHna* — tho typo to which, eib
regards the general distribution of its eanal-sjatem anil its relation
to the intermediate skeleton, Eozoon has the closest resemhlance^ — I
gave the following account of that relation (p. B64J : ' The proper
walls of the chambers are imiformly perforated, bke thoso of the
chambers of Rotalim, hj foramina of considerable size (averaging
above ai^th of an inch in diameter) ; with these the canals of the
supplemental [or intermediate] skeleton do not seem to be directly-
oontiuuouB, for they are of about double the diameter and lie further
apart from one another ; but immediately round the proper walls of
the chambers there seem to be irregular lacunar spaces, into which the
foramina open estomally, and from which the passages of the canal-
system originate.* Now, ia my ' Supplemental Notes on the Structure
and Affinities of Eozoon canademe 'f I stated that precisely the same
relation ia shown to exist in decalcified specimens of Eozoon, by the
implantation of the dendritic models of the chamber-costs in plates
formed by the coalescence of the aciculra that occupied the tubules of
the ' proper wall.' Haviug now been fortunate enough to meet with a
transparent gection which exhibits this relation most unmistakably
(see Fig, 6 6), I fearlessly ask the verdict of any Biologist &miliar
with microscopic structure, whether auy more exact realization ctmld
be presented of the structure I had described in Calearina, — allowance
being of course made for the difl'erent scale of the tuhulation of the
'proper wall,' which is hcre^^ne 'uummuline' not coorse 'rotaline.' "
We think the verdict of moet niicroBcopistB will be to the effect
that the structure is unquestiooably one of organic origin.
Betrogreisive Changes in (he Serous Layer of the Bahhift Oi-um.—
Dr. Stirling says that Herr K. SlavjanakyJ describes the degenera-
I tion, called by him reticular (" reticulare degeneration"), which the
' epithelial cells of the serous layer of the ovum undergo ia their phy-
' Biological development. During the development of the ovum, the
I epithelial cells of the part of tho serous layer lying close to the um-
bilical sac become thin and flat, and in the cells themselves some
' transparent spots are to bo obsorvod. By-and-by the protoplasm dis-
ftppoars, and holes are observed in the cells. These boles gradually
imlarge, so that, at last, in place of the epithelial membrane there is
to be seen a reticulum of the remains of the protoplasm of the epithe-
lial cells, containing in some places the nuclei. There is thus esta-
blished a physiological prototype far the pathological degeneration of
I the epithelium, descrilK'd by Wagner under tho name of fibrinous
degeneration, in cases of croup and diphtheiia.^See also ' Medical
B^rd.'
Hell
utei
bran
The Microacopio Bhod'Vesaels of the Intestine. — In a note in the
•JHedical Record,' by Dr. Stirling, the writer says that Here A,
F Heller§ arrives at the following rosults : — 1. Every villus contains an
I' utery which runs, as a general rule, to the point of the villus without
T branching. In man only does it begiu fi'om the middle of the villus
156 PBOOBESS OF MICBOSOOPIGAL SCIENOB.
to lose itself in a capillary network. 2. The vein begins either in
the point of the villus (rabbit, man) or near to the same (rat), and
generally goes directly into the snbmacons tissnes without receiving
any lateral branches ; or it rises near the base of the villus and re-
ceives more or less numerous lateral branches from the glandular layer
(dog, cat, pig, hedgehog). 3. In none of the animals examined was
there to be found the often cited arrangement of an arterial stem
going to the point of the villus, and of a descending venous stem with
a simple connecting capillary network between both stems. This is
of importance with regard to the erection of the villus.
Microscopic Structure of the Cortical and Corky Tissue of Plants, —
Dr. Braithwaite, F.L.S., is now publishing, in the ' Journal of tho
Quekett Club,' a series of lectures on vegetable histology, which are
'of great interest. From a proof sheet of tho last number of that
Journal which he has sent to us, we abstract the following account of
the structure of cortical tissue and cork, which are two of the group
of homogeneous or purely cellular tissues. He says of the first, that
it includes that portion of the stem lying between the fibro-vascular
bundles and tho epidermis or cork, and in leaves between the cuticle
and vascular bundles of the nerves ; it is therefore most distinct in
parts exposed to the air and light. The primary bark proceeds directly
ffrom the primordial tissue of the growing point, and rapidly increases
by cell division. In annual plants it is completed simply by extension
of these cells, as it is also in perennial plants which cast off their bark
by cork tissue arising under it ; but in those like the holly and the
mistletoe, which do not do so, certain portions of the cortical tissue,
by mother cells, continue to reproduce new tissue of the same kind.
Cortical tissue consists entirely of parenchym cells, which in leaves
usually remain with thin walls, but in the stem are variously modified
and may be divided into an inner and outer rind.
The inner rind is formed of layers of thin-walled spheroidal cells,
with their surfaces only slightly in contact, and thus interrupted by
apertures of various sizes. Lignification of the cellulose case very
rarely occurs, but in a few instances groups of strongly thickened cells
are seen, distinguishable by their size and colourless contents; the
ash, beech, laburnum, and Hoya afford examples. The contents of the
cells of this layer are starch, with the addition of chlorophyll in the more
external, and in some instances crystals are also present. Again in
milky- juiced plants bast vessels occur, which are connected with similar
vessels of the bast bundle, and single and grouped bast cells are seen
in the inner cortical layer of the leaf-stalk of cycads and the bark of
many palms. Within this layer also occur the resin, oil, and gum
canals peculiar to many plants.
The outer rind, Collenchyma, — The outer layer consists of rounded
parenchyma cells with little or no thickening, but often more or less
elongated, or the cells have all irregular strong thickening of their
walls or angles, and then constitute collenchyma. When the outer layer
of this sub-epidermal tissue consists of thin-walled parenchyma and
coUenchym cells, the latter are in groups overlying the bast part of
the vascular bundle, while the thin-waUed cells reach the epidermis,
PBOGBESS OF MICROSCOPICAL SOIENOH. 157
and are opposite the medullary rays ; in these cases the collenchyma is
often greatly elongated. The collenchyma has no intercellular spaces,
and may take the form of longitudinal strings of cells lying under the
epidermis, as in the stem of Equisetum and leaves of Pinus ; or it may
be seen as a connected layer, only perforated by the stomata, in the
stems and petioles of many plants, and also in many leaves as a well-
developed layer, e. g. in the vine, elder, and begonia. The cellulose
case is usually soft, but in a few instances lignified, as in Angelica
sylvestris, and in others shows porose, netted and spiral thickening, e. g.
Samhuctis, Hellehorus. The contents are clear or red sap, and also
starch and chldtophyll.
Of the second, or Cork Tissue, he says, that it is of much more
frequent occurrence in plants than may be generally supposed, and
moreover it is Dame Nature's plaster with which she heals up the
wounds left by fallen leaves, or if any soft organ be injured, a firm
skin of new cork cells rapidly protects the sound tissues from the
outer damaged structures. The walls of this tissue are highly resistent
to the various reagents, behaving in this respect like the cuticle, being
also elastic and with difficulty permeated by air or water ; the cells
are rectangular without intercellular spaces, are arranged in rows at
right angles to the surface, and mostly lose their contents and become
filled wiQi air ; the cell membrane is but moderately thickened, and is
soon altered into cork. Primary cork tissue arises later than the other
elements, and the altered parenchym cells, which become the mother
cells of cork, may be either cells of the cuticle, of the collenchyma, of
the inner rind, or of the parenchyma of the bast part of the vascular
bundle; these mother cells repeatedly divide, and of these newly-
arising cells in each radial series, the inner one remains thin-walled,
filled with protoplasm, and constantly forming new cells by division,
and this is termed the cork — cambium or ^hellogen layer, while the
outer becomes suberified and permanent. Generally the cork first
commences at single points, but these gradually coalesce, and tlie phel-
logen forms a continuous layer, from which constantly new cork layers
are being pushed outward and constitute the periderm. Sometimes the
cork cells become altered in form, and the periderm consists of alter-
nate laminaa of different shaped cells ; this is seen in the cork of the
cork-oak, and of birch. As examples of cuticular development of cork
we may mention the apple tree, oleander, mountain-ash and Viburnum
Lantana ; here the epidermal cells divide into two daughter cells, the
upper of which with the cuticular layers and tertiary cellulose case
become suberified, and the lower becomes the mother cell of the next
cork formation. In the greater part of our trees, as in the maple,
beech, oak, elm, plum, horse-chestnut, elder, &c., the coUenchym cells
lying next under the cuticle become the mother cells of cork ; and
among the number of plants in which the cork tissue arises deeper
below the cuticle, but yet within the outer rind, Ficus elastica and
Bobinia paeudacada are well suited for observation; here the cells
of the second or third row of collenchyma become the mother
cells of the cork. In the bramble and currant bushes the cork tissue
arises in the inner rind, and indeed it is the cells next to the vascular
158 PKOGBEBS OF MICROSCOPICAL 6CIENC1!.
liimille which become the mother cells, bo that ali the young curtical
tiesoo becomes poshed off by tbe eork tissue.
In many oases it is not solely cork cells proceeding from tho pbel-
logen whidi give the thickness to the periderm, but porenchym cells
containing clilorophyll ore also formed ; these, huweyer, are always
the danghtor cells of the phollogen lying on the inner side which,
become thus metamorphoeed, and constitute what Sanio terms the
FheUodfmia, very well seen in the currant tree.
Bwrh. — After production of moie or less numerous cork lamell«,
the phellogen dies or loses its vital activity, but a development of
Booondary cork tissue takes place within the bast part of the vascular
bundle, in the form of tangential rows of tabular cork colls, which
loosen &om tho growing outer part of the vascular bundle. The cork
lamellfB, as it were, cut out and force off from the rind, flat pieces in
form of scales or rings ; all this outer part is dead, and the process
oft repeated from the circumference of the stem, causes the new cork
lamellie to become gradually imbedded more deeply in tho growing
cortical tissue, and we get a coostantly thickening peripheral layer of
dry tissue separating from ths living part of the rind ; this is the
bark. The condition is very avidont in the large scales of bark in.
Plalatmg orienialie or sycamore, and in old stems of the Finiis syheglria
or Scotch pine, and in the ring-like bands of the cherry tree. In the
oak, lime, poplar, elder, and horse- chestnut, similar plates of thia-
walled cells arise in the interior of the bi^t bundles, but the old dried
scales do not fall oS, but tear only at the margins in a longitudinal
direction, so that the stem becomes clothed with bark consisting of
several dead scales lying under each other, presenting internally all
tbe elements of bast, and estoraally primary cork tissue. In tho pine
and larch we have a Assured periderm, like that of the horee-chestuut,
and in the pino consisting partly of thin-walled and thickened cells in
alternate layers, but the conifers are specially remarkable for the pre-
sence of a spurious large-celled porenchym tissue, which appears
between the periderm layers and separates the elements of the bast
bundle into smaller or larger groups.
Lenticeh. — These are duo to a peculiar local cork formation, and
appear as little roundish spots on the annual shoots of trees, while the
epidermis continues uninjured, and before tho periderm is formed.
In the second summer the epidermis splits longitudinally over tho
lenticols, and they form more or less prominent warts, which by a
median furrow &e(][ncntly become bilabiate ; their surface is mostly
brown, and their substance to a certain depth dry and corky. By
growth in thickness of tho shoot, tho lenticels become expanded into
transverse Btriie, then cork or bark forms and splits tho rind beneath
them, the bark scnles off, and so they disappear. These and other
structures are very well illustrated in a plate which accompanies the
I
( 159 )
NOTES AND MEMOEANDA.
Resolntion of Amphipleara pelluoida by the -^ of Sr. Tolles.—
The 'American Soturalist' for July, 1874, coutams a noto by Mr-
G. W. Morebouse ou the abc- subject. A j^^ objective was made for
him by ToUea, aud fiuiubed oa the 12th of March, 1873. The angle
of aperture afl invoiced by Mr. Stodder ia 165^. From hia own
measuremeuts ho thinks the objective ie correctly named by the
maker. At the extreme opaa point it ie a good ^'uth dry. The
Bcrew-oollar has twelve divifiions ; by turning it eight divisions it ie
fldjusted for uncovered wet, and four divisions remain to adjust for
cover for immersion work. It works through oovering glass of about
3^th of an inch, but it is better to use thinner glass, or mica, to
enable the observer to focus through specimens. With lamplight
and the j'^th the resolution of Amphipleura pellacida is better than he
has before seen. Using ordinary daylight, vihriones, bacteria, &x.,
are well defined, eepeeially when a Keluer eye-piece is nscd as a
condenser. With sunlight and the ammonia-sulphate of copper cell,
Surirelta gemma yields longitudinal stris, and, as the direction of the
light is changed, rows of " hemispherical bosses " as described by Dr.
"Woodward. With the same illumination specimens of AmpKipleura
peUudda, mounted dry, by Norman, were resolved and counted with
perfect ease and remarkable plainness, tha stria being atill dietinctly
Tiaiblo with No, 3 eye-piece, draw-tube extended ax inches, and
power upw&rd of 10,000 times. It is with hesitation that he remarks
farther that the -g^th has resolved the lines of Amphipleara pellueida
into rows of do^, for the " beaded " structure of the easier test,
Surirella gemma, is still doubted by some experienced microscopists.
But " facts are stubborn things," and the facta are that with Wenham's
parabola as an illuminator the dots are seen, and with either the para-
boloid or the Amici prism longitudinal lines much finer than the
transverse ones are brought out. These lines, which he considers
genuine, count not far from 120,000 to the inch. With a slight
change of the adjustment their place is occupied by spurious lines
I c»imtiug generally about 60,000 to the inch. The longitudinal lines
[ can only be seen when the focus is best adjusted for the transverse
Btriffi. When the transverse lines are examined, they may be shown
smooth and shining, similar to the photograph by Dr. Woodward in
the 'American Naturalist,' but much better. If the mirror is thou
carefully touched, a sinuate appearance of the margins of the lines
suggestive of beading is seen. This appearance can be brought out
readily. And finally, ofter the most painstaking manipulation, and
when without doubt the best work is being done, the separated dots
or beads appear.
A Semoir on the Cyamus or Whale-louse has been published
in the 'Memoirs of the Scientific Society of Copenhagen,' by Dr.
LUtkon. Wo boliovo it is an interesting i>aper, but we have not yet
J
160 OOBBESPOKDENGE.
Diatoms on the Surface of the Sea, from Java and also from the
Arctic Sea, have been very admirably figured and described in English
by M. P. T. Cleve, in a couple of papers, which were originally pre-
sented to the Swedish Academy of Sciences last year. With them
has come to ui^ a paper in Swedish, also read before the Swedish
Academy of Sciences about the same time, by M. N. G. W. Lagerstedt,
on the " Diatoms of Spitzbergen." This is illustrated by two good
plates, and though the general observations are in Swedish, the
description of the species found is in Latin.
COEEESPONDENCE.
An Error in Mr. Morehouse's Paper.
To tJie Editor of the * Monthly Microscopical Journal.*
Ashtabula, Ohio, U.S. A., July 17, 1874.
Siiu— In the article on the ** Structure of Diatoms," by Mr. Geo. W.
Morehouse, reprinted in your June number, 1 notice an error which
occurred in the original text.
The last footnote, p. 23, should read " J. E. Smith," &c.
As many of your readers may not have access to the * Lens,' I
desire to say that the observations referred to were made by me in
January, 1873 ; the objective used was a superb Tolles' immersion
one-tenth (xV*^) — amplification about 4000 diameters.
These observations were very shortly afterwards confirmed by
Mr. Morehouse.
I remain, Sir, your obedient servant,
J. Edwards Smith.
The Pathological Anatomy of the Brain and Dr. Eempbter.
To the Editor of the * Monthly Microscopical JournaU
Royal College or Physicians, Edinbubgh, August 18, 1874.
Sir, — I have this moment seen your notice of Dr. Kempster's
observations on the pathological anatomy of the brain in the insane ;
in it, it is said that Dr. Kempster has only been able to find one
exception to the silence which physicians have maintained on this sub-
ject, and that one paper by me is the exception. Were Dr. Kempster
to search with anything like care, he would find that there have been
many workers in the field both in Great Britain and the Continent,
that my contributions are numerous, and that his own observations
have been anticipated by many men and many years.
I am,lSir, yours truly,
J. Batty^ TuKB, M.D., r.E.S.E.
( 161 )
PKOCEEDINGS OF SOCIETIES.
Medical Migbosgopigal Sogiety.
Friday, July 17, 1874. — Jabez Hogg, Esq., President, in the chair.
Skin Grafting, — Mr. Golding Bird read a paper on the mode of
growth of the new epithelium after skin-grafting, or at the edge of a
skinning ulcer. Specimens illustrative of the subject were exhibited.
A summary of the changes observed is as follows : — A prolongation of
the epithelium forming the rete mucosum of the adjoining sMn, in a
horizontal direction over the surface of the neighbouring granulation
tissue, the vertically placed cells of the rete mucosum losing their
upright position and becoming more and more inclined till quite
horizontal ; the epithelial scales placed more superficially taking no
part in the process, but becoming shed; so that the new epidermis
was only one-third the thickness of that of the skin from which it
had sprung. He ascribed the adhesion of the new epidermis to the
underlying granulation tissue to the insertion of the former into the
most superficial layer of the latter, the intercellular material of which
may be seen becoming fibriUated (like the fibrin of blood clot),
coincidently with the growth onwards of the epithelium, the granula-
tion cells disappearing in great numbers at the same time. He had
never yet been able to find the granulation cells becoming developed
into epithelium ; but he had seen a few of them lying between the
cells of the new epidermis. The granulation tissue beneath the
earliest formed epithelium was the first to become developed into
fibrous tissue.
Mr. Coupland thought the disappearance to the naked eye at times
of a graft, and the subsequent growth of epidermis at the spot grafted
some time after, was a proof of the development of epithelium from
granulations.
Mr. Schafer referred to the observed transformation of white
blood-corpuscles on the recently blistered surface in the frog.
Mr. Golding Bird, in reply, denied that a graft that reappeared as-
stated had ever in reality disappeared. He believed that the deepest
layer of epithelial cells was always left, though not visible to the
naked eye.
Paccinian Corpiiscles, — Mr. Schafer gave an account; of these bodies,
discussing generally the various opinions held regarding them. He
explained the various component parts, and held that the " core " was
the layer of protoplasm described by Eanvier as covering the medullary
sheath of the nerves. He has seen a nerve pass from one Paccinian
body to another.
Dr. Pritchard asked if the Paccinian bodies in the cat's mesentery
were the same as in the skin ? In reply, Mr. Schafer stated he con-
sidered them identical.
Mycetoma, — Microscopic specimens of the " Fungus-foot of India "
were exhibited by the President.
PBOOEBDnros or Bocmras.
MicKOScopioAL Society op Vicioeia, Australia.
The monthly meeting of the Mieroacopical Society of Victoria was
held May 28th, 1874, at the coroner's office, Prince's Bridge. The
chair was occupied by Mr. Balph, and there was a moderate attendance
of members. Tlie minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed.
Mr. A. W, Howitt was presented as a visitor. Mr. Robert Hobertson,
the hoQ, secretary, annonnced the receipt of an ' Extract from .the
Proceedings of the Academy of i^'atnral Science of Philadolpliia,' from
Mr. Isaac Lea. Dr. Sturt presented ' Baker's Catalogue,' and a
German copy of a list, by B. Stiirtz, of foesils and minerals obtainable
at Mr. Strong's, Queen Street, Melbonme. Dr. Bone, of Castlemaine,
a country member, attended, bringing with him an excellent
microscope — one of Nogrotti and Zambra's, of London, with B
Boss's powers, and a choice and varied collection of objects. The
chairman also called attention to a neat and useful Instrument — one
of Swift's make — which could bo put in a small case and carried
the pocket, so as to make exaosinations, at the patient's bed-side or
when travelling.
Dr. Start road a paper, on a pearlash deposit at Sebastopol,
Ballarat. This substance was of a light texture, very porous, and
splitting somewhat easilyinto horizontal layers of a greyish colour. A
sample of it had been given to him by Mr. Lyons, and he intimated that
the Society would be pleased to Toceive and report upon any specimens
of a rare nature. Mr. Lyons had been using it as an ingredient of
his artificial mannros on account of the amount of potash it contained,
The surface of some of the layers is more or lees covered with narrow
linear vegetable workings, and whea its substance is broken np under
water those can often be found floating. Under the microscope theeo
are found to consist of vegetable cells almost coated by a layer of
small oval navicula, and are evidently the remains of narrow filing
&CBh-water algie. About ten different diatoms aro found in the
deposit, together with spicules of a sponge. The latter was interesting,
as he was not aware of any fresh-water sponge having yet been
discovered in Victoria. So appearance of vascular tissue was ob-
servable, and be had no doubt, from the nature of the sheUs, that it
was formed in freati water, prubably a pond or lake. Among the
specimens found were one surirella, a few gallionelhe, synedra (often
in bundles), gomphonema, and navicula.
Dr. Sturt also read an account of microscopic examinations of
made by Dr. Dongloa Cunningham, of Calcutta. It was as follows: —
Distinct infusorial onimalcnlos, their germs or ova, aro almost entirely
absent from atmospheric dust, and even from many specimens of dnst
collected from exposed surfaces. The cercomonnds and amoabte
appearing in certain specimens of rain-water, appear to be zoospores
developed from the mycelial filaments arising from common atmo-
spheric air. Distinct bacteriffi can hardly over be detected among the
constituents of atmospheric dust, but fine molecules of uncertain nature
are almost always present in abundance. They frequently appear in
specimens of rain-water, cullected with all precautions to secuie
purity, ftiid nppear in many cases to ariso fi'om. the myceliam
developed from atmospheric spores. Distinct bacteria are firequently
found amongst matter deposited foom the moist air of sewors, though
almost entirely absent as constituents of eommon atmoapheric dust.
The addition of dry dust which has been exposed to tropical heat, to
putrescible fluids, is followed by a rapid development of fungi and
bacteria, although recognizable apecimena of the latter are very rarely
to be found in it while dry. Sporca and other vegetable cells are
certainly present in atmospheric dnst, and usually in considerable *
numbers. The mftjority of them are living and capable of growth and
development. The amount of them, present in the air appears to be
independent of conditions of velocity and direction of wind, and their
numbers are not diminished by moisture. No condition can be traoed
between the numbers of bacteria and aporea, &c,, present in the air,
and the oocurrence of diarrhcea, cholera, ague, or dengue, nor between
the presence or abundance of any special form or forms of cells and
the prevalence of any of these discaees. The amount of inorganic and
amorphous particles and other ddiria auspended in the atmosphere is
directly dependent en conditions of moisture and of velocity of wind.
Dust irashed from exposed surfaces, or collected by gravitation or dew,
cannot be depended on. The reanlts of the present experiments are
nut opposed to the belief in the trausmission of these organisms, or
other, by means of the atmosphere ; they only refer to bodies
diatiuguishable from one another while in the air; nothing has been
worked out as to their dovelopraeEt or action. " What bBcomes of
them," said Dr. Sturt, " when respired ? Is their vitality destroyed ?
If BO, how are they got rid of? Do they develop within the
organism? Do they then exert any prejudicial influences on the
organism ? " These points were not touched upon by the author cited,
but he (Dr. Sturt) thought any part of the body they could oome into
contact with was a secreting or excreting surface, and he could himself
see but little chance of their development.
Dr. Bone, in reply, stated that he had been examining the water in
Caatlemaine, and that ho found orgtiuiii forms in his own rain-water
tank underground, and cemented, and from a clean roof, which he
ehould have thought perfectly pure. He had, however, found in it
myriads of bacteria, vibrionea, and amcebce, with other minute forma
that he did not tnow, and which presented the appearances of white
corpuaclea of blood. These, he noticed, whUe under inspection, aplit
np and divide, having amcehiform movementa. He thought that if
these organisms passed directly into the air-cells of the Inngs they
mnet generate and become a source of poisoning.
Mr. Sydney Gibbons referred to a paj^er read at a previous meeting,
in which ho described these organisms as monadic.
The Chairman thought these organisms must bo taken directly
into the system, and in large tiuantities to cause jmisoning effecta,
Mr. Sydney Gibbons gave an autline sketch of the organisms
found by him on the bottom of the ' Cerberus,' when docked, besides
numerous oysters of a large size, serving to show what could be grown
in Hobson'a Bay if they were only allowed time for development :
161 PBOOEEDINGS OF SOOIETIES.
there were mussels, a large number of the common barnacle and
balanus, but none of the Lejpas anatifera (the object of ancient fable).
But the animals most abounding were ascidians, singular creatures,
interesting to microscopists on account of the contents of the stomachs.
Besides these were actiniad, tubicolar worms, the laryaB of cephalopods,
with various zoophytes, but few algie. He had some of them now
under the instrument, and hoped to find in them material for a future
paper. He afterwards described the structure of some new and curious
^ngi, and the characters by which it was proposed to classify them,
and he exhibited specimens under a powerful monocular microscope.
He also communicated some notes on the rye-grass fungus, on which
Mr. Ealph and himself had reported at a previous meeting, both
agreeing in the view that it was deficient of some of the characters
required to constitute it a clavaria. He intimated that its place had
now been settled by Mr. Bentham and Baron Von Mueller among the
Isariad, with the name of Isarioe graminiperdce.
The Chairman remarked that the subject was a very interesting
one.
Mr. Sydney Gibbons next exhibited a section of the tooth of a rare
animal, the orycteropus, a burrowing animal of the anteater family,
whose dentition differed from that of all other known animals. The
creature is devoid of canines and incisors, but has a double set of
molars, one of which it sheds every year. To add to this anomaly,
the structure of the teeth is unique, being composed of a cluster of
pentagonal prisms, instead of the usual enamel with a bony foun-
dation.
The meeting afterwards spent some time in examining the several
specimens brought by members.
:/
m
ii
/
'^
n
X
THE
MONTHLY MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL.
OCTOBER 1, 1874.
\.—Tiie Hairs of Caterpillars. By T. W. Wonpor (Hon. Sec.
Brighton and Snssex Natural Hiatory Society).
Plate LXXV.
It either works on the microscope or on entomology be consulted,
very little, if any, information can be obtained on the hairs of cater-
piUara or larvte ather as regards their structure or the variety and
beanty of their forms, but here and there a few words may be
found upon the urticating or stinging properties of the hairs of
some caterpillars.
This urticating property was noticed in very early days, for,
according to Pliny,* the OoraeUan law, De Sicariis, was extended
to those persons who administered the hairs of the fir moth,
Cn. PUyocarnpa, and which were supposed to be a very deleterious
poison. Even when applied extenully they occasioned a very
intense degree of pain, itc^g, fever, and restlessness.
Occasionally allusion is made to other members of the same
family as possessing similar disagreeable effects, viz. Cn. pmivora,
stone pine moth, and Cn. processionea, the processionary moth, the
last named so called on account of the habits of the larvce, when
moving in the evening in search of their food. One caterpillar
leads the way, followed for some two feet by single caterpillars in
Indian file, then come ranks in twos, succeeded, at about the
EXPLASATION OP PLATE LXXV.
Fia. 1.— Gwden tiger. C. caja. x 120.
„ 2.— Hop dog. 0. padibvnda. x 120.
„ S.—Oak eggar. B. gturcus. x 120.
„ 1.— Lappet, i. giurcifolia. X 120.
„ 5.— Satin. L. laliaa. x 120.
„ 6.— Dtinker. O.potaloria. x 120.
„ 7. — Btowu tail, £. Ohryiorrlvta.
a— Ti» " -
1G<) Tlie Hairs of CaterjnUurs,
same distance, by threes, fours, fives, &c., until the main body ad-
vances twenty abreast, in so orderly and compact a manner, that
no human army could move with greater regularity or be more
obedient to the word of command. As soon as the leading cater-
pillar stops, the whole army halts; when he advances, they
advance, until a fresh pasturage has been found, then they all
disperse, until some signal calls them all together again.
Woe betide the luckless individual who approaches them while
on the march, or incautiously handles them, for the tufts of short
hairs, with which they are covered, possess the power of producing
an inflammatory irritation, worse even than the sting of a nettle.
It is reported that in some cases, where persons have been stung
severely, serious and sometimes fatal illnesses have resulted.
Not only when living, but even when dead, the hairs of this
caterpillar possess the same urticating properties. Thus Eeamur,
who has written a monograph on this moth, states that he suffered,
after handUng the dead caterpillar, for days with an itching, in conse-
quence of some of the short stiff hairs sticking in his skin, and being,
at first, ignorant of the cause, and rubbing his eyes with his hands,
he brought on such a swelling of the eyelids that he could scarcely
open them. Bonnet, too, who lifted some of these caterpillars
from water in which they had been drowned, felt a numbness of
the fingers, followed by an itching and burning sensation.
Fortunately or unfortunately, I have not come across this cater-
pillar, which abounds in Prance, and in 1865 was the cause of so
much annoyance to promenaders in the neighbourhood of Paris
that parts of the Bois de Boulogne were closed to prevent discom-
fort to those who incautiously approached the trees, where the
larvaB were, so that I only know the hairs from published drawings
of them.
We have in this country several caterpillars whose hairs pro-
duce the same or similar effects with some people, and as these
hairs present microscopically diversity of form I will specially
direct attention to them. Among the most notable are L, querd-
folia, the lappet ; 0. potatoria, the drinker ; B. neustria, the
lackey ; B. quercus, oak eggar ; E» lanestris, smalLeggar ; 0. pudi-
himda, hop dog; 0, antiqua, vapourer; L, dispar, the gipsy;
L» salids, the satin; L, aurijlua and L. chrysorrhasa, gold and
brown tails; together with C. caja, and C. villica,, the garden and
the cream spot tiger. All these with some persons produce, when
handled, either in the living or dead state, itching, inflammation,
and swelling of the parts affected for days;
There is one very extraordinary fact connected with these hairs,
viz. that while some are affected even if only the fingers touch the
hairs, others can handle some with impunity, and cannot come near
others without experiencing discomfort. I have known cases where
The Hairs of Caterpillars. 167
even the most careful handling of the brown tail has caused pain,
and the person so aflfected, incautiously like Keamur, rubbing the
face, could scarcely see out of his eyes for days after. When the
hairs of this caterpillar are examined under the microscope the
wonder ceases, as it will be seen they are admirably adapted to
penetrate, whichever end touches the skin, while the jagged portion,
barbed like an arrow, remains firmly fixed in the wound.
The typical form of hair among caterpillars is cylindrical and
terminating in a sharp point ; the hair itself being composed of
the same chitonous substance as the skin of the animal, generally
hollow and lined with a substance, which seems to resemble cutis.
Many, if not all, hairs, in the living state, contain fluid matter,
fossibly of the same nature as the circulatory fluid of the animal,
nstead of springing from a bulb, as in mammals, the base of the
hair is inserted in a socket, a ring-shaped projection, from which
the hair easily parts company. Examples of simple hairs of this
character may be obtained from the larvae of the oak eggar and
lappet, both of which irritate some persons. The larvae in each
case utilize their hairs in forming their cocoons, as is often pain-
fully evident to some, when handling them. A member of my
family cannot touch a cocoon of the oak eggar, however old it may
be, without annoyance, while I can handle them with impunity.
In the case of the garden tiger, hop dog, and some others,
the hairs are deeply spinous from point to base. In the satin,
sycamore tussock, and some others, the spines are thickly studded
along the whole hair. In the case of the gipsy, the drinker, and
the lackey, all of which, and especially the last named, punish some
very severely, the hairs are very fine and beset throughout their
length by very minute spines. In the brown tail, among longer
spinous hairs, are immense numbers of very minute ones jointed
throughout their length, and readily separating into barbs sharply
pointed at one end and trifid at the other. These hairs part from
the caterpillar so readily that persons looking at them, while they
were feeding, have felt annoyance, as though the mere movement of
the caterpillar separated the hairs, which, Uke those of the pro-
cessionary moth, were wafted by the wind. Some very peculiar
hairs are found on the vapourer, knobbed and plumed at the end ;
a similar, but more extensive knob is seen on wie hairs of a South
American caterpillar. The hairs on the tortoiseshell and other
Vanessidae are very stout and jointed, while those from the white-
plume moth caterpillar are imbricated and have somewhat the
appearance of wool: suflScient has been said to show there is so
great variety and beauty among caterpillar hairs as to recommend
them to the notice of microscopists, who have simply studied,
as far as I can gather, those from the larvae of Dermestes and the
pencil tail, which are well known as test objects of great beauty.
N 2
A quoation may arise, Whence tho urticiiting power? In the
hair alone, or Bome irritating antstaiice within the hair? I am
inclined to the former, because hail's from cast ekine kept for years,
and from cocoona two or three years old, are equally nrticatiag
with those from a living caterpillar, as are also tho hairs mingled
witli the webs spun by some of the sociable larvat. I look upon it
-88 a merely mechanical action, similar to that produced by the
hairs of the prickly pear, those from the interior of tho fruit of
the wild rose or Cowhage, Dolichas urens, all of which are equally
productive of irritation, inflammation, and feveriahnees.
To make out their structure caterpillar hairs should be mounted
dry, in floid and in balaam. Anyone turning his attention to
them and not minding the risk of an occasional annoyance will be
well rewarded for his paitis, and possibly wonder why more atten-
tion has not been paid by microscopiflta to so interesting and
instructiye a class of objects. I can only account for the apparent
neglect on the gronnd that few entomologists work with the
microscope, and that microscopisla gsnernlly have thought the haire
of all caterpillars alike, whereas, as with the scales of the lepidoptera,
so with the hairs of their larvse, there is great variety of form and
marking^.
Finding so little said about them, and having moreover worked
at them for some years, I considered the subject of sufficient
interest to bring before the Society, with the hope that some
members may be induced to carry it further than I have done at
present, and to show to our lepidopterists that there is much in tho
economy and philosophy of their branch of study worthy of being
critically examined.
II, — On Bog Mosses. By R. Biuitowaite, M.D., F.L.8.
Plates LXXVI. and LXSVII.
16. Sphagnum Lindbergii Schimper.
Torflnorae, p. 67, Tab. SST. (1858).
Plate LXXVI.
Syn.— BcHiMPEB Sjnoii. p. 679 (1860).— Limubebu Torfnj. No. 2 CSGS).—
Habtm. Bkand. Fl. p. Sl (1864).— Eibsow loifra. p. 54" (1864).— Miujb Biyol.
8Jles. p. 3SS (1869),-— ArsTiN Muec. AiipBlach. No. 40 (1870).
Sph. c'Sfn'daium B fiitmna and Spb. fnlram Sebdtbeb Mbs. Sfih, ctispidatum
liHDBBBG ill Bot. Notieer 1856, p. 122.
Monoicous, in laige dense tufts 6-12 in. high, glossy ycUouisk
I green, imged with ferruginous or purplish brown. Stem solid, dark
I oroMJM, with 3-4 eortical siraia formed of irregular sized cells
, without pores. CauJine leaves crowded, refleaxd, broadly lingidate,
[ awriclea, the ajiex Iroad, hvncaie and fringed ; basal cells
► hexagonal, in four rows, pale brown, then becoming narrow and
•hglfoiffiiyTfterBstopteM JngmalBeta.1674-, Tl,i;
Sgj^^naua^l^
On Bog Mosses. 169
elongated, with a few imperfect fibres in the lateral cells, these
bound a central triangle, the b^se of which is formed by the apical
margin, and this space is occupied by large loose rhombic cells,
broader and 2-3 partite at the apex of leaf; both fibres and pores
occur sparingly in the auricles.
Fascicles of 4-5 hrancheSy of which 2-3 are arcuate and
divergerdy the others pendent^ elongated and closely appressed to
stem. Eetort cells of the branches larger, recurved at apex.
Branch leaves numerous, in five rows, not undulated, firm,
brownish or ferruginous green., rather glossy, ovate at base
becoming lanceolate above, toothed and involute ai apex ; hyaline
cells elongated, with numerous annular and spiral fibres, and
many minute pores at margin ; chlorophyll cells narrow, elliptic in
section, quite enclosed but nearest to the back of leaf; border widest
at base, formed of 3-4 rows of very narrow cells,
Male inflorescence consisting of few antheridia which are borne
on the pendent branches.
Capsules numerous, seated in the capitulum, moderately elevated ;
perichastium large, inflated, the bracts yellowish green, lower
elongated oblong, upper broadly obovate — oblong, convolute, trun-
cate and fimbriate at apex, transversely undulate at base, without
fibres or pores. Spores yellow.
Hab. — Deep bogs in the northern region of Europe. Discovered
by Lindberg in 1856 near Lakes Betsetjaur, Skutijaur and Stora-
vaviken in Pitean Lapland, and since found to be pretty generally
distributed in other parts of Lapland as well as in Finland and
the north of Sweden; Dovrefjeld, Norway (Berggren); in the
Eiesengebirge, Silesia (Milde) ; Alps of Salzburg (Sauter).. In
this country it was found in 1867 by McKinlay on Ben Wyvis in
Koss-shire, and in America it has been met with in Canada,
Newfoundland, and Greenland. Fr. July.
This fine species closely resembles Sph. intermedium, but is
readily known by the difierent form of the stem leaves, and the
non-undulated branch leaves unaltered by drying, as well as by the
glossy reddish brown colour. The species also appears to be
subject to hardly any variation, and will doubtless be found in
other localities in the north of Scotland.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE LXXVI.
Sphagnum Lindbergii.
a. — Fertile plant.
1. — Part of stem and branch fascicle.
3. — Fruit and perichsetium. 4.— Bract from same.
5. — Stem leaves. 5 a a. — Areolation of apex of same x 60. 5 a 6. — Ditto of
basal wing.
6. — Leaves from middle of a divergent branch. Gp. — Point of same. 6x,^^
Transverse section. 6 c— Cell from middle x 200,
7. — Basal intermediate leaf.
9 J?. — Part of section of stem.
10. — Part of a brandi denuded of leaves.
On So</ Moaies.
17. Sphagnnm Wnlfii G-irgensohn,
Archiy fur NaturliunJo Liv — , EbI — ■ nnd KurlnndB, Sot. 2, BhoiI 11^ '
p. 173 C18«0).
Plate LXXTII.
iyn.—Sph. Wuljianum GnKjENBOUN i.e.— Bot. Zeit. 1862, p. 247.— KuB«
Tiirfm. p. 66 (1864).— MiLDH Bryoi. Silea. p. 383 (1869).
AnnTH Unac. App&lacb. No. 32 (I8T0). Sph. jiycnocfuiium AKoeTBCOi Msa.
Babesil Bryoth. Enr. fa»c. XV, Ho. 709.
MonoicouB. Plants robust, 5-10 in. high, yellowish or brownish
green or Bometimes deep green, in loosely cohering tuftB. Sievi
simjile, or aometimeB divided, Haekish hroum, straight, solid, densely
ramulo&e, with two cortical strata of small non-porose cells, the
woody zone purple, of 5-6 rows of strongly thickened cells.
Bamuli 7-12 in each fascicle, of which 3-5 are divergent, short,
tiightly arched, becoming clavate upward and then suddenly
pointed ; the rest deflesed and closely, appressed to stem, very long
and slender, lax-leflved, usuflUy of a pale rose colour ; the porose
cortical cells short and scarcely differing from the rest. Branches
of the coma short, thick, numerous, forming a large dense
eapitvlvm.
Caaline leaves very small, from a broad base lingnlate-
' triangular, reflexed; the hyaline cells repeatedly diyided, without
fibres or pores, those in the middle rhomboidal, becoming narrower
towards the margin, where they form a border of 3-0 rows.
Bamuline leaves imbricated, erecio-paieni, recurved in their
upper half or subsquarrose, all with a border of two rows of very
narrow cells ; the basal minute oTato-lanceolate, the median ovate,
elongato-lancedate, with the margin involute a^\d shoiily 3-4
toothed at apex, the uppermost narrowly lanceolate, scarcely
toothed. Hyaline cells with annular fibres, upper with numeroiM
small pores on each side of cell, lower lateral with large pores which
become fewer in those at the middle of leaf. Chlorophyll cells
compressed, enclosed by the hyali-ne in the upper part <f leaf, but
in the lower pari free both on the inner and outer surface, and
rectangular in section,
Male inflorescence purple, at the apex of the divergent branches.
Fruits clustered in the capitulum, but moderately exserted ;
perichffitium straw-coloured or pink, lower bracts ovate acuminate,
concave, recurved at apex, upper elongate oblong, shghtly emargi-
nate and somewhat recurved at point, convolute, without fibres or
pores. Caffflule small globose, b^kish brown, spores pale yellow.
Yar. |8, squarrosulum Eussow.
Leavra of the longer divergent branches squarroae, with more
numerous pores.
Hab. — Wet pine-woods, rEtre, Techelfer woods near Dorpat,
Sequent (Girgensohn 1847); Kaddak near Reval, AUentacken
"ielfcr.lhly rji&rij^oo-p-.csl Jo-um.alOcl:l.lS^;4. PIL^
The Pebrine Corpuscles in the Silkworm. 171
and Appelsee (Kussow) ; Jamni — Les near Permeskiill (Gruner).
Bergfnnda near Lyeksele, Lapland (J. Angstrom 1864). Belle-
ville, Canada (Macoun, Fowler). Near New York (Howe, Peck,
Austin). Fr. July.
This rare and beautiful species may be readily known by its
clavate divergent branches and the large number of them in each
fascicle, as well as by the small stem leaves and the dense globose
capitulum ; in all other points its afl^ity lies clearly with 8ph.
acutifolium,
EXPLANATION OF PLATE LXXVII.
Sphagnum Wulfii.
a. — Fertile plant.
1. — Part of stem and branch fascicle.
3. — Fruit and perichsBtium. 4. — Bract from same.
5. — Stem leaves. 5 a a. — Areolation of apex of same. 5 a b. — Ditto of basal wing.
6. — Leaves from middle of a divergent branch. 6p. — Point of same. 6x. —
Transverse sections, ' from upper part, " from lower part. 6 c— Cells ' from
upper part, " from lower lateral part x 200.
7. — Basal intermediate leaf.
8. — Lciif from a pendent branch.
9 X. — Part of section of stem.
10. — Part of a branch denuded of leaves.
III. — The Pebrine Corpuscles in the Silkworm, and wliat thejj
are analogous to.
In the year 1865, Pasteur was instructed by the French Miiiister
of Agriculture to specially investigate and report upon the diseases
incident to silkworms. During the interval between the years 1853
and 1865, these disorders had reduced the annual production of
cocoons in France from sixty-five to ten millions of pounds. In
the admirable work which resulted from his laborious researches,*
the author remarks : " Certain disorders of the human race are ac-
companied by spots upon the skin, which originate in consequence
of various alterations of the intestinal canal. This is not the sole
observation apphcable to human pathology which the experiments
detailed in this work will suggest to the intelligent reader."
Diseases of the higher and lower orders of the animal kingdom
are undoubtedly subject to similar conditions, in their genesis,
resolution, or fatal issue. It is more logical as well as more con*
sonant with scientific method, to observe the uniformity of a patho-
logical law in the caries of an elephant's dentine, and the gangrene
* * £tade snr la Maladie des Vers-k-soie, moyen pratique assure de la com-
battre et d'en pr^venir le retour,' par M. L. Pasteur, Membre de Tlnstitut Imperial
de France, et de la SocicJt^ Eoyale de Londres. Paris : 1870. This work is the
source from which have been obtained all the facts relative to the contagious
disease of the silkworm, to which reference is made in this paper.
172 The Pd/rine Corpuscles in the Silkworm,
of a spider's foot, than to seek with Huxley for a community of
protoplasm between the finner whale and the fungus upon 'a fly.
The ciUas of the vorticella and of the human bronchi are not
identical in structure, but they move in obedience to a similar
impulse.
A medical friend once remarked to the writer of these pages,
that the periodical visitations and ravages of insects presented a
striking analogy to the recurrence and devastation of epidemic
diseases. It is well worth the investigation to inquire if they be
not alike dependent upon similar hygrometric and thermometric
conditions of the soil and atmosphere.
It is proposed here to point out the analogies which exist be-
tween the pebrine of the silkworm and syphilis in man, not because
these analogies might be so interpreted as to indicate that the two
disorders have, in common, a parasitic origin. It is because the
knowledge we at present possess relative to contagion is so scanty,
that it mav be said every new observation of its phenomena
stimulates the belief that that which is unknown and yet knowable
is largely in excess of that which is known regarding it.
Bumstead, referring to this subject in a recent paper,* says :
" The fact is, that a new field for investigation and experiment
has been opened, which no one has as yet fully explored, and no
one can pretend to understand. The exploration of this field
promises to throw light, not only upon syphilis, but upon other
contagious diseases, and even to add to our knowledge of the
nature of specific poisons in general ; but the work is yet undone,
and any conclusions at this time are only premature."
It is preferable to select syphilis for the study of the analogies
referred to above, first, because it is a disease produced by a tangible
virus ; and, second, because of the multiformity of its results. It
is possible to secure upon the point of the lancet a drop of matter
wmch we can prove to be capable of producing all the complications
of the disease. This is also true of pebrine. While we have,
however, an equal opportunity of isolating the maferies morM in
vaccinia, variola, maugnant pustule, and certain other maladies, the
polymorphism of the results produced is not equally marked as a
basis for comparison.
It is, perhaps, proper to admit, at the outset, that the investi-
gations of Professors Strieker and Kobner have completely exploded
the theories of Lostorfer, Salisbury, and others, as to the existence
and causality of crypta syphilitica. We have no additional informa-
tion which would warrant us in reviving such dead issues. That
is not the purpose of this paper. It is here intended merely to
exhibit a general agreement between the origin and evolution of
two contagious diseases, existing in two widely-separated orders
♦ * Ain. Jour, of the Medical Sciences/ April, 1873.
The P^mne Corpuscles in tke Silkworm. ' 173
of aDimals, in or^er tbat Uig classical featnro of contagion in an
extended area may Iw better appreciated.
The silkworm, as is well knowD, is the larve of the Bomhjx
mori, which deposits an OYum, from which, in turn, the caterpillar
is produced. The latter, after undergoing foor {in some races
three) distinct changes of integument, becomes a pupa or chrysaiis,
and surrounds itaell' with the silk eocoon. From this, lastly, the
perfect moth — imago of natoralista — cflects its escape. When it
IS considered that, in a period of between thirty and thirty-five
days, the caterpillar increases in size till it becomes eight or ten
thousand times larger than the newly-escaped Inrvo, it will bo
seen that organic life is displayed with tinequallod activity in
its development. Diseases, tlierefore, cannot but progress, pari
passu, wim an intensity proportioned to the -energy of the vital
forces.
In tho human economy, of what paramount importauee to its
conservation are the critical phases of the lirgt and second denti-
tion, the arrival of puberty, and the change of the menopause ! In
tho silkworm no less than seven equally important crises occur,
during a comparatively short interval — the cycle of a brief existence,
whose momentous stages oiler nnuBual facilities for the encroach-
ment of disease.
It is to he remarked, if we begin with the earliest phases of the
two disorders, that,
1, Pebrme and syphilis are alike producible hy arHfieial
inoculation. Pasteur produced a liquid capable of inoculation, by
bruising a diseased worm and mixing the mass with a small quantity
of water, A number of worms were selected, careftilly esamined
in order to ensure their soundness, and thoroughly cleansed by
washing, so that no germs might remain in contact with the skin.
He then made a small puncture in one of the posterior rings of the
body of each, and inoculated the wound by inserting into it a needle
dipped in the infecting liquid. The wounds readily cicatrized, and
iiotuing but a black or dark-colonred spot was soon visible in the
site of the puncture. Of twenty worms inoculated in this manner,
on one occasion, seven became diseased to such an extent as to
exhibit from fifty to two hundred of the corpuscles characteristic
of pebrine, in one microscopic field. The experimenter explains
why no larger proportion of successful inoculations was made:
"The blood which escapes from tlie wound does not invariably
permit of penetration by the corpuscles which are intended to pro-
dnce infection." Audoin is said to have observed the same fact in
his inoculations. Many an experienced physician has failed of snc-
cessfol vaccination for a similar reason.
It should be Etat«d, however, that most frequently pebrine is
produced by the ingestion of corpuscular germs when the worm is
i
174 The Pebrine Cor^uaeha in tlie Silkioorm.
feeding upon the mulberry leaf. The corpuaclts are thon fouud
distributed over the sntiace of the leaf in debria ; and a singla
repast is said to be sufficient to occoBion the diseoae. It is worthy
ofnote that an intestinal lesion is then produced.
It cannot be doubted that chancres would in like manner result,
if, by any natural process, the secretion from similar sores conld be
apphed to the mucous surface of the intestines. But it may well
be doubted if tbia species of infection of the primre yias ever occuzs
in the human subject. A vaccinicultorist of this city, however,
once informed the writer that he was in receipt of numerous orden^
from practitioners of the homceopathie delusion, who desired tq
secure an infinitesimal quantity of Taccine vims, rubbed up wilih
sugar of milt for internal administration !
2. Pehrine and aifphilis are alike communicabh hy aendeniai
inoeviation. Past«ur discorered numerous cicatrices in healthj
worms, which resulted from wounds. These wounds were inflicted
by booklets attached to the ajiterior organs of locomotion, in tbosa
caterpillare with which they had come into frequent contact.-
These were never seen in isolated individuals. He remai'ks that
not infrequently these sharp booklets, by which the caterpillar i9
enabled to cling to the leaf upon which it feeds, are inserted into
the fseces or integument of diseased worms, and sulfflequently into
the bodies of those that are sound, thns serving to propagate the
disease by accidental inoculation. It is evident that there is herJ
also the possibility of the production of mediate contamination, th(
porte-viruB (if it be allowable to coin a suggestiTe word) beina
exempt from infection.
3. Pebrine and syphilis alike require a period if inatbcUiotij
before the pJienomena of i/eneral disease appear, Pasteur di»
covered that after accidental or artificial inoculation, and nlso afta
the ingestion of disease germa, a period of from t«n to twelve dsyl(
elapsed before external manifestations of pebrine appeared, BJ
feeding a namber of larves with the solution which has been already
referred to, and by killing and carefully examining a fixed number
of bodies at consecutive dateB, he was enabled to follow the evolit
tion of the disease, and to trace its natural history. In everj
instance the period of incubation was noted. This is such a con*
stant concomitant of contagions diseases, that it may well b^;
considered essential to their liiU development."
4. The first general indications of constiiutional disease t'lj
pehrine and syphilis appear as integumentary lesions. In thi
course of the experiments conducted by Pasteur, whenever a nnmbet
of larves were selected for inocidation or infection, a similar numboE
of the same age and habitat were set aside in a healthy conditumt
in order to serve the purposes of comparison. At the expiration o
* See ' Nonv. Diet do Med. et do Chi. Jaocoud' nrt. ''Contagion."
The Pebrine Corpuscles in the Sffkworm.
^^KtVbn period of incnbation previooaly refeiTod to, a very sensiblo in-
^ equality waa noticeable in these two olasaes. Those which were left
uninfected, displayed unmistakable evidence of greater well-being ;
while the diseased worms, when examined by the aid of a lens,
exhibited namerons exceesiTely anmtl spots or macnlsB, Idtherto
Tuinotieeable, about the head and rings. These lesions did not at
first indicate tho presence of the characteristic corpuscles in the
skin. The " extension of the latter from centre to circumference
had not yet affected the external organs. These surface spots,"
says Pasteur, "only occur when tlie internal skin, if I may be
allowed the expr^sion, is affected to sach a degree as to seriously
interfere with the functions of digestion and assimilation."
Subsequently, howorer, integumentary lesions were produced
which, upon careful examination, were found to contain the pebrine
corpuscles. It is difficult to recognize tho distinction ber6 esta-
blialied, and not recall the difference between those superficial
syphilides, whicb disappear readily under appropriate tr^tment,
and those which contfon a specific morbid product. One instinc-
tively recurs to the theory of Jonathan Hutchinson and others, that
the lesions of secondary syphilis are febrile phenomena. These
precede the deposits of tertiary forma, in which the " still-born "
product of Lancereaux is to be distinguished.
The patches upon tho integmnent in pebrine are generally of a
(lark colour, sometimes black (whence the name), some more and
some less clearly defined. The petechial character of this stage of
the disease has giveu it the name by which it is known among the
Italians (Petechia of the Silkworma). When completely developod,
these stams are surrounded by a yellowish areola, which exhibits
various gradations in colour. Sometimes they constituto tlie sole
symptoms of the diseaae.
M. Quatre&ges, with whose opinions Pasteur is not in com-
plete accord, declares that the alterations, described above, are
best studied in the skin of the young larves. In these be could
occasionally descry nothing more than a yellowish tint, slightly
obscuring the hyaline trauaparency of the tissues. Somewhat
later, a darker stain became viaiblo, shading gradually iuto
brown, imtil the tranalucence of the epidermis waa lost. Finally,
a brownish-black stigma remained, which was accompanied by a
disappearance of all traces of organization. About this, as a
nucleus, a yellowish areola extended, which, in his opinion,
marked the incision of the surrounding tissaee. This process
generally continued until arrested, either by the death of the
worm, or by the regular replacement of the old by a new integu-
ment. In the course of two or three days, however, the new
cuticle, which at first appeared entirely normal, waa in ite tui'n
aftected by the disease, " proving," says Quatrefagee, " that tho
I7G The P^-ine Corp\
leaioiia wore not local [lUenompaa, bat signs of a constitntioQ^
malady, dependent upon a profound cause."
Piisteur has noted that the dQ7elopmeat of the pebrina cor-
pnsoles proceeds with an nnesampled rapidity daring these periods.
of metamorphosis — a circumstance which our knowledge of the
laws of pathology woakl lead m to expect. He disagrees with.'
Qnatrefages in the sapposition that the integnmentary lesions are'
locahzed foci, from which a qnasi-gangrenons process extends ta-
the invasion of adjacent tissue; but considers each stigma to ba'
a resultant of corpuscular development, and the changes in th«
ap{)earance of the maenlie not due to molecular death, bnt tm
neoplastic hyperplasia.
In addition to the syrnptoma noted above, certain other indica^
tions of disease are described in the adult moth, as, for exranple^*
vflsieles, varices, and bullra filled with a sanguinolent fluid, under
or near the wings. Some of these were observed to burst, and
their contents, escaping and drying, were found to form adherent
crusts, black and viscous, of the size of a pea.
5, Pebrine and syphilia are alike productive of a specifie
adenopaiky. The secretion of the silk-glands of the pupa ha3
solely conbributed to the value placed upon the insect by the com-
mercial world. In a pathological point of view, these glanda
poasess Gspeeial importance from the feet that they are rapidl;
affected in pebrine. The large pentagonal cells which surrouui
the canal where the silk is secreted in a viscous state, exhibit in a
diseased condition numbers of oval corpuscles, crowded together,
and sometimefl collected in such masses that they lend an appear-
ance of hypertrophy to the glandular tissue. Viewed with a low
power, they exhibit whitish projections brilliant in colour, of oval
form, and very clear definition. They are, without doubt, eridenca
of the extension of the disease to the visceral organs of the worms :
and the total incapacity of the larvee to produce cocoons — those of
them, at least, which are profoundly affected — ia a proof of tha
destructive agency exerted by the glandular neoplasms.
In syphil^, not only are those glands affected which are in the
chain of the great system of lymphatics, but those which are
actively concerned in hrematopoesis. There is strong reason to
believe that, aade from the development of hepatic- gummata,
iisually found in the tertiary stage, one of the earliest symptoms
of constitutional syphilis is dependent upon some disturbance of
the glycogenic function of the liver. Dr. Charlea Murchison
has recently concluded," after reviewing the discoveries of Hoppe
Ssyler, Bernard, Lehmann, McDonnell, Hirt, of Zittan, Weber,
and Kolliker, that " the glycogen secreted in the liver cell com-
bines with nitrogen and forma an azotised protoplasm which main-
* 'Lttutut,' June, lB7i.
t
The Purine Corpuscles in the Silkworm. 177
bins the nutrition of the blood auJ tissnea." In this light the
K«hloroaiiiEniia of early syphiHa is most readily explained— a con-
mdition which is constaat in all but benign casoa, and which conati-
fctntea an important indication for saecesafnl treatment.
G. Pebrine and syphUis are, alike, diseases of the hlood. In
a healthy state the blood of the larve is a transparent albuminous
J'flnid — colourless in the ease of those races which produco white
"k; and golden yellow in those which produce yellow silk. Under
1 microscope, innumerable spherical bodies appear, of varioua
sa, the largest of which does not in ita greatest diameter exceed
, '0039 of an inch. They seem endowed with individual vitality,
^d continually reproduce themselves during the life of the insect.
I When the latter is infected with pebrine, the number of the blood-
Iglobules decreasM — thus inducing n species of chloroansBmia^ — and
W.&e albuminous fluid becomes charged with an immense number of
■ minute animated corpuscles '01 of an inch in diameter, increasing
( in proportion to the disappearance of ita normal ingredients. These
[ are the pebrine corpuscles ali-eady described, which Pasteur is dis-
I posed to regard as the parasitic germs of a species of psorosperm.
j.They are oval or reniform in contonr, destitute of cihte, and move
Y tapidly, apparently at will, sometimes advancing and sometimes
■ Teceding in the vascular ehauncl.
The genia " psorosperm " was first established by Jean Mullcr,
after his observation of certain anomalous organisms- in different
varieties of fishes, and especially in the freah-water pike. But
certain later expressions of Pasteur seem to imply that his mind is
not perfectly clear as to the parasitic character of the germs de-
scribed by him. In some of his communications to the Academy
of iSciencea, for example, he wea language &om which it might be
inferred that the disease originated in generations of the ancestora
of these worms, whose connective tissue had undergone a pecuhar
cell-metamorphosis.
It is well known that Beale * adduces very strong grounds for
the belief that contagious disease germs are not parasites, and his
opinions are largely the result of researches upon the subject of the
cattle-plague. Let it be supposed, ill accordance with his views,
that the corpuscles dracribed by Pasteur are bioplasts — contagious
living disease germs— that they are the descendants of blood or
tissue bioplasts; that subsequently, either by hyper-nutrition or
retrogression, they have undergone a conversion of energy, and
become powerful to self-mnltiply indefinitely, and powerless to
build up new and normal structures. This would explain the
amoebiform movement of the pebrine corpnaclra, their contagious-
ness, their virulence, and their destructiveness. Not only so, but it
nild do away with tlie need of resorting to a novel species of
Disease Gtrma; Ih^ir Nnture and Origin,' LioiibI S, Bcale, I/mdon: 1873.
17S TJte Pebrine Cor^iecles in tite Silkworm.
pamsite, ia ordor to explain the phenomena. It shonld be atatod
in thia connection, that Baale considers the obaervationa of both
Pouchot and Pagtenr open to objections upon the ground of their
employment of very low powerg. Many of the germs figured by
Beale were viewed with an objective of one-fiftieth of an inch focal
^stance, enlarging the dimensions of these organisms 2800 dia-
meters.
In sncb a field as thb, speculation is illusory, and scientific
deductions are alone to be desired. Still the general trend of the
exposed strata is in one direction. Thej to whom the conservation
and transmutation of forces is an unalterable fiict of physics, have
no difliculty in believing that there is a similar law to wliicli the
vital forces are subject. Heat, light, and electricity are shown to
be modes of motion — interchangeable and intercurrent. The day
is, perhaps, not for distant, when it will be clear that contagious
and other diseases, which betray themselves by structural lesions,
depend upon the mode of motion of the bioplast. This motion is
known to be the measure of its energy. Can we not even declare
that it is tbe essential condition of its vitality ? Motionless bio-
plasm is dead. The transmutation of a normal to an abnormal
energy should, therefore, produce disease and ultimate death. If
this can be shown, it will be apparent that by an inversion of this
proc«B8 restoration from disease occnrs.
Guerin-Meneville, in a report to the French Agricnltnral
Society in 1849 — mark the date! — gives eipresaion to the same
general thought. " It seems clear fo me," said he, " that these
grannies (pebrine corpuscles) are tbe elements of new blood-
globules, normally produced and launched into the vascular cur-
rents of healthy worms ; but in pathological conditions they lack
certain essential elements, and are therefore arrested in the pro-
gress of development."
Pasteur descrilies the mature corpuscles as brilhant of refrac-
tion and ovoid in shape. They subsequently become pyriform,
sarronnd themselvea with a double envelope, and exhibit a slight
flattening at the narrower extremity. They contain granules,
either fi-ce or adherent to the cell-wall, and these, he beheves, after
their exit by rapture of the cell-envelope, serve as new centres for
the development of new corpnscles, and thus extend the disease.
The tissue of these organisms was supposed to contain sarcode.
7. PebriTie and sifphilk are hereditary disorders. The
transmission of the disease of the silkworm from one generation
to another, has been the most fruitful source of evil in the pro-
pf^tiou of the species. Unfortunately, before the microscope had
been employed iu the study of the malady, sericultarists could not
be persuaded to beheye that apparently healthy ova fi'om parents
^ The Pdirine Oorpva^s in (he SUknoorm. 179
^^1 of eqtmt apparent health, coDtaliied the seeds of the devastatioQ
^^B which had blasted their hopes of profit for the preceding year.
^^B Such, however, has been too fireqaently the case ; and the saccess
^^H of Pasteur in totally eliminating the disease from those nurseries in
^^V which his method was pnrsned, was due to his recognition of this
^^H &ct. It is not a little remarkable in this connection, to observe
^H that,
^^H 8. In Purine, as in sypkUia, when one 'parent only is affected
^^H veith the disease, healthy offspring may he produced. This general
^^B &ct was demonstrated by a great number of experiments upon the
^^M coupling of moths, in which there was nndoubted evidence of cor-
^^H pnscular disease either of the male or the female. It appeared
^^H also from these experiments, that ova entirely sound were gene-
^^H rated occasionally by males who axLibitcd very extensive ti'ac^ of
^^H the malady, when assorted with females who, while they were indu-
^^H bitably infected, yet exhibited very few of the pathognomonic lesions
^^H of pebrine. The experimenter explained these circumstances by
^^H the conditions incidental to the chrysalis. If the latter became
^^H infected with pebrine so as to exhibit corpuscles very soon after the
^^H formation of the cocoon, the moth, and its ova were almost certain
^^B to be similaj-ly diseased. But if this development did not occur
^^H imtil near the time tor the escape of the imago, then the ova of the
^^H moth uight be entirely sound. lb the case of the syphilitic ovum,
^^H similar results are said to be declared, according as infection occurs
^^H eBjIy or late in utero-gestation.
^^H Other analogies between these diseases obviously exist which
^^H might be in turn the subject of comment. Such, for example, are
^^H the involvement of the nervous system and centres in each — the
^^H infecnndity of infected females who are liable to sterihty and the
^^H production of blighted germs ; the non-inocukbility of the infec-
^^B iious matter obtained during the later stages of each disease, and
^^K the liability of each to complication by the advent of other
^^~ maladies.
It should be stated that Pasteur himseK is disposed to regard
pebrine as analogous to pulmonary phthisis. But he is careful
to announce that in establishing a resemblance between the facts
i which he has observed and those relative to diseases of the
Ituman race, he does not speak as an expert.* The hereditary
influence of phthisis seems to have attracted his attention to this
subject.
But there are many objections to this view founded upon the
clinical history of tuberculosis. This latter disease is neither
• " Je desire toutefoia que roc
j'itiiblia dea aMimildtiina eutre
VOL, xn.
eache bieu iiue ja pnrla en profane, lorsqiiB
Bfl fuits que j'ai ..bservra Bt Im malaiicB
ir
I
180
infectioua, contagions, nor inociilable.* Nor does it prodnce a
pathognomonic cntaneons lesion.
It is tme, as stated by Pasteur, that children bora of phthisical
parents may, in some instances, merely become more or less sickly,
while in omers tnbercie may be developed in different degrees at
various agee. But one has not to consult the statistics of con-
sumption in order to establish this diversity in the evolation of
herwlitary disease. Congenital syphilis may infect the ovum, the
fcetus at term, and the intaut newly born or which has survived for
weeks and months. But this is not the limit of its efi'ect. Massa
narrates cases in which the disease was developed between three
and eleven years of ago ; BaUing, similar instances at the age of
sixteen ; Eosen, at eleven ; Baumes, at four ; Cazenave, at eighteen ;
Fournier, at twenty-five ; Zambaco, at twenty-aJx-t Other authors
cite cases which illustrate the same point. In the face of these
observations who will venture to say, " Thus Cir doth it come, and
no farther" ?
In concluding the consideration of the general subject here dis-
cussed, few will refuse to concur with the opinions expressed by
Dr. William Aitken. " The diseases of the lower animals," says
this author, " rarely form any part of the study of the student of
medicine. ITie diseases of plants are almost entirely neglected.
Yet it is clear that until all theae have been studied, and some
steps taken to generalize the resnlta, every conclusion in pathology
regarding the nature of diseases must be the result of a limited
experience from a limited field of observation." — The Medical
Examiner, Chicago, July 15tb, 1874.
IV. — On the Microscopical Characters of the Spvlum in PMhiBts.
By John Denis Maodonald, M.D., F.E.S., Staff-Surgeon R.N.,
Assistant Professor of Naval Hygiene, Netley Medical School.
Plateb LXXVin. AND LXXIX.
It is a question whether, with all our progress in pathology, we
can satisfactorily diagnose incipient phthisis by the microscopical
characters of the sputum alone. Critically similar appearances are
presented in the sputum of chronic hsemorrhagic catarrh, and in a
very frequent sequel of ordinary pneumonia. Indeed there can be
* BouiUaad atatus that " the lubeECDloua vims is an hypothesis vhich up to
the pieaent time rests upon no esact nor trustworthy obserratiiin ; and there doeB
not exist B. single inalauce of lubBrculoaia of the lungs, or of any part of the body,
heing produoed in tlie Luiuan apeciea hj nisiinB of spwifio (viralent) inoculation."
Aa to oootngion, the eiperimouta of Krdt, Villemiu, Simon, Herard, and Clarke
have been ahowu bjLehert, Nysa, Sanderson, and Pox, Id demonstrate merely tha
initative character of sahciitaneoua injections of putrid matter.
t Lancoteauz, 'Troitf do ta Syplulis,' Paris: 1866.
I
I
of the Spvium in PhiMsis. 181
bnfc littlo doubt that under the designation of PhthiHis, at least
several distinct maladies are commonly included ; and some of
Hiese even tend to tha destructioa of the lung tissue in a manner
Boarcely to be distinguished from the process of ulceration occurring
in connection with softened tubercle. Nevertheless, the detection
of this tissue in the expectoration is perhaps the clearest diagnostic
mark of phthisis that the sputa can afford. Professor Bennett's
case of the discovery of elastic lung tissue under the microscope,
Erior to the development of true phthisical symptoms, appears to
ave been followed by few, if any, other good examples of the kind.
There is, however, great promise that with improved methods of
examination, as, for instance, the process recommended and so suc-
cessfiilly practised by Dr. Fenwick,' much may yet be done to
elucidate this important point. It nsually happens that at the
time we are able to trace such anatomical elements in the sputa,
the disease haa sufficiently manifested its real nature by other
attending signs and symptoms. It aeems to be generally admitted
that the charactera of the elastic tissue of the airH3ells are so dis-
tinctive, that there is little likelihood of anything else being mistaken
for it, and it is qnite true that an experienced microscopist may not
confound other fibrous tissues with it. But the tyro must be made
aware that many things of an extraneous nature will he sure to
deceive him, unless he makes himself acquainted with the minute
anatomy of the air-cells, more especially with the microscopical
appearance and mode of distribution of their supporting fibrous tissue.
"The accompanying Figs, 1 anil 2, Plate LSXVIII., are selected
for the guidance of those who may not be fiimiliar with the structura
of the air-cella. The first represents a portion of inBated and dried
lung, showing the comparative size and general disposition of the
air-cellfl, as seen with a half-inch power. The second was drawn
from a small portion of recent lung divested of its epithelium, and
treated with acetic acid to render the investing tissues more trans-
parent, and thus to display the fibrous basis more distinctly (mag-
nified about 300 diameters).
Should tubercular matter be deposited in the cells themselves,
or between the layers of the basement membrane in contact with
the fibrous tissue, the irritation thus induced will sooner or later
lead to inflammatory action and the development of its products,
Wmph and pus. "With the central softening and ultimate breaking
down of the tubercle, an ulcerative process is set up, by which frag-
menta of pulmonary tissue become detached and are expectoratetl
with the surrounding pus and mucus from the bronchial membrane.
Such fragments are therefore commonly to be found in the sputa
of persons affected with phthisis, and the credit of having first
discovered them by the aid of the microscope belongs to Professor
■ gee ' Lancet,' December 5th, 186B,
2
I
182 On the MieroBeopvxd Charaders
Schroeder Van der Kolk, who in 1816 first published hia obser-
vations on the subject, and gava a fresh impetus to the labours of •
Dr. Andrew Clarke and otnera in this country. How soon after
the accession of the malady, portions of lung tissue may be detected
in the sputa, is yet a question to which no definite answer can be
given, but at an advanced stage there is often very Uttle difficulty
m finding them. Thus Fig. 3 represents some fragments of fibrous
tissue taken from a small quantity of greenish purulent mucus
brought away with a single effort, but supposed by the patient, who
bad himself been a nurse, to be of some import, judging from his own
sensations when it was expectorated. Patients frequently direct atten-
tion to particular portions of their sputa under a similar impression.
As to the various modes of discovering the presence of lung tissue
in large or small masses of spatnm, some remarks may be made here.
First of all, some difficulty may be experienced in removing
suggestive morsels from the mass, on account of the viscid and ropy
nature of the surrounding mucus, more or less imbued with pus.
For this purpose Mr. Sansom lias invented sharp spoon-blade
forceps, which will be found most effective and useful ; with this
instrument small portions may be easily taken from different parts
of the sputum, and separately examined. By careful compression
the mucus and pus corpuscles, young and old epithelial cells, may
be reduced to a thin film having a homogeneously granular appear-
ance, in the midst of which any lung tissue present may be distin-
guished by its continuity and high refractive power as compared
with that of the ground. The addition of a Utile acetic acid, how-
ever, will, on the principle previously explained, bring it out still
more clearly.
When the quantity of expectoration is large it may not be easy
to make a selection of suitable portions for examination, but by
boiling the whole mass in caustic alkali the ropy plasticity of the
mucus is reduced to a Hmpid fluidity, with the total destruction of
the mucus and pus corpuscles. Any indestructible tissue present,
such as cotton and linen fibre, the elastic tissue of beef or mutton
used as food, or, what concerns us most, the fibrous tissue, &c., of
the patient's lungs, will be deposited at the bottom of the ve^el,
from whence they may be readily removed with a pipette, and placed
under the microscope. Besidi the elastic tissue, which exhibits
some sUgbt change in its appearance by this treatment, we often
find portions of the basement membrane of the air-cells and smaller
bronchi, and even fragments of the bronchial radicles themselves,
with unequivocal though &int!y marked rings, (Fig, 3 a.) By
pouring the sputum thus reduced into tall conical glasses such as
are used for urinary deposits, all the solid matters will quickly settle
at the bottom, so that some Httle discrimination may be required
to distinguish true lung tissue from other subatancea with which it
■fcM!iitHylfcroscirp3i!alJraraia.Oofl.l874. H.LXXMII.
,^v i
WY/e^tU" iUk:
Sputumm PlitKms-
/ ,N,;.
1]ieMi:itlilyMcro3copicaUounial.Oci^l.B74;
Pl.LXXK.
^«
Sputum, m Phthisis.
wyfiiti^c hik..
of the SpUvan in FMhieie.
ia often entangled. Moreover, the sooner the depoBit ia examined
tbe better, for by long standing, eepecially if there has been blood
in the spatum, light cloudy films, which first occupy the upper part
of the fluid, finally gravitate upon the tissue, and obscure it to a
considerable extent when removed with a pipette and placed under
the glass. The remedy for this, however, is shaking and reprecipi-
tation. For the operation here alluded to, a email beaker adapted
to the ring of a retort stand, a glass rod for stirring, a spirit lamp,
a bottle with solution of soda, a tall champagne glass, and a pipette,
are all the apparatoa required.
When the case is complicated with much bronchitis, the first
part of the expectoration with a fit of coaghing usually conaiste of
frothy mucus, after which it gradually becomes more dense and
purulent, and better suited for e^tamination. By receiving the
sputum directly into the beaker at this period, much trouble may
he saved, and there will be lesa chance of contracting impurities
from without.
The more ordinary components of the sputa in phthisis are re-
presented in Fig. 4, and are particularly noticed in the explanation
of the Figures. — Transactions of the St Andrew's Medical
Qraduaies' Association, vol. vi.
EXPLANATION OP PLATES LXXVIIL AND LXXTX ,
Plate LXXVIH.
Fio. 1. — A portion of lung, inflated and dried, io order to sliow the general
nrmngemeiit and compaiatiVB size of tbe nir-oells, as seen with a
half-inch puwer.
„ 2. — A portion of reoent Inng, diveatad of tta epithelium »nd treated with
ttoetio acid, su aa tu Btioir the jellow elastic element and the nuclei
□f tbe white fibrona tiasne more diBtiactl;.
Flats LXXIX.
^, 3, — (ii) Lung tisBiie obtained from the s[)Dtnm of a phthisical patient, b;
boUing in caustic aoda, as dcacrilied in tbe text. At * are one or
two portions of minuta branchial tubes, with the rings faintl; but
unequivocally visible.
(6) Aaotlior Hpeciinea fzoia. the some sputum, with a atrip of btODchial
boBemi^it membrane and. subjactnt elastic tissue.
4. — The more oniiiiEiry nnnjioneJitH of phthisical sputa : —
(a) Bo«iillc<l exudation oeiU, filled with fiitty granules, and occaaianally
speckled with pigmeat.
(6) The liberated contents of <'i)i the globules in some instances running
(c) Mucoa-corpuBoleB.
((() PuB-oorpusolea,
(() Blood-cOTBUsoles.
(f) Epithelial scales.
(g) All the foregoing tnalerialfl, with a basis of ptire gt^ry mucus, ex-
hibitine b striiited appeumnce: and an alteration in the figure of
acme of the ooipusclea bj- pressure and traction, showing the plastio
nature of their onb^nts. The mucus, pus, exudation, and epithelial
cells are but moiliiieatJonB of the same eatntial organism.
y.—Blue a7id Violet Stainings for YegdiiUe Tissues.
By Chbistopher Johnston, M.D., Baltimore, U.S.A.
Without qnestioniag the advantage of viewing vegetable tisBnes,
isolated or in section, in glycerine or water when freshly obtained, I
proceed at once to point out methods by which very usefal and
beautiful tinted objecta of this claas may be prepared and mounted
IB balsam.
As in the Bessemer process, iron must be thoroughly decarbonized
and afterwards regularly doeed with carbon for the making of steel,
so all colour must be destroyed in or mthdrawu irom vegetable
structures before a good staining material can be successfully em-
ployed. Alcohol docolorizea, but its prolonged action crisps the
tender material ; and although the latter might take the dye, it
would not always be possible to display the vegetable web, or, in
many instances, to render it distinctly transparent. But alcohol is
extremely important, indeed, I should rather say indispensable, in
the preparation of the class of objects under consideration. For
whatever may have been the early steps of several processes, alcoholic
saturation must precede balsamic embalming.
With our present intention recent plant structurra may be studied
in two conditions, first, in that requiring the section-cutter, and,
secondly, in their natural form. And this, without taking into
account the ultimate dissection accomplished by the knife, by needles,
by acids, or by alkaUea. As a preliminary to the first it is only
necessary to keep fresh specimens of plants or parts of plants in
strong alcohol, in which, after the lapse of a mouth or two, colour
will oftentimes entirely disappear. Whereupon the desired sections
may be made, tinted if they be sufficiently blanched, and mounted
at once.
For tinting such sections I have used the hiac fluid of Thiersch
as given in Frey, a double strength hlac fluid, a dilution of the
hfematoxylin staining fluid of Dr. J. W. S. Arnold of New ¥ork,
as published in the ' Lens ' of July 1S72, and aqueous solution of
BniEne blue which I obtained ready made and labelled Blue ink of
F. 6. Bower and Co., New York. I much prefer the two latter'
because distinct carmine stainings fatigue the eye when stadied at
night, while the lilac of logwood, but especially the delicate blue
purple of the aniline, are most agreeable and not fatiguing at all.
Arnold's fluid is prepared as follows : — " The ordinary logwood
estract is finely pulverized in a mortar, and abont three times its
bulk of alum (in powder) added ; the two ingredients are well rubbed
np together, and mixed with a small quantity of distilled water.
The complete admixture of the aJum and hsematoxylin is necessary,
and this will require fifteen or twenty minuttss' vigorous, tritnration.
I
Blu6 and Violet SicUnmffBfor Veg^tMe jTinues. 185
More water may now be poured on, Eind the solution, after filtration,
sbonld preeent a clear, somewliat dark violet colour. If a dirty red
be obtained more alom must be incorporated and the mixture again
filtered. After standing several days add 75 per cent, alcohol in
the proportion of two drachma to one ounce of the fluid. Should B
Bcum form on the suifece of the liquid at any lime, a few drops of
alcohol and careful filtering will be all that is required.
Thia fluid colours very rapidly, requiring but a few minutes,
wbereaB, if a slower tinting be desired, the fiuid may be diluted with
a mixture of one part al&^ol and three parts water.*
Aniline blue, of which there are several shades, may be
disaoived in distilled water. A 1 per cent, solution, to which a
small qimntity of alcohol and a trace of oxalic acid have been added,
answers admirably. For convenience I use '■ Bower's Blue Ink,"
slightly acidulate with oxaUc acid. The tint is exactly that of
Eoberfc Dale and Go.'a Soluble Blue, No. 3.
The hfematoxyhn colour will not wash out, but the aniline
bloe will do so unless precaution be taken.
Having prepared suitable sections of parts having been kept in
alcohol, place them in a very weak dilution of Arnold's fluid, and
watching the result, transfer the morsel to dilute alcohol for wash-
ing, and afterwards to strong alcohol in anticipation of mounting.
Or immerse the sections in the aniline fluid for five or ten
minutos, or longer; watch the result; wash in strong alcohol, and
drop them into absolute alcohol.
The logwood stainings may be mounted at pleasure ; but the
aniline dyeings ought to be rendered transparent in oil colours
as soon as possible, and mounted speedily in a moderately thin
solution of old hard balsam. If it be intended to display the
general atmcture let the tint be decided ; but if it be wished to
give prominence to the veaaeb, for instance, a laint blue only
should suggest the other parts.
A weight of a fourth or half-ounce ought to be placed on the
cover for a week.
The treatment of thin leaves, or of fresh green sections, is
entirely different. Colour must first be removed, or else staining
I would be of little service. The bleaching is to be accomplished
through the agency of Labarraque's solution of chlorinated soda, in
which the objects ought to be macerated, and suffered to remain
until perfectly achromatic and transparent. Immediately thereatter
others must be transferred to distilled water for an hour or two,
and then to a 3 per cent, solution of oxalic acid in 50 per cent,
alcohol, wbicb neutralizes the soda and disposes the tissue to accept
the aniline dye.
Solul
I
At the operator's pleasure tho chlorinateil leaves may be soaked
in pure water for au nour, and afterwards in a 3 per cent. ac[ueonfl
solution of alnm, in preparation for tlie logwood staining.
If tlie aniline blue dye be chosen, let tbe acidulate! leaves be
immersed in the blue fluid, and soaked for twenty or thirty
minutes. Upon being withdrawn their colour will be foand to be
■very intense, but washing in 90 per cent, alcohol for half a minnte
will remove superflnous aniline, and a final bath in absolute alcohol
will in a few minutes prepare the object for being soaked in oil
of cloves. With a bent pktinnm spatula the transparent prepara-
tions must be laid upon a shde, receive a liberal quantity of a
solution of old balsam in chloroform poured upon it, and be coTered
with thin glass, on which a small weight ia to be placed.
In the course of a month or two the excess of balsam may be
cleaned off, but the shde should bear a provisional label before the
specimen is mounted.
The hfematoxyhn staining is, perhaps, rather more successful
than the aniline, and its violet tinge is very beautiful indeed. Let the
transparent leaves or sections be transferred from tbe alum solution,
after a short residence, to Arnold's fluid undiluted. At the end of
five minutes remove one olyect and wash it in the alum solution ;
if not decidedly or sufGciently tinted return to the fluid and examine
it again at the end of another five minutes ; and when, finally, the
whole of the object shall have been evenly and distinctly coloured,
it must be dropped into tbe alum solution for a minute or two, and
then into 75 per cent, alcohol, in which tbe former dull red colour
will change to a lovely violet. In many cases the fluid, diluted
with 25 per cent, alcohol, will make a better staining, but, of course,
the object must have a longer espoanre.
For mounting immerse in absolute alcohol, then in oil of cloves,
and finally embalm in the chloriform solution of old Oanada balsam.
If the foregoing directions be strictly followed there will be no
difficulty with the logwood stainings ; but to secure good aniline
preparations all the steps of the process must be done completely
but with all possible dispatch, therein hee a secret of success.
It is, perhaps, somewhat out of place in this paper to speak of
stainings of animal tissues ; bub I beg to say that my resulta have
not, hitherto, been very satisfactory as regards anihne colours;
while, on the contrary, carmine has always succeeded perfectly,
and Arnold's fluid most beautifully, with sections of the nervous
I
^^m St
( 187 )
VI, — A Phj/sicist on Evoluiion ; being a part of PROPEsaoB
TrNDALL's Address to the Britisli Association at Belfast.
Bisnop BnTLER accepted with uowavcring tmst the chronology
of the Old Testament, describing it aa "confirmed hy the natural
and civil history of the world, collected from common historians,
from the state of the earth, and from the late inveutions of arts
and aciencea." These words mark progress ; they mnst seem
somewhat lioary to the Bishop's auccessora of to-day,* It is
hardly necessary to inform yon that since his time the domain of
the naturalist has been immensely estended — the whole science
of geology, with its astoanding revelations regarding the life of
the ancient earth, having been created. The rigidity of old con-
ceptions has been relaxed, the public mind being rendered gradu-
ally tolerant of the idea that not for six thousand, nor for sixty
thousand, nor for six thousand thousand, bat Jor Beonfl embracing
untold millions of years, this earth has been the theatre of Ufe
and death. The riddle of the rocks has been read by the geolo-
gist and palieontologjst, from sub-cambrian depths to the deposits
thickening over the sea-bottoms of to-day. And upon the leaves
of that stone book are, as yon know, stamped the characters,
plainer and sorer than those formed by the int of history, which
carry the mind back into abjsaea of past time, compared with
which the periods which satisfied Bishop Butler cease tfl have a
visual angle. Everybody now knows this ; all men admit it ;
still, when they were first broached, these verities of science found
loud-tongued dennneiators, who proclaimed, not only their baae-
lessness considered scientifically, lint their immorality considered
as questions of ethics and religion : the Book of Genesis had.
stated the question in a different fashion; and science mnst
necessarily go to pieces when it clashed with this authority. And
as the seed of the thistle produces a thistle, and nothing else, so
these objectors scatter their germs abroad, and reprodnce their
kind, ready to play again the part of their intellectual progenitorSj
to show the same virulence, the same ignorance, to achieve for
a time the same success, and finally to siifTer the same inexorable
defeat. Sure the time mnst come at last when human nature in
its entirety, whose legitimate demands it is admitted science alone
cannot satisfy, will &id interpreters and expositors of a different
stamp from those rash and ill-iiiformed persons who have been
hitherto eo ready to hurl themselves against every now scientific
Oaij to aolne ; for thpre are dignittirica who evdn now speak of the irsrlb's
toekj criutt oa to miicli building mnleriitl tireparcJ for man at tbo Creation.
Snrtdj it ie time Uiat Ihis loora langiis^ should cunse.
r
I
188 A Phyaiciii on Evolution.
rerelatioD, lest it Bhoald endanger what they are plea^ to con-
aider theiis.
The lode of discovery once struck, those petrified forms in
which lite was at one time active, increased to multitudeB and
demanded classification. The general tact soon became evident
that none but the simplest forma of Hfe lie lowest down, that aa
we climb higher and higher among the snperimpoaed strata more
perfect forma appear. The change, however, from form to form
was not continuoT^ — but by steps, some email, some great. " A
section," says Mr. Huxley, " a hundred feet thick will exhibit at
different heights a dozen species of ammonite, nono of which
passes beyond its particular zone of hmeatone, or clay, into the
zone below it or mto that above it." In the presence of auch
facte it was not possible to avoid the question. Have these forms,
showing, though in broken stages and with many irregularities,
this unmistakable general advance, been subjected to no continuous
law of growth or variation ? Had our education been purely scien-
tific, or had it been sufficiently detached from influences which, how-
ever ennobling in another domain, have always proved hindrances
and delusions when introduced as &ctot8 into the domain of physics,
the scientific mind never could have swerved from the search for a
law of growth, or allowed itself to accept the anthropomorphism
which regarded each successive stratum aa a kind of mechanic's
bench for the manufacture of the new species out of all relation to
the old.
Biassed, however, by their previous education, the great majority
of naturalists invoked a special creative act to account for the ap-
pearance of each new group of organisms. Doubtless there were
numbers who were cleEir-headed enough to see that this was no
explanation at all, that in point of fact it was an attempt, by the
introduction of a greater difficulty, to account for a less. Bat
having nothing to ofi'er in the way of explanation, they for the
most part held their peace. Still the thoughts of reflecting men
naturally and necessarily simmered round the question. De Maillet,
a contemporary of Newton, has been brought into notice by Prof.
Huxley as one who " had a notion of the modifiability of living
forms." In my frequent conversations with him, the late Sir Ben-
jamin Brodie, a man of highly philosophical mind, often drew my
attention to the fact that, aa early as 1794, CJiarles Darwin s
grandfather was the pioneer of Charles Darwin. In 1801, and in
suhsequent years, the celebrated Lamarck, who produced so pro-
found an impression on the public mind through the vigorous
exposition of his views by the author of ' Vestiges of Creation,'
endeavoured to show the development of species out of changes of
habit and external condition. In 1813, Dr. Wells, the founder of
our present theoiy of dew, read before the Et)yal Society a paper in
I
I
'hymetst a
which, fo oae the words of Mr, Darwin, " he distinctly recognizee
the principle of natural selection ; and this is the £rst recognitioii
that has been indicated." The thoroughness and skill with which
"Wells pursued his work, and the ohviona independence of hia
character, rendered him long ago a favourito with me ; and it gave
me the hvelieat pleasiire to alight upon this additional teBtimony to
lis penetration. Prof. Griat, Mr, Patrick Matthew, Von Buch,
the author of the ' Vestiges,' D'Halloy, and others," hy the enun-
ciation of views more or less clear and correct, showed that the
question had been fermenting long prior to the year 1858, when
Mr. Darwin and Mr. Wallace simultaneously bat independently
placed their closely concurrent views upcm the subject ibefore the
Linnean Society,
These papers were followed in 1859 by the publication of the
first edition of ' The Origin of Species.' AH great things come
slowly to the birth. Copernicus, as I informed yon, pondered his
great work for thirty-three years, Newton for nearly twenty years
kept the idea of Gravitation before his mind ; for twenty years also
he dwelt upon his discovery of Fluxions, and doubtless would Lave
continued to make it the object of bis private thought had he not
found that Leibnitz was upon his track. Darwin for two-and-
twenty years pondered the problom of the origin of species, and
douhtlesB he would have continued to do eo had he not found
"Wallace upon his track.f A concentrated but full and powerful
epitome of his labours was the consequence. The hook was by no
means an easy one ; and probably not one in every score of ttose
who then attacked it had read its pages through, or were competent
to grasp their significance if they had. I do not say this merely
to discredit them ; for there were in those days some really eminent
scientific men, entirely raised above the heat of popular prejudice,
willing to accept any conclusion that scieoce had to offer, provided
it was duly bacKed by &ct and argument, and who entirely mistook
Mr. Darwin's views. In fact the work needed an espoiuidor ; and
it found one in Mr. Huxley. I know nothing more admirable in
the way of smentific exposition than those early articles of hia on the
origin of species. He swept the curve of discussion through the
really significant points of tne subject, enriched his exposition with
profound original remarks and reflections, often su mmin g up in
& single pithy sentence an argument which a less compact mind
■would have spread over pages. But there is one impression made
by the hook itself which no exposition of it, however luminous, can
• In 1853 Mr. Herbert Spencer (Trinciples of POTclioIogy,' 2nd edit, vol. i.,
E. 465) aipreesed " the belief that life under all itn lormB Cba arken by an un-
roken c^vulution, end thronijli the instmnientalitj of wliat are t-nlled luitaral
I
ISO A Ph^aieist on Ewlviioa.
conTey ; and that is the impression of the va^t amount of lahoar,
both of obeervatioa and of thought, implied in its prodnction. Let
us glance at its principles.
It is conceded on all hands that what are called varieties arc
continually produced. The rale ia probably without exception.
No chick and no child ia in all respects and particulars the coun-
terpart of its brother or sister; and in such differences we have
" variety " incipient. No naturalist could tell how far this variation
could be carried ; hut the great mass of them held that never by
any amount of internal or external change, nor hy the mixture of
both, could the offepring of the same progenitor so far deviate from
each other aa to constitute different species. The function of the
experimental philosopher is to combine the conditions of natnre and
to produce her reaulte ; and this was the method of Darwin.* He
made himself acquainted with what could, without aiw matter of
doubt, be done in the way of producing variation. He associated
himself with pigeon-fanciers^xinght, begged, kept, and observed
every breed that be could obtain. Though derived from a common
stock, the diversities of these pigeons were such that " a score of
them might be chosen which, if shown to an ornithologist, and he
were t«ld that they were wild birds, would certainly be ranked by
him aa well-defined species," The simple principle which guides
the pigeon-fancier, aa it doea the cattle-brewer, is the selection of
some variety that strikes his fancy, and the propagation of this
variety by inheritance. With Lis eye stitl ujxin the particntar
appearance which he wishes t« exaggerate, he selects it as it
reappears in successive broods, and thus adds increment to incre-
ment until an astonishing amount of divergence from the parent
type is effected. Man in this case does not produce the elements of
the variation. He simply observes them, and by selection adds
tbem together until the required result has been obtained. "No
man," says Mr. Darwin, '" wonld ever try to make a fantail till he
saw a pigeon with a tail developed in some slight degree in an
unusual manner, or a ponter until he saw a pigeon with a crop of
unusual size." Thus nature gives the hint, man acts upon it, and
by the law of inheritaoee exaggerates the deviation.
Having thus satisfied himself hy indubitable facts that the
organization of an animal or of a plant (for precisely the same
treatment appHes to plants) ia to some extent plastic, he passes
from variation under domestication to variation under nature.
Hitherto we have dealt with the adding together of small- changes
by the conscious selection of man. Can Nature thus select?
Mr. Darwin's answer is, "Aaauredly she can." The number of
• The first step only towards eiperiimsntal dejnonstmtion lina Leen taken.
Elperimonta now begnn might, a coupLe of relilimcB hence, fiimiflli data of incal-
culuble value, whieb ought to be enppljad to the Bcieace of the future.
indet
^^ actin
no do
^^ repos
A Phtjiieid on, Evdtwfion.
living things produced is fiir in excess of the number that can be
supported; hence at some period or other of their hves there
must bo a struggle for existence ; and what is the infallible result ?
If one organism were a perfect copy of the other ia regard to
strength, skill, and agiHty, external conditiona would decide. But
this is not the cose. Here we have the feet of variety offering
itseU to nature, as in the former instance it oS'ered itself to man ;
and those varieties which are least competent to cope with sur-
rounding conditions will infallibly give way to those that are com-
petent. To use a familiar proverb, the weakest comes to the wall.
Bat the triumphant fraction again breeds to over-production, trana-
mitting the qualities which secured its maintenance, bnt transmitting
them in different degrees. The struggle for food again supervenes,
and those to whom the favourable tonality has been tmnsmittfid in
excess will assuredly triumph. It is easy to see that we have here
the addition of increments lavourable to the individual still more
rigorously carried out than in the case of domestication; for not
only are unfavourable spenmens not selected by nature, but they
are destroyed. This is what Mr. Darwin calls " natural selection,"
which " acta by the preservation and accumulation of small inherited
modifications, each profitable to the preserved being." With this
idea he interpenetrates and leavens the vast store of tacts that he
and others have collected. We cannot, without shutting our eyes
through fear or prejudice, fail to see that Darwin is here dealing,
not with imaginary, hut with trae causes; nor can we fail to
discern what vast modifications may be produced by natural selec-
tion in periods sufficiently long. Each individual increment may
resemble what mathematicians call a "differential" (a quantity
indefinitely small) ; but definite and great changes may obviously be
|ffoduced by the integration of these infinitesimal quantities through
'"" jtically infinite time.
If Darwin, Uke Bruno, rejects the notion of creative power
actmg after hnman feshion, it certainly is not because he is un-
acquainted with the numberless exq^uisit^ adaptations on which this
notion of a supernatnral artificer was founded. His book is a
repository of the most startling tacts of this description. Take the
arvellons observation which he cites from Dr. Criiger, where
bucket with an aperture, serving as a spout, is formed in an
chid. Beea visit tne flower : in e^er search of material for their
combs they push each other into the backet, the drenched ones
escaping from their involuntary bath by the spout. Hero they rub
their backs against the viscid stigma of the flower and obtain glue ;
then agtunst the pollen-masses, which are thus stnck to the back of the
bee and carried away. " When the bee, thus provided, flies to another
flower, or to the same flower a second time, and ia pushed by its
comrades into the bucket, and then crawls out by the passage, the
192 A PhysiGist on Evolution,
poUen-mass upon its back necessarily ocmea first into contact with
the yisdd stigma," which takes np the pollen ; and this is how that
orchid is fertilized. Or take this other case of the Gatasetum, '^ Bees
visit these flowers in order to gnaw the labellum ; on doing this they
inevitably touch a long, tapering, sensitive projection. This, when
touched, transmits a sensation or vibration to a certain membrane,
which is instantly ruptured, setting free a spring by which the
poUen-mass is shot forth like an arrow in the right direction, and
adheres by its viscid extremity to the back of the bee." In this
way the fertilizing pollen is spread abroad.
It is the mind thus stored with the choicest materials of the
teleologist that rqects teleology, seeking to refer these wonders to
natural causes. They illustrate, according to him, the method dT
nature, not the ** technic " of a man-like artificer. The beauty of
flowers is due to natural selection. Those that distinguish them*
selves by vividly contrasting colours from the surrounding green
leaves are most readily seen, most frequently visited by insects,
most often fertilized, and hen^ most &voured by natural selection!
Coloured berries also readily attract the attention of birds and
beasts, which feed upon them, spread their manured seeds abroad,
thus giving trees and shrubs possessing such berries a greater
chance in the struggle for existence.
With profound analytic and synthetic skill, Mr. Darwin invefr-
tigates the cell-making instinct of the hive-bee. His method of
deaUng with it is representative. He falls back from the more
perfectly to the less perfectly developed instinct — from the hive-bee
to the humble-bee, which uses its own cocoon as a comb, and to
classes of bees of intermediate skill, endeavouring to show how the
passage might be gradually made from the lowest to the highest.
The saving of wax is the most important point in the economy of
bees. Twelve to fifteen pounds of dry sugar are said to be needed
for the secretion of a single pound of wax. The quantities of nectar
necessary for the wax must therefore be vast ; and every improve-
ment of constructive instinct which results in the saving of wax is
a direct profit to the insect's life. The time that would otherwise
be devoted to the making of wax is now devoted to the gathering
and storing of honey for winter food. He passes from the humble-
bee with its rude cells, through the Melipona with its more artistic
cells, to the hive-bee with its astonishing architecture. The bees
place themselves at equal distances apart upon the wax, sweep and
excavate equal spheres round the selected points. The spheres
intersect, and the planes of intersection are built up with thin
laminae. Hexagonal cells are thus formed. This mode of treating
such questions is, as I have said, representative. He habitually
retires from the more perfect and complex, to the less perfect and
simplei and carries you with him through stages of perfectinff, adds
A Phydeisi on Evolution.
193
P increment to increment of infinitcaimal change, and in this way
gradually breaks down your reluctance to admit that the exquisite
climax of the whole could be a result of natural selection.
Mr. Darwin shirks no difficulty ; and, saturated as the subject
was with his own thought, he mast have known, better than hia
critics, the weakness aa well as the strength of his theory. This
of course would be of little avail were hia object a temporary
dialectic victory instead of the establishment of a tnith which he
means to be everlasting. But he takes no pains to disguise the
weakness he baa discerned ; nay, he takes every pains to bring it
into the strongest hght. His vast resonrcea enable him to cope
with objections started by himself and others, so as to leave the
final impression npon the reader's mind that if they be not com-
pletely answered they certainly are not fataL Their negative force
being thus destroyed, you are free to be influenced by the vast
positiye mass of evidence he is able to bring before you. This
largeness of knowledge and readiness of resource render Mr.
Darwin the most terrible of antagonists. Accomplished naturaJista
have levelled heavy and sustained criticisms againat him — not
always with the view of fairly weighing his theory, hnt with the
express intention of exposing its weak points only. This does not
irritate him. He treats every objection with a soberness and
thoroughness which even Bishop Butler might be proud to imitate,
surrounding each fact with its appropriate detail, placing it in its
proper relations, and usually giving it a significance which, as long
as it was kept isobled, tailed to appear. This is done without a
trace of ill-temper. He moves over tJie subject with the passionless
strength of a glacier ; and the grinding of the rocks is not always
witliout a counterpart in the logical polverizatiou of the objector.
But though in handling this mighty theme alt passion has been
stilled, there is an emotion of the intellect incident to the discern-
ment of new truth which often coloars and warms the pages of
Mr, Darwin. His success has been great ; and this imphes not
only the solidity of his work, but the preparedness of the public
mind for such a revelation. On this head a remark of Agassiz
impressed me more than anything else. Sprung from a race of
theologians, this celebrated man combated to the last the theory
of natural selection. One of the many times I had the pleasure of
meeting him in the Unif«d States was at Mr. Winthrop'a beautiful
I residence at Broofcline, near Boston. Rising from luncheon, we all
I halted as if by a common impulse in front of a window, and con-
|tinued there a discussion wmch Lad been started at table. The
laple was in its autumn glory ; and the exquisite beanty of the
I'IKene outside seemed, in my case, to. igtwMHB Ijate without dis-
irbance the inteilectnal action. £iKHHIIHHj|l9(|dlyi Agassiz
ned and eaid to the gcutltBHiB^^dH^^^I^BMA^ ^-^
194
A P^/sieist on 1
<Mmm.
it has been by
greater than I could
1 waa not prepared to see this theory r
the best intellects of our time. Ita suce
have thought possible."
In our day great generalizations have been reached. The theory
of the origin of species is but one of them. Another, of etill wider
grasp and more radical significance, is the doctrine of the Oonserva-
tion of Energy, the ultimate philoeophieal issues of which are as
yet but dimly seen — that doctrine which "hinds nature fiist in
fate " to an extent not hitherto recognized, exacting from every
antecedent its equivalent consequent, from every consequent ita
equivalent antecedent, and bringing vital as well as physical pheno-
mena under the dominion of that law of causal connection which, as
iar as the human understanding has jet pierced, asserts itself
everywhere in nature. Long in advance of all definite experiment
npon the subject, the constancy and indestroctibility of mattar had
been affirmed ; and all Bubaequent experience justified the affirma-
tion. Later researches extended the attribute of indestructibility to
force. This idea, applied in the first instance to inorganic, rapidly
embraced organic nature. The vegetable world, though drawing
almost all its nutriment from invisible sources, was proved incom-
petent to generate auew either matter or force. Its matter is for
the mast part transmuted air; its force transformed solar force.
The animal world was proved to be equally unercative, all its
motive energies being referred to the combustion of its food. The
activity of each animal as a whole was proved to be the transferred
activities of its molecules. The muscles were shown to be stores of
mechanical force, potential until imlocked by the nerves, and then
resulting in muscular contractions. The speed at which messages
fly to and Iro along the nerves wna determined, and found to be,
not as had been previously supposed, equal to that of light or -
electricity, but less than the speed of a flying eagle.
This was the work of the physicist : then came the conquests
of the comparative anatomist and physiologist, revealing the
structure of every animal, and the fuuction of every organ in the
whole biological series, from the lowest zoophyte up to man. The
nervous system had been made the object of profound and continued
study, the wonderful and, at bottom, entirely mysterious controlling
power which it exercises over the whole organism, physical and
mental, being recognized more and more. Thought could not be
kept back from a subject so profoundly suggestive. Besides the
physical life dealt with by Mr. Darwin, there is a psychical life
presenting similar gradations, and asking equally for a solution.
How are the different grades and orders of mind to be accounted
for ? What is the principle of growth of that mysterious power
which on our planet culrainatea in Reason ? These are questions
which, though not thrusting themselves so forcibly npon the atten-
A Physidei on EvotmonT
195
I
tion of the general public, bad aot only occnpied many reflecting
minds, but had been formally broached by one of them before the
• Origm of Species ' appeared.
The origination of life is a point lightly touelied upon, if at
all, by Mr. Darwin and Mr, Hpencer. Diminishing gradually the
number of jirogenitors, Mr. Darwin eomea at length to one " pri-
mordial form " ; but he does not aay, as far as I remember, hoW be
supposes this form to have been introduced. He quotes with aatiefac-
tion the words of a celebrated aatbor and divine who had " gradually
learnt to see that it is juat as nuble a conception of the Deity to
beheve Ho created a few original forms, capable of self-development
into other and needful forma, as to believe that He required a fresh
act of creation to supply the voids caused by the action of Hia laws."
"What Mr. Darwin tmnka of this view of the introduction of life I
do not know. Whether he does or does not introduce his " primor-
dial form " by a creative act, I do not know. But the question
will inevitably be asked, " How came tho form there ? " With
regard to the diminution of the number of created forms, one does
not see that much advantage ia gained by it. The anthropo-
morphism, which it seemed the object of Mr. Darwin to eet aside,
is as firmly associated with the creation of a few forms as with
the creation of a multitude. We need clearness and thoroughness
here. Two courses, and two only, are possible. Either let us
open our doors freely to the conception of creative acts, or abandon-
ing them, let us radically change our notions of matter. If we
look at matter as pictured by Democritus, and as defined for gene-
rations in our scientific text-books, the absolute iinpossibiUty of any
form of life coming out of it would be Bufflcient to render any other
hypothesis preferable ; but the definitions uf matter given in oar
text-books were intended to cover its purely physical and mechanical
properties. And taught as we have been to regard these definitions
aa complete, we naturally and rightly reject the nionstrons notion
that out of such matter any form of life could possibly arise. But
are the defin'tions complete? Everything depends on the answer
to be given to thia (juestion. Trace the line of life backwards, and
see it approaching more and more to what we call the purely phy-
sical condition. We reach at length those organisms wnieh I have
compared to drops of oil suspended in a mixture of alcohol and
water. We reach the proiogeaes of Haeckel, in which we have " a
type distinguishable from a fragment of albumen only by ite finely
granular character." Can we pause here? We break a magnet
and find two poles in each of its fragments. We continue the pro-
cess of breaking, bnt however small the parts, each carries with it,
though enfeebled, the polarity of the whole. And when we can
break no longer, we prolong the intellectual vision to the polar
molecules. Are we not urged to do something similar in the coae
VOL. sn. E
I
A Physicist on Evolution.
of life ? Is tlicre not a temptation to close to some oxteut nith
Lueretitia, when ho affirms that " Nature is seen to do all things
spontaneoualy of herself without the meddling of the gods"? or
with Bruno, when he declares that matter is not " that mere emptjr
capacity which philosophers have pictured her to be, hut the uni-
versal mother who hringa tbrth all things as the fruit of her own
womb " ? The questiona here raised are inevitable. They are
approaching Tie with accelerated speed, and it is not a matter of
indifference whether they are introduced with reverence or irreve-
rence. Abandoning all disguise, the confession that I feel bound
to make before you is that I prolong the vision backward acroFB
the boundary of the experimental evidence, and discern in that
matter, which we in our ignorance, and notwithstanding our
professed reverence for ite Creator, Lave hitherto covered with
opprobrium, the promise and potency of every form and quality
of life.
Tho " materialism " here enunciated may he different from what
you suppose, and I therefore crave your gracious patience to tho
end. "The question of an external world," says Mr, J. 8. Mill,
"is the great hattla-giound of metaphysics,'" Mr. Jrill himself
reduces external phenomena to " possibihties of sensation." Xant,
as we have seen, made time and space "forms" of our own in-
tuitions. Fichte, hftTing first by the inexorable logic of his nuder-
standing proved himself to be a mere link in that chain of eternal
causation which holds so rigidly in nature, violently broke the chain
by making nature, and all that it inherits, an apparition of his own
mind.t And it is by no means easy to combat such notions. For
when I say I aoe you, and that I have not the least doubt about it,
the reply is, that what I am really conscious of is an affection of my
own retina. And if I urge that I can check my sight of you by
touching you, the retort would be that I am equally transgressing
the limits of feet ; for what 1 am really conscious of is, not that yon
are there, but that the nerves of my l^nd have undergone a change.
All we hear, and see, and touch, and taste, and smell, are, it would
be urged, mere variations of our own condition, beyond which, even
to the extent of a hair's breadth, we cannot go. That anything
answering to our impressions exists outside of ourselves is not a
fact, but an inference, to which all vahdity would be denied by an
idealist like Berkeley, or by a sceptic like Hume. Mr. Spencer
takes another line. With him, as with the uneducated man, there
is no doubt or question as to the existence of an external world.
But he differs from the uneducated, who think that the world really
IS what consciousnesa represents it to be. Our states of conscions-
ness are mere symbols of an outside entity which produces them
and determines the order of their succession, hut the real nature of
' ' EmmiofltioD of Hamiltoii,' p, 154. f ' Be«timinut]g den Menaehen,'
A PhfsiMsl on Svolviim. 197
I which we can never know* In fact the whole prowae of evolution
1 fe the manifestition of a Power absolutely inBcrutable to the iiitellsct
I of man. As httle in onr day aa in the daya of Job can man by
I flearching find this Power ont. Considered fundamentally, it ie by
f the operation of an insoluble mystery that life is evolved, species
, difierentiated, and mind unfolded from their prepotent elements in
it. There is, you will observe, no very rank
I
The strength of tho doctrine of evolution consists, not in an
experimental demonstration (for the subject is hardly accessible to
this mode of proof), but in its general hMTnony with the method of
nature as hitherto known. From contrast, moreover, it derives
enormous relative strength. On the one side we have a theory (if
it could with any propriety he so called) derived, as were the
theories referred to at the beginning of this address, not from tho
Btady of nature, but from the observation of men — a theory which
converts the Power whose garment is seen in the visible universe
info aa Artificer, fashioned after the human model, and acting by
broken . efforts as man is seen to act. On the other side we have
the conception that all we see around us, and all we feel within us
the phenomena of physical nature as well as those of the human
mind — have their unsearchable roots in a cosmiciil hfe, if I dare
ftpply the term, an infinitesimal span of which only is offered to
me investigation of man. And even this span is only knowable in
part. We can trace the development of a nervous system, and
'eorrelate with it the parallel phenomena of sensation and thought.
"We see with undoubting certainty that they go hand in hand. But
we try to soar in a vacunm the moment we seek to comprehend the
connection between them. An Archimedean fulcrnm is here reqnired
which the human mind cannot command; and the effort to solve
the problem, to borrow an illustration from an illustrious friend of
mine, is like the effort of a man trying to lift himself by his own
waistband. All that has been here said is to be taken in connection
with this fandamental truth. When " nascent senses " are spoken
rf, when " the differentiation of a tissue at first vaguely sensitive all
' In B paper, at oni'^ popult
Hieory of VieioD," contained in
[lOngmans, thia ByniboliBm ot o
■IbiLpreaBionB of enoite ore Uie mt
rkofta contends Btrongl; against
r t!ad he evidently doabtB the
J and profuund, entitled " Recent Progrcas in the
tlie Tolame of letters by HclniholtE, published by
HI Bt&tea of coiiBcioaaness is also dwtlt npon. The
re signs of oxternal thiagj. In thia paper Hetm-
tlie view that the cunacionsiieaa of apiico is inborn ;
of the ebick lo pick up graioa of corn withoat
niciary lessons. On this point, be says, further eipeiii
3zperiiuenU have been since iiiaile by Mr. SpaldiDg. aided, I believe, in some
is observations by tho aceomplishud Rtiil deeply-lamented Lady Auibertey : and
they ateia to prove ooncliunvely tlmt the chiok docs not need a aingk' mo:nent'B
tuition ta teudi it to stand, run, gDVcm the musclea of il£ eyes, and perJr. Helm-
lioltB, iiowevor, is contending against tiio uotiou of pro-oatabliahcd ha/mony;
1 I a
or breed.
u tho organizatio
of experiences of race
r a
1S8
A PhynetstonEvolution.
■
■
I
over " ifl spoken oi^ and when these processeB are aeaociated with
" the modification of an organism by ita environment," the same
TOrallelism, without contact, or eveu approach to contact, is implied.
There is no fusion possible between Ine two classes of facta — no
motor energy in the intellect of man to carry it without logical
rupture from the one to the other.
Further, the doctrine of evolution derives man, in hia totality,
from the interaction of organiutii and environment through oonnt-
less ages past. The human nnderstanding, for example— the faculty
which Mr. Spencer has turned so skilfully round upon its own
antecedents— is itself a result of the play between organism and
environment through cosmic /anges of tim& Never surely did pre-
scription plead so irresistible a claim. But then it comes to pass
that, over and above his miderstanding, there are many other things
appertaining to man whose prescriptive rights are quite as strong
03 that of l^e underatandiug itself. It is a resalt, for example, of
the play of organism and environment that sugar is sweet and that
aloes are bitter, that the smell of henbane differs from the per-
fume of a rosa Such focta of consciousness (for which, by the way,
no adequate reason has ever yet been rendered) are quite as old as
the understanding itseh'; and many other things can boast an
equally ancifnt origin, Mr. Spencer at one place refers to that
most powerful of paasions — the amatory passion — as one which,
when it first occm's, is antecedent to all relative experience what-
ever; and we may pass its claim as being at least as ancient and as
valid as that of the understanding itself. Ihen there are Buch
things woven into the texture of man as the feeling of awe,
reverence, wonderland not alone the sexual love juat referred to,
but the love of the beautiful, physical, and moral, in nature, poetry,
and art. There is also that deep-set feeling which, since the earhest
dawn of history, and probably for ages prior to all history, incor-
Ijorated itself in the religions of the world. You who have escaped
from these religions in the high-and-dry light of the understanding
may deride them ; but in so doing yon deride accidents of form
merely, and tail to touch the immovable basis of the religions senti-
ment in the emotional nature of man. To yield this sentiment
reasonable satisfaction is the problem of problems at the present
hour. And grotesque in relation to scientific culture as many of
the religions of the world have been and are— dangerous, nay, de-
structive, to the dearest privileges of freemen as some of them nn-
donbtedly have been, ancf would, if they could, be again — it will be
wise to recognize them aa the forms of force, mischievous, if per-
mitted to intrude on the region of knowledge, over which it holds
no command, but capable of being gnided by liberal thought to
noble issues in the region of emotion, which is its proper sphere.
It is vain to oppose this force with a view to its extirpation. What
A Physicist on Evolution, 199
we should oppose, to the death if necessary, is every attempt to
found upon this elemental bias of man's natare a system which
should exercise despotic sway over his intellect. I do not fear any
such consummation. Science has already to some extent leavened
the world, and it will leaven it more and more. I should look
upon the mild hght of science breaking in upon the minds of the
youth of Ireland, and strengthening gradually to the perfect day,
as a surer check to any intellectual or spiritual tyranny which might
threaten this island, than the laws of princes or the swords of
emperors. Where is the cause of fear ? We fought and won our
battle even in the Middle Ages : why should we doubt the issue of
a conflict now ?
( 200 )
PBOQBEBS OF MIOBOSOOPICAL SCIENCE.
I
The HittiHoijy of Leacorylha^nia, — Id VircIiow'B 'AroMv'*
occurs on ndiuirable paper by Professor Ballingcr, of Zurich, whlak
lifts beeii fully trauslated by the ' Medical Becord ' (June 3rd}, and
wHcli wo give hero in part. Ho says that in the spleens of dogs
there occur with anusual frequency — according to lus olBervations,
juado alike on healthy and on disoosed animals, in at least 10 per
cent, of all dogs — true lymphonuita. It is extremely probable that
these form the starting point of leucocytlifemia : in the case already
related the splenic nodules were uertainly present at tho beginning of
the disease. In confirmation of this assiunption, he can bring forward
a caae observed in a dog, affording an instance of loucocythfemia in
the incipient stage, which rarely comes under observation.
A Tery large old male dog was brought to the veterinary school in
this place to be killed- It did not show any special signs of disease,
and shortly before death ate abnudautly with good appetito. The
body was examined on May C, 1871.
There were splenic lencocythiemia, and a large lymphoma of the
spleen. The relation of the white to the red blood-corpuscles in tho
general circulation was 1 to 30 or iO ; in the blood of the splenic
vein, 1 to 10 or 15.
The animal waa rather thin. Tho lungs were of normal extent,
rather emphysematous, and strongly pigmented. On the left aide
were some suhpleural hard bodies as large as pins' heads, which ou
microscopic osamination were found to be bony dejiosits. The air-
passages wei'e normal. There was no remarkable change in the heart.
Above the aortic valves, near the mouth of tho coronary arteries,
there waa a prominence of the size of a lentil, with a rongh stirfaoe,
and mostly calcified : around it was distinct atheromatous thickening
of the inner coat. On opening tho abdominal cavity, a tumour nearly
as largo as a child's haoA was observed ; it waa covered by tho great
omentum, lay iu front of the left kidney, and proceeded from the
posterior surface of tho upper part of the spleen. While the spleen
itself was in other parts normal, containing little blood, of a pale
flosh-red colour, and moderntely firm, the. tumour was of soft elastic
consistence, of a shining dark-violot aspect, with the poritoneal invest-
ment much distended and at scvoral points closely adherent to the
omentum. On section, tho tiunour was found to consist of a sploni-
form dark brown-red tissue of alight consistence, having imbedded in
it numerous deposits, mostly miliary, partly whitish, partly grey and
diaphanous ; they differed in no rospeot from the normal M^pighian
bodies. In some parta towards the interior, these greyish-white de-
posits predominated so much over the remaining tissue as to become
confluent. On microscopic examination, the whole tumour showed all
the elements of the normal spleen ; but in place of tho fine Malpighian
* Baud lix., Ucl'le 3 and i.
F&OQBB^ OF mOBOSCOFICAL SCHIKOE.
f bodioa, thcra were largo maseea of lymfiLoid siibtitttuce of similai'
I Btructare. The eplocn itself was remarkable for its great riuhness in
' gntmilar blood-coloiiring matter and cells coutaining bloud-uarpiiaclos,
I as well as for a great amount of small and large fat^drops. The bloml
r of the splenic vein was fluid,- and of a clear red colour, and contained
I about one white corposcle to ten or fifteen rod ones. There was a
slighter increase of the white corpuscles in the blood of tho coronary
I veins of the heart, where the proportion was about 1 to 30 or 40,
The liver was of a pale coffee colour, of normal size, and rathor
' aatemic. The kidneys wore of uectil size ; the capsule was oaeily
removed, and oa tho surface beneath it wore some eieatricial contrac-
tions. The substance of tho kidneys was of a dear brown colour,
and fragile. On mieroscopio esamination, there was found to be
t marked fatty degeneration of the opithelinm of the ui'inary tubules.
C The bladder was full of clear yellow urine, having a neutral reaction,
I and throwing down a flooculent deposit of albumen on being heated.
I On microscopic examination, instead of tho cylinders that wei^o ex-
I pected, there were found nnmerous round nucleated cells, having tho
I appearance of colourless blood-eot-pusclee, and a few spermatozoa.
The mucous membrane of the bladder and urethra was normal. The
1 stomach and intestine did not present any remarkable change. There
9S no onlArgemeut of the lymphatic glauds anywhere.
This case of simple splenic leucocythiemia, in which, besides the
I large lymphadcnoma of tho spleen, there was only a moderate iucroase
I of tho colourless blood-corpuscles, can, without doubt, bo applied in
I the direction indicated above. The disease was seized in its early
[ stage, before it had gone on to metastasis, and to leucxwy thymic
[ disease of other organs. The remarkable amount of colourless hlood-
r corpuscles in the urine, while the urinary passages were in a normal
I state, may perhaps bo attributed to escape of the too abundantly
r formed cells into the diseased renal tissue ; yet tho simultaneous
I occurrence of spermatozoida in the urine indicates that there might
I possibly hare been another source for those cells..
y A further case of lieno-lymphatie leucocythiemia in the dog has
I been observetl by SiodamgrotKky, of Dresden;* so that, in all, three
I cases of lenoocythfemia in the dog have been fully described. Tho
\ eseenttal features of the cose referred to were the following : —
A fonr-year old spaniel, which had suffered for seme time from
' loea of appetite and from diarrhosa, died four days after admission
into the veterinary hospital, A largo firm tnraonr had been detected
m the abdomen by palpation. At tlie necropsy, the spleen was found
to weigh about 2^ lbs. ; it was much enlarged, and was covered with
flat projections on the surface. AH the lymphatic glands, especially
I tho mesenterio, were remarkably enlarged; as were also the tonsils.
Tlie proportion of white to red corpuscles in the blood was 1 to 16.
There were sanguineous cfbsions in tlie spleen, on tho pericardium,
in the mucous membrane of the tonsils, mid on the gums.
Siedamgrotzky also describes a slight degree of lieao4ymphatio
leucooy thocmia as having been found in a cat which had died of internal
* Ucriclit liber daa VotoritulTwuacn in ELiinigniich SachHon fUi daa Jahr ItlTl.
Lromorrhftge. Tlioro wtia reinarkflble hyperplas
glande, and tbo splran was douUod is bIzo.
With regard to other ftnimalB, there are obMrvationa oe the occur-
renoe of leuoocythiemia in pigs and horsew, to which he briefly refers.
In the pig, the following three oasos'have been described.
LeiBeriiig* relates a, case of loncocythajniia in a pig, whose spleen,
liver, mesonterio glands and blood, showed corresponding changes.
Further details are wanting respecting this case, which was the first
observed, and was cvideutljr one of lieno-lymphatic leDcocythteiaift.
E^stonbergt describes a case of lenco^ty thromia in a pig, with enlarge-
ment of all the lymphRtic glands, the s])leen, and the liver. The
spleen was more than 2 lbs. in weight ; the liver, which was studded
with lencocythiemic doposits, weighed more than 8 lbs. There w«»
deposition of white corpuscles iii the marrow of the bones. The
blood was of a clear chocolate colour ; the white oori)uscleB wfflw
enormously increased, their proportion to tho red being 2 to 1.
In the case of splenic leucocythremia in the pig to which he referred
at the beginning of this article, the spleen was much enlarged, weigh-
ing 3^ lbs. There was remarkable enlai'gement of tho kidneys,
with leacocythicinic infiltration and extensive htemon-hagcB- Leuco-
ojithranie deposits were found in tho liver and lungs. There was
increase of the white blood -corpuscles, their proportion to the red
being 1 to 5. The blood was of a clear red colour and watery.
"Whether tho lymphatic glands were affected could not be ascertained.
Microscopic eiamination of the hardoned organs ^ve the following
result. The spleen was in a state of hyperplasia, and its tisBue
presented exactly tho some characters as in splenic leuencythnmia in
man. Desides the abundant deposit of lymph-cells, there were great
increase and thickening of the normal elements of the spleen. In the
lungs, the chief seat of the leucocytbeemia proliferations was the con-
nective-tissue sheaths of the arteries and bronchial tubes. The liver
not only showed a remarkable lymphoid deposit in the connective
tissue between the amni, but also in die acini themselves there was bo
^«at a deposit of lymphoid colls, that their number exceeded that of
the liver-cells. Finally, the kidneys were enlarged to more than
double the nomial size, and wore studded with htomorrhages ; they
contained eo many lymph-cells that, nnder the microscope, the organ
presented the appearance of a lymphatic gland, the remains of the
normal kidney being disooverahle at points only in the form of
tirinary tubules and Malpighian bodies.
A number of cases of leucocythannia in the horse are recorded in
literature ; but I pass them over, as I have not been able to convince
myself that they were cases of idiopathic lencocythremia. In the
meantime, they all might, with greater justice, be classed among those
ff^ptomatic and transient forms of leucocythtBmia which, following
Tirdow, we designate loncooytosis. Considering the known irri-
tability of the lymphatic system in the horse, and the corresponding
liability in this animal to inflammatory affections of the lymphatic
• Betiflit iibcr iLia Vetei-inar»eseii iin Kouigrdi'h SachaOQ, 18(35.
t Berliner KlbiochQ WockcnBcrift, ISTO.
PBOOBHBS OF 15^
veBsole and glaoda, it may bo sapposcd that eucli lenoocytoses, which
ooneiRt in a temporary incroaee of the colnarlcGS blood-ccirpuBcles, are
of frequent occTurence ; aud this is indeed observed in a host of
iii£itmiiiatory and other diBeases afiiactiug the horse, snch as glanders,
fiircy, &c. After largo blood-Iettiags, the iucroase of white blood-
corpnficloB in the horse may go ao far, that the coloured and colourleaa
corpoBclea appear nearly equal in number.
Counting Ihe Blood - eorpagdes in cases of Trans/usio:i. —
M. Brouardel givea, according to the ' Medical Record,' an interesting
report on a case of transfusion of blood in an individual dying of
prostration from incoorcible vonuting after swallowing sulphuric
acid. 150 grammes of blood not deiibrinizcd, taken irum his honse-
Burgeon, M. Landunzy, were injected into the vein of the arm. The
immediate consequences were fe,vonrflble, but in twonty-eis hours a
relapse occurred, and the patient died with hepatization of the lower
lobes of the lung. The necropsy showed ulceration of the pylorus.
This obserTation. showed this impoxtant point, that the application of
M. Malasaez's new method of numeration of the blood-corpuscles •
has allowed it to be ascertained that a rapid destruction of the
elomenta of the blood occurs when the individual cannot repair the
incessant losses of the economy ; while, in an individual in good
I health, repair is rapidly effected. Thus the patient had 3,200,000 red
I corpuscles in the cubic millimetre of blood ; after the injection of
1 150 grammes of blood the figure was raised ; but thirty hours
afterwards it was again ftt the previous figure of 3,200,000 ; while in
I M. Landunzy, who bad lost 300 grammes of blood, the number of
[ blood-corpuscles before tlie bleeding was 4,300,000, immediately after
I it 4,000,000, and twelve houTB afterwards 4,100,000. M. Dujardia-
T Boaumetz related a cobo of obstinate auBemia, in which transfusion
r produced a temporary benefit, as in the above case, and was twice
I xepeatod when tliat ofibct had posscdoff; the amelioration after the
I third transfusion was, however, of very brief duration, and the patient
[ flied on the following day. The results of the ennraeration of the
I' oorpusclea mentioned above, give & key to the transitory effects of
' transfuBion in these cases.
The Deeelopmenl of the Lobster. — A very good paper, which
originally appeared in the Transactions of the Connecticut Academy
(vol. vii.), is abstracted in the 'American Naturalist' for July,
1874. It is by Mr. S. I. Smith, Assistant in the Sheffield School, New
^ Haven, U.S.A. It seems that the season at which the female lobsters
Fssrry eggs varies much on differeut parts of the coast. Mr, Smith
CWates that lobsters from New Lomlan and Stonington, Conn., are with
' 1 April and May, while at Halifax he found them with eggs, in
F'irhich the embryos were just beginning to develop, early in September.
• The writer says that he has seen them in Salem with the embryos
I <ieady to hatch in the middle of May, and has been told by Mr. J. H.
r Emerton that they also brood here in November. It is not impossible
I that they breed at intervals throughout the year. This Is on impor~
• "Lonilon MedicaJ Bucurd,' January 8, 1873.
204
PBOOBESS OF UICnoaOOFIflAL 80ISNOK.
tant point. At any rate there elioiild Iju n clone time on the ooaet of
New England, iluriug April dual May, aud October nnd Novembor.
Persons should also be fined heavily for Belling lobsters witli ogge
attached.
Ho divides the larval condition of the lubeter into tliree stages.
The first is a little under a third of an inch long, and was found earl;
in July at Wood's Holo, Mass. In the second stage, the animal has
increased in size, and rndiuicntnry appeudagcs have appeared npou
the second to the fifth segmoats of the abdomen. In the third stage
the animal is abomt half an inch Jong, and has begun to lose its Uysia-
Uke (Schizopodalj appeai-onco, and to assimie somo of tho features of
the ftdult.
There are probably two succeeding stages before tho adult form is
attained ; one is described by «nr author, whilo the first of tho two he
supposes to have existed, bat Las not yet discovered. After this the
animal ceases to swim on tho sarfaco, and late in sommer seeks the
bottom. They feed on the young of various animals, the larvte of
their Crustacea, and when muoh crowded in captivity, on one another,
tho stronger devouring the wonier. In the firKt stage of the adult
form, when the auiiuol is about three-fifths of au inch long, it still
difici'B from the adult so much that it would ho regarded as a distinct
genus. " III this stage, the young lobsters swim veiy rapidly by
means uf the abdominal legs, and dart backwards, when disturbed, wiu
tho caudal appendages, frequently jnmping ont of tho water in this
way like Bhrimp, which their mOTements in the water much resQmbLe.
Thoy appear to live a large part of the time at the surface, as in the
earlier stages, and were often seen swimming about among other
surface animals. They were frequently taken from tho Sth to the
2Sth of July, and very likely occur much later." Mr. Smith thinks
the young pass tlirough all the stages he describes in tho course of a
single season. Those in the last stage mentioned be believes hod not
beon hatched firom tho eggs more than six weeks, and very likely a
shorter time. How long the young retain their free swimming hahit
after arriving at the lobstoi'-like form, was not ascertained.
Specimens three inches in length have acquii-ed nearly all the
characters of the adult. The doscriptions of the different stages are
very detailed, and accompanied by ndmii'able figures.
" Of all tho larval stages of other genera of Crustacea of which
I have seen figures or descriptions, there are none which are closely
allied to the early stages of the lobster. Astacus, according to Bathke,
leaves the egg in a form closely resembling the adult, the cephalo-
thorocic legR having no osopodal branches, and the abdominal Icga
being already developed. Of the early stages of the numerous other
genera of Astacidea and Thalassinidoa scoi'cely anything is known,
but as far as is known, none of them appear to approach the larvte of
the lobster. Most of the species of Crangonidie and Palffimonidsa
(among tho most typical of Macrourans), of which the development is
known, are hatched from the egg iii tho zera stage, in which the five
posterior pairs of cophalothoiacic appoiidngus, or deeapodal legs, are
whoUy wanting, as are also tho abdominal legs, while the two imtorior
PBOOBE98 OP BnOBOBOOPICAL SCIEKCE. 205
pftirs of BuudUipeds, or all of tkom, ore developed into locomotiTe
organB. In bo period of their development do they have &U the
decapodal legs furaiahed with natatory oiopodal branclies. Tlioro are
imdoTibtedly larval forms closely allied to those of Homonis in some of
the groups of MaeronraQB, although Ihey appear to be as yet unknown.
" Notwithstanding these larval forme of the lobster seem to have
no close afOnities with the known larvffi of other genera of Macrourans,
they do ehow in many charaoters a very remarkable and iatercsting
approach to the adult Schizopoda, particularly to the Mysidra, This
api)earB to me to furnish additional evidence that the SiThizopods are
only degraded Macrourana much mcire closely allied tu tliu Sorgestidce
than to the Sijuilloidca."
WJtat is a Sponge f —Thia seemfl a more difficult question than
ever it has been. Hacokel has recently confirmed in great measure
Mr. Carter's view, that it is a oolloction of Amcehra-like infusoria,
living among a framework of ailicioUB or limestone spicules. A little
later than Carter, the lamented Professor H. J, Clark, of America,
published, in 1866, a paper in which he maintained that the sponge
was an aggregation of flagellate infusoria, like monads of the genera
MoTioa, Anthopki/sa, Codoeiga, &c. The sponge, then, in his view was a
compoimd protozoan animal. Now Haeckel contends that tlieso
monads of Clark are simply coUe lining the general stomach-cavity of
the sponge, each bearing a cilium or thread, and that the sponge is
not a compound infueorian, but a much more highly organized animal
related to the radiates, BUch aa tho Polyps {Hydra, &o.). He dia-
' iinguishes in them a general cavity or stomach, tho walla of which
, eonsist, as in tho Acalephs, of two layers (entoderm and oxoderm) of
[ ocUb. He regards the sponges and Acalephie qb having been evolved
" om a common ancestor, which he terms Prolascug.
Quite recently the editor of the ' American Naturalist' has
ftxeoeivod a paper by Metschnikoff oa the development of a. calcareous
KHponge {Sycon eiliatitm). Ho clearly proves that Hoeckel's view of the
B'Btructuro of the sponges was correct, but shows that there is no real
k relationship between the sponges and radiates.
Tvielau Bingworm and ita Fungus. — Dr. T. Fox has given in tho
L^Lancet' (Aug. 29) an interesting paper on the above subject. He
■fs that there is a form of erujition which appears to be very common
it Samoa, the hitherto unknown cause of which ho has recently been
r aUe to discover ; and he seeks this opportunity of placing the main
fects in regard to it before the profession. The Hev. Dr. Turner, M.D.,
refers to tho disease, in his First Annual Report of tho Somoan
Medical Mission, under the term " Tokelan Eingworm," or " Lafa
Tokelau"; so named from ita having recently been introduced to
Samoa from Tokelau or Bowditch Island. Dr. Turner says, " It is a
scaly disease, much more like ichthyosis in ita general appearance
than any other disease with which I am acquainted. The scales, how-
ever, differ from those of ichthyosis, in that they ore not disposed in
sqaares. Thoy run in concentric circles, and may be well represented
by taking a sheet of stout cardboard and shaving tho iip2>er layer of it
I
i
I
206 FROSItESa OF HICROaOOPICAL 60IEN0E.
in Buch n way aB to make it coil up in circles. Tlio rings of the
desquamatod cuticle are about b, quarter of an inch apart. . . , M7 ,
impression is that it is a parasitic disoaeo, bnt as yet I have not
succeeded in discovering any pai-asite ; nor can I speak definitely of
any treatment which has proved successful. " It seenis that the exist-
ence of the disease was noticed by the o£Gcers attached to the United
States' exploring expedition, under the command of Captain "Wilkee, in
1811, who noticed it in the Eingcmill group, and spoke of it undar
the designation of " Qone," and an, at some of its stages, retemUing the
ringworm.
" Dr. Mullen, of H.M.8. ' Onmeleon,' has," says Dr. Fox, '
good enough to forward me some facts about the disease, throngL the
courtesy of the Director- Genern.1 of the Navy Metlical Department.
He remarks that Dr. Tumor has noticed, about three hours after the
application of sulphur ointment to the skin, some winged insects
bursting through the ointment and flying away. ' On scraping the
skin there were perceived dipterous insects, somewhat smaller than
midges, others still smaller, and what appeared to be the dipterous
insects iu the pupa stage. Now these aro not accidental accompani-
monte, for they have been found iu all cases about three hours after
the ointment has been applied ; and the Eev. Dr. Turner has procured
" scrapings " from niissiouaries of other islands, who, by his advice,
have used the ointment, and has always found the same insects. It is
strange,' Dr. Mullen eontinnes, ' that before applying tho ointment no
trace of these ineecte, nor nuy pustulos, papuloH, &c., indicating the
presence of such large parasites, can be discovered. PoBsibly they
may exist as ova in tho under surface of the scales, which become
developed on the application of the ointment ; but is not this develop-
ment too rapid even for the inseota?'
" I have received ' scrapings ' from the akin and a muuber of the
dipterous insects referred to in tbo above paragraph from Dr. Turner ;
and I now proceed very briefly to summarize the conolusions to which
I have come after a careful examination of them.
" The disease is clearly a form of ringworm (tinea), dependent
upon the growth, amongst the cuticle cells, of a vegetable fungus.
The general features of the disease, in its mode of onset, its progress,
symptoniB, and nokod-cyo characters, are those of an exaggerated tinea
unquestionably. There ate points of difiereuce, I admit ; but I will
refer to these in a moment. In the 'scrapings' of cuticle I find
abtrndant evidence of a vegetable fungus of a most luxuriant kind.
This fungus exists in great abuTidaTKe; but, though so plentiful, its
presence may readUy be overlooJced, unless a very thin layer of the
^scrapings' is escamined. Of the accompanying illustrations, one of
tho figures [which we regret we do not possess] represents the fungus
magnrfled under a power of 500 diameters, and as drawn with the
camera. It will be noticed that the fungus elements ore very largo.
They bear, indeed, a resemblance to the parasite of the so-called
Eczema marginaiuTn of the Qenaans. I am not at present prepared
to say whether the fungus is a modification of tlic trichophyton, or a
new and special one. I await further experiments, and do not propose
COBBESPONDENCE, 207
therefore to give the fangns or the disease a new name. The second
figure shows the fangus as seen under a power of 1500 diameters, and
conveys a very good idea of the structure of the cell-wall of the
conidia, and the mode in which these conidia are developed within
the cell-wall of the mycelial threads. But I purposely omit entering
into any further account of the microscopic history and relationship of
the fungus, as my object is a practical one. Suffice it, that I have
discovered the fungus and figured its main features.
" I have been unable to detect any dipterous insects — of which I
have specimens — in the ' scrapings ' which I have examined ; and it is
clear to me that their presence is accidental^ and that they are
attracted to the skin, in Tokelau ringworm, by the ointments applied
to it, and in which they become imb^ded. They are not, so far as the
microscope enables me to judge, present in the diseased skin until
after ointments have been appli^. Further, dipterous insects could
not, I take it, possibly cause such an eruption as Tokelau ringworm ;
and it is impossible to suppose that, in or upon a skin in which not a
trace whatever of their presence exists, the application of a strong
parasiticide would cause tiie rapid development, in the space of three
hours, of a host of these dipterous insects from ova supposedly existing
in the skin, and undiscoverable by accurate means of detection. I
presume it is the fact of the non-discovery of the fungus which led to
the supposition that the diptera may be the cause of flie disease. But,
now that I have demonstrated the presence of the fungus, and having
regard to the general features of the eruption in LafiEi Tokelau, the
aspect of the question of the relationship of the diptera to the disease,
in the light of cause and effect, is altogether altered. I have said that,
as compared with exaggerated tinea circinata, Tokelau ringworm offers
some points of difference. I think these do not refer to essential
.features of the eruption, but rather to those which are accidental —
viz. to the infiltration and the scaliness ; and these differences are to
be explained, I think, by the greater luxuriance and amount of fungus
present, which necessarily cause a greater degree of inflammation. It
is not necessary to suppose that the fungus is a special one; tho
differences referred to will be equally accounted for if it should turn
out that the parasite is a modification — a more luxuriojit form than
usual —of the trichophyton."
OOBKESPONDENCB.
Gundlach's i AND Beni^xuk H No. 7.
To the EdU</r of tJie * Monthly M icroHCi/jnc/xl Jonrital,*
DlSNH'J'c>NK C<)LLKfiKf Amjutt 24, 1874.
Sib, — With our brother microscopintH and optjciarm in (Icrmany a
favourite method of testing a J-iuch objective iw U) try if it will show
the lines on P. angulatum with |>erfectly straight suidight, using, of
OOBBKSFONDEKOE.
conrao, as tiio German faEhion is, both mirror nnd diaplirngm ; and
tboir conclofdonB ne to the quality of tLo objective niider examination
are formed accordingly.
For my own part, I havo for some time adopted a proceeding eome-
what similar, but infinitely more trying. InetMvd of straight Gunlight,
I employ the etraight light of a common composite candle, and
discard both mirror and diaphragm.
My J inch {one of GundlMjli'e earliest issues) will in this way not
only do all that I have seen Gcnnou eighths do, with the help of sun-
light, mirrnr and dinphragm, but do it with greater sharpneRs and dis-
tinctness. I may mention that, when in the summer of 1872 I visited
Messrs. Seihert and Kraft's establishment at Charlottenhnrg, and
Horr Seibeit showed mo the abovc'mentioiied feat with sunlight, as a
grand tour de force, I took my own ^ inch ont of my pocket, and
requested Hcrr Gnndlnch, who chanced to enter the room at that
moment, to try it against Hcrr Seibert'B. He did fo ; and the remdt
was a complete victory for my glass, to Gnndlach's great delight,
when I informed him tiiat the glass was one of his own manufacture.
So much for eighths.
Well, on Saturday last, L. Beneche of Berlin sent me, as I had
requested him, a specimen of his newly improved No. 7, which
corresponds to a weak English \ inch,
I t^ed it the same evening, using straight candlelight and a B eye-
piece, but without mirror or diaphragm. The test applied was one of
Holler's slides of P. aitgnlatun.
Under theae cojiditiona it showed the markings on P. an^ulaitim
with the utmost distinctness, leaving nothing to bo desired on that
score. Indeed, I preferred its performance to that of my ^ inch, with
which I compared it.
I then took out the eye-piece, and used as an eye-piece a very
indifferent 1-inch ohjoetivo. This method, though resulting in a per-
ceptible loss of light, left the definition as sharp as ever. My J inch,
on the other hand, broke down completely under this last test.
Then I proceeded to try Beneche's glass on a variety of other
testa, from P. lalticam up to S. (femma, and in all cases with excellent
results. Its performance on S. gemma I shall leave unrecorded, as
the truth here would seem incredible. Meanwhile, its performance on
P. angiiJalum is a pretty " big thing " for a ^ inch ; and I shall be
glad to hear if any of your Teaders can do the same with their
quarters.
I om yours, &c.,
W. J. HlOKIK.
-..r..,.-..^^^
jral jiXlcI ii-j.i'.iJj.i -.--i
THE
MONTHLY MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL.
NOVEMBER 1, 1874.
I. — Supplementary Remarks on Appendicularia.
By Alfred Sandebs, M.E.C.S.
{Read before the Royal Microscopical Society, October 7, 1874.)
Plate LXXX.
At the beginning of this year I had the honour of laying before
this Society some remarks on two apparently new species of Ap-
pendicularia, belonging respectively to the genera Oikopleura and
Frittillaria ; a much larger number of specimens of the fcrmer, and
a longer time for examination, have enabled me, during the course
of thjs summer, not only to correct some misinterpretations of
structure, but also to add several details to my former paper.
*I have, unfortunately, not been able to meet with further
specimens of the s|>ecies of Frittillaria which I then described, so
that my remarks will be entirely confuied to the genus Oikopleura
on the pi:esent occasion.
The species of this genus, the description of which I am now
about to complete, abounds on the south coast of England ; I have
found specimens in large quantities at Weymouth, Gowes, and
Newhaven, and it is to be presumed that they occur also in the sea
between those places.
They are best caught in a muslin net left for a short time in
the tideway a little before high water, at about the period of the
spring tides ; the plan suggested by Dr. Fol, of bailing them out
EXPLANATION OF PLATE LXXX.
Pig. 1. — ^Neural view of Oikopleura.
„ 2. — ^HsBmal „ „
The tail is not represented, and is supposed to be cut off.
A, Anus. I, 1 ; I, 2 ; Intestine.
B, Ae, External branchial aperture. In, Integument.
B, Ai, Internal „ „ M, Mouth.
E, Endostyle. N, Nerve.
G, Ganglion. O, Otolithe.
G, Ey denerative gland. (E, (Esophagus.
Gl, Glandular bodies attached to the 01, Olfactory organ.
endostyle. R, Rectum.
H, Heart. St, Rl, Right lobe of stomach.
H, G, "Hans'* gland. St, LI, Left „
VOL. xn. . (i
I
f 210 TrattsaetiotiB of the
into a Ifttge glass vessel without lifting the not entirely out of the
water, aiiswera very well.
There appears to be aomo confusion with rpganl lo the nomeu-
! dature of the position of the body ; Dr. Fol * and ^Jao Vogt t
term the side on which the nervons system occurs, the doraal, and
tlie side to which the tail is attached, the Tentral. This would be
■correct in regard to the development of the Ascidia in reference to the
vertebrate type of structure. In Professor Huxley'sJ paper, on the
other hand, the nervous system is descrihed as being on the ventral
Bide. In order to avoid this confusion, perhaps it would be better
to call the side on which the ganglion is situated the neural, and
that to which the tail is attached the hiemal ; and in speaking of
the dureefcion of any part, whethei towards the neural or htemal
Bide, the corresponding terms § would be neurad or hcemad. Bnt
there still remains the necessity, when referring to the right or left
side of the aoimal, to determine whether the neural side is to be
considered ventral or dorsal ; but as in my last paper I followed Pro-
fessor Huxley's nomenclature in reference to this aspect, I think it
will be preferable still to do so, and in order to distinguish the right
from the left side, to speak aa if the nervous system were situated
on the ventral side of the body. This discussion may appear trivial,
but it will be found that the present paper would he unintelligible
without some definite rule on the auhjeet.
It is comparatively easy to obtain a side view of these animals,
because, being narrower in that direction than from the nenral to
the hfemal side, they naturally fall into that position when they are
slightly confined by the covering glass. But to get a haemal or
neural view is much more difBcult ; in this case it is neceasaiy so to
arrange the covering glass that it does not touch any part of their
body, and being thus free to move about as they please, a good
view is a matter of chance and patience. The plan that I have
found to answer heat, is to support both ends of the cover by a
sufficient thickness of paper, to put the animal into a very small
drop of water, and by means of a horsehair to draw this drop of
water into a point ; when this ia done they sometimes drive them-
selves into the inlet thus formed, and revolve with great rapidity
round their long axis; bnt after a time they become tired, and
remain quiet for a few seconds, when it is posaible to gain a view of
them in either the hsemal or neural position. The specimens that
I examined varied in length of body from 0'24 mm. to 0-72 mm,
Integum&nt. — The whole body, with the exception of the extreme
posterior end, ia surrounded by a hyaline membrane ; that this is
Mem. de la Sociit^ de Pbjs. et de I'Histoire Nnturelle de Geneve,* lorn, ii.,
la™ partie.
t ' Mem. de I'lnalitut National GeneTDis,' toin. ii.
j ■ QuBT. Jonc. Mic. Science," vol. iv., I85fi,
§ Derived from Vertebrate Asatoiny.
I
Boyal Miero3coj)ieaI Society.
not the commencement of the stmcture known as the " Hans " I
am convinced, hecanae, although I have only met with thia stmc-
ture in a fully formed condition once or twice, I have frequently
seen what appears to be its beginning, and in each case it was
separate from and covered hy the hyaline substance ; be that as
it may, all the specimens that I have examined possessed thia
glassy covering.
Beneath this, tlie body is enclosed in thick granular porietoa,
which extend from each side of the generative gland forward to the
entrance of the pharynx ; the deficiency of this granular wall at the
posterior end of the body is filled up by a thin membrane, to
which the genexating gland adheres. The interior of the pariet^ is
lined by what appears to be an epithelial layer, which presents the
appearance of variously shaped cells at different portions of the
body, hut I am not decided whether this layer is a separate
straeture, or whether it is onlj the optical expression of the
elementa composing the thickened parietes, for when an optical
section of the wall is obtained a distinct and separate layer of
epitheUum cannot be made out ; surrounding the entrance to the
pharynx, however, these quasi cells have a four-sided appearance;
as seen from the hiemal side there are four rows of them, here
tliey approach the form of a square ; but on the nearal side they
reaembla layers of bricks, each element forming a parallelogram
with the angles rounded ; behind these, in that part of the walls
covering the endostyle on the hsmal side and the nervous
ganglion on the neural side, they are circular in outline, being
arranged in rows in such a maimer that those of the second row
occur opposite the interspaces of the first row, those of the third in
like manner opposite the interspaces of the second, and so on In
some few cases theee cells appeox to be hexagonal in shape ; when
this occurs each hexagon is separated from its neighbour by a cleai'
line when the focus is properly adjusted.
As soon as the process of dying begins to set in, these cell-like
appearances are more distinct, the divisions between them become
more marked, they swell out, and on a profile view project as
rounded eminences into the somatic cavity ; it is thia appearance
which perhaps gave Dr. Fol' the idea that the somatic parietas
were composed of a single cellular layer, which he terms the
eetothehum or epidermis ; but in healthy specimens the walls of the
body, as seen in on optical section, present only the appearance of
indistinct molecules mibedded in a granular substance, with the
above-mentioned cells forming an apparent lining membrane.
Belonging to the integumentary system is a large gland, which
Dr. Fol declares to secrete the gelatinous material fiarming the
BO-callod " Haus," which interpretation I am inclined to confirm
^
212 Transactions of (he
from my own observations. This gland consists of two parts;
ftnteriorly there are a pair of oval swellings of the inner surface of
the integnment, one being sitnated on each side of the ganglion
and otolithic vesicle ; these swellings gradually subside to the level
of the int^timent towards the middle line ia front, but more
suddenly behind ; they project nearly half-way across the body, and
are composed of circular molecules imbedded in a matrix which
appears to be composed of 'sarcode. When deterioration first
begins to set in, a few rows of large hexagonal cells moke their
appearance on each side of the central nervous system, which, as
the animal progresses towards dissolution, become more and more
of a rounded form until they represent rows of hemispherical
projections ; it is in this state that Dr. Fol has given a flgwe of
these glands. That this appearance is abnormal, and the result of
commencing decomposition, is demonstrated by the fact, that it is
not seen in perfectly fresh specimens, that it comes on gradually,
passing first through the he^gonal stage, and that subsequently
other parts of the integument show hemispherical projections
resembling these, but of varying sizes, according to the position
they occupy as mentioned above ; during the larther progress of
diaaolntion they develop into globules of a highly refracting ap-
pearance, which obscure all view of the interior of the body ; in
extreme cases a like process goee on in the walla of the viscera
mmnltoneously.
The posterior portion of these glands presents quite a different
appearance from the anterior ; this part consists of three transverse
rows of square corpnscles terminated anteriorly by a sharp edge ;
each of these corpuscles is divided from its neighbour by a clear
line; this band la finished off posteriorly by a border of finely
granular material, which is obsctirely filled in some cases by cor-
puscles of an oval form, with tho long asis placed transversely ; it
was this bond of squai'e corpuscles that I rashly concluded, in my
last paper, were rows of stigmata, but that they are not openings,
and have nothing to do with such struetm'ee, is eaaily shown by
feeding these animals with indigo.
There ia no excretory duct to these glands, but the gelatinous
material of the " Haus " appears to be exuded through the finely
granular portion which is situated between the two in the mid Hue
on the neural side of the body.
The endostyle, and the glandular body on each side of it, may
he considered as appendages of the integument. The endostyle,
which was briefly described in my last paper, appears on the dorsal
view to be a soHd body very nearly divided longitudinally into two
halves by a fissure, which is sUghtly expanded at its anterior end ;
its posterior extremity projects for a short distance beyond or
poskirior to the anus. A mmiitc examination of its substance
I
I
Royal Microscopical Socidy. 213
discloBoa indiBtinct molecales; ie many cases, the addition of aceti
acid, besiclea giving it a coarsely granular appearance, canaea a feM
tranaTerse lines to become visible, as if it were about to divide into
segments.
According to Dr. Fol, this body secretes a glairy mucua, wliicb
mixes witb the food aa it passes down the pharynx, and, therefore,
belongs to the digestive system, I have not observed this secretion,
nHither have I seen the pair of styles with which the some authority
remarks that the endostyle is provided.
There are two apparently glandular bodies, one on each side of
the endostyle, instead of only one, as I supposed in my last paper,
for reasons which will appear presently ; in structure they so fiir
resemble the endostyle as to shov? obscure indications of molecules
in their substance ; it is noticeable that in small specimens these
bodies are larger in proportion to the size of the endostyle than in
large specimens ; perhaps they have some function in the economy
of fiiese animals analogous to certain foetal structures in the verte-
brata, e. g, the thymus ; their position, also, it may be remarted, ia
homologona.
Four openings pierce the integmnent, but only two need bo
noticed at present ; these are the ciliated branchial openings. In
my last paper I mentioned that there existed only one of tliese
openinga; thia miatake arose from the circnmstance that all the
Bpecimena were examined on the aide, this being the position which
the animal invariably assumes when slightly held by the covering
glass, and when this is the ciiae, one branchial opening conceals the
other (the same thing occurs in the case of the glanda just men-
tioned). It so happened, in my investigations last year, that
when the creature bad been sufficiently examined in this position,
it was out of my power to procure any further specimens, so that I
was unable at the time to correct misapprehensions caused by want
of variety in position. The branchial openings are situated on the
hsemat side of the pharynx ; they are rather long tubes, having a
direction backwards, htemad, and slightly towards the middle line.
The internal openings are larger than the external ; the foi-mer are
circular in outline, and are provided with a circlet of strong cilia,
which, when in action, gives a figure resembling the engine-turning
on the back of a watch, or the drops of water from a revolving
wheel 'J'he circumference of these openings is enclosed by two or
three strong circular fibres, outside of which a circlet of pentt^onal
cells occurs ; each of these cells is provided with a clear spot
resembling a nucleus ; five of them can be counted on tlie anterior
part of the circnmference of the openings, which is alJ that ia visible
on the htemal view of the animal.
t'ha external opeuings are quite plain, and unprovided with cilia j
they arc smaller thnn the internal, somewhat oval in shnpe, and are
i
214
Transactions of the
^^F2I
^^H Bitnated one on each aidu of and iu close juxtaposition to tlte com-
^^K mencemeiit of the rectum. Thoee tubes are more visible in tbe
^^f largest specimens ; indeed, in the smaller ones they are scarcely per-
^^B ceptible : this might account for my having missed seeing tl^m in
^^f my former observations.
^^ I tried feeding some vigorous specimens with indigo, and found
that the particles entered the pharynx through the branchial aper-
tures in a regular stream ; the greater part went out again through
the month, but the part which struck against the neural wall of the
pharynx turned back, and vrere carried by tbe ciliary current into
the tesophagUB and thence into the stomach, and eventually into the
remainder of tbe intestine ; the indigo followed this course iu every
I instance in which the expeiimenb was tried.
Digestive System. — This species of Oikopleura is distinguished
by the high development of its alimentary canal.
The general description of this tract was given iu the former
paper; I will content myself, therefore, in this place with adding
some further details to that acconnt.
The mouth looks towards the neural sui'face ; it is heart-shaped,
being provided with a rounded anterior lip.
The stomach is a comphcated organ ; it consists of two flattened
disk-like lobes, one of which lies parallel to tbe right side of the
body, the other lobe is situated at right angles to this on the neural
side ; it is this latter port that I termed the flist portion of the
intestine, from the fact that fteces begin to be observable therein ; but
as most authorities appear to consider it to be a lobe of tbe stomach,
I shall adopt that view in future. The two lobes in A.jtabellum are
described by Professor Huxley" as being parallel, and not at right
angles, as in this specimen. The ri^t lobe of the stomach, which
^^ corresponds to the left lobe in Dr. Pol's nomenclature, is provided
with two different species of &
a the lining membrane; one sort
I
are large, and form hemispherical projections into the cavity of the
stomach ; these are arranged in a crescentic form, and occupy that
part (abont half) of the mucous membrane which is situated towards
the heemal side of tbe body ; the space between the right and left
walls on this side is occupied by four or five cells much larger than
the remainder.
The other portion of the mucous membrane of the right lobe of
tbe stomach is formed of flat irregularly polygonal cells, which
occupy the spaces between the above-mentioned rounded cells, and
also spr^ over that wall of this lobe which is directed towards the
neural side ; these flat cells vary in shape and size ; they line the
whole of the right lobe not occupied by the rounded cells. The
transition between the right and left lobes is marked by a longi-
tudinal ridge at the angle which they form together, but the
Bot/al Mioroscopiedl Society. 215
neural wall of tlie two parts ia continuous, without any mark of
transition.
The left lobe ia also Kned by flattened cells, wbioli form a
tceselated or pavement epithelium. These cells are polygonal in
shape, like the flat cells of the right lobe, but difier m each con-
taining a clear round spot resembling a nucleus, the rest of the cell
contents being coarsely granular. The shape of these cells varies
in difierent specimens; in some the prevalent form ia elongated,
pointed at one end and broad at the other, at which part the clear
spot is present; but in the greater number they are irregularly
polygonal, with the clear spot at or near the centre.
A profile view of this part of the stomach shows that these
cells are sUgbtiy elevated above the level of the walls of tliia viaeus,
so that the separation between them is formed by a series of
channels, whicn are indicated in a front view by clear lines of
demarcation.
The colour of these cells is generally darker than iu those of the
right lobe and of the intestine ; in a few specimens they were of an
orange tint, and in one only of a deep purple, the second part of
»ihe intestine being of a lighter shade of the same colour.
The pylorus is placed at the posterior wall of the left lobe,
oloee to the angle between it and the right lobe, so that the greater
part of thia left lobe forms a evi de eac^ which perhapa might be
considered as a rudimentary livei; if so, this animal presents
another pomfc of resemblance to the amphiosns, inasmuch as it pos-
sesses a hver constructed in the form of a blind sac.
The last-mentioned organ being considered as belonging to the
stomach, there only remain two chambera and the rectum as form-
ing the intestine ; the first and second of these (which I termed
second and third portions of the intestine in my last paper) are oval
chambera, which present no apertures except when the iieces are
passing ; both of them are lined by an epitheUimi formed of flatr
tened cells, like that of the left lobe of tne stomach ; the cells of
this epithelium difler, however, in not containing a clear spot in
the centre, or when this is present, as happens in a few cases,
it is BO indistinct that it is easily overlooked and soon disappears
entirely.
The rectum continues forwards from the second chamber and
ends in the anus, which ia situated on a distinct papilla in front of
' the insertion of the tail. Thia part of the intestine is lined by
Ijound cells which project into the cavity.
That part of Uie right lobe of the stomach which is lined by
flattened epithehum is ciliated, as aJso is the whole of the left lobe,
tt^etber with all the intestinal canul except the rectum.
Nervom Sys/eni.—Ihe nervous system of these auimals is very
highly developed, more so even than in their allies the ascidia.
Transaciiona of the
II, — New Diatonia. By F. Kitton, Norwicli,
^liead hf/ore the JlovAL Micboscopical Sixirtv, October 7, 1874.)
PL4TE8 LXSSI. ASH LXXXII.
Thboooh the kindness of my friend Captain Verty, of Liverpoolj
I am enabled to introduce to the notice of the Fellowa of thia
Society eome new and rare forms of Diatomaceie which I Imvd
detected in a dredging made by him ofl' Navy Bay, Colon, Faoama.
This gathering is one of the most interesting it hoa over been
my fottime to examine : in addition to the many hue forms of
Diatomacese, Foraminifera and Polycystina are not of unfreqnent
occorrence. Siiicified casta of the borings of some species of Oliona,
the chambers of Foraminifera (often with the psendopodal apertures),
fragments of Echinus spines, and Bryozoa may be tbai^ among
the heavier debris after tne calcareous matter has bean destroyed by
acids.
The species of Diatomacese are numeroufl and fine ; those which
I am about to describe are, I believe, new.
Perrya, N. G., mihi,
Free, elongated, fra'?tulcs comjjre^ed, sometimes slightly con-
stricted, extremities rounded, strife transverse moniiilbrm. Marine.
This genus is distinguished from Nitzacliia, its nearest aily, by
the absence of a keel, and also by its very much compressed valve.
P. puhherrima, F, K, — Valve in f. v. linear, inner or ventral
margin straight or very slightly concave, outer or dorsal margin
straight, suddenly rounded at the apices, markings, distant monili-
form dots, in transverse series, not reaching ventral margin, between
which are fine moniliform striie, a, v, narrow, linear, suddenly tajier-
ing towards the acnte extremities, a central line of large monili&rm
dots dividing the valve. Length ■ 0090" to ■ 0200", bi^adth " 0015".
Navy Bay, Colon, Panama ; Campeche Bay. = Nitzsehza puleher-
■ 1 Grunow, m. s. Herr Weissflog, in litt. PI. LSSXI., Fig. 1,
valve £ v.; 2, frustule ; 3, ideal section of ditto.
This form somewhat resembles Nitzschia, but the compressed
valve and absence of keel indicate that the resemblance is only
DESOBIPTION OP PLATES LSXXI. AND LXXXII.
FiO. 1. — Perrya pulcherrims, valsa.
„ 2. — „ „ friiatule.
„ 3 — ,, ,, ideal aectiou of ditto.
„ 4,— 8urirc?fa amlorla, valve.
,, H.— ififisoAva grandis.
„ 6.— „ „ outline of frustule.
„ 7. — E-iceraHum /aim, var. sept'imgulatum,
„ S. — Portion of iaaet BWface Hhowing the punctate film.
All X 400 ilinmeterB.
TheMontUy MimseopicdJouraal Nov' 1.1874
PIIX5
\ % O-^&xsi^t'^
H ThB J&ntiily merosoopi^^
scopical ^ouTnaKHov"! IWi.
Boyal Microscopical Society. 219
superficial. It resembles Amphiprora in the f. v., but the absence of
the sigmoid keel and central nodule distinguishes it from that genus.
I have detected two or three other species in the Colon and
Campeche dredgings, which I hope to describe in a future paper.
Nitzschia grandis^ n. sp., F. K. — Frustule linear, ends rounded,
valye linear, suddenly tapering to the acute and incurved extremi-
ties, keel subcentral, costate punctate between the costsB, remainder
of valve marked with distinct moniliform striae in transverse series.
CostsB 10 in •001,strige 25 in -001 ; length from -0100" to -0200".
Navy Bay, Colon, Panama. PL LXXXII., Fig. 5, valve ; 6, outline
of frustule, shaded portion the cingulum; the dotted line shows
ventral margin of lower valve.
This form is perhaps one of the finest of the genus, and I know
of no species with which it is likely to be confounded. N, Bright-
weRii equals it in size, but differs in the position of the keel and
also in the striation.
Triceratium favus, var. sept-angulatum, F. K. — Valve large
with seven sUghtly concave margins, processes produced, cells hexa-
gonal somewhat irregular in size, centre of valve turgid, marginal
cells elongated, margin with large moniliform granules, inner surface
of valve punctato-striate, radiant, about 20 in • 001 ; extreme breadth
of valve • 0200". PI. LXXXII., Figs. 7 and 8. Navy Bay, Colon,
Panama.
I have Httle hesitation in referring this magnificent form to
the above-named species, the number of sides, like the number of
nodules on Eupodiscus or Aulacodiscus, being of no specific value.
All forms of Triceratia with conspicuous hexagonal cells are, I
beheve, only varieties of T.favvA, The radiating punctse on the
inner surfaice are not always present, and are really not on the
inner surface of the valve ; they indicate the presence of a thin
silicious film, possibly the rudiment of a new valve ; if a valve is
crushed between the shde and cover, fragments of the film are
detached.
In the first volume of the 'Lens,' a good Woodbury-type
of T.' firnbriatum (from a photograph of Dr. J. J. Woodward^)
will be found, in which the puncte are very distinctly shown.
T. fimlriatum is rightly referred by Ealfe to T.favus.
Dr. M. Edwards (* Lens,' vol. ii., p. 105) mentions a six-sided
form which agrees very well with my seven-angled variety, and
which he calls T. ponderosum, but from the absence of any spe-
cific characters I am unable to decide upon their identity with
certainty.* I have given the breadth of my largest specimen, the
smallest I have seen measured about • 0120" ; size is, however, of
little or no value, even if this form had occurred in sufficient quan-
* His speoiiuens were found in the Monterey deposit, in which he said a three-
sided valve was also detected.
220 Transactions of the Boyai Microscopical Society.
tity to have afforded means of estimating its variation ; in the type
form this variation is considerable. In a gathering from Sierra
Leone I found a frustule of the type form scarcely exceeding
• 0020" from angle to angle.
SurireUa contorta, n. sp., P. K. — ^Valve eUiptically or slightly
ovate, canaliculi fine, nmnerous, alae inconspicaous, narrow median
elevation terminating in short spines, surface of valve obscurely
striate, valve in f. v. contorted. Sub-peat deposit, Mannawata,
Wellington, and Wangarei, Auckland, New Zeakad. PL LXXXI.,
Fig. 4. This fine species of Surirella is undoubtedly distinct from
any form of this genus with which I am acquainted. The valves
in the Wangarei are more robust than those in the Mannawata
deposit, and of a yeUovrish brown colour, whilst those in the Man-
nawata material are hyaline, but differing in no other respect ; the
surface of the valve is blistered or puckered. The spines with
which the elevated ends of the median space terminate form a very
acute angle with the surface of the valve, and point in opposite
directions.
I may here remark that the forms associated with the above are
those usually found in sub-peat deposits, viz. Epithemia, Navicula,
Himantidium, Cocconeis, Stauroneis, &o. Navicuia ( = Pinnularia)
cardindlis is very fine in the Wangarei deposit, and differs from the
typical form in the greater distance of the costse and the broadly
cuneate ends.
8tav/r(meis acuta is rare but fine in the above-named material.
( 221 )
llL — Final Jtemarlcs on Immersed Aferturei.
By F. H. Wekham, T.P.R.M.S.
r closing this discussion I have to thank Col. Woodward for
iobligingly furnishing a diagram. When I requested this I did not
Iflipect the forthcoming tangible proof by direct meaanrement of the
'angles of the ^th belonging to Mr. Crisp, made by Mr. ToUea ; this
having decided against the alleged extra aperture, the argument
may also end with him. Some, however, still follow and uphold
these ultra rays ou theoretical grounds, and call for a notice which
may be biief.
L Me. Keith's illustration in the September number of this Journal
[ refers to a T^th. I need not raise any question of iia accuracy as a
mere dit^ram, as I doubt the &rat position taken, and the direction of
the rays that follow. I could give in diagram a dry lens admitting
the largest pencil possible, that when immersed would fall within the
theoretical limit, and so argument might bo continned ad infini-
tum, and quite uselessly, as we have the objectrglasa reten'ed to in
this controversy to settle the point by measurement.
It will be seen in the diagram that while the back lenses may
assimilate for a rsth, the front is of small I'adius and diameter,
magnilying sufficiently for a i^j or tV- This is very different in size
from the " unfortunate " tenth previously sent also to prove the extra
immersion rays. I am not prepared to allow the front to be correct
in size or position with its radiant point "assumed" as stated,* If
it were moved into the position necessary for a dry object the focus
would fell on or within the front aur&ce, and in any position there
will be no air focus. If the diagram is made up of uncertain
measurements, what is the use of it ? Mr. ToUes, from whom all
dimensions come, has repeatedly supplied diagrams to suit his
theory. On page 14 of this Journal lor July last he assumes that
in all conditions of the combined lenses an angle of 6U° can be
obtained from the back systems. He there places the hemispherical
front in this angle just where it fills it beat, and at an exceedingly
long distance from the middle. On the other hand, in Mr. Keith's
illustration it is brought very close ; a contrast indeed to the former
case, where the increase of aperture is to be obtained by actually
separaling the lenses.T
Of course Messrs. Woodward and Keith are not responsible for
data, but the former gentleman tells us it is " a diagram aceuraiely
condruded in accordance with the computed reaults":^ having,
I
therefore, been drawn to suit the proposition, it may be dismissed.
Eeferring hack to Mr. Keith^ correspondence, I find he first
222
Final Hemarka on Immersed Apertures.
I
I
figuroa an arrangement for obtaining full apertures in bitlaam — the
same in principle as that described and carried ont by myself more
than twenty years ago, and yet " wonders that I cannot see it,"
He next appears as an advocate of the correctness of Col. Wood-
ward's diagram,* wherein he assumes his immersion radiant points
close, and yet closer, in order to show that rays of any degree
of obliquity can be got through a hemisphere, regardless of the
destination of all of them to the focus at the eye-piece, thus carry-
ing the argument round agaio to its commencement. On this
Mr. Keith gives his verdict that Col, Woodward is right and I am
wrong ; and I may state, in reference to hia last communication,
that I do not think that it is po^ible to discriminate and decide in
such a complicated optical arrangement as a microscope object-glass,
that the spherical aberration is " practically nothing by compata-
tion " t and — on paper. It would be a great boon to the makere of
object-glasses if iJiis could be done.
It is still a matter of surprise to me that these gentlemen
cannot see or will not admit that if an objeet-glasa, whetiier made
by Mr. Tollea or anyone else, be set at the immersion atljustment,
and the angle considered as near Mr. Tollea' 180^^ as anyone may
have the temerity to venture, till it occupiea the whole of the front
lens (for in dry lenses of larj^e aperture the rays nearly fill the
hemisphere), and with the focua ela^e to the glass, that on dipping
it into balsam, whatever the including aperture may have previposly
been, the cone immediately falls within 82° by the first law of
refraction, the back focna remaining the same in both cases. But
the bias of the discussion has been to show myself wrong by Mr.
Tollai presumably getting some extra immersion rays, if only to
the extent of 10^, 5°, yea, even half a degree. For the decision of a
scientific fiict, glasses besides Mr. Tolies' might be referred to in
support, as immersions are mojle in other countries quite unsor-
passed ; but it is a triumph for him only.|
Finally, a few words concerning the sUt in focus of object-glass,
for cutting off all these disputed or felse rays. It is difficult to anni-
hilate this by theory. Having given the death-blow to Mr. Toiles'
extra apertures, it may be treated with but little notice, but cannot
be got rid of as a thing of no account or a mere sensational affair.
Col. "Woodward says, " This method might be used without giving
rise to material iuaccuracy when the objective is adjusted for an-
coTered objects ; but when it is closed to the point of maximum
• 'M.M. J.,' Nov., 1873, p. 212.
t Ibid., Bejit., 1874, p. 121,
' j " One maker hoviiis made a uyXh of tlie limit, it ih probnble that the rest
will toon fblloir. But Mr. Tollea richly deserves bigli praiee from all who naa
microBCDpes, aad all tc/io maie theui, far perfieverence in the mechanical cxpraBsioD
of hiB eorrfd ptrc^tion of the rase, in c^po^tion b> high theorotical authority." —
R. Keith, ' M. M. J.,' June, 187i.
Final Bemarhs on Immersed Apertures. 223
aperture its spherical aberration is of course no longer corrected for
uncovered objects." In measuring varying angles of aperture by
the usual method, we take them at all points of the adjusting collar,
and do not place in front a thickness of glass suitable for that cor-
rection, because with a parallel plate of glass there is no perceptible
difference. The angle at the crossing point of the rays is the same
whether it is there or not. I stipulate that the edges of the stop
shall be in the crossing point. If anyone thinks proper to intro-
duce an intervening plate of glass, serving no purpose, he must
focus through it, so as still to get the stop in the focal plane.
Further, if the collar is set for an object immersed in balsam, for
the purpose of testing its reduced aperture therein by the means I
have described, the sUt must be set in focus, whether air, water, or
balsam is the intermedium. In Mr. Tolles' ^th the immersed aper-
ture was found to be the same with all three, simply because they
are parallel plates.
The question has now been so well ventilated that there is no
use m wearying readers with further theories and counter-theories,
perhaps only noticed by those engaged in the controversy, which
few care now to read. Anyone free from prejudice, and recognizing
the importance of cutting off all false rays within the focal point,
would use a suitable stop for the purpose, and throw all controversial
papers aside in favour of the practical proof in which the whole
question must culminate at last. AU this voluminous correspond-
ence has arisen from a very small beginning, in which I pointed
out an optical error of Mr. ToUes in the direction of rays, and
which he unwisely chose to deny. In his last production of 180*^
he has gone ahead of all others ; no one has surpassed him in that,
and perhaps argument will not be wanting to prove by diagrams
that ne is right.
There I leave him, not without some amusement at the gro-
tesque fatuity that induced his colleague to select the chaste and
Christianlike motto, " A blunder is worse than a crime !" *
♦ See * M. M. J.,* May, 1874, p. 228.
VOL. xn. K
I
( 224 )
IV. — The Filaria immitis. Amended Anatomical Details.
By F. H. Welch, F-R-CS., Aaaiatant to Professor of Pathology,
Army Medical School, Netley.
In my paper" descriptive of the thread-worm, F. immitis, the Ganina
Hfemntozoon, nmong other anatomical details of the parasite Wo
conclusions are arrived at which subsequent dissections have proven
to require modificatioD ; I refer (a) to the assomed coecal termmation
of the intestuie aad consequent absence of anal aperture,! and (b) to
the merging of the two uterine channels diverging from the vagina
into one membranous tube continuous with the convoluted ovarian
tubes at the tail end of the female worm. J
Further examination of mora recent specimens has shown me
that these details do not correspond with the facts since brought to
light, and as they are important points in the anatomy of the worm
I hastfin to correct them.
Termiiiaiion of the AliTnentary Canal. — Plate XXX, Fig. 2,
female worm, and Plate XXXII., Fig. 16, male worm, illustrate a
coecal termination of the canal. However, on getting rid of tha
cutaneous envelope of the tail end of the parasite by maceration and
dissection, and tating away most of the muscular parietes with the
contained ovariftn coils, I have traced the intestinal canal, contracted
from the average ^iifth inch to rfrVoth inch in diameter, from
beyond the assmned cceeal termination of the delicate tube to within
TTirth inch of the terminal end of the worm, and when tension was
brought to bear on this short unexplored portion the canal separated
invariably from the inside of the muwular tip with a ruptured end
and dimpling in of the external surface. The walla of the intestine
are so thin that when collapsed it is easy to overlook the ftibe,
which is mainly indicated by its dark contents ; and when these stop
abruptly, accompanied by a reduction in calibre of the canal, it is
not difficult to be misled in favour of a coecal termination. The
presence of much dark granular material in the peri-visceral cavity
at the tail end prevented the tracing of the dehcate tube through it
with absolute certainty, yet considering that up to within Twth inch
from the tail end it could be unquestionably followed, and that a
ruptured end invariably ensued on tension being apphed to this
short obscared portion with indrawing of the outer surface, I think
that a bUnd ending to the alimentary canal may be fairly negatived.
Hence I conclude that an anal aperture is present in this blood
parasite, and to make the sketches in accordance with these details
it becomes necessary to extend the tubes, marked a and p respec-
tively in Plate XXX., Fig. 2, and Plate XXXII., Fig. 16, to the
extreme tip of the tail.
1873.
How to prepare Specimens of Diaiomacew. 225
I will also add here that careful esamination of the guinea-
worm (F. medinensia) has led me to coiielude that in this congener
worm also the intestine terminates in an anal orifice a httle within
the concavity of the curled tail, and so in thia anatomical point the
worms are in imison.
Merging of the (wo Uterine Channels or Soma into one common
Ti^B.—li is quite clear that thia is incorrect. The two canals,
diverging from the vagina, do nob coalesce, but continue separate
throughout, though placed in close apposition and bound one to the
other by nnmerous fibres. When within a distance of the tail
varying from 3 to IJ inches, each uterine horn merges into an
ovarian tube, as detailed at p. 1 61 and illustrated in Plate SXXI.,
Fig. 7. The ovarian tube is coiled npon itself, but when extended
averages 5 inches in length ; it is continuoua from one nterine horn
to the other, and varies in diameter from j^gth inch at its junction
with the nterine channels to rirrtli inch midway, becoming again
reduced to the smaUer measurement at the extreme loop. The
remarkably close binding of the one horn of the uterus to the
' other in their course from the vagina to the ovarian tube, and
I the difficulty of unravelling them without tearing thefr dehcat© walls
I Kid 80 obscuring accuracy of observation, led me to regard these
tnbea f>a one, but the tracing of the ovarian coila upwards haa ren-
dered clear these amended details of the generative system.
With these modifications I behove that the anatomy of the
Filaria immitis, b& detailed in my former paper, is substantially
I v. — Row to prepare Specimens o/ Diatomacea^ for Examinaiio?t
and Study by means of the Microscope.
By A. Mead Edwards, M.D., Newark, New Jersey, U.8.
rHiviNO accumulated a nnmber of gatherings of rough materia!,
f which, a cursory esamination has shown, contain specimens of
I Diatomaceie, and which, it is judged, it will answer to clean and
I otherwise arrange and put up, or, as it is technically termed,
I '« mount, " for future study, the intending diatomist recfuires to be
|informed how he may best set abont preparing his specimens in the
I most advantageous manner. The author of the present sketch has
I imblLahed, in the seventh volume of the ' Proceedings of the Boston
f (Mass.) Society of Natural History," certain directions for collecting,
reparing, and mounting Diatomacese for the microscope ; and as
lat paper contains a large part of the information he desires to
s 2
226 How to prepare Specimens of Diatomacese for
impart at the present time, he will draw upon it pretty freely,
supplementing it to such a degree as later investigations warrant,
or as may seem desirable.
Although most of the published treatises on the use of the
microscope in general profess to give directions for mounting objects
in such a manner as to preserve them for almost any length of
time, and at the same time exhibit their characters to the best
advantage, and although we have in the English language at least
three books treating specially of this subject of the preparation of
microscopic objects, yet hardly any one of these volumes gives
any concise, practical, and at the same time reUable descriptions of
'the best methods of collecting, preparing, and mounting specimens
of Diatomaceae. In books, generally, when the preparation of these
organisms is treated of, it is usually the fossil deposits which are con-
sidered, and even such directions as relate to these are for the most
part meagre and unsatisfactory ; and, when the specific and special
directions are, as is often the case, copied from one book into the
other without having been tested by the copyist, any faults they
may have possessed, as originally written, are merely repeated and
not ehminated. To prepare and mount specimens of DiatomaceaB,
for the purpose of sale alone, is one thing, and to prepare and mount
them, so as to preserve and exhibit their natural characters and fit
them as objects of scientific study, is another and very different
thing. The latter can only be attained after considerable practice,
and to do it properly a considerable amount of knowledge of their
natural history is plainly necessary.
The Diatomacese should always be prepared and put up for a
special purpose, — that of exhibiting characters peculiar to genera
and species; and to do this those characters must of course be
known. Muds, guanos, dredgings, and gatherings of that descrip-
tion can seldom be used for the purpose of exhibiting such charac-
ters, and when they can, in exceptional cases, be so employed, it is
when the forms they contain are selected out in the manner to be
described hereafter. Gatherings, Ukewise, which contain many
species in a mixed condition, should, as a general thing, be rejected,
unless there be present something of special importance, such as
rare species, or some large and fine or distorted forms of common
species. But even in such cases it will be found best not to mount
the gatherings as collected, but to select out the forms desired and
place them upon slides by themselves, and in such media as will
exhibit their peculiarities to the best advantage. Of course it may
be desirable to study the geographical distribution of the Diatomaceae ;
and then mixed gatherings become of value as exhibiting the
number of forms occurring at a particular station. Then, again,
the fossil as well as the semi-fossil deposits and guanos may be
cleaned and mounted as obtained ; but even then it may become
r Examination and Study hy means of the Miaroseope, 227
desirable, if space can be spared in tlie cabinet, to have the Tarioua
species found in each gathering separately mounted, so that they
may be at any time studied in compai'ison with similar forms from
other localities.
General directions for collecting Diatomacea? have been already
given in part seventh ; but it v^ill be desbable to again allude to a
few points in connection with this portion of our subject. Some
years since, an article entitled " Hunting for Diatoms" was pub-
lished in a London journal called ' The Intellectual Observer.' The
author's name was not given, but internal evidence would seem to
indicate that it was penned by a deceased botanist of note, who was
I a decided authority on tbia branch of biology. This paper contains
^^^ some valuable hints respecting the places in which to look for
^^H diatoms, and some of the suggestions contained tlierein I have
^^V ventured to transfer to these pag«s, as they will be found of value
^^ to the intending diatoraist. Thus, the exquisite Arachnoidiscus,
Triceratium Wilksii, and Aulacodiems Oregonemis, may be looked
for on logs of wood which have been floating in the sea, and imported
from New Zealand, or Vancouver's Island. So, on logs from Mexico
and Honduras may be found the curious TerpsiniB mimoa. The
nets of fishermen , especially from deep water, may yield algffi bearing
such forna aa Bluibdonema areuaium oi Adrtatium, Gramm^ophora
serpenti^ia and marina, various Synedras, and other fine Ibrms.
On oyster shells may be found algas bearing upon their fronds
Biddulphia regina, Baileyii or aurUa. Mhizosotenia styliformis
_ is aaid to be almost sure to be there likewise. After a ship is
inloaded, and as it flotita higher in the water, its sides may be
i for treasures of the diatom world, and Achnantheg longipes
. brevipes found, or even Diaioma hyalinum and Hyalosira
felicatitla. The sea-grass, or Zostera marina, growing along our
list, often bears upon its waving ribbons fine foiToa of diatoms,
1 tliat used for stuffing chairs, and loimges or mattresses, and
bport«d from abroad, will yield foreign species to the collector.
mere is a plant known in England as " Dutch rushes," which is
frxnltA into tliat country from Holland, and which is used for
l»>ll«iiiH, TlipHP plfLota glow in tho brackish water of the
' ■ ki be found the delicate Cosciiio-
\ii Tfkemtiumfavus. Both of
iL- commonly on our Atlantic
- i' /i.Tnl Wilmington, Ga., have
'if bones, which present
. .iter for some time, are
■ I'aro, as coming from
iiire has not yet been
\liat the characteristic
mlaries are, but yet we
How to 'prepare Specimens o
may safely predict that tlie lakes, ponds, streams, and sea-coast of
tliat state will yield to tho aeatdier ample material of beautiful
forms.
If the microBcopist wishes to mount a few slides of recent
diatoms just to show what diatoms are, nothing is easier. It ia
only necessary to boil a small msss of them in strong nitric acid in
a test-tnbe over a spirit lamp, and, when the acid has ceased to
emit red or yellowish fumes, wash them thoroughly with clean
water, aUowing them to settle completely. Then a little of the
clean sediment, conaiating almost entirdy of the shells of the
diatoms, is taken up by means of a " dip-tube," and placed upon
the central portion of a glass ahde. Here it ia dried, and the slide
warmed over a lamp ; then a drop of Canada balsam is permitted to
fall upon the diatoms. As soon as all bubbles have cleared oft' from
the balsam, a warm cover of thin glass is carefully laid upon it and
permitted to settle into place. When cool, it is ready for examina-
tion hy means of the microscope, any balsam which has exuded
aroimd the cover being washed off with alcohol. In this way rough
and tolerably clean specimens may be obtained ; but such would not,
or, at all events, should not, satisfy the student of the Diatomaceae.
For him more elaborate methods are necessary, and these we vrill
now proceed to consider.
Apparatus and Chemieah necessary. — A chemiat'a retort-Btand,
which is a heavy iron plate with an upright rod projecting from
one side of it. Eunuing on this rod, and so arranged that they
may be fixed by set-acrews at any height, are a series of ring* of
various diameters, which are to be used to hold the vessels in which
the specimens are to be manipulated over the source of heat used.
Mr, C. G. Bush, late of Boston, Mass., who has had considerable
experience in cleaning Diatomaoeie, tells me that he uses a lamp
burning petroleum oil, as cheaper than a spirit lamp, and, to
support the veasela he employa, has a little metal arrangement on
the top of the chimney, such as ia aup^ed for the purpose of
holding a small tea-kettle and the like. The only objection to the
oil lamp is, that, unless the wick be well turned down, we are liable
to have our vessels blackened. However, the heat given off by burn-
ing petroleum is very great, and I have often used such a lamp
with advantage. If desired, of course, the source of heat uaed may
be gas, burned in a Bunaen'a burner, ot a spirit lamp ; and this
last, especially if it be supplied with a metal chimney to cut off
draughte, is, all things considered, the best, as it is very cleanly, not
being liable to smoke the bottom of the glass or porcelain vessels
used. If we are going to work with large quantities of material,
we shall require a small sand-bath to heat the glass veasela upon.
In small quantities, the diatoms may be boiled in test-tubes, -mien
some sort of holder will be required. The metal ones, sold by
I
^" fc
I
Examination and Study hy means of the Microscope. 229
dealers in chemiBta' apparatus, are extremely handy ; but I have
fonud that we can make very good onea out of old paper collars.
One of the kind called " cloth-lined " may be cut into stripe about
three-quarters of an inch wide and three inches long. Such a strip
is folded around the test-tube near the top, and the ends, brought
together, are held between the forefinger and thumb. In this way
the tube is firmly grasped, and can be held over the lamp without
much danger of burning the hand, as the paper eollar strip is a
bad conductor of heat ; or the paper atrip may be grasped in an
"American clothee-peg," which has a spring to force its parts
together. Large quontitiee of diatoms are best boiled in porcelain
evaporating dishes, glass flasks, or beaker glasses. The kat-mou-
tioned vessels are also by tar the best things for washing them in.
A few, say three or four, glass stirring-rods will be found useful ; and
one or two American clothes-pegs to take hold of hot evaporating
dishes with. Then there will be required a few dip-tubes, made of
small glass tube, drawn out over a flame, so that the opening is con-
siderably diminished. The mode of making these caimot be given
here, but will be found in books on chemical manipulation ; and it
will be well for the student to learn to make his own dip-tubes, as a
number will be required first and last, and they are easily broken.
Of course there will be required a nmnber of glass shdes of the
usual dimeiaions of three inches by one. These should be of as
white glass as possible, and it will be found beat to procure those
with ground edges, as they are the neatest in appearance. Only such
as are free from scratches or other blemishes in the central square
inch should be used ; and although even such m have bubbles or
scratches near the ends only will not look ornamental in a cabinet,
we should remember that microscopic objects are not generally
mounted to look well in a cabinet, but to be useful out of it ; so that
if the centra! and useful portion of the shda be perfect it need not
be rejected. Some persons make their own glass slides, but I have
never found it answer to do so, as it is difficult to get the right
iind of glass, not at all easy to cut it or grind the edges, and it is
liable to be scratched while cutting or grinding. Thin glass, such
as is made on purpose for microsoopie use, will bo required ; and
this, also, it will be found best to bay ready cut than attempt to cut
it for one's self. The thin glaaa uaol for covers may be of difl'erent
thicknesses, bat the thickest made will not do for diatoms, and a
certain amoant of the very thinnest will be required for small and
delicately marked forms, on which very high power objectives will
have to be used. The covers must be perfectly clean, which may
be ensnred by soaking in caustic potaasa solution, and then washing
thoroughly in clean water. The thinner kinds of glass are rather
difficult to clean ; but with a little eitra caution it may be accom-
plished, the last polish being given to it by a piece of an old and
230 How to prepare Specimens of IHaiomaceai for
well-worn cambric handkerchief. The covers, always round,
should be separated into sizes and thickaeeaes, so that the exact
kind of cover required can be found without having to search for it
by turning over a number, scratcliing or breaking them, and losing
much valnable time. We shall also require a pair of forcers for
holding the slides over the lamp ; and such as are sold at nouae-
fttmiahing stores and by grocers, under the name of American
clothes-pega, and whiclt have been already mentioned, are by fer
the best I have ever seen or heard of. A small pair of brass forceps
which close with a spring will he needed, and they are best set in a
wooden hajidle so as to protect the fingers from the heat; and
another pair, which spring open and may be closed by means of
the finger and thumb, will he wanted for taking hold of and adjust-
ing the thin covers. I do not advocate the use of paper covers for
slides, but labels of some kind will, of coarse, be required, and I
have found the plain circular white ones to look the best. There
are very pretty square labels sold by dealers in these things that I
have used and hked. For making ceils to bold specunens put up in
a fluid, a turn-tahle and brushes and some cement will he necessary.
The cement I use and prefer above all others is good old gold size
nsed warm.
The chemicals required are nitric acid, sulphuric acid, hydro-
chloric acid, bicliromaffi of pot-ash, caustic potash, alcohol, and,
above all, a plentiful supply of clean, filtered water. The water
should be such as leaves hardly any residuum when a quart
of it k evaporated to dryness ; and it must be filtered just before
use, to remove any minute organisms, diatoms especially, whidi it
may contain, A certain amount of washing soda will be wanted,
if guanos are to he cleaned.
We will now proceed to consider the manipulations necessary
to prepare the various kinds of gatherings, always remembering
that these methods will have to be modified to a certain extent ior
each specimen.
Recent Gaiherinffs. — If there be sand in the gathering, it will
be well to remove it before using aeid, by shaking it in clean water
and pouring off before the diatoms, which are lighter than the
sand, settle. The water holding the diatoms in suspension may be
poured into a test-tuhe, or beaker, the diatoms aUowed to settle,
and as much of the water poured off as possible. Tho diatoms are
now covered with nitric acid to about the height of half an inch,
and allowed to stand for a few minutes. Usually some chemical
action takes place, and it will be well to wait until it subsides. The
test-tube or beaker is then held over the lamp and carefully heated
until the reaction of tho aeid upon the organic matter of the
diatoms ceases. Thereafter, and while the liquid is still hot, I have
found it often advantageous to drop in one or two fragmente of
I Examination and Study hy tiieans of the Mieroacope. 231
bidiromate of potash. The orgEtnic matter ia more thorongUy
destroyed in this way than when the acid ia used alone. Thereafter
it is well t<) pour the acid and diatoms into a capacious heaker of
clean water, washing the tube or smaller beaker out with a little
crater, and adding this to the other. After the diatoms have all
settled, which will often require hours, the supernatant fluid is
carefully poured off, and a fresh supply added ; and this must be
repeated several times until all of the acid and coloured chromium
•compound has been removed. When this point is arrived at can
jjuly be ascertained from experience. In this way the valves and con-
iiecting membranes of the diatoms are nsually separated and cleaned
ieady for mounting, which pioceaa will be described hereafter.
Muda will hare to he treated in a somewhat different manner
from recent gatherings. If the mud ia dry, it will have to be
broken down by boiling for a few minutes in a solution of caustic
^^_ potaesa, the strength of which mast be apportioned to the particular
^^L specimen under treatment. After it has been broken down into a
^^■i^ft mad, ail of the potash is thoroughly washed off by means of
^^f dean water, and replaced by nitric acid, as in the case of recent
gatherings This is boiled, and a little bichromate of potash added
as before, and the whole washed. It very seldom happens that the
diatoms occurring in mud will be sufficiently cleaned by this process,
ISO that it has to be aapplemented by another. The sediment ia
jtherefore washed into one of the evaporating dishes and allowed to
iSettle, and as much of the water poured off as possible. Then
flulphnric acid, in quantity to a little more than cover them, is
ipoured in, and the vessel gradually and carefully heated. Ab soon
as the liquid shows signs of boiling, bichroma,te of potash is added,
a very little at a time, until the green colour first formed by its
leaction upon the organic matter begins to assume a yellowish tint,
■when no more is dropped in ; but a lew drops of hydrochloric acid
are permitted to fall in, and the liquid ia allowed to cool. Of course
it will be best if the person undertaking to clean diatoms is some-
iWhat versed in the use of chemicala ; but at any rate care must be
■taken not to drop any of the acids upon the clothes or skin, and
great caution must be exercised in not inhaling any of the vapours
given off. Those evolved after the addition of the hydrochloric acid
(tte especially irritating and dangei'ous, and must be avoided. Aa
60on as the hquid has cooled a little, water should be added
cautiously, as great heat will be generated thereby, and there will
«aJ)e danger of its boUiag over. Thereafter it may be poured into a
■Jargo beaker-gUss of water and thoroughly washed as in the former
KfiBse. If it be found that the precipitate is not quite white, it will
l^rjje necessary to boil it again in sulphuric acid, with bichromate of
^.^tash and hydrochloric acid, until it is quite clean. If, onesamina-
■lion by means of the microscope, it is found that there is much
232 How lo prepare Specimen* of Diatomaceie for
^^H 6occuleDt matter present besides the diatomB and sand, tbie can be
^^H removed by boiling for a few eeconda in a weak solution of canatic
^^1 potash, and waeliing quickly and thoroughly with plenty of clean
^^^ water. "ttTien we have recent gatherings of filamentous or etipitate
^^H fornu of Diatomaceffi, which we desire to preserve in the natnral
^^B condition, they should bo immersed for about twenty-four hoara in
^^M alcohol to dissolve out the endochrome. If this does not answer, it
^^M will be well to aoak the mass of diatoms or plants upon which they
^^m are adherent in a solution of hypochlorite of soda, an impure variety
^^M of which ie sold in the shops under the name of Labarracgue's disiu-
^^m fectant, for about the same length of time. This will generally
^^M destroy all colour, and leave the specimens transparent. It is best,
^^M however, in many cases not to remove the endochrome, but leave it,
^^M and mount the specimona in such a way as to show them in ss
^^^ natural a condition es possible. How this may be done will be
^^1 described hereafter.
^^B Guanos. — The preparation of these substances, so as to obtain
^^H the microscopic organisms they may contain, is rather dif&cult,
^^H tedious, and dirty, and should only be undertaken by a person
^^M somewhat versed in chemical manipulations, and in a proper room
^^M as a laboratory, where there is no danger of harm resulting from
^^B the fames evolved. As the ammoniacal guanos are those which
^* contain the most diatoms, and coDBequently which answer best to
clean, we will begin with them, and take as a type that which comes
from the islands on the coast of Peru. As it comes into commerce
this guano is a moist powder of a hght iron-rust colour, smelling
I strongly of ammonia, and having scattered throughout its mass
lumps of ammoniacal salts of a more or less solid consistency. The
guano should he thinly spread- out upon a stiff piece of paper and
exposed to the air, and, preferably, to a moderate heat for several
days or even weeks. In this way most of the moisture and much
of the ammonia will evaporate, and less acid will be required to
clean the gnano. It will now have become much hghter in colour,
and crumble to a dry powder. A tin pan is now about half filled
with a solution of common washing soda in clean filtered water,
and placed over some source of heat, as on a stove. The strength
I of tms solution is not a matter of any great moment, and must vary
with the guano manipulated, Aa soon as it begins to boil, the
guano is dropped gradually in, a httle at a time, while the hquid is
stirred with a glass rod or stick of wood. Considerable effervescence
takes place, anamonia being given off, and therefore it must be kept
continually stirred, and care exercised to prevent its boihng over-
After a while it is poured into a plentiful supply of clean water and
washed therewith several times, care being taken to permit all of
the diatoms to settle. As soon aa the wash-water is only slightly
coloured, the guano is transfen-ed to a good-sized evaporating dish,
[Examinaiion and Study by means of the Miei-oseo^e. 233
i covered with nitric acid, and boiled. While it is boiling, a few
— ystala of bichromate of potash are dropped in, and the material
washed as in the case of muds. Thereafter the diatoma are boiled
in sulphuric acid with bichromate of potash and hydrochloric acid,
as before described.
Phosphatic gnanoa, as that from Brazil, are somewhat more
difficnlt to treat. They are generally drier than the ammoniacal
kind, and mnat be boiled in a krge quantity of hydrochloric acid as
Pmany as three timea, and the acid mast be poured off while atUl hoi.
Thereafter nitric acid and sulphuric acid and bichromate of potash
BitiBt be employed, as in the other caae.
Lacustrine Sedimentary Deposits. — For the most part these
are pulverulent, and easy to clean. Some, as found in nature, are
80 pure that thej require no cleanin g except washing in clean water.
Burning on a plate of platinum or mica will often serve to clean
some specimens ; but it will, in general, be found beat to boil in nitric
acid with a httle bichromate of potash, and subsequently in sulphuric
acid and bichromate of potash, with the after addition of hydro-
chloric acid. Occasionally a certain amount of flocculent matter
' will be left, which it will be necessary t« remove with very careful
' siting, not boiling, in a weak solution of caustic potash, and
amediately pouring into a large quantity of clean water and
loronghly waehing.
Marina Fossil aiid Svh-Fluionie Deposits, being stony, and
ossessed of very much the aame physical characters, are manipu-
lated in the same manner. A smatl lump of the deposit is placed
in a test-tube, and covered vrith a strong solution of caustic potash.
It is then boiled for a few minutes, and usually it immediately begins
to break up and fall dovm in the shape of a soft mnd-hke material.
At once the hquid, with the sUBpended fine powder, is poured off
into a large quantity of clean hot water, and if the whole of the
lump has not broken down into a powder, what remains has a little
water poured over it in the test-tube, and it is again boiled. It will
be found that a httle more will now crumble off. This is added to
the rest in the large vessel, and if the lump has not now broken
down, it is again boiled in the alkaline solution and in water alter-
nately, until it has all been disintegrated. It is then all permitted
to settle for at least three hours, when it ia thoroughly washed and
boiled in hydrochloric acid for about half an hour. There is then
added an equal amount of nitric acid, and the boiling continued for
a short time. It is then washed and heated in sulphuric acid^ with
the addition of bichromate of potaah and hydrochloric acid.
All mixed gatherings of Diatomaceie, and particularly all muds
and deposits, should be separated into densities, so that for the moat
part the larger forms are collected together, Iree from sand, and
separate from the smaller species and broken specimens. This is
r
L
234 Hoxv to prepare Specimem of Biatomacem for
done by tismg a number of beaker glaBses, of various sizes, in tbe
following manner : — Into a 1 -ounce beaker the cleaned diatomB
are placed, and the vessel filled with water. It is theu well etirred
up % means of a glass rod, and, after resting about five seconds,
poured ofi* carefully into a 6-OTmce vessel so as not to disturb the
sand which has settled. Again the vessel is filled up with water,
etirred, allowed to settle for the same length of time, and poured
into the same vessel. This is repeated until it has been done at
least six times, wheu we shall find all of the Baud, free from diatoms,
in the small beaker. This can be thrown away, and as soon as the
material in the large beaker has settled it is returned to the small
one, and the same process goue through with, only extending the
time of settling now to about ten seconds. The next density is
that which settles in twenty seconds ; and so od, five or six denaitiea
may be obtained, and if carefully prepared they will be found to
contain forms varj-ing very much one from the other. The large
species of Triceraiium, Aulacodiscus, and the hke, will be found in
the coatsest density, and the broken diatoms in (jie lightest.
Preserving and Mounting Specimem so as to have them in a
condition for slndt/ at any future time. — Of coarse, when possible,
Diatomaceae should be etndied in the living condition. But there
are many forms which have not been as yet found living, and these
can only be studied aa dead skeletons; and, in feet, it is in the dead
skeletons of the Diatomac(?ffi that many of the most marked charac-
teristics are to be tbund; and on such characteristics species have
been founded. Besides, the most beautiful sculpturing of the valves
is only to be seen after everything has been removed but the
silicious cell-wall I have termed the skeleton. Therefore I advocate
the cleaning of a portion at least of every gathering in the manner
described, so that nothing will be left but the clean silicious cell- wall.
If we desire to keep specimens in a state as near that they
present when Uving as possible, we have to put them in some
preservative fluid in which they will not decay, and in which the
softer parts vrill be preserved. Unfortunately these soft parts do
not keep well ; but tne fluid which I have found to be the best for
the purpose is distilled water, which has to every fluid onnce two
or three drops of wood creosote added, and thereafter a sufScient
number of drops of alcohol, which will be about double the number
of the drops of creosote, to mate the creosote soluble in the water,
which it is ouly to a very slight degree under ordinary conditions.
I do not advocate any fluid containing glycerine, or, in fact, any of
the preservative fluitk described in the books treating of the pre-
paration of microscopic objects. The vessels in which the fresh
specimens of Diatomaceje are put up are what are known to micro-
acopists as " cells," but how these are made cannot be gone into
here, as the deacription would occupy too much sijace and time.
^ npo
Suffice it to aay that I prefer cells made of old japan gold-size,
which can be procured of dealers in microgcopic materials. Within
BTich a cdl, of sufficient depth and immersed in the preseryative
fluid, a few of the diatoms, or a scrap of the phmt upon which they
are growing, is placed, and the glass cover fixed over it in the
manner described in the books upon manipulation. The fllamen-
toag forma are thna preserved almost in their natural condition;
but, on account of the presence of the endochrome, the sculpturing
of the silicions cell-wall is almost invisible. To show this
character, while the filamentona form ia preserved, another method
of mounting is employed. A thin, clean covering glass is selected,
and laid upon a clean piece of paper, A large drop of distilled
water is then allowed to MX upon it, and in this drop the filamen-
tous diatom is thinly spread out. Then the cover ia taken up by
means of a pair of tbrceps and held over the flame of a spirit lamp,
which has been turned down so as to ho quite small and steady.
The cover is held some distance above the flame, and judiciously
manipulated, so that the heat is evenly distributed oyer it, and it
dops not crack. As soon aa all the water has been driven off with-
out the formation of bubbles, the glass is brought gradually down
almost in contact with the flame, and held at that point for a few
minutes. Then the diatoms will be seen to turn black, on account
of the chaning of the organic matter contained in them. Aft«r a
while this black carbonaceous matter will burn off, and they will
become quite white. If, however, there seems to be any difficulty
in burning off the last portion of carbon, the cover is lowered once
or twice to come in contact with the top of the flame, and then
raised again. In this way it will become red hot for a moment ;
and everything will be burned off except the silieioua portJona of
the diatoms. Now the cover ia removed slowly from over the
flame, and held hi the forceps until it is cold, but by no means kid
down upon any surface until it is quite cold, otherwise it will fly
into pieces. Then it can be laid upon an ordinary glass slide, and
examined to see if it is worth preserving, which may be done in
one or two waya: first, the glass cover is warmed, and a drop of
good spirits of turpentine let fell upon it, covering the diatoms.
Just before the spirits evaporate, a small drop of thin Canada
balsam is added, and a sHde taken, warmed, and a drop of balsam
placed upon the centre part of it. Then the cover ia brought down
upon the slide, the two balsam-covered sides together, in such a
,y, by tilting the cover shghtly, that no air is allowed to come
tween them, and the cover permitted to fiJl gradually into place,
iving a wave of balsam before it. In this way we have the
filamentous diatoms arranged as they grow, but with lendochiome
removed which would obscure the marSngs, and in balsam, which
rendera them transparent. Boms forms, as some of the
I
I
How to prepare Speeimem q
FragUlarUe, become too tranaparent if put up in this way, and
therefore another method of mounting must be adopted with tliem,
They are burned upon the cover, aa just described, but mounted
dry in air ; that ie to say, a cell of gold size is made, the glass
cover Bliehtly warmed, and then placed upon the cell, with the side
upon which the diatoms are fixed, downwards. The warmth
slightly softens the gold size, and the cover becomes fixed.
Other forma besides the filamentous speciea may be mounted in
fluid, or burned upon the cover and subsequently put up in balsam,
or dry. But the commonest way of treating such forms is to clean
them by means of chemicals, as already described, and then,
previous to monnting them, divide the clean gathering, consisting of
a white sediment of large and small diatoms along with fine sand,
all mixed up together into densities. Of course, if some of thia
sediment were to be moanted in this condition, extremely unsightly
slides would be procured ; so it ia best to separate the finer from
the coarser diatoms, and these in turn from the sand. This is
accomplished by what is known as elatriation, or, separating into
densities after the manner already described. Then slides may be
mounted from each of the denaitiea in the following manner. A
slide is thoroughly cleaned, and a good-sized drop of water placed
npon the centre portion. A httlo of the diatom sediment ia then
taken np in a dip-tube, and the point of the tube brought just into
contact with the drop. As soon as a few diatoms have run out of
the dip-tube, it is removed. Then a small splinter of wood or stiff
bristle is naed to disseminate the diatoms through the drop of water
in such a way that they will be pretty evenly distributed and not
overlie each other. The water ia then driven off by heat, a drop of
thin Canada balsam placed upon the dry diatoms, and a cover
placed on them in the usual manner. In many cases, especially
when dealing with the smaller forms, it will be found desirable to
mount them upon the cover in this same way, instead of upon the
ahde, as they will then be brought as near as possible to the
objective of the microscope. Single or remarkabre specimens of
diatoms may be picked out and mounted by themselves ; but the
manner of accomplishing thia would occupy more space than it has
been thought deanable to devote to thia portion of our Bubject, and
the reader is referred to the hooka on mounting microscopic objecta
for the particulars of the process.
The main principles of preparing and mounting DiatomaceiB
for preservation and study haTe been given, and the intending
student will be able to devise modifications and improvements for
himself, so that he will be able to put up specimens in aa finished
a manner as any to be procured from the dealers. — From the
He^ort of (he Geological Survey of New Hampshire, vol. i.
( 237 )
NEW BOOKS, WITH SHOET NOTICES.
The Anatomy of the Lymphatic System, By E. Kleiu, M.D.,
t^LfifiietaBt FrofeesoF at the Laboratory of the Brown Institution,
T liondon. I. The Serous Membriuies. London ; Smith, Elder, and Co.,
|,J873. — -Some of the reanltB of the observationB described in this
oir were published in 1872, in the JanuATy numbers of the ' Cen-
tralblatt fiir die MediciniGchen Wissonschafteu.' Dr. Klein has since
that time carried his obBervations farther, and is of opinion that the
anatomy of the aeroua membranes, so far at lenst aa their lymphatic
system is concerned, may bo regarded as complete. The present
work deals with the minute stracture of the omentum, the centrum
tendincum of the diaphragm, and the mediastinal pleura, both in their
normal and pathological conditions.
It ia almost impossible to criticize a book of this nature. The
Teutonic carcfulnosB, which insists on a knowledge of all contemporary
work on a given subject, precludes almost any farther inquiry into
fiicta and arguments adduced on one aide or the other, where the only
possible proof ia a repetition of the writer's work and esperiments.
And it is only the careful histologist who can verify or pull to pieeea
such work as Dr. Klein's. Merc bibliographical research, with the
addition of one or more presTtmably new facts, not necessarily sup-
porting, or even antagonistic to, some etatod test, ia certainly too
common a characteristio of authors in Gennan " Archive " and " Zeit-
sehriften." But no such fault is viaihle here. The facts observed are
stated plainly and severely ; the opinions of others put forward with
fairness, whether they agree or differ with those of the writer ; the
conclnaions of the observer himself offered modestly, though with no
lack of firmness.
In his first chapter he points out that on the serous membranes
fin certain regions there is normally to be seen a germmating endo-
thelium. For instance, the fenestrated portion of the omentum in
Tarious animals shows numbers of cells which are raised from the
general surface by means of a stalk, and which possess in their peri-
pheral spherical portion two nuclei or a nucleus in a state of division ;
and besides tho appearance of eonstriction, and division of these poly-
hedral or club-shaped endothelial cells, there are always numbers of
smaller spherical lymphoid elements which are detached from the
surface, that is to say, which have bccomo perfectly separated. The
same character is possossed by the endothelium of the surface of
certain nodular or cord-like structures, which arc either isolated or
in connection with tho chief trabeciilfO of the fenestrated part of
the omentum, in which larger blood-vessels or fat are contained. In tho
second chapter, in which he discusees the cellular elements of tho
ground-substance (matrix, basis-substance), ho shows that the knots
and cords are not exactly to be regarded as pro-oiisting adenoid
tissue, nor' as collections of lymph- corpuscles, but that they are
developed for the most part out of the ordinary branched cells of tho
I
^^L the mt>
^^H oettain
^^H rabbits
NKW D00K9, WITH SnORT NOTICES.
tiBBae — in fact, as " peri-lympbiLngial nodulos and tracts;" and that
the briber the ileTelopment is advanced the more nnraeroufi are the
lymph-oorpuBcles at the spot — tbo more does the cellular network
aesame the character of an adenoid network. From their topo-
graphical arrangement they are analogues of the fat tifisne of the
omentum; and the writer considers at length their conversion into &t
nodalca and tracts. In the third chapter ho describes the Ijmphatio
Ycsscis of the serous membranes, their relation to the enrface of the
latter, and the development of lymphatic capillaries. He distingoiehee
two kinds of stomata on the surface of the serous membranes, stonutta
vera and stomata spuria or pseiido-stomata, the former representing
cither the mouth of a vertical lymphatic channel, or a discontinuity of
the ondotheliam of the Burfaco. Ho points out also that normaUy
in tbo omentum and the mediastinal pleura, knots and cords originate
by the outgrowth of the endothelium of the lymphatic capiUariee as a
network of branched cells from which young cells spring. The fourth
chapter is taken up with the clistribution of blood-vessels in tha
Ijonphangial nodnles and cords, and the development of blood capil-
laries. The principle according to which the latter takes place he
finds to be similar to that which was first pointed out by Strieker in
the new formation of blood-vessels in the tadpole and in inflammation,
and confirmed in every prticulai by Arnold afterwards. In a patch
in which there is a considerable number of young vessels one capillary
may easily be found which ends coscally. At the coical end the proto-
plaismio character of the wall may be recognized very clearly; the
lumen becomes mote or less suddenly narrowed, the wall finally
becomes solid, and passes into a perfectly ordinary nucleated brancbra
cell of the matrix. In the second section he sketches hriefiy the views
of different writers on inflammation and artificial tuberculosis, and
shows that they are all, more or less, borne out by bis own description
of the normal serous membranes. For instance, Eanvicr and Kundrat
confirm the germination of the endothelium in inflammation of these
tissues, and the latter considers the miliary nodules on the serotia
membranes in tuberculosis to be derived irom the same source.
Sanderson holds that there is a pre-existing adenoid tissue in tdie
omentum, in the form of nodules and cords, which increases to an.
extraordinary extent in chronic Inflanunation, so that tbo nodules and
cords of tubercle found in artificial tuberculosis are nothing bot
hyperplastic adenoid tissue, Kiiauff's views on the some subject are
precisely similar ; while Elebs declares that in the same aflcction tlio
lymphatic vessels play a most important part, their endothelium pro-
liferating, and thus composing the tubercle-knot. The book closes
with the observations of the author himself on the changes found in
these serous membranes in acute and chronic peritonitis; and in an
interesting, though somi^bat abrupt tailpiece to a most interesting
volume, a fact is mentioned which has bearings somewhat different to
the intended scope of the book, the occurrence, namely, of the ova of
certain entozoa in the lymphatics of the omentum and mesentery of
rabbits and cats,
For reasons stated at the commencement of this article, we have
PBOGBBBS OF HIOBOSOOPtOAJi SCIENCE. 239
rpOBoly contontod ourselveB with abstracting, as far ns possible in
e words of the author, the matter of this work. The Govemmeiit
rant Committee of the Boyal Sociotj are able to congratulate
emselves on having furnished the means for the eiecution of the
psnmerouq plates, which to our eyes are better, as being less hard,
flian the engravings attached to ' The Handbook f()r the Physiological
Laboratory.' It seeme almost a pity — though it may be caviUing
about a minor matter — that eo handsome a volume as that under
notice ahonld be somewhat spoiled by certain faults of idiomatic
style, which no one, we are sure, would more willingly have overcome
than the writer himself. To the same absence of caiefnl supervision
on the part of a friend arc probably due one or two obvious misprints,
perhaps scarcely worth mentioning. Bnt the work adds one more to
the numerous causes of self-congratnlation with wliich the English
scientific world rejoices over the connection of Dr. Klein with tho
Brown Institution.
I
PROGRESS OF MICROSCOPICAL SCIENCE.
The Egg-peduneles of certain TTotTiw. — Professor Mocbius figures
ftnd describes a new genus of chtctopod worms with external ovarieH
from the eighteenth segment onwards ; tboy ore situated below the
branchiie, and at the boundary between tho two segments. Within the
body-wall in the same segments are also eggs. The worm is named
ietpocems uviferitm. Moobius has discovered that another worm
{Scolecolepia drrata Sars) carries its eggs in pouches like a swallow's
neet, along the hinder segments of the body. Many Polychetoua
worms bear their eggs in sacs attached to the ventral surface of tho
body (o. g. Aulolgcug prollfer Miill.). One (SyUis puUigera Krohn)
carries them in the shorter dorsal filaments of its foet, while in
Spirorbis gpirillum the eggs are carried in folds of the skin, developed
in the peduncle of the operculum, with which it closes its tahe.
To>%aria, the young of a Worm, — It is stated in the 'American Na-
tmiilist ' for July, that Mr. Alexander Agassiz has discovered that the
Tornaria, an iuunature microscopic floating auimal, which he in common
with other naturalists had thought to be a young starfisb, is really
a young worm, The parent is a remarkable worm, found at difiereut
points on the American coast and thnt of Europe, burrowing in sand,
and described by the celebrated Italinn zoologist Delle Ghiaje. The
history of Balanoglossua as given by Agasaiz " while showing great
analogy between the development of Eehinoderms and the Nemertian
worms, by no means proves the identity of type of tho Echinoderras
and Annnloids. It is undoubtedly tho strongest case known which
could bo taken to prove their identity. Bnt when we come carefully
to analyze the anatomy of true Echinnderm larvte, and compare it with
that of Tornaria, we find that we leave as wide a golf as ever between
240 PROflBESS OF mOBOBCOPIOAL SCIENCE.
the Btmctnra of the EclmiodermB ami tlint of tlio Annuloicls." Now
the young of certain EchinodemiB have a form very similar to larval
worms. " On thia chiefly Professor Husley, mislod by tbo names given
by J. Muller to Bome of these larvffi, has revived the old opinion
of Oken, and aesooiatod the Euliinoderma with the Articulates
he based his opinion entirely upon the figures of Miiller, and not
npon original investigations, his conohisiona, which have been adopted
by the majority of English naturalists, do not appear to Mr. Agassiz
OS tenable. The hypothetical form to which iHuxley reduces these
larvie, to mako his compariGons and to draw his inferences, ia one
which has never been observed, and as far as we now know does not
exist" Mr. Agassiz's paper, with many beautiful figures, appeals
the ' Memoirs of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences.'
The Stmclure of the Cornea. — This has been very well investigated
1:^ Dr. Thin, who haa oonimunicated a paper on the subject, through
I^fessor Huxley, to the Royal Society. The paper appears
last number but one of the ' Proceedings of the lloyal Society,' The
author says, referring to his former paper,* that in " order to
oorroboratQ the results yielded mo by the nitrate of silver,
KTSiled myself of the well-known property which hromatosylin p
Bosses of specially staining th« nuclei of cells. I allow the cor
to remain in the solution until it is perfectly saturated. Subsequent
maceration in acetic Bcid removes the hiematosylin from the flbrillary
substance before it bleaches the nuclei. On comparing a cornea so
treated with Buceessful preparations of the comea-corpusclea as
obtained by chloride of gold, it is found that the number of cells
demonstrated by the hematoxylin exceeds by several times that found
in the gold preparation, affording direct proof of the existence of other
cells in tho cornea than those known as the coruea-corpuHclo
vertical section of the cornea is so treated by hromatoxylin and acetio
Bcid, in many of tho clefts of the fibrillary substance, in which,
well known, the eornea-corpusclea are situated, several nuclei arc
proving in another way the existence of a greater number of cells than
those hitherto ooceptod by anatomists. But in addition to the proof
afforded by staining the anclei of the cells, I have, by the application
of a new method, been able to isolate (and thus demonstrate beyond
all further possibility of doubt their existence in the cornea) a large
number of cellular elements, the varied size and shape of which
distinguish them not only from the cornea-corpuscles, but irom any
anatomical structures that have been as yet described. If a cornea is
placed in a saturated solution of caustic potash, at a temperature
between 105° and 115° Fahrenheit, it is reduced in a few minutes 1'
B white granulated mass of about a fourth of its previous bulk. In _
small piece of the diminished twmea, broken down with a needle an(
examined imder the microscope in the same fluid, it is found that t
only visible elements ore a great number of cells. If the oonjunctiT
epithelium of the cornea has not been previously removed, the oeUa
that stmctiire can be recognized amongst the others ; and if the nu
under examination has not been too much bi-oken up in monipnlatu
♦ ' Lfitteet.' Feliriimy H.
groups of thoio may bo scon in diroct anatomioal continuity with long
narrow flat coUa, which belong to the olomoEta that Imvo been for tho
first time brought to light by the .potaeh solntion. But the cclle of
the ftnttirior or surface epithelium form a very small proportion of tho
nnmbor. The smallest pioco that can be removed by the neodlo from
a cornea which, before being pnt into the Bolutioo, Las had this
epithelium scraped off and Deecemet's membrane removed, shows -
under the microscope a multitude of cells. Of the branched cor<
puscles, the fibrillary substance, and nerves, not a trace is visible.
The form of those colls is so various that it would be difficult to con-
struct a series of types under whioh every individual coll could bo
brought. They seem in their development to have asaumod any modi-
fication of form that is nccesaary to enable them to fit aconratoly the
cavities and fibrillary bundles to which they are applied. Those
whoso outlines do not permit tbair being accwately described as
belonging to a strictly defined type, are many of them somewhat
quadrangular or triangular in form, or club-shaped, with a short or
long projecting process. Of fised and definite typos are long narrow
roils, ending obliqaely at the point, and oblong cells interseotM at one
end by a notch, which receives the estromitiea of two of the long cells
that lie parallel to each other. I do not attempt to give an oxhaustivo
account of tho various forms assumed by these cells. A bettor idea
than can bo given by any description will be got by on examination of
figs. I, 2, 3, plate viii., in which many of them ore represented; but
an examination of tho first^prepared cornoa will show that there are
L many forms and modifications which have not been drawn. The cells
WKe granular in appearance, with shftrp clear outlines. Tho terminal
r nu'faces of the long cells can often l>e seen to be finoly serrated ; and
BO closely do they fit each other at these points, that sometimes a high
magnifying power is necessary to discover the suture'liko line by
which the junction is indicated. The nuclei of all the cells have
nearly the tuune length, but in the narrower cells the nucleus is often
much compressed transversely. The long cells ore many of them
O'O'J inillim. long, and from 0'006-0*003 millim. broad ; the shorter
cells are broader. Those O'Ofi millim. long are generally about
0'009 millim. brood. A length of 0'S6 millim. with a breadth of
about 0-015 millim. is common; others are 0-03 millim. long and
0-012 millim. broad. I have chiefly examined the cells in the cornea
of the ox, sheep, and frog, and have found no important differenceB
_ either in sliape or arrangement. In "examining portions of the cornea
pbich have biion as little disturborl as is consistent with the maiu-
mauee of trunsporeucy, groups of cells are found massed together
■ ^n(%a8 thoy havo heiax loft by the dissolving out of the GbriUary
* ■' ' ' " iro fonnd chiefly in two forms.
epithelium are found sutured to
me« seem U> join them at an angle.
t.lk tingle layer of oolls are found
Mite sides tho external
r oells, to which
i^Meli otlier. Those
s 2
I
242 FBOaSESS of UICROSCOPtOAI. BGIENCE.
from ench Bide rospeotively meet in tlio centre, whore they join. Tbe
remaining aides of tUe qnadrangle are formed by a side view of these
various celle, where they have been detached from the adjoining ones
in the breaking down of the cornea mass. The coincidence between
the breadth of the long narrow colls and the fibrill&ry bundles of tho
oomoa-aubatanee, as seen when prepared by the ordinary methods, ie
evident, the coutinuons planes formed by their junction indicating
that they form layers between which it is enclosed. According to this
view, the groand~Bnbstance is everywhere encased in a sheath of
cellular elements. Bowman's corneal tubes I believe to include both
the straight canals described in the paper above referred to and the
spaces between the long celle widened by injection, chiefly the latter.
Although I have nothing to add to the description of the mode of pre-
paration which I have already given, I must state that there are con-
ditions of snccoBS, as to the nature of wbich I have not yet come to a
definito conclueion. Sometimes the same solution, applied at the same
temperature to different comeie, succeeds in one and fails in another,
and sometimes a solution prepared with every precaution has failed to
afford me any result. The two essential conditions to snccess are
complete saturation and temperature. 1 have never succeeded with a
temperature above 120°, nor with one below 102°; and so sensitive is
the solution to moisture, that preparations sealed in it with asphalte
seldom keep longer than one or two days, except in very dry weather.
On a damp day I have known a sncceasful preparation left on tbo
object-glass disappear in sii hours. The corneal moss may be kept
unaltered for at least some weeks in the solution by running ecaling-
wai round the stopper of the bottle. A perfectly successful prepara-
tion shows nothing but the cells. TJnsTiecossfnl preparations, especially
those prepared with too hot solution, show globular masses nnlike
any anatomical element ; others, especially those prepared at too low
a temperature, or with imperfect eaturation, show masses of hexagonal
crystals like those of cystin. To sum np, I believe that there eiisfa
in the cornea : — I,, the fibrillary ground-substance, which is pierced
by straight canals and honeycombed with cavities ; II., flat cells,
which everywhere cover the fibrillary bundles of the former and lino
the entire system of the latter ; III., the cornea -corpuscles of Toynbee
and Virchow; and IV., the nerve-structures of the tisane. The
comeo-oorpuscles and the nervee lie free in the canals and cavities,
and between them and the epithelium there is a fluid-filled space
■which permits the passage of lym'ph-corpuscles. It is therefore proper
to regard the canals, cavities, and interfibrillary spaces as forming a
continnouB and integral part of the lymphatic system, the latter
having to the former the same relation that blood-capillaries have to
the veins. The junction of the flat cells of the fibrillary substance
with the epithelium of the surface justifies the inference that the
intercellular spaces in the anterior epithelium of the cornea oommu-
nioate with the lymph-spaces in the ground-substance, and that the
position of nerve-fibrillte between the epithelium is a continuation of
the similar relation that has been demonstrated in the substance of the
PBOQBEBS OV UIOBOBOOFIOAI. 8CISS0S. 243
A Special Mode of Development in ButToehia.-^la a lato numbCT of
tho ' Academy' appeared a notice of some importance on tliis eiibjeat.
It saya that in a letter printed ia the ' Eovne Scientificiue,' M. JnlOB
Onmier comniimicates Bome remarkable observationB that have bcoa
made by M. Baray on certain Hylodea which esist in largo numbera
in tho ifiland of Guadaloupe. These animals arc widely distribated
over the island, being found, not only near the aoa, but in the higher
lands of the interior, and after rain tlieir croalf miikes the air TeBonant.
The physical features of Guadalonpe, a volcanic ielanil, tho soil of
which ia composed of t\if&, pozzuolaua, and similar material, are so
pecnliar and so very imfavourahlo for the maintenance of tadpole life,
which IB cBBentially piscine, that M, Eaniy was led to expect tho
eiiBtence of some peculiarities of development. The ova were easily
procured, as they were everywhere present under moist leaves. No
tadpoles could be discovered, but many of the frogs were of an extra-
ordinarily minute size. The eggs were spherical, with a diameter of
from 3 to 4 millimetres, and were each provided with a small spheroidal
expansion resembling a hernia of the gelatioous mass through a pore
in the envelope. In the centre of the sphere the embryo was visible,
lying on a vitelline mass of a dirty white colour, and having a thin
body, a largo head and four atyliform members with a recurved tail,
[ When the egg was touched the embryo moved rapidly and changed
I its position, A day later the embryo was perfect, with a tail as long
as tho body, translucent and like that of a tadpole. The limbs
I imroeiiatoly formed, and at the expiration of a few days little frogs of
I -a dark greyish brown colour, and without a vestige of a tail, escaped
I ftom the egg. M. Baray's observations have established the following
fccts :— (1) That this Sylodes Martinieensis commences Ufe by a
1 ttjtatory movement of the future embryo. (2) The folly formed
I embryo performs the rotatory movements more rapidly, but in a
I faoi'izontal plane. (3) The branclua) make their appeamnce, and
again vanish sometime afterwards, (i) The larva in the ovum is
i provided with a tail and limbs. (6) The tail of the larva not only
&cilitates the movements of the imprisoned animal, but also aids
I Tespiitttion by the numerous and minute vessels which ramify in this
highly developed appendago. (6) The animal issues from the ^g in
tho form which it preaerves throughout life. As M. Gamier observes,
these observations seem to constitute a starting-point for a special
invcBtigation of great importance, and have a close relation to the
Iqnestion of the adaptability of speciea to surrounding conditions. It
may be asked in this case whether the frog has been created with
special modifications adapting it to live in an island destitute of
jnarshes, or has it in coarse of time acquired a new mode of dovolop-
ment enabling it to Burvive under tho exceptional conditions under
which it has been placed.
IHscovery of the Pogition of the Bee't Sling. — Mr. A. S. Packard, Jan.,
makes the fellowing obsorvations in a late nnmher of the ' American
Naturalist,' and as theyhiiveanimportiintclaim to priority of discovery,
tlioy deserve a placo here. Ho saya that in '■ Siebold and Kolliker'S
' Journal of Scientific Zoology ' for July, 1872, contaimug an account
244
I^OQBBSS OF mCEtOBOOPIOAL SCXEKOE.
I
of tho Proceedings of tbo Zuological DiviBion of tlio tliird meeting of
tlie RaBsiaa ABstKiatiou of Naturalists, at Kicw, is an alietract of a
paper by Onljanin on the development of tho ating of the boe. Tho
anthor deaoribes but tiro pairs of imaginal disks, while threo were
diMiovei'ed and described by the undersigned in 18C6. Tbo author
homologizee the elements of the sting with tbo feet, as had already
been done by me in 1871. Soon afterwards Dr. 0. Kraepelin pub-
lished an elaborate article on the structure, mechanism and develop-
mental history of the sting of the bee. In speaking of the origin of
tho ating,* he only refers to Ganiu'a observations made in vol, sis. of
the same Journal (1869). Dr. Kraopolin sooms to have overlooked the
writer's papers I on the origin of tbo ating of the bee and ovipoaitor of
other insects (jEBokaa. and Agrion) published in 1866 and 1868, the
observations and drawings having been made in 18G3."
TTte Mouili of the Dragon-fly. — Mr. Packard has also the following
note in the same number of the ' American Naturalist ' as the above
|)nragrapli is taken &om : — " An imporiant article on the mouth parts
of the ctftgon-fly, Perlse and allied forms (Orlhoptera amphibiotica), is
published by Di'. Gerstaecker, in the memorial volume of the Cen-
tennial Celebration of the Society of the Friends of Science in Berlin,
1873. Tbo author describes and figures the palpi of the dragon-flies.
They poBsees a one-jointed masillary palpas, and 2-jointod labial
pidpua, which are not however in the masillie palpiform, bat con-
atitute a simple lobo (galea of Burmeister, Erichson and Eatzbui^).
In llagen's ' Synopsis of Nouroptora of North America ' (1861) it is
stated ' mouth not furnished with palpi.' This statement, which is '
morphologically inexact, was copied in the ' Guide to the Study of
Insects.' It will bo corrected in the flfth edition of the latter, as it
was unfortunately too lato to correct the statement in the fourth
edition, now passing through the press, except in a few words in the
preface."
Tli6 Plan of Descent of Ihe Animal ^^iiiydom.— The following is
given as a rude outline of the plan sketched out by Professor Haeckel.
Regarding the sponges as consisting of two layers of cells, surround-
ing a body cavity, sumowhot as in the Hydra, Haeckel compares the
sponge to the embryos of the higher animals, both vertebrate and
invertebrate. In bis view the germ of all aniiuals, and the adult of
such a simple form as Hydra, may bo reduced to the simple form of
tbo young of a calcareous sponge which ho calls OoBlnila. " The
• P. 3!
., 1873.
■ t " ObaecvationB on the DovBlopment and Position of tho Hymenopfera, with
notes on the MorpholoCT of InBecta," 'Proceedings Boston Sooiety, N. H,'
pabliBhed May, 1866. ''On the Strncture of the Ovipoaitor and Homologous
Patta in the Male Insect," ' Proceedings BoBton Sooiety, N. H.,' voL xi., puliti^ed
in 1868. 'Goidc la the Btady of Infloctn,' 18C9, pp. H, 536. " Binbryologiral
Sfndies on Diplax, PBcithemiB, and the Thysamirons genua Isotoma,'" 'MemrarB
Peahody Aondemy of BcienoB," 1871, p. 20. Here the spring of the Poduiidw Ib
homologized with a pair of hlades of the ovipiieitor of the bee, &o., and tho
ovipositor regnrded m homologous with tlio apmucroia of spiderB and abdominal
ti.'et of niyriapiidfl.
Y Qaslmla I coneidor as the biieet and most eignificoat embryonal form
of tlie animal kingdom." It leads in his view to the eponges, to the
Acalepha;, to the worms, to the ech-inodcnoB, to the molluBka, end to
the vertebrates, through AmphioxuB. Embryonal forma which may
easily be traced from Qaetrula, occur among the Arthropods (Crustacea
as well as Insects). In all these representatives of diflbieat stocks of
animals, the Qasirula always maintains the same Bttncture. From
this identity ia fonn of the Gastr}da with the representatives of the
different aninml stocks (or sab-kingdome), from the sponges up to the
Tertebrates, he imagines an unknown stem-form of animals, typified
I by Gaatmla, which he calls Gaalrcea.
I Becenl Seep-gea Dredgings hy the ' CJiallenger,' ^The following
extremely interesting letter which was sent from Professor Wyville
Thomson to Admiral Richards, has been published by the latter in a
late number of the ' Proceedings of the Koyal Society.' The Professor
says :~" I have the pleasure of informing you that, during our voyage
from the Cape of Good Hope to Anstralia, all the necessary ohserva-
. tions in matters bearing upon ray department have been made most
snccesafully at nineteen principal stations, suitably distributed over
the track, and including Marion Island, the neighbourhood of the
I Crozots, Kerguelen Island, and the Heard group.
I " After leaving the Cape several dredginga were taken a little to
I the southward, at depths from 100 to 150 fathoms. AniTtinl life was
' very abundant; and the result was remarkable in this respect, that
I the general character of the faana was very similar to that of the
North Atlantic, many of the gpeeies even being identical with those on
I the coasts of Great Britain and Norway. The first day's dredging was
1 1900 fathoms, 125 miles to the Bouth-wostword of Cape Agulhas;
I it was not very successfnl.
L " Marion Island was visited for a few hours, and a considerable
L oolloetion of plante, including nine flowering species, waa made by
I Ur. Moseley, These, along with collections from Kerguelen Island
[ snd from Yong Island, of the Heard gronji, are sent home with
Mr, Moseley'a notes, for Dr. Hooker's information.
I " A shallow-water dredging n*ar Marion Island gave a large
I number of species, again representing many of the northern types, but
\ with a mixture of southern forms, such as many of the characteristic
I southero Bryozoa and the curious genus Serolis among Crustaceans.
] Off Prince Edward's Island the dredge brought up many large and
I striking specimens of one or two Bpecies of Alcyonarian zoophytes,
I allied to Mopaea and Isie.
I " The trawl was put down in 1375 fathoms on the 29th December,
I and in 1600 fathoms on the 30th, between Prince Edward's Island
1 and the Crozeta. Tho number of species taken in those two hauls waa
I very large; many of them belonged to espoeially interesting genera,
I Knd many were new to acience. I may mention that there occurred,
I with others, the well-known genera Euphcfella, Hyalonema, TJmhell»-
I laria, and FlabcUum ; two entirely new genera of stalked Crinoids
I belonging to tho Apiocrtnidie ; Pottrtakiia ; several Spatangoids now
r
I
I
246 PEOGitias OP mcnoacopicAi. bciencb.
to science (allied to the o^ttinc.t gcnne Ananchyleg) ; Salenia; eevcral
remarkable GTuetaceniiE ; nsd a few fish,
" We nero uBfoitunately unable to land on PoBsession Island on
account of the weather; but we dredged in 210 fathoms and 550
fathoms, about 18 milos to the S.'W. of the island, with a satisfactory
result. We reached Kcrgnelen Island on the 7th of January, and
remained there until the Ist of February. During that time Dr. y.
Willemoes-Suhm was chiefly occupied in working out the land fauna,
Mr. Moseley collected the plants, Mr. Buchanan mode observations
on the geology of those parts of the island which we visited, and
Mr. Murray and I ctorieii on the shallow-water dredging in the
steam-'pinnoce- Hony observations were made, and large collectionB
were stored in the different departments. We detected at Kerguelen
Island some peculiarities in tho reproduction of several groups of
marine invertebrates, and particularly in the Echinodennata, wluch I
have briefly described in a separate paper.
" Two days before leaving Kerguelen Island, we trawled off the
entrance of Christmas Harbour ; and the trawl-act came up, on one
occasion, nearly filled with large cup-sponges belonging to the genus
Bog»eUa of Cai'ter, and probably tho species dredged by Sir James
Clark Eoss near the ice-barrier, JtoMella antaTctica.
'' On the 2nd of February we dredged in 150 fathoms, 140 miles
Bonth of Kerguelen, and on Qie 7th of Fobruoiy off Yong Island, in
both cases with succees.
" We reached Corinthian Bay, in Yong Island, on the evening of
tho 6th, and had made all arrangements for examining it, as far as
possible, on the following day; but, to our great disappointment, a
sudden change of weather obliged us to put to sea, Fortnnately
■Mr. Moseley and Mr. Buchanan accompanied Captain Naros on shore
for an hour or two on the evening of our arrival, and took the oppor-
tunity of collecting the plants and minerals within their reach. A
east of the trawl taken in lat. 60° 52' 8., long. 80° 20' E., at 1260
fathoms, was not very produetivCj only a few of the ordinary deep-8ea
forms having been procured.
" Our most southerly station was on the 14th of February, lat.
65° 42' 8., long. 79° 49' E. The trawl brought up, &om a depth of
1676 fathoms, a considerable number of animals, including Sponges,
Alcyouarians, Echinids, Bryozon, and Crustacea, all much of the
usual deep-sea character, although some of the species had not been
previously observed. On February 26th, in 1975 fiithoms, Umbdlu-
larice, Holothuria, and many examples of several species of the
4nancAy/id(E were procured; and we found very much the same gronp
of forms at 1900 fathoms on the 3rd of March. On the 7th of
March, in 1800 fathoms, there were many animal forms, particularly
some remarkable starfishes, of a large size, of the genns H'jm&vater ;
and on the 13th of March, at a depth of 2600 fathoms, with a
bottom temperature of 0''-2 C. Rohlhurim were abundant, there were
several starlisheG and Actinia, and a very el^ant little Brachiopod
occurred attached to peouliar concretions of mauganeae which come
numbers in tho trawl.
Decspoda Uacniin . .
„ Brachyura
PyonogoniJa
Lamellibranchiata
BtBcliiopoda
Gasteropoda
Cephalopoda
Teleostei .. ..
th the books
AntliDzoe Octactini
„ PoijEictiD
Crinoidea
Asteroidca
Ophiuridea
Echinidoa
Holothuridea .
Bryozoa
Tnuioata .
Sipuncolni
Nematodea
anelida
" It ie of course impossible to deteimine the speciee t
of reference at our comiuimd ; but inaaj of them i
and some are of great iatcreet fi'om their relstioD to groups supposed
to be extinct. This is particularly the case with tho Echiiiodermata,
which are hero, as in the deep water in the north, a very prominent
group.
" During tho present cruise special attention has been paid to the
nntuxo of the bottom, and to tmj facts which might throw light upon
the source of its materials.
" This department has been chieSy in tLe hands of Mr. Munny ;
and I have pleasure in referring to the constant industry and care
which he has devoted to the preparation, examination, and storing of
samples. I ostract from Mr. Murray's notes : —
" ' In tho soundings about the Agulhaa bank, in 100 to 150 fathoms,
file bottom was of a greenish colour, and contained many crystalline
particles (some dark-coloured and some clear) of Foraminifera, sjKcies
of Orbulina, GlohigeritM, and Palvimdiiia, a pretty species of Uvigerina,
PlanoThulina, Miliolina, Bulinaiia, and NummuUna. There were very
few Diatoms.
" * In the deep soundings and drctlgings before reaching the
Crozets, in 1900, 1670, and 1375 fathoms, the bottom was composed
entirely of OrbvitTM, Globigerina, ond Pulvinalina, the same species which
we get on the enrface, but aU of a white colour and dead. Of Forami-
nifera, which we have not got on the surfece, I noticed one Rotalia
and one PolysUymeUa, both dead. Somo Coccoliths and Bhabdoliths
were also found in the samples &oin these soundings. On the whole,
these bottoms were, I thini, the purest carbonate of lime we have ever
obtained. When the soundings were placed in a bottle and shaken up
^^_ with water, the whole looked like a quantity of sago. The Pulvinvlina
^^K were smaller than in the dredginge in the Atlantic We had no
^^H soundings between the Crozeta and Eergnelen.
^^H " ' The specimens of the bottom about Kerguelen were all from
^^^^ depths from 120 to 20 fathoms, and consisted usuotly of dark mud,
^^^B with au offensive sulphurous smell. Those obtained farthest &om
^^H land wore made up almost entirely of matted epongo-spicules. In
i
PROQBESS OF mOBOSOOMCAL BOIENOB.
tlieae soundiugs one speciea of Botalina and one othei' Furamimfor
. occurred.
'''At 150 futboms, between Eerguolcn and Heard It^lnnd, tbe
bottom was composed of basaltic peJiblos, Tbo bottom at Heard
lalaud was mucb tbo same as at Kerguoleu.
" ' Tbe sample obtained from a deptL of 1260 fathoms, south of
Hoard Island, was quite different from anything we bad previunaly
obtained. It was one mass of Diatoms, of many species ; and, mixed
with those, a few small GMjigerinfB and Radiolarians, and a very few
crystalline particlesi
" ' The soundings and drodginga while we were among tbe ice in
1675, 1800, 1300, and 1975 fathoms, gave another t«tally distinct
deposit of yellowish clay, with pebbles and small stonoe, and a con-
siderable admixture of Diatoms, Radiolarians, and QUSiigeriiuv. Tbe
clay and pebbles were evidently a sodimont from the melting icebergs,
and the Diatoms, Itadiolarians, and Foraminifera were from tbe
surface-waters.
" ' The bottom from 1960 fathoms, on our way to Australia frcon
tbo Antarotio, was again exactly similar to that obtained in the
1260-fatboms soundings south of Heard Island. Tbe bottom at 1800
fathoms, a little farther to tbe north (lat. 50^ 1' S., long. 123^ 4' E.),
was again pm^e " GWnjerina-ooze," composed of OrhaUme, Gloingefince,
and PalfinuUnis.
" ' Tbe bottom at 2150 fathoms (hit. 47° 25' S., long. 130° 32' E.)
was similar to tbe last, with a reddish tinge ; and that at 2600 fathoms
(lat i2= 42' S., long. 134° 10' E.) was reddish cloy, the same which
we got at lilce depths in the Atlantic, and contained manganese
nodules and much decomposed Foraminifera.'
"Mr. Murray has been induced, by tbe observations which have
been made in the Atlantic, to combine tbo use of the towing net, at
various depths from the surfiioe to 150 fathoms, with tbe examination
of the samples from tbe soundings. And this double work has led
him to a conclusion (in which I am now forced entirely to eonenr,
altbongb it is certainly contrary to my former opinion) diat the bulk
of the material of tbe bottom in deep water is, in all cases, derived
from the surface.
" Mr. Murray has demonstrated the presence of GUMgerinm,
PulvirtuUrue, and OrbuliTKe throughout all the upper layers of the sea
over the whole of tbe area where tbe bottom consists of ' Globigerina-
ooze ' or of the red clay produced by the decomposition of tbe shells
of Foraminifera ; and their appearance when living on the surface is
BO totally different from that of the shells at the bottom, that it ia
impossible to doubt that tbe latter, even although they frequently
contain organic matter, are all dead. I mean this to refer only to the
genera mentioned above, which practically form the ooze. Many other
Foraminifera undoubtedly live in 4»)mparatively small numbers, along
with animals of higher groups, on the bottom.
" In the extreme south the couditions were so severe as greatly to
interfere with all work. We had no aiTangeniont for boating the
work-rooms ; and at a temperature wliich avuriigod for somo days
PBOGRSaS OF UIOBOaCOPia&L SOIENCi:.
25° F., tho inetrumenta became bo cold tliat it was impleasant to
handle them, aud the vapour of the breath condenaed and &oze at once
upon glass and bragB-work. Dredging at tho coneidoTable deptbs
which wo fonnd near the Antarctic Circle became a severe and some-
what critical operation, the gear being stiffened and otherwigo affected
by the cold, and we could not repeat it often.
" The evening of the 23rd of Febmary was remarkably fine and
calm, and it waa arranged to dredge on the following morning. The
weather changed soniewhat during the night, and the wind rose.
Captain Karee was, however, most aniiona to carry out our object,
and the dredge was put over at 6 ajk. We were eurrounded by iee-
LergB, the wind oontinned to rise, and a thick snow-storm came on
from the south-east. After a time of some anxiety the dredge was got
in all right ; but, to our great disappointment, it wa8 empty impro-
bably the drift of the ship and the motion hod prevented its reaching
the bottom. In the meantime tho wind had risen to a whole gale
(force = 10 in tho actualls), the thermometer fell to 21°'5F., tho enow
drove in a dry blinding cloud of esquifiito star-like crystals, which
burned the skin as if they had beeu ced hot, and we were not sorry to
be able to retire from tho di'odging bridge.
" Careful observations on temperature are already in your hands,
reported by Captain Nates. The specific gravity of the water haa
been token daily by Hr, Buchanan ; and, during the trip, Mr. Bnohauan
has determined the amount of carbonic acid in 2i different samples —
15 from the Burface, 7 from tho bottom, and 2 from intermediate
depths. The smallcat amount of carbonic acid was found in siu^ace-
wator on the 27th January, near Korgueleu; it amounted to 0'0373
gramme per litre. The largest amount, 0'0829 gramme per litre,
was fonnd in bottom-water on the 14th February, when close to
the Antarctic ice. About the same latitude the amount of car-
bonic acid in Hurfoce-water rose to the unusual amount of 0*0G56
gramme per litre ; in all other latitudes it ranged between 0' 044 and
0'054 gramme per litre. From the greater number of those samples
tho oxygen and nitrogen were extracted, and sealed up in tubes.
" The considerations connected -with the distribution of tempe-
rature and specific gravity in these southern waters are so very com-
plicated, that I prefer postponing any general rimttie of tho results
until there has been time for fall consideration.
" While we were among the ice all possible observations were
made on the structure and composition of icebergs. We only regretted
greatly that we had no opportunity of watching their birth, or of
observing tho continuous ice-barrier from which most of them have
the appearance of Laving been detached. The berg- and floe-ice was
examined with the microsoope, and fonnd to contain the osnol Diatoms.
Careful drawings of the different forms of icebergs, of the positions
wlticb they assnrao in melting, and of their intimate structure, ^vere
made by Mr, Wild, and instantaneous photographs of several were
taken &om the ship.
" Upwanls of 15,000 obfiorvations in meteorology have boon
recorded diu-ing the trip to the south. Most of these have already
250 PBOGBESS OF MIOBOSCOPIOAL SOIENGE.
been tabulated and reduced to curves, and otherwise arranged for
reference in considering the questions of climate on which they bear.
« Many specimens in natural history have been stored in about
seventy p^ldng-cases and casks, contai^g, besides dried specimens,
upwards of 500 store-bottles and jars of specimens in spirit.
*' I need only further add that, so far as I am able to judge, the
expedition is fulfilling the object for which it was sent out. The
naval and the civilian staff seem actuated by one wish to do the utmost
in their power, and certainly a large amount of material is being
accumulated.
'* The experiences of the last three months have of course been
somewhat trying to those of us who were not accustomed to a sea-life ;
but the health of the whole party has been excellent. There has been
so much to do that there has been little time for weariness ; and the
arrangements continue to work in a pleasant and satisfactory way."
The Enemies of Difflugia, — Professor Leidy remarks * that in the
relationship of Difflugia and Amoeba we would suppose that the
former had been evolved &om the latter, and that its stone house
would protect it from enemies to which the Amoeba would be most
e xposed. The Difflugia has many enemies. " I have repeatedly ob-
served an Amoeba wiiJi a swallowed ArceUa, but never with a Difflugia,
Worms destroy many of the latter, and I have frequently observed
them within the intestine of Naia, Pristina, Chcetogaster, and JEaoh'
soma. I was surprised to find that Stentor polymorphus was also fond
of Difflugia, and I have frequently observed this animalcule containing
them. On one occasion I accidentally fixed a Stentor by pressing
down the cover of an animalcule cage on a Difflugia, which it had
swallowed. The Stentor contracted, and suddenly elongated, and
repeated these movements until it had split three-fourths the length of
its body through, and had torn itself loose from the fastened Difflugia,
Nor did the Stentor suffer from this laceration of its body, for in the
course of several hours each half became separated as a distinct
individual."
On the Bevivificaiion of Botifer vulgaris, — In a paper before the
Academy at Philadelphia, Professor Leidy observes that during the
search for Bhizopods, having noticed among the dirt adhering to
the mosses in the crevices of our pavements many individuals of the
common wheel-animalcule, Botifer vulgaris, he had made some obser-
vations relating to the assertion that they might be revivified on
moistening them after they had been dried up. Two glass slides,
containing beneath cover glasses some dirt, exhibited each about a
dozen active living Eotifers. The glass slides were placed on a
window ledge of my study, the thermometer standing at 80°. In the
course of half an hour the water on the slides was dried up, and the
dirt collected in ridges. The next morning, about twelve hours after
drying the slides, they were placed beneatib the microscope. Water
was applied and the materials on the slides closely examined. On
each slide a number of apparently dried Eotifers were observed^
♦ *Proc. of Acad, of Sci., Philadelphia,' p. 75, 1874.
^^^f PBOQBISB 01' mCBOSOOFIOAL SOIEKCE. 251 1
^^^B These imbibed water and expanded, and some of them in the conrso J
^^^r of half an honr revived and oshibited their usual movements, hut J
others remained motionless to tho hist. The same slides were again
Bubmittad to drying, and from one of them the cover glass was
removed. They were eitamined the nest day, bnt several hours after
^^^ moistening them only two Rotifers wore noticed moving on each slide.
^^^L He nest prepared a slide on which there were upwards of twenty actively
^^^H moving Rotifers, and exposed it to the hot sun during the afternoon.
^^^P On examination of the sUde the following morning, after moistening
^^^ the material, all the Rotifers continued motionless, and remained so
to the last moment. From these observations it would appear that
the Rotifers and their associates became inactive in comparatively dry
positions and may be revived by supplying them with more moistnre,
but when the animals are actually dried they are incapable of being
revivified. Moisture adheres tenaciously to earth, and Rotifers may
rest in tho earth, liie the Lepidoairen, until returning waters restore
them to activity.— See also ' Silliman's Amer. Journal,' Sept.
New Fretk'Water Shizopods have been recently observed by Pro-
fessor Leidy, who, in a paper before the Philadelphia Academy,
remarked that besides the ordinary species of Amceba, which ho had
observed in the vicinity of Philadelphia, he had discovered what
he suspected to be a new generic form. It has all the essential
characters of Amaha, but in addition is provided with tufts of tail-
like appendages or rays, from which he proposed to name tho genus
Ourajii(F6(i. The rays project from what may be regarded as the back
part of the body, as the animal always moves or progresses in advance
of tho position of those appendages. " The rays are quite different
&om pseudopode, or the delicate rays of the Actinophryens. They
■ are not used in securing food, nor is their function obvious. Tho
Ouramceba moves like an ordinary Amceba, and obtains its food in
the same manner. The tail-liko rays are not retractile, and they are
rigid and coarse compared with those of Actinophryens. They are
simple or unbranched, except at their origin, and they are cylindrical,
of uniform breadth, and less unifnrm length. When torn from the
body thoy are observed to originate from a common stock attached to
a rounded eminence. Several forms of the Ourammba were observed,
but it is uncertain whether thoy pertain to one or to several species.
One of the forms had an oblong ovoid body about Jth of a line long
. and -jJ^th of a line brood. The tail-lite rays formed half-a-dozea
•' tutts, measuring in length about the width of the body. The latter
was so gorged with large diatoms, such as Navictda viridh, together
with desmids and confervte, that the existence of a nucleus could not
bo OBcertained. Tho species may be distingnished with the name of
Ouramceba vorax, A second form, perhaps of a different species,
moved actively and extended its broad pseudopods like Amaha prin-
eeps. When first viewed beneath the microscope it appeared irregu-
larly globular and about iVt^" "^^ 1'°^ '« diameter. It elongated to
the ^th of a line, and moved with its tail-like appendages in the rear.
These appendages formed five tufts about ^^th of a line long. The
interior of tho body exhibited a largo contractile vesicle and a discoid
I 1«
I
I
1 PEOOKE88 OF MIOR0300WCAI. 8CIENCK.
nncleiiB. Tliia Bocond form may bo difltrnguielied witli tho name of
OvraauBha lapsa. Another Ourawc^a had two comparatively eliort
tnfta of rays, ood n fourth, of smaller size than the others, had a
single tuft of throe monilifbrm rays. It is poasible that OuramCBba is
the same as the Plagioplirys of Olaparjide, thoagh the deBcriptlon of
thia does not apply to that. Plivjiopliyijs ia eaid to be an Actino-
phryou, fumishod with a himdle of rays emanating from a eingle
point of tho hody, but the rays are described ae of the same kind
and use as those of Aclinophrijg. Plagiophryg ia further stated to ho
provided with a distinct tegument lite Corycia of Dujardin, or Pam-
phagiia of Bailey, bnt the hody of Ouramceba is as free from any
investment as an ordinary Amosba, and the rays are fixed tail-like
appendages, with no power of elongation or contraction. The species
of Owanie^ were found among desmida and diatoms, on the surface
of the mud at the bottom of a pond, near Darby Creek, on tho Phila-
delphia and West Ohestor Eailroail. Two of tho commonest spoeieB
of Bijjlugia of our neighhourUood I had until recently confounded
together aa D. jrrotei/ormU, and, perhaps, the two forms may bo
included under the latter nama in Europe. In one the month is
deeply trilohed, and tho animal ia usually green with chlorophyll
globules. In the other the mouth is crenulate, usually with six
shallow cronulationa, and the animal is devoid of chlorophyll. The
former is usually the smaller, and may he distinguished with the
name of D. lobostoma ; the latter may be named D. crenulata. In
an old brick pond, on the grounds of Swarthmore College, Delaware
County, among Difflitgia pijriformis, D. gpiralis, D. corona, H. aeumi-
itala, and others not yet determined, there occurs an abundance of
a large species, apparently undcscrihed. It is sometimes tho fourth
of a line in length, and is compressed pyriforra, but is quite variable
in its relation of length to breadth, and in the shapo of the fundus
of tho shell. This is often trilobate, but from tho non-production
of one or more or all the lobea, differs in appearance in different
individuals. The animal is filled with chlorophyll grains, from
which it might be named D. entocklorh. Another large Difflwjiii,
allied to D. lageniformk, is not unfrequent about Philadelphia.
The shell is beautifully vase-like in shape. It has an oval or suh-
apherical body with a constricted neck, and a recurved lip to the
mouth. The body of the shell opposito the month is aoute and often
acuminate. Tho animal coctains no chlotophyll. One shell measured
^th of a line long by Jth of a line broad; another measured ^th of a
line-long by ^^th of a line broad. The species may ho named D. amphora.
A DifBugian, found in a spring on Darby Creek, is interesting, from
its transparency, which allows the structure of the animal to be seen
in all its details. The investment is membranous aud apparently
structureless. The aoft granular contents occupy about one-half of
the investment, and are connected with this hy long threads. The
pseudopoda ore protruded in finger-like processes. The form of the
animal is compressed ovoid, with the narrow pole truncate and
forming the transversely oval inouth. It ia probably the species
Diffiugia ligata, described by Mr. Tatem, of England. Its length is
about 3'grd of a line. The character of the investment in so different
PBOOKESS OF monOSCOPICAL eCIENOE, 253
&am tliat of ordmn.ry DifHugians tbat tlio species may he regarded as
pertaining to another gonus, for whicli the name of Calharia would
be appropriate."
The Analomieiil Okangas m HydrophMa Oimina.^h. good paper
on this sabjeot appears in a late nnmber of tho ' Medical Record '
(Sept. 30), which says that the long-continued epidenxic of last winter
has, through the assistance of his colleagues of the Imperial Yetori-
nary School in Vienna, furnished Dr. Benedikt* with numerous
preparations from the brain and spinal cord of different animals that
had been attacked with rabies. Before desorihiag these, the author
discuBses tho difForence presented by the disease as seen in man and
in dogs, which has also a special aigntficance with reference to the
anatomical appearances. In both the disease begins with a restless
melancholia. In the dog this passes into raring madness, while in
man this form of mental affeotioQ is wanting, In man illusions and
hallucinations take but small share in the symptoms, while in doge
they are plainly a prominent feature. In man there is the greatest
degree of hypenesthesia, with highost possible susceptibility for con-
Tulsions ; in dogs, diffused paralysis and aphonia are among the
earliest and charocteristio symptoms. In the human being thoro is
the most extreme reflex excitability in tho moToments of deglutition,
so that not only the raising a glass to the month, but oven the sight of
fluids, will induce violent spasmodic action in those organs ; whereas
in dogs there is a paralysis of deglntition for fl.uida. In man the
Bevereet epaaraa of tho roapiratory musclos are present, so severe as
semetimes to cause asphyxia. Such spasms are not obaervcd in doge,
which die generally from exhanstion.
Dr. Benediit has studied the pathological changes by making
seven separate vertical sections through tho hemispheres in dogs, and
has observed such plain and striking pathological changes as could, ho
observes, only have boon previously overlooked by reason of an imper-
fection of the methods of investigation.
In the first place, there is noted an abnormal distentioii of tho
meningeal vessels, and the accumidation around them, and in tho
meshes of the pia mater, of inflammation corpuscles, together with a
nncleolated exudation. Thia cxuda,tion is strongly refractive of light,
is colourless, and under high magnifying powers is seen to consist of
pnnctiform unclear Hubatance (granular disintegration). Striking
changes are observed in the grey matter of the convolutions, and in
various parts of the nervous centres. One of the eoareer changes
observed was tho presence of nnmerous holes, or spaces, which, when
magnified eighty or ninety diameters, were seen to be filled with a
material which also refracted light. This mass, under the high
^^K . powers of the microscope, consisted of a granular or unclear substance, ■
^^^L in which were single hyaloid and colourless corpuscles, of the size of fl
^^^1 a distended nucleus of a blood-corpnscle. Inflammatory corpnacloa H
^^B were to be seen in both these masses. In the larger spaces, nerve- H
^^V cells also were found. Dr. Benedikt fnrthot describes what ho calls a H
^^H pcciiliarconditionof the hardened brain, especially in the finer sections. H
^^K The slightest prossoro forced out upon ibe surlaco shining masses, H
^^^^ * 'Wiener Mcdiz, Presfic,* June, 1KT4. ^|
r
I
I
I
254 NOTES 4SD MEMORANDA..
whioh under the microscope proved to bo myelin (colloid? Sep.).
These masses were often found lying detocliod on tte surface of tto
scotion, aud prcsonted a greomsh liistro. The aathur states that he
has seen the sarao in the episal cord of a horse that had Bu&rod &om
rheumatic tetonue, and that he had regordod it as a softeuiBg aud
chemical alteration of the substance of the spinal cord.
The signs of inflammation aro not presented everywhere in the pia
mater, hut only in certain parte. The distribution of these in the
grey matter and in the central v^hite substance throws a new light,
according to Dr. Benedict, upon the nature ef the " granular disinte-
gmtion." (A diagram intended to illustrate this point is given.) From
what he has noted, it is concluded that the pathological process in
this disease consists in ooate exadative indommation, with hyaloid
dogonoiatiou, which doubtless arises from the exudative infiltration of
the connective tissue. It is characteristic with reference to these
inflammatory products that the attack, in man at least, is nshered in
with rigors. The hypenemia and nuclear proliferation is concurrent
with that form of difiused indaimuation which Lockhart Clarke has
designated as "granular disintegration," and so far, the author con-
siders, the anatomical obscurity of this disease is dispelled. The
morbid process, in man, is doubtless essentially the same. The usual
post mortem appearance is congestion and softening, which may have
no especial value except as following asphyxia.
Dr. Benedikt states that there are in literature only two trustworthy
reports, viz. by Meynert, who found much the same appearances as the
author. The spaces, or holes, are regarded by Meynert as being the
result of the hardening of the brain-substance. In two other cases
Meynert found hypertrophy of the connective tissuo in the posterior
columns, with molecular and amyloid degeneration in the anterior
columns. The nerve-cells of the cortical matter had also undergone
-^partly molecular and partly sclerotic change.
KOTES AND MEMORANDA.
The Method of Heasnriiig Angular Aperture,— The 'American
Naturalist ' (August) states that Mr. Wenhum, in order to gain accu-
racy in measuring the angular ajierturo of dry objectives, would like
to cut off all stroy light that might enter the lens without being
capable of forming an image, by-placing over the objective a conical
nozzle having a small aperture in its apex. This aperture would
correspond to the focus of the lens, and the nozzle would just include
the cone of rays capable of forming an image, and would exclude all
&lse rays of any considerable angle. This method would be inconve-
nient, however, and as the angle is measured by a horizontal move-
ment, a vertical slit will be a satisfactory substitute. For high powers
the slit must have thin edges; and it must be capable of adjustment
to the width of focus of the lens. His arrangement is essily nutde and
A plate three innbes long and oue inch wide has a central
I apertnro nearly one-half inch wide, the edges of this opening being
b«TeIled away below bo as to admit a large angle of light. Upon this
plate lies a glass alip about 2 in. x 4 in., proseod against at one end
by a spring, and at the other end by -a screw, eo that it can be easily
slid backwards and forwards under the two staples (one inch apart)
which hold it upon the surface of the plate. The slip is formed by
the edges of two slips of platinum foil ('001 thick) one of which is
cemented with Canada balsam upon the glass slip, while the other ia
fastonod nnder one of tho staples so as to lie on the glass slip but not
move with it. These platinum slips never overlap ; but their edges
may be brought in contort, or may be separated as widely as desired
by means of the set-screw pressing against one end of the glass slip
which carries one of them. In measuring angles the usual method of
rotating the instmment horizontally ie employed ; only this apparatus
lies npon the stage with its slit in focus of tho objective, and adjusteii
in width so as Iwrely to include the whole breadth of tho focus. If
the stage of the microscope is too thick to admit full angle of light,
the apparatus may be arranged below the stage, and the objective
focnssed down to it.
A New Hicroscopioal Society has, we are glad to perceive, been
established at Memphis, Tenn., U.S.A. Its bye-laws bear "date
August 28, IST'i, and are torse and to the point. It numbers about
twenty-sis members, Dr. Cutler being its President, and Mr. S. F. Dod
its Secretary and TreaBnrer. Wo wish it every sneceas, and hops to
have some contributions to onr Society from its members.
The Leeds Public Library.— We have much pleasure in acceding
to the Librarian's wishes — making known to those of our readers who
may reside in the neighbonrhood of Leeds the fact that the Leeds
Public Library contains an admirable and considerably large selection
of Natural History and Microscopic works. It is a public, and there-
fore a free, library, and its catalogues are published in separate
sections ; that which we have seen being devoted to natural history,
or biology in its widest type. We notice in it some fow crvata, which
we hope to see removed as soon as possible, Wbo, for instance, ia
E. Lambert, who is stated to be one of the Editors of the ' Quarterly
Jonriutl of Microscopical Science ' ?
CORRESPONDENCE.
Beheohb'8 No, 7 Objbctitb.
fNOBWIOW, Ocloher 8, 1874.
Sib, — Having recently obtained one of Beneche's No, 7 objectives
and submitted it to one or two sharp trials, I am able to confirm Mr.
Hickie's report of tlio performance of those glasses, Mr, Hickie says
the one he tried was equal to a " weak English i-" Mine I should call
VOL, xn. T
266
a Btrong English qnnrter ; on comparing it? magnifying power with a
^ inch made in 1843 by A. Roes (of 75^ angular ajicrturo only, but A
most eicolloiit glass), and using a B. ocular, I found tho ^J^ diTieioa
on the micrometer (when x ^OO diameters) was exactly I of an. inch
longer when magnified by the No. 7 than when the quarter was used.
The angular aperture of Benecho's lens is certainly not Iobh than 9S°.
And now for what I have been able to do with it,
Pteurotigma angjilalum mounted by Miiller (which by tho way ia
much more robust than the species we find in Englaud), strice resolved
by direct light ; with oblique light and D, ocular, the peculiar arrange-
ment of tho terminal 8tri» were well shown.
P. intermedium, striffi easily eeeu by oblique illumination,
Niiztehia gigmoidea, transverse strice very fairly distinct.
Cymbdla Ehrenhergii, tho coatee woro easily resolved into com-
pressed beads, as were also tho transverse markings on Synedra
robuBta. Pinnularia jperegrina, the fine transverse lines on the costto
were plainly visible (the last three specimens were in balsam). This
glass also performs well with the binocular, both tubes being well
Ulmiiinated.
The admirable performance of these glasses is remarkable, Eks they
have no adjustment, and the price in Berlin is 10 thalers 1 1 !
Yours truly,
Fbbd. Kitton.
k
POWEU. AND LbAT,ASd'b ^TH AND ^^TH -WITH STEAIGHT
(jANDLE-LIGHT.
To lie Editor of the ' ATonthly Microscopical Joiirjial'
YoBK, October 7, 1874.
Sir, — Tour correspondent, Mr, Hickie, desires to know if any of
your readers can do with their ^th objectives what he can do with His,
that is, whether they can resolve tho markings on " Pleurogigma
anguialum " in a perfectly satisfiictory manner under certain severe
restrictions which he roentions. If, therefore, you will allow me, I
will briefly state how a ^th in my possession iuis behaved under theso
limitations.
But since he speaks of tho performance of his Gandlaeh's ^th, it
may bo as well to inform you first how a similar power, likewise in
my possession, fared under the ordeal to which both were subjected.
My glasses were obtained from Messrs. Powell and Lealand, tho eminent
London makers.
The slide of " P. angnlalum " selected was one covered dry for
jVA iiich. This I placed upon the stage, and then brought tho flam.-
of a composite candle to an eiaet level with it, and precisely in a line
with the tail of the compound body, mirror and diaphragm being both
discarded. The first irustule that appeared now stood out with such
cleomeea, and was go boautifullj defined, that the whole proceeding,
when viewed as a testiug operation, looked to mo to be little better
than child's play.
PBOGEBDmOB OF SOCIETIES. 257
Afterwards I brought the ith to bear upon the same object, ilia*
mination and everything else remaining precisely as before, except
that the B eye-piece now became almost a necessity. On proper
focassing the resolution of the stri® quite surpassed my expectations :
the definition was crisp and little short of brilliant.
As Mr. Hickie does not state what his Berlin j^th has done with
^^S. gemma" comparison is of course impossible; but if he means
that it has detected the longitudinal lines of that diatom, it would be
a real favour to microscopists to tell them of the feat. He is doubt-
less too experienced an observer to be misled by the deceits of
dif&action.
I am, Sir, your faithful servant,
E. CoBBET Singleton.
PROCEEDINGS OF SOCIETIES.
BOYAL MiOROSCOPIOAL SOCIETY.
King's College, October 7, 1874.
Charles Brooke, Esq., F.RS., President, in the chair.
The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and confirmed.
A list of donations to the Society since the last meeting in June
was read by the Secretary, and the thanks of the Fellows were voted
to the donors.
Mr. H. J. Slack called special attention to some of these donations,
consisting of some curious old microscopes and optical apparatus
presented to the Society by Dr. John Gray ; amongst which were an
ancient microscope of unknown date, and an elaborately made instrument
by TuUy, for Eobert Brown, also some spectacles, with a series of
lenses of different powers, which were used by the great botanist in his
researches.
Mr. Hembry, introduced by Dr. Braithwaite, was presented to the
President and formally admitted as a Fellow of the Society.
A paper by Mr. AUred Sanders, entitled *' Supplementary Eemarks
on the Appendicularia," was read by the Secretary, The paper was
illustrated by drawings, and appears at p. 209 in the present number
of the Journal.
Mr. Slack said that a few months ago Mr. H. B. Webb of Lyttleton,
N.Z., one of the Fellows of their Society, sent over some samples of earth
containing diatoms, &c. These were placed in the hands of Mr. Kitton,
and that gentleman had discovered amongst them a new species of
Surirdla^ which he had described as S. corUorta, A paper by Mr.
Eitton, descriptive of the forms found in these deposits, and also
amongst some dredgings sent by Capt. Parry from Colon, Panama, was
then read by the Soorotary, and the illustrative drawings were hakded
T 2
I
PBOOHEDtHeB (Of BOoatajB.
roiiDd for the inflpection of the PellowB. Tlie paper is printed at
p. 218.
Votes of thanfcB to Hfx. Sunders and to Mr. Kitton fur their cotn-
nnnications were nnammouelj passod.
Mr. Slock remarked that the danger of nanilitg objects apon insuffi-
cient information rooeived fresh illustration from the paper, in which
mention was made of a species of Tniceratinm linTing seven points.
Mr. Sloek said he had brought to the meeting some films of silica
prepared from a solution containing a mixture of one part of water and
four parts of glycerine. Some of them were eiceedingly delicate, and
it was not possible to get good definition of them with high power
objectives of lai^ angles. When seen with a glass of largo angular
aperturo there were so many false images that the tme effect of what
ought to Ik) seen was entirely loet. He had, however, been able to
obtain some good definitions with an object-glass, ^th, 60^ aperture, need
in conjunction with Mr. Wenhani's dark-ground illuminator. It was
of interest to know that in searching for minute particles of a highly
refractive nature they could not always bo detected with a high-angled
lens. Moat microacopists would still persist in using these objectives
for all purposes, in spite of what had been pointed out by Dr. Carpenter,
Mr. Brooke, and others. By osing a Gmatl-aogled gUiss they would
often see much more, and when Mr. Wonham's illuminator waa also
used, effects would be obtained which seemed to be unattainable in any
other way.
Mr. {JharlcH Stewart called the attention of tho meeting to a very
curious living organism which was exhibited in the room by Mr.
Badcock. He then drew it upon the hiack'board, and gave a general
description of its appearance, expressing a hope that all who wore
present would avail themselves of the opportunity of seeing it. He
was quite unable to say what it was, but from its general appearance
he thought it was something like an entozoon.
Mr. Badcock, in reply to a question from the President, said that
the creature was developed in his aquarium in the month of June last.
He thongbt at first that it must be the larval condition of some other
form, but it did not seem to have undergone any change in the course
of four months. Tho only suspicious thing in the aquarium was a
fresh-water mussel, he did not know whether that had anything to do
with it. He had brought some sketches of it, which were placed upon
the table for inspection.
The President invited information upon the subject from tho
Fellows present, who be hoped would examine it and say if they
thought it to be a larval condition, or a perfect animal, or what ?
Mr. Slack said that in its extraordinary power of changing its
shape it resembled Bucephalus polymorphtis,* an entozoon found in '
fresh water, but then it was unlik* it in oth« respects.
The President directed the attention of the Fellows to a remarkable
collection of photographs of animal tissues and morbid conditions of
the same, n*hich bad been presented to the Society by the Army
Medical Itepartment, Washington.
* Piof. Rvrtj G rceiie ha« since Eeen th.c aniiDal, nnd couaidcrti it a Bncephalos.
PBOOEEDINGS OF SOCIETIES. 259
The proceedings then tenninated, and the meeting was adjourned
to November.
Donations to the Library, &c., since June 8, 1874 : —
From
Nature. Weekly The Editor.
Athenseum. Weekly Ditto,
Society of Arts Journal Society,
Transactions of the Linnean Society. Two parts . . . . Ditto.
Journal of the Linnean Society, No. 76 Ditto,
Popular Science Beview, Nos. 52 and 53 Editor,
Journal of the Geological Society, No. 119 Society.
Smithsonian Beport for 1872 Institution,
Bulletin de la Soci^t^ Botanique de France. Three parts Society.
The Toner Lectures. By Dr. J. J. Woodward. Illustrated^ The Surgeon-General,
with seventy-four Photographs / Uj3.A,
A simple microscope and set of powers by Tully
A single microscope by Dolland
An ancient microscope and some spectacles that were used'^^ Dr. John E. Gray,
by the late Mr. Bobert Brown / F.R.S., ^c.
One slide of silica film ff. J. Slack, Esq.
Walter W. Ebevbs,
Assist.-Secretary,
QuEKETT Microscopical Club.
Annual Meeting, July 24. — Dr. Braithwaite, F.L.S., President, in
the chair.
The Ninth Annual Report of the Committee was read, giving
details of the work accomplished by the club during the past year, and
testifying to the continuance of its prosperity, and successful progress
in the course marked out by its founders. The President read the
Annual Address, in the course of which he made some interesting
remarks upon the function of the various organs of plants, tracing the
chemical and physiological changes which took place during the
germination of the seed and the development of the plant, thus adding
a supplement to the valuable and interesting series of papers *' On the
Histology of Plants," written by him for the club.
Officers for the ensuing year were elected, the President being Dr.
John Matthews, r.R.M.S., who was duly inducted by the retiring
President.
Dr. W. Sharpey, F.R.S., &c., was unanimously elected an honorary
member of the club, and four ordinary members were also elected.
Ordinary Meeting, August 28. — Dr. Matthews, r.R.M.S., Presi-
dent, in the chair.
Three members were elected.
Extracts were read from a letter writt^ by Mr. S. Green, of
Colombo, to Mr. T. Curties, giving further details of his methods of
mounting insects without pressure, so as to preserve their natural
appearance, and a further communication on the subject was promised.
There being no paper, Mr. Ingpen made some remarks upon two
gatherings of Volvox^ both obtained on the 1st of January last, one of
260
vhich famished good epecimeDB as lato as the beginning of April.
The other gathering was slightly frozen in February, shortly after
which StatosporeB were found in most of the eouditions deeoribed by
Dr. J. Braxton Hioks, in the ' Quoi't. Journ. Mic, Scionce,' 7ol, i., N.S.,
p. 281.
The President announced the excarsionB and meetings for the en-
suing month, and the meeting closed with the usual oouversazioue.
Sept. 25.— Ordinary Meeting. Dr. Matthews, F.E.M.S., President,
The Preeident brought to the meeting for distribution a quantity
of infusorial earth from Ecvoral localities in Barbados, which promised
to ho rich in Polycystina.
Mr. T, Charters White read a paper " On the Salivary Glunds of the
Cockroach," illustrating the subject by coloured diagrams and beauti-
fully prepared spccimons. He first spoke of the strnctiire and functions
of glands in general, and then showed the method of dissecting the
salivary glands from the cockroach, which he very minutely described,
and added the reasons which confirmed him in his opinion as to their pos-
sessing the nature and functions of true salivary glands. Mr. T. Curties
read a letter which ho had received from Mr. J. ti. Tatem, accompany-
ing a slide of the some object for presentation to the club. In this
letter Mr. Tatem adopted the opinion advanced by Mr. Hollis in a
receut number of ' Nature ' that the sacs arc not reservoirs for saliva,
but air-sacs only, and probably capable of inflation as an aid to flight.
He could not exactly comprehend in what way the sacs could be filled
with air from without, but thought that they might possibly be inflated
from time to time with " geereted air" OrS in the case of the bladders,
having no ducts, of some fishes,
In the discussion which followed, Mr. Lowne supported Mr. White's
view, and suggested staining the preparations ndth chloride of gold,
for the better demonstration of the network of nerves. He spoke at
length on the different kinds of salivary glands in vertebrate and
invertebrate animals, and stated that there was no evidence of the
sacs being tracheal tubes, or of their ever being filled with air. The
President read Dr. Hollis's letter in ' Nature,' and said that he did not
regard the presence of trachea as conclusive of the argument, and
thought that on the whole tho reasoniug was inconclusive.
Mr. Loy felt quite euro that tho tubes wore not tracheal, and
thought that tho sacs were reservoirs in which tho saliva was stored
until pumped by the tube into the stomach. He had never found any
evidence of air in any insect's salivary glands. In answer to a qnestion
from tho President, Mr. Loy mode some remarks upon the irritating
nature of the saliva of some insects, and ofterwards suggested difierent
woys of killing the cockroaches, which Mr. White proposed to dissect
at the nest couversational mcetuig for the instruction of the members.
After the meeting, several beautiful preparations of the disputed organ
e shown, as well as other objects of interest, by various members.
ihel^j:'th}y}.£Gro£coficaIJra.'iialE<icl " 4-
CU J->r-i(vi.;hAtJ. ';y'S
THE
MONTHLY MICROSCOPICAL JOURNAL.
DECEMBEE 1, 1874.
I. — Continued Besearches into the Life History of the Monads.
By W. H. Dallingeb, F.E.M.S., and J. Drysdalb, M.D.,
F.R.M.S.
(^Bead before the Royal Microscopical Society, Nov, 4, 1874.)
Plates LXXXIII., LXXXIV., and LXXXV.
The prosecution of oux inquiries as to the developmental history
of the minute monad-forms found in macerations of fish was con-
tinued during the past summer. Our methods were precisely the
same as those previously described ; so also was our mode of work,
everything being mutually accepted as a correct interpretation.
Prolonged work with infusions has led us to make observations
DESCRIPTION OF PLATES LXXXni., LXXXIV., AND LXXXV.
Fig. 1. — ^Typical specimen of the monad described.
„ 2. — Shows the different positions taken by th'e enlarged bases of the flagella
when the latter are in motion.
„ 3. — The peculiar structure a, 6, intimately connected with the bases of the
flagella c, indicates a probable organ of locomotion ; of which b may
be muscular.
„ 4. — The earliest condition of change of state, showing hyaline investment
more clearly.
„ 5. — First constriction within the hyaline.
„ 6. — Constriction more developed.
„ 7. — The first division into two complete; but the forms are still within
the hyaline.
„ 8. — Transverse constriction ensues in each of the preceding.
„ 9. — Division into four has taken place, and the flagella of some of the
enclosed ones are protruding.
„ 10. — ^Further multiplication has ensued, and the first of the new forms is
escaping from the hyaline investment.
„ 1 1. — The hyaline envelope after all have escaped.
„ 12.— The same when one or more has aborted.
„ 13. — A specimen of the granular form from which parthenogenetic elements
are emitted.
„ 14 and 15. — The emission of the above.
„ 16, 17, and 18. — ^The condition of the monad after emission.
„ 19 and 20. — The germinal points seen in the granules of sarcode emitted, as
discovered in the process of development, x 10,000 dium.
„ 21. — Sexual contact.
„ 22. — The earliest result of the blending.
„ 23.— The still condition which follows.
„ 24 and 25.— The cyst bursting and emitting a cloudy mass containing germs,
„ 26 and 27. — Represent the " clubbed " condition.
VOL. XII. U
I
I
262 Transactiotis of the
concerning them wliict, althougt withont explanation or apparent
fcearing at present, seem to na of snfScient importance for note.
Our first maceration was a cod's head; it was freely exposed to
the air, but excluded from the light. For two raontha uothing
at all remarkable presented itseK. Abundane« of Bacteria termo,
B. Uneola, and AmoebiB were found. But at the expiration of the
twelfth week the form to be described in this paper gradnally
appeared — survived for throe months and two weeks, to the almost
complete exclusion eventually of other forms — and then was sup-
planted by other monads, some of which have been described by ns
in former papers.
This maceration was made from ordinary water supplied by the
company on the Cheshire side of the Mersey. The same year, in
the same place, another cod'a head, and the head of a salmon were
macerated in separate vessels. It was later in the year, and the
production of vital foi-ras was slower ; yet in the course of four
months the same phenomena as those described above took placo ;
the only difference being that the form that we are about to describe
did not persist so long.
In the autumn of the same year another cod's head maceration
was made in Liverpool from the ordinary water supplied to the
town. This up to the spring of the following year showed no
trace of the tbrm in question, nor indeed of any monad, bnt
swarmed persistently with gigantic specimens of the SpirUlum,
volitians. After tim several otlier macM^tions were made, in the
same place, and the form we desired appeared, but no spirilla could
be discovered. While a maceration of salmon's head made in April,
1873, under the same circumstaJices at the same place (viz. on the
lancashire side of the Mersey), was found in April, 1874, to swarm
with the peculiar monad form in question ; but another infusion of
herring made at Bock Ferry (on the Cheshire side) late in the
snmmer of 1873 has not yet shown the monad we hoped for.
What determines their appearance or non-appearance we have no
data even to surmise; but it is a subject which ia securing our
attention.
Another incident in our last summer's wort may be mentioned.
We always work from a small qnantity of the largo vessel of
decaying matter which we can keep at hand, Durbg the early
summer the intense and continued heat evaporated all the fluid
from the salmon's bead infusion without om; knowledge. The form
at which wa were working had been in it in great profusion. It
was growing less abundant in oar small working tank, and we
feared that we must wait another year to finish our inquiries. But
we led a forlorn hope, and took the hard, porous, dried, papiet-
mach^-hke mass which formed the dry residuum of the infusion,
and determined to pat it into an exhausted maceration of the same
1 j-« US -
PI LXXXIV.
Gt"
„-l '874
V,
"- (
^JL,
Q
Bayal Microscopical Society. 263
kind at Bock Ferry, which at the time showed only very feehle
signs of any life, and certainly no monads. We watched the
i^nlt; and, to onr great surprise, in three days the required
monad appeared in remarkable yigonr and daily increasing abun-
dance, enabling ns to complete our researches into its cycle of
development. Whilst at the same time another, and remarkable
jform, whose history we haye since completed, and which had only
very feebly shown itself before the drying up of our infusion, now
showed great vigour, and eventually survived and predominated,
evidently very much at the expense of the former.
This may be accounted for in two ways at least First, the
germs — ^whidi we have proved to exist in flie development of this
form — gave origin to new monads when the caked mass was
broken up by solution and set them free in normal conditions ; and
second, we are strongly inclined to believe that hundreds of millions
of the adult forms were only desiccated by the drying up, and
were resuscitated when the fluid was restored; an opinion. which
subs^uent experiment has done much to confirm.
With reference to the immediately asserted, and eventually
absolutely secured ascendency of the new form above referred to,
after the remoistening of the dried maceration, it is evident that
some new conditions had arisen in consequence of the drying up
of the pabulum, and its subsequent remoistening, which in the
struggle for existence made it the fittest to survive.
The form we now describe has occupied our attention for at
least three years, but some points of difficulty each year presented
themselves, and we have delayed any reference to it until we had
learned as much concerning it as we deemed possible. It is in fact
the form incidentally referred to in our first paper,* and drawn, in
various positions, at a, a, &c., Fig. 1, PI. XKLY., vol. x., of the
' Monthly Microscopical Journal.'
It is a form possessed of more distinctive and distinguishable
structure than any other so low in the scale of life with which we
are acquainted. Its most marked peculiarities may be summarized
with the aid of Fig. 1. The sarcode is invested with a distinct
hyaline envelope, perfectly structureless to our best aplpliances, and
sharply distinguishable from the protoplasm of the body ; two flagella,
inserted into what appears like a special organ of locomotion ; a
large central disk or nucleus-like body, a ; numerous protoplasmic
granules, 6, the function of which we shall shortly explain ; a pair
of "snapping" eye-spots, c;t and occasionally some remarkable
club-like appendages to the anterior part of the body, the nature of
which we have failed to ascertain ; and to which we shall again refer.
The body is oval, the pair of flagella with which it is famidied
* * M. M. J./ vol. X., p. 53.
t Ibid., vol. xi, p. 8.
U 2
264 Transactions of the
beiog placed anteriorly. The average length of the long diameter
of the body is the 1100th of an inch. The flagella are aboat twice
the length of the body, very fine, and intensely rapid and graceful
in their movements- They are inserted into a couple of pear-shaped
bodies, -with their thickest ends in contact with the investing mem-
brane. They are shown as they generally present themselves in
Fig. 1, d, but they also assume the conditions drawn in Fig. 2,
being intimately connected with the motion of the flagella ; this
may be distinctly seen when the motion of the monad becomes
slower, a, I, c, and d show some of the positions assumed, and their
relations to the movements of the flagella.
The motion of this monad when in complete activity is ex-
tremely graceful, almost swallow-like ; but there is no question left
upon our minds that it is wholly accomplished by means of the
flagella. They are usually thrown out in the manner of a swim-
mer's arms, and made to meet at the posterior end of tiie monad ;
but they can also be used in all directions, either singly or together,
giving' either a rolling forward motion, or a gyrating horizontal
motion, or even a longitudinal revolution. They can also move
backwards, by uniting Uie flagella and making a sculling motion.
To attempt to give anatomical explanation of their movements
as produced by what appears to be a mere mass of structureless
Barcode would be waste of space. But we are constrained to indi-
cate what was seen twice by both of us, and three times by one, as
indicating something that suggests structure. We were observing
once with the Ath, and once with the ^Vth, when we perceived by
careful focussing what is drawn in Fig. 3, where the rod a seemed
to run longitudinally through the monad as if for support ; the
bulbous part h was closely connected with the knobs c, which give
actual support to the flagella.
The posterior part of the sarcode is always filled with granular
masses of protoplasm to nearly the extent of half the body, as seen
in Fig. 1. These, as we shall subsequently see, play an important
part in the life history of the creature. Immediately above this
granular mass is situated a nucleus-like body ; it is without struc-
ture, and large in proportion to the size of the monad, always
occupying the same position, a, Fig. 1. Beside these peculiar
features this creature possessed almost constantly the snappmg eye-
spots which we have shown to belong to other monads, and have
fully described in earlier communications,* but the function of
which we have failed to discover.
We may now consider the phenomena attending the develop-
mental history of this form, which is divisible into three chief
features. '
(1.) By continuous observation on the normal form, with a
♦ ' M. M. J./ Tol. xi., p. 8.
IB
I
Eoyal Microscopical Society. 265
■"power of from 1200 to 10,000 diameters, the fine hyaline invest-
lanent in tlie initial stages of development ia perceived more clearly,
tfinveloping the monad, but no change of shape or motion ensues,
1 Fig. 4. In about forty minutes to an hour a line suddenly appeare
\ across the short diameter of the oval, which soon develops into a
very marked constriction, as seen in Fig. 5. This constriction
ContinueB rapidly to increase within the hyaline membrane, which
throughont the process preserves its normal form, until it reaches
I the condition drawn in lig. 6. During the whole of this time the
motion of the monad is unaffected ; and in about two hours from
the first* a total division takes place. Just before division, howpver,
in some way not made out, two short cilia appear in the place of the
future flagella, as seen in a, Fig. 6 ; but directly actual division tabes
^ilace the separated monad tarns over, and occupies the position
Been in a. Fig. 7. After swimming freely in this conditiim for not
iesa than ten minutes an indentation may be observed in tlie long
axis of the divided bodies within the hyaline, and in from seven to
twenty minutes a constriction longwise ensaea,^ as "seen in Fig. 8,
where a and b show the lines of constriction. After this the divided
bodies remain within the hyaline envelope, sometimes dividing into
eight and even into sixteen, although rarely, and swim about with
an elegance and ease certainly not surpassed by the pregnant Volvox
glolator. Generally this compnand mass la dependent for motion
on the original flagella of the original monad, which persist through-
out; bnt at times, determined by conditions we have not discovered,
the flagella of each new form protrude beyond the hyaUne envelo]je,
as seen in Fig. 9, bnt these always move in concert, and apparently
obey a common impulse. After swimming in this way for a length
of time, varying from ten to one hundred minutes, or more, one of
the forms within the hyaline investment protrudes itself, as seen in
Fig. 10, and shortly escapes a perfect monad like its parent. This
is repeated in each case nntil in the majority of instances all escape,
leaving the fragment of a pellicle or sac behind with the old flagella
I -attached, as drawn in Fig. 11, Bnt in many caaes there appears to
j be incapacity to throw off the laat one or two, and it remains
apparently dead, as seen in Fig. 12. This is the usual method
of increase, and goes on with great rapidity ; the multiple forms
in a fresh field, always bearing a large proportion to the other
forms. This process does not terminate with the first generation
ISO produced, but may be continued for many generations in
succession with no congress of any kind and no visible modifica-
tions.
(2.) But the attentive and patient observer will soon find
I
I
266 Tranaadions of (he
hiiiiself OTi'ested by another kind of phenomenon. Some of the
normal forms become entremdy granular at their posterior or non-
flugellete end, so that the granules give the protruding effect
of an acorn cup. These Bwim -with great freedom, and are gene-
rally larger than the other forms. One of them is represented
at Fig. 13. Suddenly, and without warning, these swiftly moTing
bodies shoot out almost the whole mass of granules, and deposit
them, as seen in Figs. 14 and 15, leaving the monad almost entirely
destitute of granules, and with the hyaline membrane still retaining
its shape, but the sarcode within much altered in form and
position. This is shown in Fig, 15 ; but also other modifications
attending the emission are drawn at Figs. 16, 17, and 18. At
certain stages of development thousands of these granular forms
are visible in every " dip " of the fluid. At first the extraded
granules seem to have no significance ; and they vrere for a long
time a source of great perplexity to ns. But we confined our
attention at length wholly to these for some time, and by the nsa
of our best MpHances were enabled to discover their nature.
When deposited, the granules are amorphous, moro or less agglo-
merated, and perfectly transparent. Watching them attentively
with the highest available powere of the ^ we at length saw epota,
or minute points or dots, appear in the grannies, as seen in
Fig. 19. These under constant observation increased, and in one
of them, as many as seventeen were counted. In this condition
they are drawn at Fig. 20. They remained like this for from two
to three hours, only sUghtly increasing in size. At the expiration
of this time a vibratory motion of the internal points was per-
ceived, which very rapidly increased, and in the course of forty
minutes intense internal activity was visible, the minute dots within
the sarcode moving upon each other in all directions. This lasted
from ten to fifty minutes, when they all escaped and at once swam
freely as minute hacterial-hke bodies, but no trace of any organs of
locomotion could be discovered. After they began to move they
rapidly increased in size, so that in from tour and a haK to five
hours they were of normal size, and endowed with all the powers
of the original monad. This was seen again and again, in all its
stages, and the new forms were foUowed up to the condition of
multiple fission, as before described.
Other phenomena presented themselves, hut nothing that we
could explam or correlate ; and we were for two years inclined to
think that this must be the entire process of development. But
commencing again with fresh working power, we were this lost
aummer enabled to find what gives completeness to this history.
(3.) We had occasionally seen during the whole period of our
researches on this form a coming together of two of the monads ;
but from its infeeiiuency and occasional abortiveness, as well as
Eoyal Microscopical Society. 267
rom the prominence of other phenomena, we did not with any
Jcontinned intemity follow it up. This past summer we made it a
•specific object, and by dint of close application found that, in
loompariBon with other phenomena, very occasionally two of the
f monads, at times in no way distinguishable from each other, met
and touched each other at their anterior ends, swimming freely
together, as setn in Fig. 21. The normal flagella rapidly dis-
appeared, and the bodies melted into each other ; another stalked
double flagellum appearing at one end in a manner never in any
way understood by us. The nuclear bodies a, h, Fig. 21, blended
also into one ; the whole thing in this stags being shown at Fig. 22,
where also an intensely granular state peculiar to this condition is
shown. This body preserved its freedom of motion for a long time
— occasionally for ten or twelve honrs — but during this time it lost
slowly the line of juncture, and became oblong and then rounded ;
after which its motion was more sluggish, and it eventually
became quits still. Fig. 23 represents it in this condition. It
remained in this state sometimes as long as twenty-four hours ; bnt
generally, from four to six honrs was the time occupied before any
changed ensued. The uncertainty, however, made constant watch-
ing absolutely necessary. The whole sac showed as the first
symptom of change a slight vibration or wave-like motion, and
then, with no further premonition, its edges broke ap and a clondy
mass poured out, in which with competent powers it was compara-
tively easy to detect myriads of minute points. Fig. 24 depicts
this ; and by following up rigorously these emitted points, we found
that after a short period of inactivity they became motile, and
rapidly grew, acquiring flagella, and becoming perfect monads of the
parent type. Not only so, but these very forms were persistently
followed, and were seen to increase by multiple fission, and to
deposit granules as before described. At times the globular con-
dition was not taken, but the emission took place in the condition
shown at Fig. 25. It will he seen that iJiis, and another form
_ which we hope to describe in a subsequent number, gave us more
I trouble and perplexity than any we had worked at. But after
F working the whole Hfe cycle out it now appears to us that this
monad primarily multiplies sexually by the congress of the genetic
elements. This, however, is comparatively a very rare occurrence,
and serves for many (probably) hnndreds of generations. Bnt a
kbd of parthenogenesis, or internal budding, follows — resulting in
Lthe emission of the sarcodic granules which contain minute monad-
tgfirms — this being by far the mote frequent and rapid mode of
r increase ; while at the same time multiple fission is taking place in
all directions.
Thus we have the minui« germ sesnally produced; the bud
produced in large quantities within the unfertilized form, both
268 Transactiona of the
of which grow to the parent size ; and the perfect series of monads
produced directly by multiple fission.
From the peculiar manner in which the parthenogenetic pro-
ducts are deposited — in a clear investing sarcode —the capacity for
desiccation so remarkably shown by this monad may be understood
on the principle pointed out by Mr. Henry Davis.*
There is one condition of this monad which, in spite of most
constant and assiduous research, has defied all our attempts to
discover its meaning. We have called it the " clubbed " stage, for
in this special condition the monad was vested with one or two
peculiar knobbed stalks either supplanting or associated with
the flagella. The ordinary clubbed condition is shown at B,
Fig. 26, where t, c appear to have taken the place of the ordinary
'flagella. Almost as frequently the condition seen at A is assumed
where there is one flagellum and one knob,'; but instances have often
occurred in which both flagella and two knobs exist together as at c.
We have endeavoured for three years to find the meaning of
this, but have entirely failed. We persisted in our eflforts, because,
so far as we could discover, this anatomical phase seemed to coincide
with certain stages of development. But wider and closer observa-
tion has enabled us to abandon this idea. Our first impression was
that this phenomenon had a sexual significance, and this arose from
the fact that we had frequently observed copulating forms, as at c,
Fig. 21, in which one of the monads was clubbed. But from the
large number of cases subsequently watched with all conceivable
care, in which no such a phenomenon presented itself, we are obliged
to abandon this also. That it is without significance in the creature's
development we are unwilling to think; the more because of its
occurrence each year, and with greater or less persistence throughout,
as well as on account of the occasionally observed method of its
production. In Fig. 27 the mode of origin is shown. At first
two disks were seen within the sarcode, as in a, t, A ; these would
slowly push out, as in c, d, B, and the stalks would appear, and
eventually they would be wholly and permanently thrown out, as in
e,f,G.
But in spite of this we have failed to correlate it with any step
in the developmental history, which appears complete without
it; and we can only record the facts, and hope that some more
fortunate workers may be able to interpret them.
In the course of our work on this and other forms we have
been more than ever strongly impressed with the danger of hasty
conclusions. It animates our diaries to comment from time to time
on the probable meaning of certain observed phenomena — to specu-
late on their relation to what we had fully ascertained and what
we had yet to discover. At times, indeed, our inferences, when
* * M. M. J.,' vol. ix., pp. 206-209. .
Royal Microscopical Society, 269
made, seemed inevitable. But nothing is more interesting to us
than to see how facts slowly and unceasingly pursued and ascer-
tained and collated, showed the inutility of our surmises. In
investigations of this kind we are convinced that sequences must be
made iy the facts themselves. Inference, however plausible, may
vitiate a whole train of observation ; and, amongst other things, we
are bound to perceive the liability there must be to infer heterogeny
if observations be not long continued, and every transitional step
in the process be not demonstrated with the severest accuracy.
To complete our work on this f6rm we conducted a series of
heating experiments in precisely the same way as before. It will
suffice, therefore, to give the results of one series, which may be
taken as typical.
Six sUdes were taken : a drop of the fluid put on and covered
with a thin cover. This was carefully examined, and if found to
contain what was needed was allowed slowly to evaporate. The
whole selec^ six were next slowly heated up to 250 Fahr., kept
at this heat for ten minutes, and then allowed slowly to cool. When
cold, they were carefully remoistened with distilled water — the
water flowing readily under the cover by capillarity — ^and they were
again examined and reported upon.
Before they were put into the heating apparatus in each case
it was discovered that the elements required were there.
On examination after heating, and immediately after fresh
moistening, nothing was visible but a baked amorphous mass. Two
hours after this no motion of any sort was visible, save in two,
where, with ^^i\ excessively minute points were seen to be in a
state of activity, which was translatory and not Brownian.
Twelve hours after minute bodies — almost certainly known to
us as the very earhest motile form of the monad above described
after development from the germ — were seen in four of the fields.
These in two of the instances were traced up to full-sized monads
of the form and with the developmental history of the form at
which we were working ; whilst the other two on the second day
had many of the same in full maturity and complete action. The
other two were wanting in this form.
From this it is clear that whilst in one condition this^ monad
can survive desiccation, in another — the true sexual-germ-state — it
can survive a temperature of 250° Fahr.
We now heated another set of six under precisely similar con-
ditions up to 300°, Fahr. But in this whilst some forms with
which we were acquainted survived by means of their germs, this
•form was wholly destroyed, and not the trace of one in any form
could be discovered in any of the slides.
I
Transaoiions of the
JL — Oil some Microscopic Leaf Fungi from the Himalayaa.
By Joseph Flemino, M.D., F.R.C,8., Surgeon Army
Aledical Department,
(_Iltad before tlte Royal Microscopical Society, Nuv. i, 1874.)
Plitb LXJtXYL
Sous years ago, 'when the supposed fungoid origin of disease drew
the attention and observation of many practical physiciana and
scientitic men to that subject, more so perhaps than at the present
time, I was led — no doubt as many otlier observers were — in the
course of certain special investigations in India to make tha
acquaintance, though slight ani for the first time, of that inter-
esting and DOt generally known department of cryptogamic botany.
Though not at any time successful in associating for certainty the
presence of undoubted fungi witt constitutional or epidemic tiisease.
It frequently happened, as other observers both at home and abroad
have noted, that certain forms were seen both in the human subject;
and in some of the lower animals while in perfect health.
However, in the present state of the question I would not
pretend to afOnu that many specific and constitutional diseases in
man and animals are not caused by the presence of fungi or their
B|>oridia in the body ; and I cannot but beUeve that as our know-
ledge of them increases, and with the assistance of the higher
magnifying powers, in conjunction with a careful co-relative
analyses of symptoms, aecretiona, excretions, &c., we ultimately
shall be able to say to what extent certain diseases may be owing
to the lower forma of animal or vegetable life, I know the subject
is a difficult one, and nowadays it must be confessed there are few
men qualified for such investigations, simply because there are leas
mateiial inducements than there oi^ht to be, and hence men specu-
late and invent new theories, which are often more convenient and
DESCRIPTION OF PLATE LXSSVl.
FiQB. 1 dnd 2.^ PramE/eas omMms, on leaf of Himalayaa boi.
FiO. 3.— TncAofeasis sp.
„ 4. — Lower corner of leaf.
FiOB. 6 and 6. — Probably Uredo dsraatidis.
FiO. 7. — Part of leat with Undo jrunctaidea,
„ S- — Bpoies of Ureda panct-oidea.
„ 9. — Cislia q{ Septutrkh'ain,
„ 10,— Probftbly Votutella or Vermiadarla.
„ 11. — Spotee of Coleosporiani piagrie [?].
Figs. 12 and 13.— Part of leaf, with spores of Pnixn
„ 14 and 15, — Part of leaf, wLih Bpores of Piiccb.
PiQ, 16.— Bpores of P. vmbellife
„ 17, — Eiineum [deformed i
TteMonthlyMicroscopicaiJir^iQ-i .^^
rSiineClB.-;ja3i"?'vrti-^ ■
Royal Mieroseopieal Sodeiy. 271
Batisfactory, rather than putting their shoulders to the wheel, and
by experimeiit and observation trying to eliminate the truth.
It happened that for a period of two months in the autumn of
1870 I obtained leave to visit the Himalayas north of Deyrah
Dhoon, and employed moat of my time there m shooting game and
large animals, especially bears, which are very plentiful in many
parts of those truly magnificent mountains. In my search for
sport, sometimes in places most difficult of access, I frequently
observed fungi on the leaves or stems of living plants, and as
opportunities permitted I made collections of the affected leaves,
and preserved them for esamination, which I regret k> say haa
never been done nntil the present time.-
During the space of four years many have changed their colour,
and others cannot now be detected on the leaves, and some, indeed,
have been lost ; nevertheless I have endeavoured to coUect a few,
some of which no doubt are rare or CTen tmkuown in this country,
I am not aware of the existence of any work on the fungi of the
Himalayas, otherwise I should have consulted it prior to writing
the present paper, and thus have saved myself from useless repe-
tition and a httle anxiety lest I should be imperfectly performing a
labour which has already been well done by another. Since my
return to England I have had the advantage of Mr. M. C. Cooke'a
opinion of the objects figured in Plate LXSXVI,, which he haa
kindly named. Jndging from what I observed in September and
October, 1870, 1 should say that fungi are very common throughout
the whole range of the Himalayas, and it is probable that all the
English species, and maybe many new ones, are to be found with
little trouble to any energetic and adventurous mycologist who may
be fortunate enough to traverse those regions.
On some banks and simny slopes of the liillf:^ the wild straw-
berry and raspberry are to be fonnd in. abundance, and on the under
Borface of the leaves of many will be noticed black spots, which on
microscopical examination are proved to be the Aregma (Phrag-
midium) dituswn and Aregvia (P.) gradle respectively, and differ-
ing in no way from the English species.
On the under surfiice of the leaves of the thistla {Cardv/at
lanceolatvs) the Puccinia sgngenesiarum was frequently noticed,
and so was the Pticcinia variabiUs on the npper and under sur&ce
of the leaves of the dandelion.
The blackberry brand, the Aregma (Phragmidium) huU>osum,
was quite common on the under surfaces of the leaves of the black-
berry bushes, and occasionally a white, tough, cotton-like fungus was
met with, growing either from the under surfece of the venation of
the leaf or from tiie petiole, or both. This fungus will be referred
to farther on.
The Aregma (Phrugmidinm) mueronatum waa found on Um
272 TranBodions of the
under surface of the leaves of the wild rose, and another form which
was also common on oak leaves, laurels, and other species, and
which will bo referred to presently.
Pertdermium pini was plentifol on the leaves of the silver fir
and other pines, which grew in abundance in every direction, and a
similar fungus was commonly noticed on the pine leaves about
Dalhousie, more than a hundred miles from the hills north of
Deyrah Dhoon.
The various grasses as well as the leaves of Mudwa (a species of
millet) and the leaves of the rice plant, which is cultivated m many
of the valleys, appeared to possess their share of fungi.
In the accompanying Plate the portions of leaves have been
drawn the natural size from the actual specimens, and the spores
are magnified about 320 diameters.
In a valley about twenty miles from the mihtary station of
Landour, between Deyrah Dhoon and Dunooltie, but close to and
behind a high hill at the latter place, there is a considerable
extent of forest, principally compose of a species of boxwood tree
(Buxus), from zO to 30 feet high, and with wide-spreading
branches and with stems averaging from a few inches to 1^ feet in
diameter. During my travels of many hundred miles through the
Himalayas I never happened to come across a single specimen of
box tree except in the place mentioned, and in which they appeared
to grow well.
The under surface of most of the leaves contained a dark-brown
fungus, resembling in outward appearance an ^cidium, varying
in diameter from ^ to more than a :|: of an inch, and frequently
two or three of these orbicular patches may be found on one leaf.
The peridium bursts regularly in circular patches and the
margins become irregular and recurved, exposing the dark-brown
spherical spores. The spores appear to be peculiar and to belong
to the cenus C/romyces, naving short peduncles, a thick cell- wall,
and a hght amber-coloured endochrome, which communicates exter-
nally by a funnel-shaped orifice on the side opposite the attachment
of the peduncle, i. e. the upper part of the spore. This description
will be better understood by referring to Fig. 1, which represents
a box leaf with the fungus in situ, and Fig. 2, which shows three
of the spores magnified. [TJromyces amhtens, Cooke.]
Fig. 3 represents spores from the under surface of the leaf
of a plant which I fidl to recognize, and which exhibits small Ught-
brown spots made up of an aggregate collection of oval yellowish
spores attached by short peduncles to the epidermis of the leaf
(Trichdbasis). The plant apparently belongs to the order Convol-
vulacea, is herbaceous, about 2 feet in height, and the stem, &c.,
contains a milky juice as well as the roots, which are used by
the natives as a purgative. A species of dematis (probably the
Boyal Microdcopioal Society. 273
Traveller's Joy) is common on the hills and in the valleys, and
sometimes a beautiful orange-red fungus may be observed on the
under surface of the leaves. This fungus on thQ fresh leaf emitted
an odious smell — the smell of a recently killed bug — and was
quite unbearable, but now both the red colour and the smell have
disappeared. When the leaf is examined with a low power the
spores are found to be arranged in little button-hke clusters
(Fig. 5) iBrmly packed side by side and of yellow colour (Fig. 6),
and growing from the cellular dermis of the leaf almost at right
angles. [ Uredo clematidis* Berk.]
Fig. 7 shows the appearance of the leaf of a species of mimosa
with a fungus on the under surface, and Fig. 8 the spores with
three sporidia above. [Uredo pundoidea, Cooke.]
I found also a leaf of an unknown shrub with rust spots irregu-
larly distributed on the under surface. The spores are many-celled,
irregular, elongated, yellowish, and easily separate as a yellowish-
brown dust without any traces of mycelium, vide Fig. 9. [This is
a Septotrichum formerly included with fungi, but now discarded
as a diseased condition of the tissues. — M. C. C.l
On the leaf of a species of willow, I observed on the upper and
under surface a number of black spots, which were easily scraped
off. On microscopical examination, these black spots were found to
be made up of a number of bodies Uke that depicted in Fig. 10.
They consist of a circular, yellow-coloured matrix, with an interior
dark-brown-coloured nucleus, made up of fine mycelium, and inter-
spersed throughout the latter there are numerous small cells.
Outside the central nucleus, and arranged in a radiating manner,
there is a number of jet black spine-shaped processes, apparently
very brittle, as they are easily broken by pressure under the covering
glass. [No fruit : probably a VoliUella.'\
Fig. 12 represents the appearance of a portion of the under
surface of a leaf resembling the Bumex acetosa, on which raised
circular reddish-brown spots of fungi are observed. The spores
(Puccinia) are shown in Fig. 13, magnified, the cells being nearly
separate, and attached to long, tapering peduncles. [Pucdnia
dissiliena, Cooke.]
On the leaf of the common dock, which differs in no way from
that seen in this country, the upper and lower surfaces were studded
with rusty minute fungoid spots, which appear to belong to the
order -fficidiacei. The spores are circular, tuberculated, and of a
yellowish colour, [j^cidium rvhellum, P.]
Fig. 14 represents the appearance oi a piece of the under
surface of the leaf of a cruciferous plant, very common in the
* On the leaf I find Uredo clematidis, but not the structure indicated in the
drawing. If this is manifest in its fresh state, then the Uredo would be a
Coleosporium, — [M. C. 0.]
I
274 Transaeiions o/Oie Rotfol Mi«roeeoj>ieal Soeiettf.
Himalayas, and which is freqaently fonnd covered with dark-brown
spots of fon^. The spores are septate, with short peduncles
(which are liable to bo easily detached), oval in shape, and with a
comparatively transparent, nipple-hke projection on tne upper part,
vide Fig. 15. [Ptmcinia cmciferaram, Cooke.]
Fig. 16 shows the appearance of the apores of a Puceinia found
on the "pper and lower surfaces of the leaves of an ambelliferons
plant. [Puccima umbelli/eranim, D, C]
Fig, 17 reprcsenfe the magnified appearance of bodies which
form patches on the iinder surfaces of the leaves of the oak, species
of laoiel, wild rose, &c. They resemble the agarics in shape, are
hollow, or filled with a pink fluid, which, when pressure of the
covering glass is used, exudes throagh the lower part of the stipe
or stalk. [An Erineum, not a fungus, but diseased tissue. — M. C. C.]
Fig, 11 illustrates two of the sporangia which form the tough,
ootton-like fungus met with on the under surface of the briar leaves,
or on the petiole. The coneeptacles which contain the sporea are
hi- and tri-partite, and terminate in long filiform appendages. Two
of the nearly colourless tubereulated spores are depicted to tba
right of the sporangia. [I have seen no specimen of this. The
figures might belong to Cohosporium pingue, but the description
is rather that of some Erineum. — M. C. C]
I feel that an apology is necessary for writing on a subject with
which I am so little acquainted ; but as I had collected the
materials many years ago, I considered it better that they should
be made public at once, rather than be lost. Perhaps others more
competent may be induced to pursue the subject more fiiUy than I
have been able to do, as it is one of great interest, and not without
some advantage, and indeed, at all evente, the small collection of
leaves now before me recalls to my memory many pleasant days
rt amidst most beautiful scenery in one of the finest climatee of
world,*
in the cnrrent n
Hbtlzv, 8fptend)er, 1874.
-The Sphmra^hides in British UrtieaceiB and in Leonurua.
By Professor Gkobqk Guii-iveb, F.E.S.
The BpliBeraphides in the leaf-blade of some Urticaceffi are well
known, and imve been described on the Continent fts " crystal
glanda " and " cyatoKths." But tkere ia another kind of aphiera-
pbides in these plants which has hitherto eacaped notice; and
though Mr. Roper, in a late number of ' Science Groasip,' has made
Bome good observations on the apli£eraphido8 in the leaf of the
wall-pelletory, the chemical compcaition of the two kinds of them
in all the British Urticacere requires investigation. Nor have
we yet any description of such crystals in Leonurus and other
Labiatfe.
In JJrIiea dioica, U. urejis, and Parieiaria diffusa, the leaf-
hlades are studded with sphBeraphidea, each about s^sod of an inch
in diameter, globose, smoothish or granular on the suriace, and all
compoBed mainly of carbonate of lime. In the fibro- vascular
handles of the leaf are chains of mnch smaller sphieraphidea, each
about lo'ob th of an inch in diameter, rough from projecting crystal-
line points on the surfece, and composed of oxalate of lime ; and in
the pith these small rough sphsraphides are stiJl more abundant.
Both the leaf and pith of HumuluB lu^ulus abound in like manner
with the two kinds of sphaeraphidea. In the leaf-blade thase are
crystalline concretions, made up of glassy granules, consisting of
carbonate of lime. In the leaf-nerves, and in the pith of the stem,
are thickly-set strings of rough sphasraphidea, in shape and che-
mical composition like those in the same parts of the nettles and
pelletory.
The sphteraphidea in Leonurus cardiaea seem to have escaped
notice, though tbey are very distinct. In other Labiatie 1 have
not yet met with similar crystals, much less raphides. The leaf-
blade of this plant is thickly dotted with globrae granules, each
about jsfftli of an inch in diameter, rounded in form, and contained
in a closely fitting cell, which ia often tipped with a short uni-
cellular hair ; the globose crystalline matter consists chiefly of
carbonate of lime. In the fibro-vascnlar bundles of the leaf are a
few much smaller rough sphteraphides, each about T^'mith of an
inch in diameter, and composed of carbonate of lime ; but the pith
of this plant contains no sphsraphidea.
In all these examples the value of boiling the parts in a solution
of canatic potass is bo great, that the crystals ai^e exposed more clearly
than they appear before such treatment ; and aometin)es, when not
eaaily found at first, the potass discloses them admirably, as may
be proved in the leaf of Ficus carica. Though this species is so
■ VOL. XS. X
276 The Enetf$tmeni of Bucephalus HaimeanuB.
nearly allied to the hop and nettles, the crystab in its leaf-blade
are composed chiefly of oxalate of lime, without any appreciable
trace of the carbonate, and the pith is devoid of sphaeraphides.
Some practical applications of these tacts appear obvious. They
afford good examples of two kinds of crystalline concretions, differ-
ing as well in form as in chemical composition, existing in one and
the same plant ; that one use of the pith may be as a repository
and laboratory of saline crystals, ready to be restored as manure
to the soil ; and that nettles and hop-bines should be thus utilized.
Besides, the sphaeraphides are so very beautiful, so easily examined
and preserved, as to afford an abundwce of excellent materials, ever
at hand, for the employment of the microscope, and for preparations
to enrich the microscopic cabinet.
Ca\tebbubt, Nov, 12, 1874.
IV. — The Encystment of Bucephalus Eaimeanus.
By M, Alp. Giabd.
Von Baeb pointed out long ago (1826) a peculiar parasite of the
Anodon, which he called Bucephalus polymorphus. This parasite
was later more fully described by Steenstrup and by Siebold, who
gave it its true place in classification.
In 1854 M. Lacaze-Duthiers made known another species of the
same genus, the BiLcephdlus Eaimeanus, which he had found in
the Mediterranean, and which lived parasitic in the genital glands
of the oyster (Ostrea edulis), and also on the cockle (Gardium
rusticum), which it renders sterile. The sporocysis and the ^er-
caria form of this Trematode have been very carefiiUy figured in an
excellent paper in the * Annales des Sciences Naturelles.'
Claparede has since found this curious Trematode at Saint- Vaast-
k-Hogue, on the coast of Normandy.* It was in fishing in the
open sea with a very fine meshed net that he caught the Btt"
cephalus very frequently. The specimens drawn by Claparede differ
a little from those represented by M. Lacaze-Duthiers ; but this
difference, which bears principally on the form of the lamellar
appendages, did not appear important enough to the Genevese
savant to necessitate the creation of a new species. Claparede no
more than his predecessor has been able, in spite of his active
researches, to succeed in making known the final destiny of Cer-
caria Haimeana.
♦ Claparbde, Beobachtungen uber Anatomie u. 8. w. an der Kuzte von Nor-
mandie, 1863.
The Eneystment of Bucephalus Haimeanus.
277
The Bucephalns of Haime is to be found both ,it Maples and
in the neighbourhoixl of Boulogne-sur-Mer. Goided by certain
theoretic views, the result of researchea followed out upon the para-
sitic Crustacea, I have been more fortunate than iny two skilful
predecessors, for I have proved the encystment of tho Bucephalns.
It is upon the gartiah (Belone vidgaris) tba,t I have made
this observation. This fish (at Boulogne the maquereau d'elS, at
Abbeville the heeassine de mer) occurs commonly in the market of
Boulogne during the months of May, June, and the beginning of
July. The viscera of this fish, especially the liver, the genital
glands, and the peritoneum are frequently filled with minate cysts
having the form of cylinders, terminated at one of their extremities
by a bulb lightly drawn to a point, like a thermometer in construc-
tion. By opening cautiously a certain number of these cysts, one
finds in some one of them the Bucephalus as yet nntransformed.
My anatomical researches, interrupted in July, were not pushed
BO far as I should desire. However, I should say, in accordance
with Claparede, that it is impossible to arrive at the opinion of
M. Lacaze-Duthiers, when he says, in speaking of Bucephalus,
" One observes in it a general cavity, tmt may be considered a
digestive cavity." The position of the openings and their phy-
siological purposes appear to me to be worthy of being studied
.anew.
\ What becomes of the encysted Bucephalus ? Does it arrive at
* maturity in the body of the garfish, or does it undergo another
migration ? In this latter case, which is the more probable, is this
' migration active or purely passive ? This it is which remains for
discovery. Claparede has many times found the Cerearia Maimeana
fixed upon the Sarsia and the Oceania. On one occasion the
cerearia had lost its two long appendages, but it still wanted the repro-
ductive organs. Claparede concludes that this fact was accidental,
and that the medusae were bnt momentary hosta of the Bucephalus.
I myself have met an adult Trematode in the ccelenteric cavity of
I Cydifpe pileitt, which in spring is sometimes cast up in abundance
P on the shore of Wimereux ; but I have no serious reason for sup-
■ posing a genetic relation between this Trematode and Bueephalua
According to Siebold, BueephaJus polj/morphus is transformed
into Gaeteroitomv/m Jimhriatum in the digestive tube of Perea
fiuviaiilia and P. luctojierca. We also find it encysted in the Cypri-
nidse. It seems, then, very probable to suppose that Bucephalus
HaimeanuB, encysted in Belone vxdgaris, is metamorphosed into a
species of the genus Qatterostamum in the intestine of some largo
fish which the garfish is the prey of. In fact, Lacepede assures us
that when the garfish quits the deep maters to go to spawn near the
shore it often becomes the prey of sharks and large species of
X 2
278 The Encydment of Bucephalus Haimeanus.
Gadus, or other voracious and well-armed fish. Finallj, as one
has mot Bucephalus in the liver of PaludinsB and Giusterostomse,
in the intestines of the pike, the eel, and of other fish, and even in
the duck, I am compelled to think that the fresh-water species of
this group of Trematodes are more numerous than is at present
belicvt'd. The differences already pointed out between the marine
Bucephalus of the ocean and that of the Mediterranean Sea will
prol)ably liave a greater importance when we shall have made a
more complete and comparative study of these animals. — Compfes
liendus, p. 485, August 17, 1874.
^K dii
( 279 )
PEOGRESS OF MICEOSCOPICAL SCIENCE.
of Egg». — In a paper lately read before the
Brit i eh Agsociation at Belfast, Mr. William Thomson said that
researches on this eubjeet were commenced by the late Dr. Crace Cal-
vert aad himself about the beginning of October, 1870, and extended
over the following year and a half. From numerous experiments ho
drew the CDnclnsion that whole egge could only be attacked by one,
two, or all, of three different agencies of decomposition. The first,
which he termed putrid cell, is ca,pable of being developed within
some eggs, no matter Low effectually their shells be protected by var-
nished coverings from the spores Eoating iu the atmosphere. It is
generated from the yolk. In some cases the yolk begins to swell and
absorbs most of the white ; in otbexs the yolk bursts, and its whole
BubstancB becomes thoroughly mixed up with the white; and in others
again it begins to change slightly, and then gives off minute cells
into the white, rendering the white turbid ; but in all cases where this
takes thorougb hold of the contents of the egg, true putrefaction com-
mences, and the albumen emits a putrid smell. The minute granules
or cells of the healthy yolk, when this decomposition commences,
assume a morbid vitality ; they grow large, and become filled with
small cells ; each large cell then bursts, and the smaller cells take
independent existence. These cells are the bioplasm of the yolk,
which, had the egg developed into a chicken, would baVe gone to form
its flesh, bone, and tissues. These cells, under their morbid vitality,
itbeorb oxygen, and liberate carbonic acid gas. Two eggs had their
shells well varnished over with shellac, and were set aside on a shelf
for one year, and both then opened. One appeared as fresh as on
the day when it was set aside, but when the other was struck with the
point of a knife to open it, the pressure of gas contained within the
shell burst out, and scattered part of its contents in all directions.
The next germ of decomposition— the vibrio— appears under the micro-
scope like a small rigid worm which swims about. These animalcules
are constantly found floating about in the atmosphere, but never pene-
trate into the contents of an egg if the shell be kept dry, but if the
shell be moistened or wet, the dried bodies of these animalcules
develop in that water, assume much vitality, and then penetrate the
shell and set up putrefaction. Egga were placed in fluids swarming
with different animalcules, some like corkscrews, which swam by
quickly turning round ; otbers which appeared under the microscope
like flukes, but which really had the foi^n of an egg ; some with one,
some with two feelers, which swam by switching those feelers into a
quick serpentine motion in front of them. Those, however, were not
able to penetrate the shell of the egg. The third is the fungus decom-
position. The spores of this fungus are found everywhere floating in
the atmosphere. They settle on the shells of egga placed in stagnant
atmospheres, and send myriads of lilaments through the shell in all
directions, sometimes binding all sides of the shell together, in all
za\} PBoaBESs of hioroboofioal sonoroE.
cases converting the white into the congistency of a strong jelly, and
often the filaments grow in such immense numbers as to make the
whole eentente appear like a hard-boiled egg. This fungus acts on
the air exaetly like animalcules, absorbing oxygen and liberating
carbonic acid gas.— TAe Medical Jtecord, Sept. 9th.
Effects of Section of MoIot Nerves on Muscle.- — Eizzozero and
Grolgi* give an account of an experiment they made upon a rabbit
when six months old. On the 10th January they cnt out a con-
Uderable piece of the sciatic nerve. The tibio-tarsal juint of the aide
» operated on became thiekened, and an nicer formed upon the surface
jurse of a month. The lymphatic glands swelled. The
oimal, however, retained tolerable health till ^e 20th August, when
) portion of the crui-al nerve was excised on the same side. The
hibbit remained pretty well till the 9th November, when the ulcer
pegan to increase and assuinc an imhealthy aspect, and in December
K died, having previously become exceedingly thin. On post-mortem
uamination the connective tissue of the whole lower exb^mity was
jbimd to be infiltrated with serum, ulcers bad formed at various
i, and beneath these were cheosy deposits, each of which was
rrounded by a dense capsule of connective tissue. The stmnps of
the divided nerves were separated from each other by a considerable
interval. The supei'ficial muscles of the thigh presented a pale-rose
colour, whilst the deeper ones were of a yellowish red. The super-
ficial muscles of the lower leg were in general greyish red, but in
parts yellowish ; they felt hard and were easily torn. The deep
muscles had undergone some thickening, and had a uniform yellowish
colour ; on section they appeared smooth and uniform, the surface of
the section resembling bacon-fat. Microscopical esamination showed
that in the superficial muscles of the thigh there were scattered
groups of fat-cells arranged in linear series, which apparently corre-
sponded with the course of the nerve-fibres. The muscular fibres of
the deep muscles of the thigh wore thinned, the transverse strite
scarcely visible, and between the museular fasciculi of the first and
second order were numerous and very well defined fat-cells. In other
parts the muscular substance of the several fibres was partly torn into
fragments and partly replaced by fat'-cells. The superficial muscles
of the lower leg presented in a very marked manner the usual con-
sequences of nerve section — namely, proliferation of nuclei in the
muscle-corpuscles, atrophy of the muscular fibres themselves, increase
of the interstitial connective tissue, and numerous fat-cells between
the muscular fibres. Lastly, in the deep muscles of the lower
extremity, where the muscles were yellowish and like bacon on
section, no trace of muscular fibre was visible ; the tissue appeared
to be altogether converted into adipose tissue, comparable to the
pannicuIiLS adiposus. In transverse sections the fat-cells were
rounded or polyhedric, and formed a kind of mosaic. In longi-
tadinal sections they were serially arranged in correspondenca with
the direction of the fasciculi. — The Lancet, Aug. 30th,
» Strieker's 'Jahrb,,' 1S73, Htft 1.
d
PBOaBESS OF MIOBOSOOPIOAL SOIENOE. 281
The Original Distinction of the Testicle and Ovary,* — This paper
is of the utmost importance, as it bears so thoroughly upon Haeckers
theory. It is by M. Van Beneden, of Liege, and we quote the
following translation of part of it from the 'American Naturalist'
of November, 1874 : —
" Huxley was the first who demonstrated that the entire organi-
zation of the zoophytes, medussB, and polypes, hydroids and Siphon-
ophoreSj can be reduced to a sac formed of two adjacent cellular
layers, the ectoderm and endoderm (Allman), and who considered
this proposition as expressing the general law of structure in the
zoophytes, f Although one did not dream at this period of seeking
homologies between the vertebrates and lower animals, Huxley took
in all the bearings of his discovery. He recognized and formulated
in clear and precise language his opinion on the homology which he
believed exists between the ectoderm and endoderm of the Coelen-
terata, and the two primordial cellular layers of vertebrates. See in
what terms he expresses this idea : — * The peculiarity in the structure
of the body-walls of the Hydrozoa, to which I have just referred,
possesses a singular interest in its bearings upon the truth that there
is a certain similarity between the adult state of the lower animals
and the embryonic conditions of higher organizations.
" * For it is well known that, in a very early state, the germ, even
of the highest animals, is a more or less complete sac, whose thin
wall is divisible into two membranes, an inner and an outer ; the
latter, turned toward the external world ; the former, in relation
with the nutritive liquid, the yolk "The various organs are
produced by a process of budding from one, or other, or both of
these primary layers of the germ.'
'* He seeks likewise to establish a parallelism, from a histological
point of view, between the ectoderm of zoophytes and the external
layer of the embryo of vertebrates on one hand, and the endoderm
and internal layer on the other. He concludes by saying, *thus
there is a very real and genuine analogy between the adult Hydrozoon
and the embryonic vertebrate animal.' All the embryological researches
made in late years, in the first phases of the embryonic development
of animals of all branches, have tended to confirm, extending it to
the whole animal kingdom, the opinion of the illustrious English
naturalist. And in the first rank of work done in this direction may,
without fear of contradiction, be cited that of Kowalevsky ; in showing
the identity of development of Amphioxus and of the Ascidians, he
closed with a single stroke the abyss, thought to be impassable, which
separates the branch of vertebrates from all the lower organisms. The
important publications of the same author on the other types of
organization, added to those of Gegenbaur, Haeckel, Eay Lankester,
♦ * De la Distinction originelle du Testicnle et de TOvaire ; Caract^re sexuel
des deux Feuillfcis primordiaux : de TEmbryon ; Hermaphrodisme morpholo-
gique de toute Individualite animale ; Essai d*une Theorie de la Fe'condation.'
Bruxelles, 1874. 8vo, pp. 68.
t " Observations upon the Anatomy of the DiphydsB and the Unity of Organi-
zation of the DiphydsB and Siphonophorse." ' Proceedings of Royal Society,' 1849.
Il
PBOQOBSS OF HIOROBCOPICAL SOIBNOB.
* Kleinenborg, and somo others, have resulted in estendiag to the entire
aaimal kiiigdom this grand conception that all the parts of tlio animal
organiBm ore formed from the two primordial coUulai layers, and
everywhere horaologima.
" These ideaa have just been developed in detail and brilliantly
defended in two essays of a high philosophic impoit. Uaeckel has
proposed in his brochure ' Die Gaetraa theorie, die phylogenetiache
Classification des Thierrcichee und die Homologie dor EoimblStter,'
a theory which he had first annouDoed in his monogragh on the cal-
careous sponges. Some analogous ideas, and in several respects
almost identical, Lave been publiah'ed iti England in the Annals and
Magazine of Natural History, under the title, " OB the Primitive
Cell-layers of the Embryo as the Basis of tlio Genealogical Classifica-
tion of Animals," by my friend E. Ray Lankcster.
" All the plnricelliilar animals, in which the development begins
, ty the segmentation of the cell-egg, pass through in the course of
, their evolution a similar embryonic form, that of a sac whose thin
I walla are constituted of two adjacent layers, the endoderm and ecto-
I detm. The first surrounds a cavity which is the primordial digestive
' tabe ; the second limits exteriorly the body of the embryo ; it alone
can be impressed by external causes. The digestive cavity commu-
nicates with the exterior by a single orifieo which serves both as
mouth and anus. The embryo is reduced to a digestive cavity, which
is but a simple stomach ; Haeckel has proposed to give to this
primordial form the name of Gasimla. As this embryonic form
occurs in the vertebrates as well as the mollusks, arthropods, echino-
derms, worms and polypes, it is clear that the ectoderm is homologous
in the different types of organization ; that the endoderm has in all
the eame morphological value ; that the primoi-dial digestive cavity of
vertebrates and that of all other types of organization have the same
anatomical signification. The existence of this eouunon form in the
» course of evolution of all the mebazoal animals allows ns to refer
them to a common source ; there is a convergence of the great
^pes of organization and not a parallelism as had been urged by
Ouvier and Ton Baer. Finally, we can infer the existence at a
geological epoch for back, of organisms like the Gaatrula form;
these organisms, probably varied in a thousand ways in their form and
in their external characters, have been the common source of verte-
brates, arthropods, moilusks, eehiiiodoims, worms, and zuophytes ;
I they constitute the very numerous group of Gastrfeadea (Haeckcl). if
the endoderm and ectoderm are hopiologoua in all the Metazoa [i.e.
all animals except Protozoa], we tLen have a right to suppose that
these two cellular layers have in all the same histological value, and
that the same systems of organs are developed in the different types
of organization from tho same primitive layers. This induction
has been already freely confirmed in that which eonceras the cen-
tral nervous system, which is developed in all animals &om the
ectoderm.
" Consequently, it makes no difference if we should wish to know
the origin of an organ, whether we seek for it in one or another type
PBOQBESS OF MIOBOSOOPIOAL SCIENCE. 283
of organization ; the results can be extended to the whole animal
kingdom, and receive a general signification.
" However, of all the types of organization, that which serves best
for research on this capital question of the origin of organic systems,
is that of the polypes, still called zoophytes or Coelenterates. In
them, in short, the ectoderm and endoderm persist with their embry-
onic characters during their entire life ; all the organs of the zoophytes
are only a dependence of one or the other of these layers, sometimes
of the two layers united.
" The polype form may be traced back with the greatest facility
to the Grastrula, all the parts of which are preserved without under-
going any great modifications during all the course of existence.
*' Conclusions. — In the Hydractinias, 1. The eggs are developed
exclusively from the epithelial cellules of the endoderm. They remain,
up to the time of their maturity, surrounded by the elements of the
endoderm.
" 2. The testicles and spermatozoa are developed from the ecto-
derm; this organ results from the progressive transformation of a
primitive cellular fold formed by invagination.
" 3. There exists in the female sporosacs a rudiment of the tes-
ticular organ ; in the male sporosacs a rudiment of an ovary. The
sporosacs are then morphologically hermaphrodites Fecunda-
tion consists in the union of an egg, a product of the endoderm, with
a certain number of spermatozoa, products of the ectoderm. This act
has no other end than to unite chemical elements of opposite polarity,
which after having been united an instant in the egg, separate again ;
for in most animals those in which the division of the vitellus into two
occurs, the elements from which the ectoderm are formed are already
separated from those which are to form the internal layer of the
embryo.
" The new individuality is realized at the instant when the union
between the elements of opposed polarity has taken place, as abso-
lutely as a molecule of water is formed by the union of atoms of
hydrogen and oxygen."
The Origin of Typhoid Fever, — In the beginning of the month of
November a yery important letter of some length on this subject
appeared, from the pen of Dr. Tyndall, F.E.S., in * The Times ' news-
paper. We would commend the letter to the attention of those of our
readers who are interested in the subject. We differ from one of our
contemporaries in the view we take of this letter ; for, unquestionably,
although its facts are not novel to the scientifically educated medical
man, still, to the mass of surgeons, and to the whole of the non-
medical community, it is absolutely and completely novel. And it
seems to us that a certain amount of credit is due to Professor Tyndall
for thus manfully coming forward to discuss, in a purely popular form,
facts which he, of course, knew were well enough known to certain
professional minds. He has at once spread throughout the country
views which, had he not come forward, might have remained where
they had been till the next half century.
I
I
I
■ n
fSSi PBO0BEBS OV HIOROSOOPIOAI. SCIEITCE.
The South African Diamotuh. — Mr. G. C. Cooper, who m&y be said
to be "to the manner bora," as he comes from the African dianion<1-
fields, has an iuterestiag paper in the laet volume of the ' Proceedings
of (he Geologists' Associatioa' (Oct., 1874^), on this Btibject. £«Bides
other matters of noa-microecopical interest, he says: — "1 have
recently received a piece of what is termed ' chalk ' by the diggers,
wliich, from microBcopio observations, I would infer to be in all
essential points the some as the tnfu that is eo abundant, with this
exception, that this has hoan broken up, disintegrated, as on a beach,
and thus made into a softer form, after its doposition as tufa. It gives
the same white streak as ordinary chalk. It has imbedded iu its
Burfaco some sand gran ales, j and Mack crystals, resembling, and, as
I think, the same aa occurs m a sample of stuff lately given to me,
from 80 feet depth. Its component particles are cryHtaUino and trans-
lucent, and fi^m ^^^^nr *<> tAtt °^ "" ""i'' ™ diameter. Dissolves in
dilute muriatic acid, with somo floccnlent deposit. Upon evaporation,
star-like masses of crystals form, I look upon this specimen as of
importance in helping to snbstantiate what I advance in relation to
water and ice in producing the diamond deposit."
3^ Structure of the Tetlide. — A good paper on this subject is that
done by Dr. Victor v. MiLalkovics, and the results of his researches
appear in the last part of the 'Arbeiten,' or "work done" in the
Physiology Laboratory of Ludwig, at Leipzic, in 1873. The conclu-
sions at which Dr. Mihalkovics has arrived, which partly agree with
and in part differ from those of previous observers, are given in the
following manner by the ' Lancet ' (Oct. 10) : — In the first place, he
finds, in opposition to the greater number of authors, as Miiller,
Krause, Beale, Bappey, Kolliker, v, Luschka, and Lavalette St. George,
that the tortTioiis terminal or peripheric portion of the tubuli semi-
niferi forms a plexus by the anastomoBes of their numerous dichotonous
divisions. The ultimate branches appear to be connected by loops.
In man, the canals in the cortical layer present smaU. bead-like pro-
jections of the wall, and never begin, as most of the above-named
authors contend, by closed free extremities. In regard to the structure
of the walls, he believes Henle is most exact in stating that it consists
of a series of laminte, or membranes with flat nuclei. The size of the
tubuli bears no relation to that of the testis, since in the guinea-pig
it is 0-10; the cat, O-ll; in the cock, 0-12; mouse, 0-15; rabbit,
0-20; goat,0-20; nian,0-21; dog,0-25; bulI,0-26; and rat, which
is the largest of all, O'iO of a millimetre. Secondly, the straight
portions of the tubes, or vasa recta, are not direct continuations of the
tortuous portions, but are of very much smaller diaineter, and are
lined by a much shorter columnar epithelium. They run in the con-
nective tissue of the corpus Highmorianum or in the lowest parts of
the septa. Thirdly, the supporting cells, described by v. Merkel, and
germ plexus are, he thinks, artificial products, which owe their exist-
ence to the coagulation of a tenacions albuminous substance occupying
the interspaces between the seminal cells. Fourthly, certain inter-
stitial cells are constituents of the testis, the analogues of which aro
discoverable in many other orgauB, as the supra-renal capsules, the
NOTES AND MEMORANDA. 285
sacral and carotidean glands, the corpus Inteum, and pituitary body.
Fifthly, the connective tissue of the testis consists of various-sized
trabecules of connective tissue, which form a network, and are covered
by an endothelial layer of cells, which last is continued from them on
to the seminal tubules and blood-vessels. Sixthly, the lymphatics
commence in the interspaces of the fasciculi of connective tissue
invested by endothelium, and partly in the lacunas of the lamella of
the walls of the seminal tubules. No true tubular lymphatics with
defined walls exist in the testis at all. Lastly, the tubuli seminiferi
are closely surrounded by a layer of capillary blood-vessels, intimately
connected with the membrana propria.
NOTES AND MEMOEANDA.
Cell-cnltiire in the Study of Fungi. — Ph. Van Tieghem and
G. LeMonnier in their published researches on the Mucorini give
a good working account of their method of cell-culture which is
applicable not only to the smaller fungi but to many other plants.
The- method is as follows, according to the ' American Naturalist,'
Nov., 1874 : — A glass cell ^ or ^ inch is cemented upon a glass
slide, and a suitable cover glass is kept in place by three minute drops
of oil placed on the edge of the ring. The contained air is kept moist,
by a few drops of water placed in the bottom of the cell, while a very
small drop of the nutritive fluid is placed on the lower surface of the
cover glass, and in this drop the spore to be cultivated is sown. The
whole drop, and indeed the entire contents of the cell, can now be
examined with suitable powers, and the germination and development
of the plant traced hour after hour from any given spore, with the
greatest certainty and ease. Extraneous spores will sometimes be
introduced, but they are easily detected.
American Opinion on Angular Apertures. — An anonymous writer
in the last number of the * American Naturalist ' makes the following
remarks on this subject : — " It is not yet forgotten that at the London
examination of the ^-inch lens sent to demonstrate the possibility of
obtaining an excessive angular aperture in immersion work on balsam
objects, the lens was measured at an adjustment of which nothing to
the point was known except that it was not a position of immersion
work at all, nor a recognized maximum position for any kind of work ;
the plain fact being that the accomplished committee were so bent
upon teaching us the familiar fact of reduced angle that they seem to
have forgotten to look for any other possibility in the case. Nor is it
likely to be forgotten as long as Mr. Wenham so far forgets his usual
and admirable caution as to allude to the correction of this palpable
mistake as an * after quibble,* nor while the eminent President of the
Boyal Microscopical Society utters in his formal Address such on
VOTES AND MEUOBANSA.
Bfltomidiag etfttemeat as the fullowing : — ' The leim in thie i
was properly corrected as a dr; lens, ttnd then after nioasurement in
air it was measured, in ivator and then in veiy flnid Canada balsam
without alteration of the adjustment. It may be quite possible
that if the lens had been readjusted eo as to give the best image for
immersion in balsam, a slightly greater angle might have been ob-
tained ; but this would not have been a fair way of making a com-
parison, as it is not the mode in which the glass would ever be employed
in actual practice.' By not saying squarely, /( is prohabhj true that
if the Una had been readjusted so as to give the best image for i'mynersion
in vsaler, a greater tmgle would have heen obtained ; and Otis wotdd have
beea Ike fair way of making the measurement, as it is Ike mode in which
the glass would be emplmjed t'n actual practice, Mr. Brooke lost a rare
opportunity to do a noblo if not a generous act. As ho is well known
to be incapable of an intentional sophistry which by odmitly worded
phrase should suggest a doubt where none is felt, belittle the conces-
eions which are colled for by manifest truth, and Bay one thing which
is true but has no relation to the case at issue, and at the same timo
imply another thing which does not relate to the case but is nn-
qualihedly incorrect,' there is no choice but to conclude that his extra-
ordinary statement, notwithBtondIng its tone of judicial coolness, was
made without that deliberation which the official character of the
Address demanded.
" On*the other hand, a still more recent lens by the same maker,
claiming still more excessive aperture, has been examined by Mr. Wen-
ham by his method of cutting oS &1bu light. By this method, which
would seem incapable of excluding any image-forming rays, he suc-
ceeded in obtaining a clear and distinctly limited angle for the lens
whose light, when not thus protected, was vague and uncertain ; the
angular aperture at the same time being reduced from '180°' to
'112'',' which corresponded within a. few degrees with the aperture
computed trigouo metrically &om the width of the front lens and the
length of the working focus. To tliis it is answered, that with a dry
object on the cover there is no distance involved and the triangle is
impracticable : while accurate focnssing upon a stop which is feasible
at ' uncovered ' adjustment, is liable to error from spherical aberration
when adjusted for maximum angle. Mr. Tolles' method of demon-
strating the utilization of cxtra-limital rays is by placing a central
stop upon the posterior surface of the bock system of lenses, so large
as to cut off all light when the objc'Ctive is used dry; so that by no
trick of illumination con the light be made to pass through the narrow
ling of clear aperture remaining arouud the stop ; but if water be
flowed in both above and below the balsam-mounted object, convert-
ing both the objective and the illuminating semi-cylinder into immer-
eion arrangements, a well lighted artd defined image is immediately
produced. With regard to extreme angles in connection with dry
objects, Mr. Tolles claims that his much-disputed ^ inch does actnally
form an image with the most oblique rays that can impinge upon the
slide, all other rays being cut off by a card or shutter which can be
moved up close to the bottom of the elide."
CORRESPONDENCE. - 287
The Microscopic Strnctnre of Ancient and Modem Volcanic
Rocks is the title of a most valuable paper read before the meeting
of the Geological Society, on Nov. 4th, by Mr. J. Clifton Ward, F.G.S.
Unfortunately we have not space for a sufficiently long abstract in
the present number, but we nevertheless call the attention of our
readers to the subject. We shall give a full account of it in our next
number.
How to Make exceedingly Thin Glass Covers. — The following
exceedingly interesting paper we quote in full from the * Quarterly
Journal of the Quekett Club,' Oct. Mr. G. J. Burch, who is the
author, says: — " Take a piece of glass tube of about ^ inch bore, seal
up the end with the blow-pipe, and continue the heat until the glass
is so soft that it will fall out of shape, unless you keep turning it
round; remove it from the flame, and blow into it with all your
strength. It will be seen to swell, at first slowly, and then suddenly
to a large bubble of very thin glass. Supposing the tube to have
been sealed up with as little glass as possible, it may be blown
out to about 4 inches diameter. When cold, break it up, and cut
the pieces to shape with a * writing diamond.' The glass in this
state is of course convexo-concave ; practically this is of little con-
sequence unless the objects are to be mounted dry, when it is liable
to be broken. In order to flatten it, place a piece of the thin glass on
a perfectly flat piece of platinum foil, and depress it for a moment into
the Bunsen flame ; as soon as it is red hot, it will sink down to the
flat foil. This also has the effect of annealing it. On measuring a
piece of this glass with the micrometer, I found it to be = ^^^ inch
= '0004 inch. In the * Monthly Microscopical Journal,' vol. viii.,
page 270, Dr. Eoyston-Pigott says: — *The thinnest glass in my
possession measures 2^ thousandths.' Now 2^ thousandths = * 0022,
and :^^f =5*5. So that his thinnest glass is 5^ times the thickness
of mine."
COKKESPONDENCE.
EOSS AND CO.'S iTH AND BbNBOHE's No. 7.
To the Editor of the * Monthly Microscopical Journal,'
MmsTEB Court, York, November 7, 1874.
Sir, — Until of late years England stood unquestionably at the head
of all other nations in the production of object-glasses for the micro-
scope, but now Paris, Vienna, Berlin, Munich, and Boston dispute the
palm with London; and there is no denying that they are very
formidable rivals.
There are, of course, great diflSiculties in the way of estimating
the relative merits of objectives so long as they are handled by
I
OOBBEBPONQXMCS.
L different persons ; difforences ia tlio skill and eyesight of the obaervers,
differences in the modoe of illumination, differeuces in the same
nominal subject of examination, differenceB of angular aperture, and
BO on. ThtiHO, it is plain, aro mure or lesB unavoidable; but there ia one
source of embarrassmeut, which, though it has often been mentioned
before, can never he mentioned often enough, for erils are never
remedied unless a loud outcry is raised against them. I allu'le to the
total absence of any standard of magnifyiiig power from which w6
are now suifering. I knuw of Jthe wliich amplify much more than
Jths, of Jths which exceed y^ths, of ^ths which are equivalent to
-yl^tii^. In fact, matters have now come to such a pass, that an inex-
perienced purchaser can seldom know much more about what he is
baying than that it is an object-glass. It would be a great boon to
the world of microscopista if the Koyal Microscopical Society could
put forward a standard measure of linear dimensions for a given focns,
and that onr great makers would at least try to approximate to it ;
for the present system is an afiront to common sense and common
honesty.
But, notwithstanding these difficulties, comparison between English
and foreign objectives is going on, slowly but surely, sometimes
noisily, oftener silently, yot still going on, searching for facts, and
awaiting a final verdict. As yot our country does not appear to
Lave been worsted in the trial, although Mr. Mayall would probably
think that the case has already gone against her, and that foreigners
are of liis mind.* There is one circumstance, however, that English
opticians would do well to keep continually before them, that Europe
has secured an immense advantage over her in the matter of price, and
that nothing hut quality can ever make head against cheapness.
As bearini! upon this question, and with a full sense of the
i which surround it, I would venture to make a few
^^ a connection with the interesting note from Mr. Kitton in
^H your last number.
As far as X am able to judge, I should say that Ross and Co.'s
patent ^th ia about a match for his Bonecho's No. 7 in magnifying
power, though it may exceed it in angolar aperture. On applying this
t objective to the examination of tbe diatoms which he has named, I
found that with perfectly direct candle-light, mirror and diaphragm
being both excluded, the B eye-piece revealed the striB on P. auja-
lattim most beautifully, and without the smallest change of the condi-
tions brought out the arrangement of the terminal striaa perfectly well.
With the help of lamp and condenser, and using the C eye-piece,
the checker-work of P. intermedium was exhibited most distinctly, and
the costBB of Cymbdla Ehrenhergii plainly seen to be composed of
^^f flattened beads,
^H Pinnularia ^leregrina is a more difficult object than Cymhella Ehrea-
^^t bergii, but in one frastule the transverse lines upon the costts were
^H shown almost vividly ; while those on Nitziehia sigmoidea stood out
^^1 quite distinctly for all their closeness.
^^1 The transverse markings of Synedra robusla were distinctly re-
^H ' 6ee 'M. M. J.,' Feb. 1869, p. 90.
COBBESPONDENCE. 289
solved into beads, but apparently not so compressed as those of
Cymbclla Ehrenbergii,
In all the above observations the adjusting collar of the glass
remained unaltered, just midway between " covered" and " uncovered."
May I add that this objective contains in itself an adaptation for
immersion use, and while it performs so well on lined objects, it gives
a superb figure of Lejpidocyrtus curvicollis,
I am, Sir, your faithful servant,
E. CoBBET Singleton.
On Mb. Singleton's Obsebvations.
To the Editor of the * Monthly Microscopical Journal,'*
Denstonb, November 9, 1874.
Sib,— While I am much obliged to the Rev. R. Singleton for his
readiness to ventilate the question of straight candle-light illumina-
tion, I must confess I am disappointed at the general tone of his
letter, and the covert vein of sarcasm which runs through it. This
has been the more surprising to me, as I am conscious of having
taken unusual pains to avoid giving offence, and to write nothing that
might rouse up any of the genus irritabile microscopicorum.
Indeed, it would be well for all of us, when we have to remark
upon the performances of another, of which we have before us only a
brief printed account, to exercise a certain amount of caution, lest,
while criticising, we ourselves fall into mistakes. With nothing but
an abstract to guide us, and in the absence of the writer himself, we
are not always certain what is the strength of the point we would
attack ; nor do we know but that our opponent may have an awkward
trick of keeping back his strongest troops in the reserve.
Mr. Singleton must himself by this time regret the peculiar turn
he gave to his last sentence.
" If he means that it has detected the longitudinal lines of that
diatom, it would be a real boon to microscopists to tell them of the
feat."
Indifferent persons who take up his letter will read between the
lines something of this sort : —
" S. gemma is a test * of prodigious difficulty. Mr. Hickie seems
to hint that he has resolved it with a \ inch. Either he has so
resolved it, or he has not ; he declines to say which. I will force
* The Grermans, in spite of the Grundlichheit we are in the habit of ascribing
to them, are in these matters pretty much as we are ourselves, and quite as much
given to copying one from another. See Dr. Hager's *Das Mikroskop,' p. 36.
An exception may be made in favour of Dr. E. Hartnack, of Potsdam, as his
blunders are usually original. But the Herrschaft zu Waisenstrasse, though great
opticians, are by no means great manipulators, as I know by experience. Some-
thing of the same kind appeared also in an early number of this Jolimal ; but the
writer has since, in my liearing, candidly retracted his error. To those who have
no opportunity of judging otherwise, I would recommend a glance at Dr. Wood-
ward's photograph of this diatom.
him to spenk out plainly ; and if be eajB he hns, I nm prepared
beforehand to disbelieve him."
I have no right to aBanme — what certainly does not appear from
Mr. Singleton's letter — that he has given any special attention to
diatoms as te»U ; bnt those who have done so know well that, when
once they have fully succeoded in mastering such a test with a
moderate power — aay a -^ inch — a little practice and perseverance
Boon enable thom to overcome it with a weaker objective, and that a
little further practice generally reBolves it with a weaker power still.
Resolution turns not SO much upon ubjectivos as upon the manipn-
lator's own fingers.
My use of the words " up to S. gemma " was an intentional con-
cession to the frailty of human nature, in order not to oSend the
prejudices of those who persist in classmg that diatom as a very high
In my own practice, I know only four firfit-class fosta : (1) Anvpki-
pleura peltucida, (2j Staaroneig spicula, (3) Nttpicula cragstnenig,
(4) FrueluUa Saxontea, as it is found in Eastern Prnaeift. In sorao
of these latter, especially in those mounted by C. Kodig, of Hamburg,
the lines are so amazingly fine, as to render this kind of Frnstulia a
more difGcult test even than the acus. The second mentioned may be
foaud on almost any slide of P. macmm. It is a small lanceolate
species of Staurvneig, somewhat like two dagger-blodos placed hilt to
hilt. I recommend it to the notice of the readers of this JonmaL
But with regard to S. ijemtiut itself, I attach no sort of valna to
this diatom ; and I have often wondered how such a thing ever got
voted into a test.
Its deficiencies are obvious. It almost never presents an even
surface; there is no uniformity in the same gathering in respect of
difSculty, some specimens, espoeially those of a whitey-brown colour
with almost black ribs, being troublesome enough, while many of
those with a greenish tinge ore scarcely a tost for an ordinary ^ inch.
For instance, I have one snch slido so easy of resolution, that I can
resolve six ont of every seven of those that lie perpendicularly,
taking them just as they come. In some the interspaces between the
ribs are twice or three times as wide at one end as they are at the
other. In others, again, some of the ribs run only half-way, leaving
a wide space ; and though the longitudinal lines almost invariably,
instead of forming straight vertical lines, elope somewhat from right
to left, I have sometimes met with instances to the contrary.
In short, 8. gemma seems made for the express purpose of
upsetting all our theories as to the uniformity of etrncture and
regularity of marking of Diatnmaceie, and, like many Christian men
and women, is consistent only in its inconsistency. I think, therefore,
I am justified in discarding it as a standard test.
Now, if I can produce satisfactory evidence that I have shown,
clearly and distinctly, the longitudinal lines with an antiquated
J inch, it will, I suppose, render it somewhat probable that I might
" detect " them with a remarkably good ^ inch of latest date, espe-
cially if the latter have the advantage of iUuminatioii so helpful as.
GOBBESPONDENOE. 291
according to Mr. Singleton, to render testing thereby " little better
than child's play," to say nothing of the peculiar arrangement I used
instead of an eye-piece, which Mr. S. somehow overlooks.
" Sandioroft.
" I certify that I saw the longitudinal stripes on Surirella gemma
with Mr. Hickie's ^-inch objective, with the utmost distinctness.
This was on the evening of the 23rd day of November, 1871.
" H. P. Stbadman."
This gentleman could not possibly make any mistake about the
lines he speaks of; for I had just previously let him see the very
same lines on the very same shell with a ^ immersion. I showed
them also to Dr. Eales, of Dresden, who made a drawing of them then
and there.
I am sorry 1 cannot in the same way quote chapter and verse for
what 1 have seen with Beneche's No. 7 ; so the following must pass
for what it is worth.
In a private letter to my friend, Mr. Kitton, of Norwich, in which
I gave him a detailed account of the performance of Beneche's No. 7
on a variety of tests, the following passage occurs, which Mr. Kitton's
kindness in returning me my letter has enabled me to extract : —
" I then put on S, gemmM, I was able fairly to bring into view
the longitudinal lines."
But after all, I am not the only person who has seen these
longitudinal lines with a ^ inch. Mr. Jabez Hogg, who is the fortu-
nate possessor of a Beneche's No. 7 of rare excellence, has done the
same with Ma glass ; and did so in my presence, though I do not
recollect the illumination he employed.
Unfortunately the microscope is a solitary instrument; and
Mr. Brown finds it hard to believe that Mr. Smith has seen anything
which he (Mr. Brown) cannot see. Hence come strife and debate.
Headers of this Journal will be at no loss for instances. I have also
to thank Mr. Singleton for his caution about " difl&*action." In return
let me caution him against a much more besetting sin of these
times — " slowness of heart to believe."
Yours faithfully,
W. J. HlOKIB.
Kepobt of Qubkett Micboscopical Club, Sept. 25th.
To the Editor of the * Monthly Microscopical JoumaV
Gabbiok Chambers, November 17, 1874.
Sib, — Will you kindly allow me to correct a slight inaccuracy
that appeared in the November number containing the above report?
I am there made to say I never found evidence of air in any insect's
salivary glands. It should read —
'* In a large number of insects examined he had never found any
evidence of tracheal or air sacs forming part of their salivary glands."
I remain yours very truly,
William T. Lot.
VOL. XII. Y
( 292 )
PEOCEEDINGS OF SOCIETIES.
RoTAi Microscopical Society.
King's College, November 4, 1874.
Charles Brooke, Esq., F.R.S., President, in the chair.
The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and confirmed.
A number of donations to the Society were announced, and the
thanks of the meeting were voted to the donors.
The Secretary said that Mr. Suffolk, a Fellow of the Society, had
presented them with an ingenious little apparatus, known as me-
chanical fingers, and which had been modelled after the plan of
Professor Smith.
The President observed that it was for the purpose of picking up
minute objects, such as diatoms, by means of a bristle held by some
forceps. It was a very ingenious contrivance, and was worikh the
examination of the Fellows.
A vote of thanks to Mr. Suffolk was unanimously passed.
The President announced that the Council purposed holding
another scientific evening on Wednesday, December 9 ; this arrange-
ment was of course subject to the consent of the authorities of King's
College,* and due notice would be sent to all the Fellows of tibe
Society in the usual way.
The Secretary said they had received a paper " On Microscopical
Leaf Fungi from the Himalayas," by Dr. Joseph Fleming. The paper
and the drawings which accompanied it had been shown to Mr. Cooke,
who had found amongst them a number of genera and species which
were apparently identical with European species. The paper was one
which he thought would be more interesting to Fellows when they
could read it for themselves ; he would therefore only mention the
fungi discovered. It would be printed in full in the Journal, with
the drawings and the remarks of Mr. Cooke upon them. The paper
will be found at p. 270.
The thanks of the Society were voted to Dr. Fleming and
Mr. Cooke.
The Secretary then read a paper by Dr. Drysdale and the Rev.
W. H. Dallinger, entitled " Continued Researches into the Life His-
tory of the Monads." The paper was illustrated by numerous
drawings, which were enlarged upon the black-board by Mr. Charles
Stewart. The paper will be found at p. 261.
The President, in proposing a vote of thanks to the authors of the
paper, remarked that there were several points in it which were
* Since obtained.
PEOCEEDIN08 OF SOOEETIEa. 'iitd
matters of great interest. Tho twofolil mode of reproduction men-
tioned — ^flsaion and impregnation — was remftrkablo. One of tho pro-
cesses migbt prove to be the same as parthenogenesis, which was
known to exist in the case of the aphis. Another great point was tho
bearing of some of the obaervationa upon the important question of
spontaneous generation ; because if the germs alluded to had been
found by eKporim.ent to survive after exposure to a temperaturo of
250° or 300''' Fabr,, it was quite clear to him that tho observations of
Dr. Bftstian must be looked upon as wholly inconoIuBive.
Mr. H. J. Slack said he would juet call attention to the excessive
minuteness of some of these " moving points," as tliey were called in
tho paper; for if a skilled observer, using a power bo high as ^tj inch,
can only describe them as moving points, the actual objects themselves
must be almost infinitely small, und it could only be Irom the differ-
ence of their refractive power that they could bo seen at all. The
impression given was, that if they were only a little smaller or were
nearer in refractive index to that of the fluid in which they moved,
though there might bo myriads of them there, they would be utterly
invisible. They also found from the paper that they nmst not conclude
that even a high temperature would destroy life. They had usually
supposed that the process of heating organisms produced similar effects
to the coagulation of tho albumen in & boiled ben's-egg ; but it was pro-
bable that a proteine snbstanco which was not cl^ged in that way
might survive any temperaturo wliicb failed to actually disintegrate
it, and in the case of a hydro-carbonaceous compound it could not be
destroyed by anything short of actual burning. If carbon had only
been known to them in its combustible forms it would have been
received with much duabt that there might bo conditions nnder which
it was difficult to burn it, but they knew that a piece of grapliite could
not be burnt in a candle, or a diamond with a lucifer match. These
things showed them how very careful they should be not to rely
upon any merely negative evidenco as to organisms and germs being
destroyed by heat.
A vote of thanks to the authors of the paper was carried
unanimously.
Mr. Charles Stewart called attention to some living organisms
exhibited in tho room by Mr. Wood, and which bore a very strong
resemblance to the one shown there at the Inst meeting, and which ho
thought to be allied to JBnccphalua polymorphis.
Mr. Wood said that one of the Fellows of the Society bad men-
tioned to him that an object had been exhibited at the last meeting
very much like tho one which be now exhibited, and ho had therefoi'e
endeavoureil to bring his specimens there for inspection, Tho objects
were, he believed, the larvfe of tho cockle. He also exhibited some
drawings taken from his notebook showing the other stages of its
development. He at first bod supposedthat these organisms did not
belong to tho cockle at all, but further observation showed that they
wore really the larvte, and he had traced them up tbrongh ell their
T 2
. 294
FBOOBEDIKOa OF SOOTBIIES.
Tho thanks of tlio meetmg were voted to Mr. Wood for his
iotcicBtiiig cummiuiicatiou.
Mr. GhorleB Stewart said lie Iind LeoD afibrded an opportnnity of
looking at tbie anppoaod larva, and, so close was its resemblance to
tho Bueephalag eidiibitod at the lost meetiog, that ho could not help
thiuking if that was on entozoon this must nleo be Eontotbing of the
BOine kind. It was bo unlike the larval forms of the lamellibranchiate
muUusca that he thoagbt it might after b11 turn out to bo really a
parasite, and its position in tho ovary would not negative this notion.
The roeemblance between the two was really ao very close that he
could not help thinking that the pasition of both in the animal kingdom
would prove to be the same, though, of course, he did not say that it
was not the young of tho cockle. Mr. Stewart then drow upon the
black-board the object oiLibited. by Mr. Badcock at tho previous
meeting, and also a copy of Mr. Wood's drawing of the one he had
brought that evening, and pointed out the similarity between them.
Mr. Wood said that he hod never found anything else than these
creatures in the ovary of the cockle.
Mr. Stewart thought it might be worth while to institute some
further comparisons between the two objects in their earlier stages ;
ho did not say, of course, that the two were really tho same thing,
but bo was quite disposed to bracket them togothor as being of the
same genus.
X)t. Moore said that ho hod been for some time examining both the
cockle and the mussel, and had traced out tie dovelopmeui of the cockle
in the same way. He believed that these objects were the larval forma
of the cockle, and in the marine mussel he had also traced out the
development. Ho found that these long arms consisted of striated
mnscular tissue.
Mr. Stewart said he had osamincd tho arms under -fi^, but had
found no trace of striated muscle — it might, however, perhaps require
I a higher power.
The President observed that the fact of such analogous organisms
having been found in so many inetances as described would lead one
to suppose that they might be the young of the cockle instead of
Ikitozoa.
Dr. Moore inquired what proof there was ihat the Bucephalus was
aid it n
3 considered i
I by some who were thought
troce the rudimentary shell
Mr. Stewart si
to bo authorities.
Dr. Moore said he had been able ti
both in the cockle and in the mnssel.
Mr, Stewart mentioned that in the lost number of the 'Annals of
Natural History' there were a number of references UtBucephalm, and
perhaps they might throw some light upon it. He must say also that
when he first saw a drawing of Sucephalug -polymorphue he fancied that
it might possibly he the young of some lamellibranchiate, but did not
think so after eiamining the creature itself,
Perrya puleherrima (Kitton) and some other new species of
diatoms were exhibited under one of the Society's instruments.
FROCEEDIHaS OF SOOtKIIES.
DoniitioiiB to tlis Library und Cabinet since Oct. 7, 1874 : —
I Nature, Weekly Frcm The Editor.
AtheDJEum. Weekly „ Ditto.
Boeiety of Arts Jnurnnl. Weekly „ Society,
Journal of the Linneau Society. No. 77 „ Dilta.
Jourual of the Qaekett Olub. No. 27 „ Club.
IBulletm de la SooiCte Botaniqiie de Frauco „ Society,
Man-els of Poud Life. By H. J. Black. 2ud Edition .. „ Aal/ior.
TbeFrotopliiBinicTlieorjof Life. ByJoIin Dryndalo,M.D. „ Ditto.
MeobaDioal Finger „ W. T. Suffolh, Esq.
l"oar Slides of Diatoms „ F. Xilton, Esq.
The following gentlemen were elected Fellows of the Society : —
■John Eailton WilUamB, Esq, ; JanieB Wallinger Goodinge, Esq.
WAtTBa W. RbEVEB, Assist-SeorcUri/.
Medical Mioeoscopioal Societi'.
October 16, 1874.— Jabez Hogg, Esq., President, in the chair.
At the first meeting of this Society, for the aesaion 1874^5, a
paper oommunicated by John GJorhain, Esq., of Tnnbridge, " On a Now
and Expeditions Method of Micrometry," was read by the President.
The principle of the instrument described, depended upon the
meaeuroment of lines drawn parallel to the base of an isosceles
triangle — the base of the latter being given — by means of the aides,
which are divided into a known number of parts. The triangle is
obtained by dividing through the centre a disk of brase, about 1^ inch
in diameter and half on inch thick, and bevelled at the edge, so as to
allow of its being embraced by a stout india-rubber ring, by which
means the two portions are held in perfect apposition at the edges
of the section. The line of section, for the distance of 1 inch from
the circumference, is marked out into fractions of an inch — at least,
into 33 parts — a less number being insafSoient to obtain accnrate
results. A piece of paper of known thickness is now inserted between
the halves of the disk, and moved along till its edge touches the
commencement of the marked inch, the elastic band retaining it in its
place, and thus an isosceles triangle, or gap, is left, with a boao the
tiiickness of the Klip of paper, and with on edge of 1 inch, divided, as
» stated, into 32 equal parts. If a hair or cobweb be passed along the
:slit from base to apex, it will bo arrested somewhere, and by reading
(^ the number opposite which it stops, a simple matter of mnltiplica-
tion, the base of the triangle being known, will givo the diameter
required. For microscopic purposes tlie instrument is phtced on the
stage, and the object to be measured, placed on a thin glass cover, is
slid over the aperture till it exactly at one point spans it. The
diameter ia then read off. To <jbtain still greater accuracy, Mr.
» Browning has added a screw of known vaJuo, to separate the holvea of
iSiB micrometer in lien of the slip of paper.
In answer to some qnestiona by members of the Society, the Presi-
dent replied that the instrument was specially designed for unmounted
objects, the thickness of an ordinary glass slide being rather an objec-
tion in the cose of mounted ones. A thin glass cover might be in all
cases employed for placing the specimen, e. g. blood, or pus, upon.
October 13. — Csptaia Lung exhibited monnta of ivobB of three
kiude of spider ; the first that of Speira dtadema ; the eecond of
an undetermined Bpociee, ne unfortunately he could never find the
r at Lome (though the woh was renewed each night, after being
destroyed) ; and the third also unknown, being an old bought elide.
All three were furnished with the viscid beads so well hnown on
the concentric threads of Epeira ; but those on the third slide were
much larger, and the threads apiteared to ho not spiral or concentric ;
whilst the arrangement of beads on the second was very different and
peculiar. This web was not geometrical.
Till lately it was generally considered that the spider, after form-
ing its web, went orer it again, adding the viscid drops or beads ; but
the Inte Iticbard Beck eiplodeai that fallacy, by simply watching
(nndcr a microscope) an Epeira making its web, when he saw that the
thread, after emission, ran into beads by molecular attraction.
Captain Lang, however, though accepting this general fact, con-
siders that two of the three pairs of spinnerets ore employed in the
formation of the thread; the simple line issuing from one pair whilst
the other pair vamisht.'S it with a ^scid secretion running into heads \fj
molecular attraction, as saliva will on a hair passed between the lips.
The second slide seemed to prove this; for, whereas in the Epeira web
the beads were seen to be arranged singly along the line, and might,
therefore, bo produced according to Mr. Beck'a theory, in that par-
ticuUir slide the heads are grouped in grape-like bunches on a firm
thread. The threads of both sjiccies aro perfectly dry, and not viscid
between the beads. If the web of an Epeira is caught on a slip of
glass its form is entirely destroyed ; the fluid viscid drops being as it
were blotted ont, whilst in the second kind of wob the threads, with
their harder grape-like bunches, will remain distinct and uninjured.
In Epeira the four" eiternal spinnerets arc arranged in two pairs,
each pair containing tubuli differing from those of the other, so that
though the glands of these two pairs of spinnerets are similar, it
seems reasonable to suppose that they are used for different purposes.
Captain Long thinks that bnt one pair of these exterior spinnerets
is employed in forming the eoneentric line, which is varnished over,
as it runs oat, by the third interior pair of spinnerets, furnished with
a viscid secretion from a totally different set of glands. There are
other offices for which the other pair of exterior spinnerets with thoir
different tubuli may be needed, and also where no viscidity of thread
may be required, as in the fonnation of the radial lines, which are
thicker and more elastic ; or for that of the wob with which the insect
victim is swathed in a mummy-like shroud.
From slides showing the attachments of the Epcira's radial thread
it would appear that the spider nses its spinnerets as a painter does
hia brush ; the very delicate threads issuing from each tubule being
dashed against the surface, formed into an entangled mass of loops, and
then drawn out into one compoutid, though practically simple thread.
• Report supplied bj Mr. B, J. AuBtio.
phocbbdisob or sooietibs. 297
Further proof of tho rcnaonablcnosa of Captain Long's explanatioii
was nffunlcii by the fact that when the web ia tightly Btretched with-
out touching the ghiae the thread mny be seen, with a -j*^ objcct-glofis,
rHnning through the viscid beads, which appear as if transparent and
etning on a thread. This would not be the case in a single viBcid line
running by vwlendar allraclion into beads or drops. The conclofiion,
therefore, seems inevitable that as it is only the spiral or coucentrio
linos which ore Btrnng with these beodB, they muBt be furnished jrom
the secretion proceeding from the single inner pair of spinnerets ;
the glands differing ho materially from those of the two outer pairs
whioh have so much more work to perform,
QOEKETT MiOKOSCOPICAL ClOD,
Ordinary Meeting, October 23.~Dr. Matthews, F.R.M.S., Presi-
dent, in the chair.
Mr. R. Packenham "Williams read a paper " On Cutting Sections
of the Eyes of Insects, and on a New Instrument for that purpose."
The method of preparing tho head for cutting was first described ; the
most successful plan being first to shako tho insect gently in a phial
of benzino^ — then to Boak it in alcohol 60° over proof for a time vary-
ing from four to forty-eight hours — this was conBiderod to bo the most
difficult part of the operation, some spedmena becoming hard sooner
than others; and it was suggested that the best preparations might
possibly be made from insBcts just on the point of emergence from the
ohrysaliB. The head, after being hardened, was to be imbedded in a
miEtnre of butter of cocoa and bleached beeswas, with the addition
of a little new Canada balsam. This compound melted at about 120".
The head was to bo placed in the wax so that the cut should be at
right angles to the chord of the segment forming the outline of the
eye, the most satisfactory section being that in such a direction as to
ebow the stmcturo of both eyes. The cnttcr was to be wetted with
[spirit of turpentine, and one cut having been made, a littlo was of a
Plower melting point was applied to the cut Buifaco, so that the next
I flection might be supported by a thin film of was, and the cavities of
r the Lead were also to be filled with was so as to give more effectual
support. For the same purpose a piece of tisBQe paper laid on tho
face of the section was often advantageous. The wax was to bo re-
moved by warming gently in turpentine, and the specimen could then
.' be mounted in new twlsam,
U The instrument used was then minutely deseribod. This con-
■ JDBted essentially of a rotating circular cutter, and a contrivance
Fflimilar to the slide-rest of a lathe, by means of which tho thickness
and direction of the sections could bo adjusted, and the object advanced
against the cutter white rotating. The cutter was extremely thin,
and moved with great accuracy in an exact plane. This tvas poBBJble,
because it could bo ground, polished, and sharpened on the pivots and
in tlio position which it would permanently oeeupy. The slide regu-
lating the thickness of the section could be adjusted to tho Tufftru
of an inch, while that which advanced tho object against tho cutter
1
298
mOTsd -^ of an incli to three reToIations of the cutter, anii, ub the
latter woa nearly ^ of an inch in diameter, this was equivalent to a
straight draw of throe inches for ovoiy ^ of an inch cat : this relation
was attained mocbanically. Great speed wus not roconimcnded. The
object was supported on a little ebonite block capable of motion round
an axis for the adjustment of the object to be cut in a vertical plane.
The machine was of very diminutive size and delicate construction.
A paper was read by Dr. D. Moore " On the Generatiyo Processes
of the Cockle (CardiaTit edule), Mnssel (Mi/filiis edulit), and the Oyster
(^Oilrea eduli»)." He first drew attention to the difference of opinion
on the subject, by contrasting Professor Owen's statement of twenty
years ago with Professor Eolleston's more recent statement in 1870 ;
Professor Owen asserting that all Lamellibranchs bad the sexes in
distinct indiridaals. Professor Eulleeton excluding Oelrea and Cydaa,
which had the sexes united in one individoal. He stated that his
observations had led him to the conclusion that the cockle and the
mussel were also truly hermaphrodite, having the sexes united in one
individual. He then proeooded to givo an outline of the minute
anatomy and general distribution of the genorative gland in the
cockle, mussel, and oyster, stating that nil the steps from a gland
containing immature sperm cells to one containing perfect eggs in the
oyster, and eggs and young in the cockle and mussel, eonld be
clearly traced — tbe glands containing epermatozoa being only a stage
in the history of the gland containing oggs or young. He then drew
attention to some diagrams enlargod from camera-lncida drawings,
showing three principal stages in the history of the gland : — 1st,
when the gland contained imperfect spennatozoa ; 2nd, when it con-
tained poifcct spermatozoa and clear cells, the entrance of the sper-
matozoa into the clear cells, which ho had observed in the cockle,
constituting the impregnation, which led to the 3rd stage of well-
formed and easily recognizable eggs. In the case of the cockle and
mussel, the eggs were hatched inside tbe animal, and tbe yonng were
brought to maturity in a system of tubes, which were much more
developed in the cockle than in the mussel. In these tubes the
young were found in all stages of growth, with a number of yelk
balls which doubtless supplied them with nourishment. The young
were figured in the diagrams, special attention being directed to
the stage at which they were extruded from tbe parent, when they
constituted a true larval form, and possessed a rudimentary shell. In
the oyster the eggs were extruded from the generative gland into the
buccal pouch, between the palpi and the layers of the brancbias,
where they remained surrounded by a gelatinous subBtanco, until they
were devtSoped into freely moving ciliated young, when they were
puffed out from the parent shell a small number at a time. Dr. Moore
concluded by stating some general considerations which ho thought
pointed in the same direction as his observations on the generatiyo
cesses in these animals.
This paper was further illnstrated by various preparations, which
were exhibited at the close of the meeting.
processes
I This
were exhi
( 299 )
INDEX TO VOLUME XII.
A.
Abbe, Professor, on the Capability of
the Microscope, 29.
Actinia, on the Nervous System of. By
Professor P. Martin Duncan, 65.
Actinophrys Sol, Remarks on, 87.
Ague-plant, Mr. W. Archer on the
so-called, 31.
Algae of North America, the Fresh-
water, 88.
Amphipleura pellucida, Resolution of,
by the -^ of Mr. ToUes, 159.
Amphipoda, on Tube-building, 90.
Animal Kingdom, the Plan of Descent
of the, 244.
Anodonta, the Development of the
Ovum in, 26.
Aperture, the Method of Measuring
Angular, 254.
Apertures, Final Remarks on Immer-
sion. By Dr. J. J. Woodward, 125.
Final Remarks on Immersed. By
F. H. Wenham, 221.
American Opinion on Angular,
285.
Appendicularia, Supplementary Re-
marks on. By Alfred Sanders, 209.
Archer, Mr. W., on the so-called Ague-
plant, 31.
Arloing, M., and M. Tripier, on the
Persistence of Sensibility in the
Peripheric Ends of Cut Nerves. Ab-
stracted by Dr. B. MacDowal, 89.
Atrophy, on the Morbid Anatomy of
Progressive Muscular, 100.
B.
Balbianfs Nucleus, the Presence of, in
the Ovum of Osseous Fishes. By
Dr. Van Bambeke, 61.
Bambeke, Dr. Van, on the Presence of
Balbiani*s Nucleus in the Ovum of
Osseous Fishes, 61.
Batrachia, a Special Mode of Develop-
ment in, 243.
Beneden, M. Van, The Original Dis-
tinction of the Testicle and Ovary,
281.
Blood-corpuscles, Migration of White.
By Dr. Thomas, 88.
Blood-corpuscles, Counting of, in cases
of Transfusion, 203.
Blood, Distinction between Mammalian
and Reptilian, 91.
Stains, on the Value of High
Powers in the Diagnosis of. By
Joseph G. Richardson, M.D., 130.
Boehmeria nivea, the Structure of. By
H. POCKLINGTON, 95.
Bog Mosses, Dr. Braithwaite on, 11,
168.
Bollinger, Professor, on the His-
tology of Leucocythsemia, 200.
Bone, the Development of. By M.
Ranvier, 105.
Brain in the Insane, the Histology of
the, 103.
Lesions of the, in General Para-
lysis. By Dr. Tuke, 109.
Braithwah'e, Robert, M.D., on Bog
Mosses : a Monograph of the Euro-
pean Species Sphagnum squarrosum, 11;
Sphagnum teres, 12; Sphagnum Lind-
bergiij 168 ; Sphagnum WiUfit\ 170.
on the Microscopic Struc-
ture of the Cortical and Corky
Tissue of Plants, 156.
Bucephalus Hairaeanus, the Encyst-
ment of. By M. Alp. Giard, 276.
C.
Canal, the Nerve of the Digestive, 32.
Cancer of the Left Femur, on the
Morbid Growths, from a case of
Osteoid. By Joseph Needham, 121.
Carpenter, Dr., on the subject of
Eozoon, 153.
Carter, Mr., on Eozoon Canadense, 30.
Dr. H. v., on the Etiology of the
Madura-foot, 96.
Caterpillars, the Hairs ot By T. W.
WONFOR, 165.
Cells, Bone Absorption by means of
Giant-, 102.
* Challenger,' Recent Deep-sea Dredg-
ings by the, 245.
Clarke, Dr. Lookhart, on the Morbid
Anatomy of Progressive Muscular
Atrophy, 100.
Corethra plumicomis, the Muscular
Tissue of, 26.
300
INDEX.
Cornea, the Stractore of the. By Dr.
Thin. 240.
Gorrespondenoe : —
Brakey, S. L., 117.
Brooke, Charles, 117.
HicKiE, W. J., 207, 289.
Hogg, Jabez, 41.
KiTTON, F., 255.
Lens, Immersion, 42.
LoY, William T., 291.
Matthews, John, 116.
PiLLISCHER, M., 40.
Singleton, R. Corbet, 256, 287.
Smith, J. E., 160.
Stodder, Charles, 40.
ToLLEs, R. B., 115, 116.
TuKE, Dr. J. B., 160.
Wenham, F. H., 1 14.
Covers, How to make exceedingly
Thin Glass, 287.
Crystals, Microscopic, 38.
Curtis, Dr. Lester, What Pus is not, 92.
Cyamus or Whale-louse, a Memoir on
the, 159.
D.
Dallingeb, W. H., and J. Drysdale*
M.D., Continued Researches into the
Life History of the Monads, 261.
Diamonds, the South African, 284.
Diapedesis: or the Pfissage of Blood-
corpuscles through the Walls of the
Blood-vessels, and how to observe it.
By Joseph Needham, 79.
Diaphragm, a Spherical, 39.
Diatomacese, How to Prepare Specimens
of the. By A. Mead Edwards, M.D.,
225.
Diatoms, on the Structure of. By G. W.
Morehouse, U.S.A., 19.
New Species of. By F. Kitton,
218.
DichsBua rugosa, Is it a Lichen or a
Fungus? By Mr. F. C. S. Roper, 33.
Difflugia, the Enemies of, 250.
Dragon-fly, the Mouth of the, 244.
Dredgings, Deep-sea, by the * Chal-
lenger,* 245.
Duncan, Professor Martin, on the
Nervous System of Actinia, 65.
DwiGHT, Dr., on Striated Muscular
Fibre, 29.
E.
Edwards, A. Mead, M.D., How to Pre-
pare Specimens of Diatomaceae for
Examination and Study, 225.
Eggs, the Decomposition of, 279.
Euzoon Canadense, Is it a Foraminifer
or not ? By Mr. Carter, 30.
Dr. Carpenter, 153.
Evolution, Professor Tyndall on, 187.
F.
Fern, the Minute Structure of a pecu-
liar, 38.
Ferns, the Development of, without
Fertilization, 88.
Filar ia immitis, Amended Anatomical
Details of the. By F. H. Welch, 224.
Fleming, Dr. Joseph, on some Micro-
scopic Leaf Fungi from the Hima-
layas, 270.
Follicle, Retrogression of the Graafian,
91.
Fox, Dr. T., on Tokelau Ringworm,
205.
Fungi on some Microscopic Leaf from
the Himalayas. By Dr. J. Fleming,
270.
Cell-culture in the Study of, 285.
G.
Giard, M. Alf., on the Encystment of
Bucephalus Haimeanus, 276
Gulliver, Professor G., on the Sph8&-
raphides in British UrticacefiB and in
Leonurus, 275.
Gum Production, the Microscopy of, 35.
H.
Haeceel, Professor, The Plan of Des-
cent of the Animal Kingdom, 244.
Hay-fever: its Microscopy and Treat-
ment, 111.
Heart and Kidney, the Condition of, in
an obscure form of Disease, 90.
Hydrse, the Americiin Species of, 87.
Hydrophobia Canina, the Anatomical
Changes in, 253.
Hypertropliy, Pseudo-muscular, 35.
Hypopus, the Zoological Position of, 26.
I.
Insects, on the Origin and Metamor-
phosis of. By Sir J. Lubbock, Bart.,
M.P., &c., 84.
Intcdtine, the Microscopic Blood-vessels
of the, 155.
J.
Johnston, Dr. C, on Blue and Violet
Stainings for Vegetable Tissues, 184.
K.
Keith, Mr. R., Discussion on the For-
mula of an Immersion Objective of
greater Aperture than corresponds
nn>EX.
301
to the Maximum possible for Dry
Objectives, 124.
KiTTON, F., New Diatoms, 218.
Klein, Dr., on the Smallpox of Sheep,
98.
Larynx, the Mucous Membrane of the.
By Dr. W. Stirling, 32.
Leidy, Professor, Bemarks on Acti-
nophrys Sol, 87.
Leucocyte and Pus-corpuscle, What is
the exact Definition of ? 37.
Leucocythsemia, the Histology of. By
Professor Bollinger, 200.
Library, the Leeds Public, 255.
Limnanthemum, the Air-cells in. By
Dr. T. G. Hunt, 31.
Liquor Sanguinis, an Accoimt of cer-
tain Organisms occurring in. By
Dr. W. Osler, 141.
Lobster, the Development of the. By
Mr. S. J. Smith, 203.
M.
Macdonald, Dr. J. D., on the Micro-
scopical Characters of Sputum in
Phthisis, 180.
Madura-foot, the Etiology of. By Dr.
H. V. Carter, 96.
Microscope, the Capability of the. By
Professor Abbe, 29.
Microscopic Writing, Photographs of,
38.
Microsporon Audounii, Has the so-
called any Existence? By M. Ma-
lassez, 26.
Monads, Continued Researches into the
Life History of the. By W. H.
Dalunger and Dr. Drtsdale, 261.
Morehouse, G. W., on the Structure
of Diatoms, 19.
Moseley, Mr. H. N., To what Group
is Peripatus related ? 107.
Muscle, Effects of Section of Motor
Nerves on, 280.
Muscular Fibre, Striated. By Dr.
Dwight, 29.
N.
Needham, Joseph, on Diapedesis : or
the Passage of Blood - corpuscles
through the Walls of the Blood-
vessels, and how to observe it, 79.
on the Morbid Growths, from
a case of Osteoid Cancer of the Left
Femur, 121.
Nerves, Persistence of Sensibility in
the Peripheric Ends of Cut. By MM.
Arloing and Tripier, 89.
Nerves in the Lips, the Termination of,
91.
New Books, with Short Notices: —
Anatomy of the Lymphatic System.
By E. KxEiN, M.D., 237.
Microscopical Examinations of Air.
By D. D. Cunningham, M.B., 152.
On Spectrum Analysis as applied to
Microscopical Observations : the
subject of a Lecture delivered at
the South London Microscopical
Club. By W. T. Suffolk, 84.
On the Origin and Metamorphosis of
Insects. By Sir John Lubbock,
Bart., M.P., 84.
The Micrographic Dictionary, 149.
O.
Objective, the Optical Quality of Mr.
ToUes* i. By Bobert B. Tolles,
13, 62.
Objectives, Discussion of the Formula
of an Immersion of greater Aperture
than corresponds to the Maximum
possible for Dry Objectives. By Mr.
B. Keith, 124.
Osler, Wiluam, M.D., An Account of
certain Organisms occurring in the
Liquor Sanguinis, 141.
Ovary, the Original Distinction of the
Testicle and. By M. Van Beneden,
281.
Ovum of the Rabbit, Retrogressive
Changes in the Serous Layer of, 1,55.
P.
Pasteur, M., The Pebrine Corpuscles
in the Silkworm, and what they are
analogous to, 171.
Peripatus, To what Group is it related ?
107.
Phylloxera, a Remedy for, 113.
Pigs, Variation in the Condition of the
External Sense Organs in Foetal, of
the same Litter, 106.
Plants, the Microscopic Structure of
the Cortical and Corky Tissue of.
By Dr. Braithwaite, 156.
Potato, How to miike Sections of,
showing Structure, 114.
Precious Stones in the Construction of
the Microscope, 113.
Prilling, M., on the Microscopy of
Gum Productipn, 35.
Prism, Refracting, for Binocular Micro-
scopes. By F. H. Wenham, 129.
302
INDEX.
Proceedings op Societies: —
Academy of Natural Sciences, Phila-
delphia, 59.
Brighton and Sussex Natural History
Society, 54.
Louisville Microscopical Society, 60.
Margate Microscopical Society, 56.
Medical Microscopical Society, 48,
118, 161, 295.
Quekett Microscopical Club, 57, 120,
259, 297.
Beading Microscopical Society, 55,
296.
Royal Microscopical Society, 44, 257,
292.
Victoria, Australia, Microscopical
Society, 162.
Pus, What it is not. By Dr. Curtis,
92.
R.
Ranvier, M., on the Development of
Bone, 105.
Rhizopods, New Fresh-water, 251.
Ringworm of Tokelau, and its Fungus,
205.
Rocks, the Microscopic Structure of
Ancient and Modem Volcanic, 287*
Roper, Mr. F. C. S., on Dichsena rugosa,
33.
Rotifer vulgaris, on the Revivification
of, 250.
S.
Sanders, Alfred, Supplementary Re-
marks on Appendicularia, 209.
Saprolegniei, the Morphology of, 102.
Schizsea pusilla. Dr. J. Hunt on the
Minute Structure of, 38.
Schmidt, Dr. H. D., Synopsis of the
principal Facts elicited &om a Series
of Microscopical Researches upon the
Nervous Tissues, 1.
Sheep, on the Smallpox of. By Dr.
Klein, 98.
Silkworm, the Pebrine Corpuscles in
the, and what they are analogous
to. By M. Pasteur, 171.
Skin, the Structure of the. By Dr. Pye-
Smith, 26.
Smith, Dr. Pte-, on the Structure of
the Skin, 26.
Mr. S. I., on the Development of
the Lobster, 203.
Society, a New Microscopical, 39, 255.
Spectrum Analysis as applied to Micro-
scopical Observations. By W. T.
Suffolk, 84.
Sphseraphides in British UrticaceaB
and in Leonurus. By Professor G.
Gulliver, 275.
Sphagnum squarrosum, 1 1.
teres, 12.
Lindbergii, 168.
Wulfii, 170. •
Sponge, a New. By Professor A. E.
Verrill, 28.
What is a ? 205.
Sputum in Phthisis, on the Microsco-
pical Characters of the. By Dr.
J. D. Macdonald, 180.
Stainings for Vegetable Tissues, 184.
Sting of the Bee, Discovery of the Posi-
tion of. By Mr. A. S. Packard, 243.
T.
Testicle, the Structure of the, 284.
Thin, Dr., on the Structure of the
Cornea, 240.
Tissues, Synopsis of the principal Facts
elicited from a Series of Microsco-
pical Researches upon the Nervous.
By Dr. H. D. Schmidt; 1.
Blue and Violet Stainings for
Vegetable. By Dr. Johnston, 184.
ToLLES, Robert B., the Optical Quality
of Mr. Tolles' ^ Objective, 13, 62.
Tornaria, the Young of a Worm, 239.
TuKE, Dr. J. B., on Lesions of the
Brain in General Paralysis, 109.
Ttndall, Professor, on Evolution,
187.
on the Origin of Typhoid
Fever 283
Typhoid Fever, the Origin of, 283.
V.
Verrill, Professor, on a New Sponge,
28.
W.
Welch, F. H., the Filaria immitis :
Amended Anatomical Details, 224.
Wenham, F. H., Refracting Prism for
Binocular Microscopes, 129.
Final Remarks on Immersed Aper-
tures, 221.
WoNPOR, T. W., on the Hairs of Cater-
pillars, 165.
Woodward, Dr. J. J., Final Remarks
on Immersion Apertures, 125.
Worm, Tornaria the Young of a, 239.
Worms, the Egg-peduncle of certain,
239.
END OF VOLUME XII.
LONDON: PBINTED BT WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, STAUFORD STSK£T AND CHARINa CHOflS.